fit 
 
ItttoIoQic^I SeminaiTB Ctbrarg 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 
 aDornell littnitiersitg 
 
^. Cornell University Library 
 
 PA 258X52 1S86 
 
 Greek lessons, with references to Goodwi 
 
 3 1924 021 601 202 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924021 601 202 
 
GREEK LESSONS, 
 
 WITH REFERENCES 
 
 TO 
 
 GOODWIN'S AND HADLEY'S GREEK GRAMMARS; 
 
 AND INTEKDED AS 
 
 AN INTRODUCTION TO XENOPHON'S ANABASIS. 
 OR TO GOODWIN'S GEEEK READEE. 
 
 BY 
 R. F. LEIGHTON, Ph.D. (Lips.), 
 
 ACTHOB OF " CRITICAL HISTORY OP GIOEBO'S LETTERS AD FAMILIARE8," 
 " HISTORY OF ROME," " LATIK LES30KS," ETC. 
 
 f'T CORNELL ^< > 
 S.A UNIVERSITY, J 
 
 BOSTON: 
 PUBLISHED BY GINN & COMPANY. 
 
 1886. 
 
Copyfiyht 1880, 
 
 By H. F. i-.£IGHTON. 
 
 J. S. Gushing, 
 
 Superintendent of Printing, 
 
 101 Pearl St., Boston. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 These Lessons have been prepared to accompany 
 either Goodwin's or Hadley's Greek Grammar, and are 
 intended as an introduction to Xenophon's Anabasis, 
 from which the exercises and vocabularies are mainly 
 selected, or to Goodwin's Greek Reader. They consist 
 of about eighty lessons, both Greek and English, Addi- 
 tional Exercises to be Translated into Greek, Harvard 
 Examination Papers in Greek Composition, Questions 
 for Examination and Review, and Vocabularies. Under 
 each Lesson definite directions have been given in re- 
 gard to the amount of the Grammar to be learned. 
 
 The exercises, while easy and progressive, are de- 
 signed to ground the pupil thoroughly in grammatical 
 forms, inflections, and the simpler principles of Syntax. 
 The exercises are so arranged that the pupil can use 
 them from the very outset of his study, thus having 
 the means furnished him of applying the knowledge of 
 the Grammar that he is daily acquiring. In order to 
 aid the pupil in memorizing the vocabularies under each 
 lesson, some insight has been given into the derivation 
 and composition of words, — how they are built up, by 
 means of significant endings, from noun and verb stems, 
 and from roots. The main aim, however, has been to 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 have the pupil master the inflections and acquire a voeah- 
 ulary. The prepositions are introduced from the first ; 
 and the pupil is taught the primary meanings, and then 
 how these meanings are modified by the cases before 
 which the prepositions stand. 
 
 The English exercises to be translated into Greek 
 are based upon the preceding reading lessops, and con- 
 tain only words and principles already familiar. In this 
 way the pupil is afforded the best aid as to the con- 
 struction and the arrangement of the sentence. 
 
 It is believed that the exercises under each Lesson 
 to be translated into Greek, together with the Addi- 
 tional Exercises, the Harvard Examination Papers in 
 Greek Composition, and the six or eight pages of con- 
 nected narrative, if thoroughly mastered, will be a suflS- 
 cient preparation in Greek composition for entrance to 
 most American colleges. 
 
 Full Vocabularies are given at the end of the book. 
 The leading signification of each word is generally given 
 first, and the distinctions in meaning which follow have 
 special reference to the use of the word in these Les- 
 sons. Some English words (preceded by " Eng."), de- 
 rived directly from the Greek, others (preceded by 
 " Cf. Eng."), from a kindred form of the Greek word, 
 are given. Occasionally a Latin, a Greek, and an 
 English word, all kindred forms from a common root, 
 are given, to indicate to the pupil their common origin. 
 When there is no apparent connection between the two 
 words, the Latin is preceded by the sign of equality. 
 
 In the preparation of these Lessons, many books — 
 American, English, and German — have been consulted, 
 and considerable use has been made of Dr. Wasener's 
 0-riechisohes Elementarhuch, used in most of the German 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 Gymnasiums, as an accompaniment to the Greek Gram- 
 mar of Prof. Curtius/ 
 
 Much care and study have been spent on the order 
 and arrangement of the Lessons. The aim has been, 
 while giving, not bare words and their inflections, 
 but sentences from the start, to introduce no difiicul- 
 ties that an average pupil, after a thorough study of 
 the prescribed sections of the Grammar, ought not to 
 master. 
 
 R. F. L. 
 
 Brooklyit, N. Y., May, 1880. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Pass 
 
 Intkoductokt Exercises 1 
 
 LESSONS. 
 
 I. First Declension 2 
 
 II. Subject and Predicate 3 
 
 III. Subject and Object 5 
 
 IV. Prepositions 6 
 
 V. Second Declension 8 
 
 VI. Attic Second Declension 9 
 
 VII. Contract Nouns of the First and Second Declensions ... 11 
 VIII. Adjectives. — First and Second Declensions. — Subject and 
 
 Copula 12 
 
 IX. Adjectives. — Contracts of the First and Second Declen- 
 sions. — Present and Imperfect of clfiC 14 
 
 X. Present and Imperfect Tenses 15 
 
 XI. Nouns of the Third Declension : — Stems ending in a Conso- 
 nant. Labial and Palatal Stems. — Verbs : Future, 
 
 Active Voice 17 
 
 XII. Stems ending in a Lingual 18 
 
 XIII. Stems ending in a Liquid. — Verbs: Indicative Active of 
 
 Ua 19 
 
 XIV. Stems ending in S 21 
 
 XV. Stems ending in a Vowel or in a Diphthong 22 
 
 XVI. Stems ending in a Vowel {continued). — Syncopated Nouns . 23 
 XVII. Adjectives of the Third Declension. — Verbs : Imperative 
 
 Active 24 
 
 XVIII. Adjectives of the Fii-st and Third Declensions 26 
 
 XIX. Irregular Adjectives. — Verbs : Indicative, Imperative, and 
 
 Infinitive, Active 27 
 
VUl 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 XX. Comparison of Adjectives 28 
 
 XXI. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives 30 
 
 XXII. Comparison of Adverbs. — Verbs ; Subjunctive and Opta- 
 tive Moods ; Active Voice ; Historical Present ... 31 
 
 XXIII. Verbs: Present and Imperfect Indicative, Passive and 
 
 Middle 33 
 
 XXIV. ^Numerals. — Verbs: Future and Aorist Indicative Middle 35 
 XXV. Verbs : Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative Passive and 
 
 Middle. Imperative and Infinitive Middle .... 87 
 
 XXVI. Personal and Intensive Pronouns 38 
 
 XXVII. Eeflexive, Reciprocal, and Possessive Pronouns .... 40 
 
 XXVIII. Demonstrative Pronouns 42 
 
 XXIX. Interrogative, Indefinite, and Belative Pronouns ... 43 
 
 XXX. Verbs : Subjunctive and Optative Middle Voice .... 45 
 
 XXXI. Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, and Optative Passive 46 
 
 XXXII. Infinitive Active, Middle, and Passive 47 
 
 XXXIII. Participles : Active, Passive, and Middle 48 
 
 XXXIV. Verbs : Present Stem ; Present and Imperfect Active . . 50 
 XXXV. Verbs : Present Stem ; Present and Imperfect, Passive 
 
 and Middle 62 
 
 XXXVI. Contract Verbs in oo) : Present Stem ; Present and Im- 
 perfect Active ' 54 
 
 XXXVII. Contract Verbs in on : Present Stem ; Present and Imper- 
 fect Active 55 
 
 XXXVIII. Contract Verbs in 01) : Present Stem; Present and Imper- 
 fect Active .57 
 
 XXXIX. Contract Verbs iu au : Present Stem ; Present and Imper- 
 fect Passive and Middle 58 
 
 XL. Contract Verbs in cu : Present Stem ; Present and Imper- 
 fect Passive and Middle 60 
 
 XLI. Contract Verbs in ou : Present Stem ; Present and Imper- 
 fect Passive and Middle 61 
 
 XLII. Verbs : Future Stem ; Future Active and Middle ... 63 
 XLIII. Verbs : First Aorist Stem ; Aorist Active and Middle ; 
 
 Gnomic Aorist 64 
 
 XLIV. Verbs : Perfect Stem ; Perfect and Pluperfect Active and 
 
 Middle, and Future Perfect 65 
 
 XLV. Verbs : First Passive Stem ; Future and Aorist Passive 67 
 XLVI. Verbs : Second Aorist and Second Perfect Stems ; Tenses 
 
 of the Active Voice 69 
 
 XLVII. Verbs : Second Aorist Stem ; Tenses of the Middle Voice 70 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IX 
 
 XLVIII. Verbs : Second Aorist Passive Stem 72 
 
 XLIX. Liquid Verbs 73 
 
 L. Regular Verbs in |ii : Active of {om)|u 75 
 
 LI. Regular Verbs in |jii : Active of tC6t||*i 76 
 
 LIL Regular Verbs in |u : Active of SCS(i>|ii 78 
 
 LIII. Regular Verbs in |ii : Active of ScCicvvpii 79 
 
 LIV. Regular Verbs in |ii, : Passive and Middle of taTT||ii . . 81 
 
 LV. Regular Verbs in ^i : Passive and Middle of rl6i\f.i . . 82 
 
 LVL Regular Verbs in )ii : Passive and Middle of SCSu)ii . . 84 
 
 LVII. Regular Verbs in 1*1: Passive and Middle of 8«£kvdhi . 86 
 
 LVIII. Irregular Verbs in |u ; the Verbs cl|t( and ct|u .... 87 
 
 LIX. Irregular Verbs of the |ii-Form : iijiii, <^T||tC, and Ket)i.ai . 89 
 
 LX. Second Perfect and Pluperfect of the |u-Form .... 90 
 
 LXI. Formation of Words. — Derivation; (a.) Formation of 
 
 Simple Words 92 
 
 LXII. Formation of Words. — Derivation ; (J.) Formation of 
 
 Compound Words 96 
 
 LXIII. Subject and Predicate. — Syntax of Adjectives and of 
 
 the Article 98 
 
 LXIV. Syntax of Pronouns 99 
 
 LXV. Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Cases .... 101 
 
 LXVl. Genitive Case 102 
 
 LXVII. Genitive Case (contmied) 103 
 
 LXVIII. Dative Case 105 
 
 . LXIX. Dative Case {continued) - ... 106 
 
 LXX. Review of the most important Prepositions 108 
 
 LXXI. Analysis of Sentences. — Use of Conjunctions .... 110 
 LXXIl. Syntax of the Verb : Voices, Tenses of the Indicative ; 
 
 Gnomic and Iterative Tenses ; Historical Present . . 113 
 
 LXX 111. Modes in Simple Sentences 114 
 
 LXXIV. Modes in Dependent Clauses 116 
 
 LXXV. Modes in Dependent Clauses (coniintied) 118 
 
 LXXVI. Relative and Temporal Sentences 120 
 
 LXXVII. Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse 121 
 
 LXXVIII. Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Discourse .... 123 
 
 LXXIX. Compound Sentences in Indirect Discourse 125 
 
 LXXX. The Infinitive 128 
 
 LXXXI. The lufLnitive (corUiniied) 129 
 
 LXXXII. The Participle 130 
 
 LXXXIII. The Participle {caiUinued) 132 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 
 Additional Exercises to be translated into Greek .... 134 
 
 Miscellaneous Exercises 153 
 
 Harvard Exahuiation Papers 161 
 
 Questions for Review 173 
 
 Miscellaneous Questions 190 
 
 Greek-English Vocabulary 1 
 
 English-Greek Yocabulabt 51 
 
GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Before beginning these Lessons, the pupil need learn only 
 the alphabet. The sections of the Grammar to which each 
 Lesson refers are designated at the head of that Lesson. The 
 references are to Goodwin's Greek Grammar and to Hadley's 
 Greek Grammar. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 
 
 Alplutbet ; Vowels atul Diphthongs. — G. 1, 2, 3 ; H. 5, 7, 8, 
 
 9, 10, 11. 
 Breathings. — G. 4, 1 and 2, with N. 1 ; H. 14, 15. 
 Consonants. — G. 5, 1, 2, 6, 1, 2, T; H. 16, 18, 19, 20, 21. 
 Pronunciation. — G. Preface xi., 18, 19; H. 9, 11, Rems. a, !>, 
 
 12, b, c, 13, 14, 16, 17, 86 and a. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Fronouiice the following words! — 
 
 1. ^a<Ti\evi, alSw. 2. aSifia, aiiTj(^pov, Sa>pa. 
 3. larpdi, a-^ly^, yecofierprji;. 4. o Be Kvpo<: vireXa^e 
 Tovt ^evyovTat, km avrij av aXKrf vpoi^aa'V'i tjv avrep rov 
 dffpoi^etv o-TpaTevfia. 5. eaya, paSio^. 6. etSo?, ■r)v^ar 
 fi6vo<t, epeaOiu, yeca/jierpi)^. 
 
CKEEK LESSOXS. 
 
 Exercise 2. 
 
 Syllahles. — G. 18, 2 (read 1 and 2) ; H. 81, 83, 85 (read 83 
 
 and 84). 
 Quantity of Synables. — G. 19, 1, 2, and 3, 20, 1, 2, and 3; 
 
 H. 86, 87 (read a and b), 88. 
 
 In tlie following wrordg determine tlie quantity of each syllable : — 
 
 1. veo<s, yXan-TO,, ;^ta/3a, ^(Sipai. 2. paSiov<i, foxTTTjp, 
 
 aperai, 3. aTpaT7]yoi<!, SeffTTOTij?, /Mw^aipdi;, "yXwTTi;?. 
 
 4. virepmov, (TTpari,u>T7j<;, Xeovrav. 5. avffpeairoi, iroXl-' 
 TWi', prjTwp, aXr/Seii, Xeov. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Accent. — G. 21, 1, 2, 3, 22, 1, 2, 33, 1, 2; H. 89, 91, 93, 94, 95. 
 Accent In the following words the syllable that Is underlined ; — 
 
 1. <f)iXo<s, (l>iXa), ^iXoi. 2. 7rai,Be<!, Senrvov, Seiirva, 
 
 SetTTV^. 3. XotTTO?, XolTTOl, XotTTttt?. 4. dcTTtSo?, KVr)- 
 
 filBot, ^etXiui/o?, fivqarii;. 5. 7ri;\t/co9, irrfXiKoi, iravpot, 
 iravpov, Travpoi, 6. cXata, eXatai, TroXtrai, arparuoTai, 
 Scopov. 7. vrja-oi, Xoyov, vrjce, altove<i, Batfiov. 8. fnjTop, 
 •troTafio<i, vtKT}, vlxai. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Inflection.— G. 32, 1, 2 (read Note), 33, 1, 2, 3 ; H. 114 and 
 
 115 (read 116 and 117). 
 NouMs. — G. 34, 35, 37, 1, 2 (omit the masculine nouns, — read 
 
 N. 2 and 3); H. 132, 123, 124, 135 with a, b, and c, 126, 
 
 127, 128, 130, 131. 
 Accent.- G. 35, 1, 2; H. 130, 131. 
 At-ticle.—G. 78, 138; H. 119, 498. 
 
LESSONS I., 
 
 IL 
 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 0, T], TO, 
 
 
 /"/<«. 
 
 TeXevTTi, -i}?, (jj). 
 
 
 end. 
 
 X<^pa, -a?. (»/). 
 
 
 country. 
 
 eVto-ToXij, -^?, (^), 
 
 
 letter. 
 
 ao^ia, -a<!, (^), 
 
 
 wisdom. 
 
 a/seT?}, -^?, (^), 
 
 
 virtue, valor. 
 
 «a)/i7?, ->;?, (rj). 
 
 
 village. 
 
 Translate into EngUgh. 
 
 1. reXeuT^/ reXeuT?}?,* KwyMi. 2. X'^Pf' ''"^' X*"/"*'- 
 3. Ktofiwv, Ta(9 Ktofiai,';. 4. ); ao^ia, Trjf; (To<f>ia^. 
 5. ypacffei (^/le writes) ttjv eTrurroKT^v. 6. ypdijsei rat 
 eTTiffToXas. 
 
 Note. Pronounce the Greek. 
 
 ' G. 3, Note; H. 11. ^ Account for the accent. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 JUasculine Nouns. — G. 37, 1 and 2, 92 ; H. 133, 134, 135, 136, 
 
 324, 325. 
 Accent. — G. 25, 2, 26, 37, N. 2; H. 120, 121, 365. 
 Subject and Preaieate. — G. 133, 134, 135; H. 485, 497, a, 
 
 539. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Kpnai ypa^vat, judges write. 
 
 01 "TtoiTiTai Xejoveri, the poets tell. 
 
 ypatfiei ttjv eiria-roXi^v, he {she, or it) writes the letter. 
 
4 GKEEK LESSONS. 
 
 VOCABULARV.i 
 
 ye^vpa, -as, (^), bridge, 
 
 iroiifrrfi, -ov, (o), J)Oet. 
 
 KplTT^i, -OV, (o), Jlidffe. 
 
 veavim, -ov, (6), youtk, young man. 
 
 <ypd<f>m^ tvrite. 
 
 Bavfia^ea, admire, wonder. 
 
 IMvBavto, learn, 
 
 jfaipm, rejoice. 
 
 \eyo), tell, relate. 
 
 Xuo), loose, destroy. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLUKAL. 
 
 1. \i>a, I loose. 1. Xionev, we loose. 
 
 2. Xtois, thou loosest. 2. X^ierc, you loose. 
 
 3. \ia, lie {she, or it) looses. 3. Xiovo-i, they loose. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 2. Xvrrov, you two loose. 
 
 3. XlSerav, they two loose. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 'ypd<f)£i,^ ypd^ofiev. 2. \eyet, \eyeK, Xe'yere. 3. o 
 veavlat ypMJtei, 4. o TTOtijTijs* davfid^ei, 5. ot TTot?;- 
 Ta( 6avfid^ov(Ttv.^ 6. o veaviwi fiavddvet. 7- p^atpovo't, 
 •yalpeK, 'xaipofiev. 
 
 Note. Pronounce the Greek. 
 
 1 The vocabularies should be well committed to memory, and often 
 reviewed. 
 
 ^ These verbs are inflected in the present indicative like Xiiu. 
 
 ' Notice that the personal pronouns, 7, thou, he, &c., are contained in 
 the endings of the verb ; thus ypa^ei means not only writes, but Ae, she, 
 or it writes. G. 134, K. 1 (read note on p. 142); H. 504, a and i. 
 
 * G. 28, 1 ; H. 101. 
 
 » G. 18, 1, and N. 2 ; H. 79, a and b. 
 
LESSONS II., in. 5 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He writes, we write, they write. 2. We admire, 
 you admire, they admire. 3. The youth writes the letter. 
 4. The youths learn wisdom.^ 5. They destroy the 
 bridge. 
 
 1 G. 141, b; H. 529. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 
 
 Nouns. — G. 16, 7, a, 37, 2, N. 1 and 2 ; H. 41, 130, 131, 133. 
 Accent. — G. 23, 1, 2, 26, 1, 29; H. 93, 94, a-f, 135 and Rem. a. 
 Object. — G. 133, 2, 158, 184, 1, 200, 201; H. 486, 544, 595, 
 695, 696. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 01 (TTpariwTai ^orjOeiav vefj-irovaiv, the soldiers send aid. 
 Ob ffTpaTiSsTat ^orjdeiav Tot? iroXtraii ire/iirovffiv, the 
 soldiers send aid to the citizens. . 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 irefiTTO), 
 
 send. 
 
 avayiyvmffKca, 
 
 read. 
 
 exto. 
 
 have. 
 
 po-^deia, -a<i, (ji), 
 
 aid. 
 
 arpaTia)T7]<i, -ov, (o). 
 
 ■soldier. 
 
 0vpa, -a?, (rj). 
 
 door. 
 
 TToXtT?;?, -ov, (o), 
 
 citizen. 
 
 aaTpa-jrri'i, -ov, (o). 
 
 satrap. 
 
 Se(Tv6Tr)<i, -ov, (o). 
 
 master. 
 
 oIkIu, -a<i, (^), 
 
 house. 
 
 BoKaTra, -?;?, (??), 
 
 sea. 
 

 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 6dXaTTa 
 
 OilXaTTcu 
 
 SoXdrra 
 
 eoXdmis 
 
 BoXaTTuv 
 
 SoXdrraiv 
 
 eaXdTTQ 
 
 6aXdTTais 
 
 
 0d\aTTav 
 
 SoXdrras 
 
 
 fldXarra 
 
 edXarrai 
 
 
 Translate Into Engilisli. 
 
 1. 01 iroi7)Tai TTjp eiriaToK-qv Bav/id^ovaiv. 2. 6 vea- 
 viai T'qv aperrfv davfia^ei. 3. o txaTpdiriji toks arpaTim- 
 raf TSfiTret. 4. at oiKiai ej(^ovcrt 6vpa<;, 5. o veaviw 
 tifv eiriaroXTjv rut Gwrpavri ire/iirei. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We admire the youth. 2. The citizens send aid. 
 3. The master^ sends the letter. 4. The citizens send 
 aid to the soldiers. 5. The soldiers destroy the bridge. 
 6. The youth is reading ^ the letter. 7. The master reads 
 the letter. 
 
 » G. 37, 2, N. 1 ; H. 135, Rem. 
 
 > Is 
 
 = readsi 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 With Genitive only. — G. 191, 1-4; H. 017, 622, 623, 624, 625. 
 TFifft Dative only. — G. 191, II. 1 and 2; H. 627, 628. 
 With Accusative only. — G. 191, III. 1 and 2; H. 620, 621. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 <j)6v'yei etc t^? kcu/i);;, he flees from (out of) the village, 
 irpb dvpSsv, before the door. 
 
LESSONS III., rv. 7 
 
 ^evyei a-vv rol^ a-TpariwraK, hejlees in company with 
 the soldiers. 
 
 (jievyet ets ttji/ BaXuTrav, hejlees into the sea. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 oTrXtTj;?, -ou, (o), heavy-armed foot-soldier. 
 
 aKTjvri, -rj<!, (^), tent. 
 
 fia')(ri, -rii;, (ij), battle, 
 
 dyopa, -at, (ij), marhet-place. 
 
 Kopr], -7?s, (^), y«W. 
 
 7r6X,Ta<7T7j?, -oiJ, (o), targeteer. 
 Tpeyw, run. 
 
 e^eKawa, march, 
 
 wal^co, play. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 01 itoSlTai, e/c^ rrjv ayopa<s f^evyovaiv. 2. ot arpa- 
 riSyrai et? rriv BaXarTav Tpe-)(pv<Tiv. 3. 6i» t^ ciyp^ 
 iroXlrai euriv (^are\ 4. ol aTpariSrrai ex t^? aKrjvrji 
 e^eXavvovai. 5. ot arpaTiarat diro rrji <7«iji'^s efeXow- 
 
 J/OVO't. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. They flee into the tents. 2. The girls play in the 
 house. 3. He sends a letter to^ the satrap. 4. The 
 soldiers march out of the village. 5. The soldiers run into 
 the sea, 6. We send aid to the satrap. 
 
 1 G. 29, 13, 2; H. 103, d, 80, a. 
 
 ^ To ia translated by a preposition when there is motion to (towards) 
 a person or place ; by Tp6s or by some other preposition when it means 
 to, towards; by els when it means to, into; otherwise, by the dative case. 
 
GEEEK LESSONa 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Gender. — G. 40 ; PI. 138, a and 6. 
 neclension. — G. 43, 1; H. 138. 
 
 Accent. — G. 22, N. 1, 25, 2; H. 93, 6, 95, a, 120, 121. 
 Article, with Attributives. — G. 143 (read Note), 167, 1; 
 H. 531, 558, 562. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ^ ToO irdkLrov oiKia, or ^ o(,Kia t] rod iroKirov, the citi- 
 zen's home. 
 
 ToO arparriyov httto?, the general's horse. 
 
 01 Kvpov arpaTiSnai, or ol arpariSnat ot Kvpov, or 
 oi aTpari&Tai Kvpov, the soldiers of Cyrus. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 rroTa/ioii, -ov, (o), 
 
 river. 
 
 tTTTTO?, -OV, (o). 
 
 horse. 
 
 arparriyo'!, -ov, (6), 
 
 general. 
 
 irapaBeiao'!, -ov, (o), 
 
 park. 
 
 oSo?, -ov, (^), 
 
 road, way. 
 
 vrj(TO<;, -ov, (ij), 
 
 island. 
 
 ayyeXo^, -ov, (o), 
 
 messenger. 
 
 ©eo's, -oO, (o), 
 
 God. 
 
 ^ca, -a?, (97), 
 
 force. 
 
 Kvpo<}, -ov, (0), 
 
 Cyrus. 
 
 Kat (conj.), 
 
 and. 
 
 otrXov, -ov, (to), 
 
 implement; pi. arms. 
 
 0r)piov, -ov, (to), 
 
 mid animal. 
 
LESSONS v., VI. 9 
 
 Translate Into Engllgli. 
 
 1. o aaTpaiTTj^ to» ffTjoarijiyw iirierToX'^v trefivei, 
 2. 01 oTrXiTat 07r\a e'^ovai. 3. 6 aTpaTrjyo^ Tiji* tSiu 
 ffTparuoTcov aperr^v Oavfia^ei. 4. o (nparrf'^o'i irefiiret 
 aTpaTi(OTa<s ex rijs Kw/irji, 5. ep irj daXtxTry xal ev 
 Toii iroraiMol'i vfjaol elaiv ^ (are). 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The soldier has a horse. 2. Cyrus sends the soldiers 
 out of the village. 3. We admire the bravery of the 
 soldiers. 4. They are playing in the house. 5. The 
 soldiers march into the villages of the satrap. 6. The 
 citizen has the soldier's letter. 
 
 1 G. 27, 28, 2; H. 105, c, 107, i. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Declension. — G. 42, 2, and Notes; H. 146, 147, 148. 
 Afseent. — G. 28, N. 2, 25, 2, Note; H. 149, a and h. 
 Predicate Nmin. — G. 136 ; H. 499. 
 
 Remarks on the Prepositions. 
 It is recommended that, in this and the following Lessons on 
 the Prepositions, the pupil fix clearly in his mind one meaning of 
 the preposition, and then modify this according to the case of the 
 noun to -which the preposition is attached. G. 191, IV. ; H. 629. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 €^e\avv6i Bia tov ireSiov, he marches through the 
 plain. 
 
10 
 
 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Si ' o^6a\fi&v op&fiep, we see {through) by means of 
 the eyes. 
 
 04 arpaTtSiTai advfioi r^aav Sia to twv voKefiuov ttX^ 
 00^, the soldiers loere dispirited on account of {throut/li) 
 the number of the enemy. 
 
 The other uses of ita with the accusative are poetic. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OF ei/il. 
 
 SINGULAK. PLURAL. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 1. Afi,Iam. 1. iirfiv, we are. 
 
 
 2. et, thou art. 2. 4<rW, you are. 
 
 2. toTov, you'two are. 
 
 3. IotC, lie is. 3. tlo-C, they are. 
 
 3. Icrrdv, <Aey too are. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Soi5\os, -ov, (d), 
 
 slave. 
 
 XaXivdi;, -ov, (d), 
 
 bridle. 
 
 \07w9, -<B, (d), 
 
 hare. 
 
 veei?, -JB, (d), 
 
 temple. 
 
 drjpevT^V, -ov, (d), 
 
 hunter. 
 
 ■^(pvaiov, -ov, (to). 
 
 gold, gold money. 
 
 \o^o<!, -ov, (d), 
 
 hill. 
 
 ireBlov, -ov, (to'), 
 
 plain. 
 
 ^w/io'?, -o5, (d). 
 
 altar. 
 
 ^■»7/3ei;«iij, 
 
 hunt. 
 
 «Ttfo), 
 
 build. 
 
 eXavvoy, 
 
 advance. 
 
 fievw. 
 
 remain. 
 
 SllOKW, 
 
 pursue. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. SuuKci TOP Xaydv. 2. oi drjpevral tous Xa-yois 
 
 67)pevov(nv. 3. o' Tois I'e^s /8cd/aoi ctcru'. 4. davjua^o- 
 
 > G. 12,1; H. 
 
 ,70. 
 
LESSONS VI., VU. 11 
 
 /lev MeveXeavA 5. 6 Kvpo<; \ayo}^ dijpevei. 6. rots 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We are building temples. 2. The hunters pursue 
 the hares. 3. They run into the temple. 4. They march 
 through the park. 5. They run into the temple on ac- 
 count of the fear of the enemy. 6. There are* altars in 
 the temples of the gods. 
 
 1 G. 42, N. 2 ; H. 149, a. 
 
 2 For the words not found in the vocabulary under the Lessons, see 
 General Vocabulary. 
 
 8 There are, eMu. G. 27, 28, 1, 2 ; H. 105, 107, a. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND 
 DECLENSIONS. 
 
 Declension. — Gr. 38, 43; H. 36, a, 132, 144. 
 
 Accent. — G. 84, 43, N. 1; H. 98, 145, a. 
 
 Contraction. — G. , read 8, 9, 1, 2, 3 (Note), 4 ; H. , read 32, 33, 34, 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ttXou? (ttXo'o?), -ov, (o), voyage. 
 
 vov<; {voo';), -ov, (o),- mind. 
 
 pov<s (poo<;), -ov, (o), stream., current. 
 
 ■\}reXt,ov, -ov, (to), bracelet, 
 
 ^pvyla, -a?, {rf), Phrygia. 
 
 axfieXeia, -as, (jj), aid, profit. 
 
 av0pa}iTo<;, -ov, (d), man, human being, 
 
 fiva, fiva^, (?;), mina. 
 
12 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 yr] (yea), yrji, (^), earf/i, land, 
 
 afyxp, rule, 
 
 (ftepio, bear, bring. 
 
 KiKucla, -a<i, (rj), Cilida. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ol pol Tr\<! OaXuTTTj^ (f>epov(n rat 7r\o) oxfjeKeiav. 
 2. Kvpoi T« avdpwrrq) utttov kuI -ylreXia Kai p.pav apyv- 
 piov treinrei,. 3. ev ttj yy ap')(pvaiv avOpairoi. 4. Kvpoi 
 ex ^pvyiat eK KiXiKiav e^eXavvei. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES, — FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS 
 
 SUBJECT AND COPULA. 
 
 Declension,. — G. 62, 1, 2, 3, 63, 64 ; H. 207, 209. 
 
 Accent. — G. 62, Note, 25, 2, 22, N. 2, 43, Notes; H. 207, Rem. b. 
 
 Subject ana Copula. — G. 133, Note, 134, 135, 136, 138, 141, 
 a and 6, 142, 1 (read Note), 2, and 3; H. 490 and a, 497, 
 498, 499, 526 and h (fine print), 529, 531, 532, 533, 535 
 and h. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 o\ tr\ov(Tioi TToXtrat, or (less often) ot woXtrat o\ 
 nrXovaioi, or •n-oXiTM ol irXovaioi, the rich citizens. 
 
 o\ vvv avOpenTroi, or (ot) avdpcavoi ot vvv, the Men of 
 the present time. 
 
 •7rpo<! TOW Tlep<Ta<s voX6iJ,o<;, or o iroXe/iog 6 tt/jos 
 Tou? Tlepffat, the war against the Persians. 
 
 01 iroXlTai nrXovaioi, or vXovaioi oi TroXtrat (ettrtv), 
 the citizens are rich. 
 
LESSONS vn., vm. 
 
 13 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ayado<;, -ri, -ov, 
 XevKov, -rj, -ov, 
 Se^ioi, -a, -ov, 
 7)iovr\, ■^, (rj), 
 ^ifiXlov, -ov, (to), 
 ■>frvxv, -^S, {■n), 
 <ro(po<!, -jj, -ov, 
 Ka\o^, -Tj, -ov, 
 BvriTOii, -Tj, -ov, 
 adavaroi;, -ov, 
 <f>iXto<i, -la, -lov, 
 \i6o<i, -ov, (d), 
 
 good. 
 
 white. 
 
 right, on the right. 
 
 pleasure. 
 
 book. 
 
 soul. 
 
 toise. 
 
 beautiful. 
 
 mortal. 
 
 immortal. 
 
 friendly. 
 
 stone. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ot •l^d^L^a>, <ro(f>oi elatv.^ 2. 6 croc^o? avdpairo^, or 
 
 avOptoiroi o (TO<f)o's. 3. d avOpwiroi; to koKov ^i^Xiov 
 e^et. 4. al rStv avdpdirasv i^ui^at adavaroi elaiv. 5. al 
 (lev rjSoval OvrjTai, al B' dperal dddvarol elaiv. 6. d 
 Kvpo<! Sia T^? <j>iXtav •^(opa^ e^eXavvei. 7- d avdpcairot 
 ayaOov eariv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The citizens are wise. 2. The wise men remain in 
 the park. 3. We have a beautiful book. 4. The soul of 
 man is immortal 5. We admire the beautiful book. 
 
 Note. — Notice carefully the change in accent of words accented 
 on the antepenult or on the penult, when the last syllable becomes 
 long; as, oOavaTos, dOavdrov; (fttkios, (pikia; iroXtrai, jroXirats. G. 22, 
 
 1 and 2, 37, N. 2; H. 93, 6, 95, a, 130. 
 
 1 G. 28, 1, 2, and 3; H. 107, 108. 
 
 ^ The particles /iiv and S^ stand in contrasted clauses, and connect 
 them, like our indeed, hit, — on the one hamd, on the other. In many cases 
 the contrast is so slight that /ih can hardly be rendered into English. 
 
14 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES,— CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DE- 
 CLENSIONS. —PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF etflL 
 
 Declension. — 6. 65; H. 208. 
 
 Accent. — 6. 43 and Notes 2 and 3; H. 98, 145, a, b, and c. 
 
 Contraction. — G. 9, 1, 2, 3, Note, and 4; H. 32, 34, 36, a. 
 
 VOCABULARY- 
 
 evvovi;, -ovv (eS, well, and vow), well disposed, 
 '^vaovi (j^/3uo-609), -^, -ovv, golde%. 
 
 j^jOW(7o%aXtvo?, -ov (xpva-^, gold, ) with gold-studded 
 
 and xdXwo<i, bridle), ) bridle. 
 
 o-TpETTTo?, -av, (o), tvAsted collar. 
 
 aKivaKT)'}, -ov, (o), s/iort sword. 
 
 fieffoi, -t;, -ov, middle. 
 
 ■^iXoi, -ri, -ov, uncovered. 
 
 Ke<j>a\ri, -^?, (ij), head. 
 
 IMPERFECT OF ei/il. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. DUAL. 
 
 1. fy> or 1\. I. 4||uv. 
 
 2. ^o-So. 2. ffn or flcrrc. . . 2. ijoTov or iJTOv. 
 
 3. ■Jjv. 3. 'fjo-av. 3. ■H<rn)v or flniv. 
 
 Translate Into EngUsli. 
 
 1. eiffiev, r/are, el. 2. ijfiev, tjo-Oa, etrrdv. 3. 6 
 Kvpo<} avdpawu) arpeirTOV 'Xfivaovv eSa>Ke [gave). 4. Sto 
 fieaov^ Tov vapaheicrov pel (^Jlows) trorafiov. 5. Kvpo<! 
 fjriX'qv e'x^ei ttjv Ke^a\7)v. 6. ao^o<i e*. 7. Kvpoi crpa- 
 
 r » 
 
 » G. 142, 4, N. 4; H. 536. 
 
LESSONS IX., X 15 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We are wise, you are wise, they were wise. 2. Thou 
 art well disposed, he is well disposed, they are well dis- 
 posed. 3. Cyrus has a gold-studded ^ bridle. 4. The gold- 
 studded bridles are beautiful. 5. The soldiers march 
 through the middle of the park. 6. The golden collars are 
 beautiful. 
 
 1 G. 63; H. 209. « 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 PEESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES. 
 
 Toices, Woods, and Tenses. — G. 88,89, 90, 91, 300, 213, 1; 
 H. 360-264, 697, 701, 719. 
 
 Terb Stems; Personal Endings of Present and Imper- 
 fect.— G. 93, 2 (read Note), 3, 4, and I., 94, 108, 1., 113, 2; 
 H. 365 (read fine print), 367, 334, 325, 355. 
 
 Inflection of Present and Imperfect. — G. 94, 95, 2, 96 ; 
 H. 369, 370. 
 
 Augment; Accent. — G. 36, 99, 1, 2, a-c, 100; H. 306, 307, 
 308, 309, 365. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 BtaKovaiv ol arpariarM, the soldiers pursue, or are 
 
 pursuing. 
 
 eSlcoKov ol ff-rpa-nmrai, the Soldiers were pursuivff. 
 
 Kipov eire/iTre ^Uov^ otvov, Cyrus was accustomed to 
 send pitchers of wine. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^aaCKeico, be Ung. 
 
 KeXevm, order, command. 
 
 irKTTevto, 
 
16 GEEEK LESSONS. 
 
 iraiBeva, teach. 
 
 To^eva, shoot with a bow. 
 
 To^oTij^, -ov, (o), bowman. 
 
 iroXefuov, -ia, -lov, hostile. 
 
 TToXefiioi (pi.). enemy. 
 
 eprfov, -ov, (to), work, deed. 
 
 ^v\ivov, -7}, -OP, wooden. 
 
 fieffov, -ov, {to), midst, centre. 
 
 dripiov {6r\p, tcild beast), -ov, (to), wild beast or animal. 
 
 HTTTo?, ov, (o or ij), horse, or mare. 
 
 The preposition Kara (G. 191; H. 631) signifies down; •with the 
 genitive, down from, — Kara tov reixovs, down from the wall ; with 
 the accusative, down (along), — Kara povv, down stream. Cf. Kara 
 fieaov, in 7 below. 
 
 Translate Into Engllsli. 
 
 1. 0aai\ev(o, e^aaiXevov. 2. marevo/iev, etriaTevov. 
 3. ypdipei, eypa^e. 4. Kvpov tov ayyekov irefi-irei. 
 5. 01 iroXtTai et9 j/ew? 6<j)evyov. 6. Ij^ere tou? tTTTrous. 
 7. ayet to a-Tpdrevfia {the army) Kara to /leaov iroXe- 
 fiitov. 8. o( To^oTai 619 T0V9 TToXe/^tovf To^evovat. 9. o 
 Kvpo<i edripevev diro iirwov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The men were fleeing into a temple. 2. The citizens 
 are fleeing. 3. They are writing, they were writing, he is 
 writing. 4. The enemy are pursuing, the enemy were pur- 
 suing. 5. He pursues the hare. 6. Cyrus hunted (was in 
 the hahit of hunting) wild animals on horseback (lit. from 
 a horse). 7. The park was large. 8. We admire the valor 
 of the soldier. 9. He sends the soldiers from the house. 
 
LESSONS X., XI. 17 
 
 LESSON XL 
 
 NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION: — !. STEMS ENDING 
 IN A CONSONANT. LABIAL AND PALATAL STEMS.* — 
 VEEBS: FUTURE, ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 I'ormMtian of Cases. — G. 6, 2, 46, 2, 47, 1, 48, 1, 49; 
 
 H. 151, 156, 157, 158, c, 159, 162. 
 EupHonic Changes, — G. 16, 2, 46, 1, 2, and 3; H. 47, 48, 49. 
 Accent. — G. 25, 1, 2, and 3, 43, N. 2; H. 120, 145, c, 160. 
 Inflection and, Personal Endings. — G. 95, 2, 96, 110, I., II., 
 
 113, 2 ; H. 269, 271, 344, 346, 352, a, 355. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 ffoXiriy^, -yyo?, (17), 
 
 
 trumpet. 
 
 KrjpV^, -VKO<S, (0), 
 
 
 herald. 
 
 apyvpovf {apyvpeoi), -a. 
 
 -ovv. 
 
 silver. 
 
 ipv0po^, -a, -ov. 
 
 
 red. 
 
 ay to, f. a^m, 
 
 
 lead. 
 
 6(0 pa^, -aKOi, (0), 
 
 
 breastplate. 
 
 aXwirrj^, -eKOi, (0 or Jj). 
 
 
 fox. 
 
 0pt^, rptxoi, (^), 
 
 
 hair. 
 
 \tvov<i (XtWos), -rj, -ovv. 
 
 
 flaxen, line 
 
 Translate Into Sngllsh. 
 
 1. ypddxo, "vpai^oj, eypa^ov. 2. ^affiXevco, /3a<rt- 
 Xevtrto, e^acrlXevov. -3. Xiyca, Xe^w, eXeyov. 4. Kvpo<; 
 irefiy^ec K-qpvKa^. 5. 01 KTqpvae^ e^ovaiv apyvpai (TaX- 
 inyyafs. 6. al Tmv dXtoireKcov rpl'^ev^ epvOpat eiatv. 
 7. ol arpwriSndi dcopuKa^^ Xivov<s eij(ov. 
 
 1 LeaiTi the declension of <j>i\ai, 0X^^, <rdXjriY|. 
 
 2 G. 17, 2, N., 142, 2, N. 2 ; H. 66, a, also 531 (fine print). 
 ' Explain the formation of the cases from the stem. 
 
 2 
 
18 GKEEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. Cyrus -will send the heralds. 2. The heralds have 
 silver trumpets. 3. Cyrus Igd the hoplites. 4. He wiU 
 lead the hoplites. 5. The enemy were fleeing down the 
 hill. 6. They write, they were writing. 7. He admires, 
 he was admiring, he will admire. 8. You rejoice ; you 
 loose, you were loosing, you will loose. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN A LINGUAL.i 
 
 Formation of Cases. — G. 6 and 2, 46, 1 and 4, 47, 2, 48, 2, 
 a and b, 50 ; H. 156, 157, 158, 6 and c, 165, 168, 169, 171. 
 
 EupJionic Changes.— G. 7, 9, 2, 46,1 (end); H. 32, 62, 64, 74, 
 75, 76. 
 
 Accent. — G. 25 (read Notes), 1, 2, 3; H. 120, 160. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 adpol^m, f. -OKTO), collect. 
 
 yvfiva^Q), f. -aa-eo, exercise. 
 
 IfiaTiov, -ov, (to), cloak. 
 
 KoafjLO'i, -ov, (6), ornament. 
 
 Kepa<!, -aTo<i {-ao<!), -w?, (to), m9ij/ of an army; horn. 
 
 aSifia, -arot;, (to'), body. 
 
 (TTparevfta, -arov, {to), army. 
 
 apfia, -aroi, (to), chariot. 
 
 , , A ( thing used ; rA. goods, 
 
 XPVf^a, -aTo<!, (to), -j ^ 1 .7 
 
 ^'^ (. property, money. 
 
 The preposition v^ip (cf. Lat. super) signifies over (G. 191, IV. 3; 
 H. 633) : with genitive, over, — 6 ijXtos imip rjiiav iropcifrm, the sun 
 
 1 Learn the declension in G. of X^uk, ylyas, T^aiaris, I'KtIs, Ipvis, irCiiia, 
 rifias, fjirap, Bit ; H. 165 and 169. 
 
LESSONS XII., XIII. 19 
 
 passes over (above) us; with accusative, over, — plwreiv imep tov 
 So/iov, to hurl over the house. 
 
 Translate Into £ng:lisli. 
 
 1. 6 Kvpo<: arpuTevfjM adpoi^ei. 2. to, ffwfiara yv- 
 fiva^ofiev. 3. ev to« apfiaai ra tov arpaTevfiaTOf; i 
 ■X^prifund ea-nv.^ 4. trr'^cra? {liaving stopped) to apfjua 
 trpo T^v (fxiXayiyo^.^ 5. to fjuev l/JtaTiov Koa/xo^* ear), 
 TOV tTtojiaTOi, o he vovv t»}? ^k^^- 6. to tou (TTpa- 
 TevfiaTOi Kepa<s opSt {see). 7. virep r^s ied)fir)<! yrjKo- 
 ^os rjv. 
 
 Translate Into Cireek. 
 
 1. Cyrus will collect an army. 2. The young man will 
 exercise his body. 3. The army of Cyrus is marching 
 through Cilicia. 4. The property of the soldiers is in the 
 chariot. 5. The army of Cyrus is in the plain. 
 
 1 G. 142, 1; H. 531 (fine print). = G. 135, 2; H. 515. 
 
 * Consult the General Vocabulary for the words not found in the vo- 
 cabularies under the Lessons. 
 
 * G. 141, N. 8 ; H. 535. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN A LIQUID. — VERBS : INDICATIVE 
 ACTIVE OF Xu(W. 
 
 XktrmatUm of Cases. — G. 46, 3, 47, N. 1, 48, 2, a, 50 ; H. 156, 
 158, b and e, 172 and b. 
 
 Conjugation. — G. 93, 2, a, b, and c, 94, 95, 2, 96 ; H. indica- 
 tive active, 269, 270, fl. 
 
 Reaui>Ucation. — G. 100, 2, 101, 1, 2, 3, and 4 ; H. 318, 319, 
 a and b, 320. 
 
 Personal Endings.— G. 113,2; II. 344, 346, 349, 350, 351, 
 352, a, 355. 
 
20 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 The preposition em primarily signifies upon (G. 191, V. 2; H. 
 640): Kipos npoixpaiveTo t'^' ap/iaTos (G. 9, 2, 17, 1; H. 32, d, 72), 
 Cyrus appeared upon a chariot . cm TJj BiiKarrri oineai, to live upon (by) 
 the sea : cVl top /SacnXca Uvai, to march upon (i. e. against") the king. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 "EWi^v, -rjpoi, (o), 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Grip, dvpo^, (o). 
 
 wild beast. 
 
 prrrasp, -opot, (o), 
 
 orator. 
 
 TJye/i(ov, -dvo<!, (o), 
 
 leader. 
 
 p,iKpo<s, -a, -ov. 
 
 small. 
 
 /SXaTTTO), f. fiXa-\fr<u, 
 
 injure. 
 
 ayStv, -S>vo<i, (o), 
 
 games. 
 
 <y6\a>9. -ojTO?, (6), 
 
 laughter. 
 
 Treido), f. irelam. 
 
 persuade. 
 
 irvp, -Trvpoi, (to). 
 
 fire. 
 
 fi\afiep6<!, a-, -6v, 
 
 hurtful. 
 
 ^evycov [jtevym, fiee), -oj/to?, (o), fugitive, exile. 
 
 Translate Into Enellsh. 
 
 1. ot EW7)ve<s eSituKov.^ 2. ^evyofiev rovi Ofjpa^? 
 3. e0avfia^e. 4. oi veaviai e^aipov. 5. yeypd<f)afjLev 
 Tfjv einaTo\r]v. 6. ol ' EWrjvei trvv yiXeari eir\ tom aKij- 
 vo? ^\0ov {went). 7. tous prjTopav^ ical tow? apy^pvra^ 
 veidca. 8. 17 toC irvpo<s ^la ov fiixpa eajiv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. "We admire the orator. 2. We admired the orator. 
 3. The youth wrote the letter. 4. The youth was writing 
 the letter. 5. The young man was rejoicing. 6. You flee 
 from wild beasts. 7. The Greeks have pursued. 8. We 
 have taught, we have hunted, we had taught. 
 
 I G. 200, N. 5; H. 701. « G. 158; H. 544. 
 
 ° Explain the formation of the cases from the stem. 
 
LESSONS XIII., XIV. 
 
 21 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 STEMS ENDING IN S. 
 
 Declension, — G. 51, 1, 2 (read Note), 58, 1, 2, and N. 1 and 2; 
 
 H. 176 (read 177, 178), 179. 
 Accent. — Gr. 35, 1, Note; H. 97, 179. 
 Contraction. — G. 9, 1, 2, 3, Note, 4, and 5; H. 38, 33, 34, and 
 
 36 with 6. 
 Tenses reviewed.— G. 200 and 201, 213, 1 and 4 ; H. 695, 1, 
 
 697, 701, 705, 710, 713, 719, 723. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 evpo<s (-60s), -ov?, (to), toidth. 
 
 Tpiripr}^ (-eos), -0U9, (^), trireme, 
 
 exarov (indeclin.), one hundred. 
 
 elKoai (indeclin.), twenty. 
 
 76^^05 (-60?), -Ot;?, (to), WCdl. 
 
 vyfro'i (-eos), oi/?, (to), height, 
 
 trovi, 7ro8o<i, (o), foot, 
 
 opoi (-609), -OK?, (to), viountain. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ZiwKet Tovt tTTpaTi]^ov<; Kvpo<i rpnqpeai.^ 2. t]v Se 
 T64YO? evpof' eiiKocTi TToocov, vyfroi! oe eKorov. o. oi arpa- 
 r(,a>Tai evl to. opr) eipevyov. 4. tt}v ye^vpav eXvaare.* 
 5. ol To^orai eTo^evaav. 6. o Kvpov xeKeXevKe. 7. ol 
 ffTpaTiwrdi ra ontXa eKafi^avov, 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. Cyrus has commanded. 2. Cyrus had commanded. 
 3. Cjrrus commanded. 4. The soldiers broke the bridge 
 
 1 G. 188, 1; H. 606. 
 
 » G. 47, 2; H. 153, 161, 170, 191. 
 
 2 G. 160, 1; H. 549. 
 " G. 200, N. 5 ; H. 705. 
 
22 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 down. 5. The soldiers will break the bridge down. 
 6. The width of the wall is twenty feet. 7. The triremes 
 were large. 8. They admire the triremes. 9. There are 
 mountains in Cilioia. 10. The height of the mountain is 
 many feet. 
 
 LESSON XY. 
 
 II. STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL OR IN A DIPHTHONG. 
 
 I)eclension.~G. 53, 1, 2, and 3 (read 1, N. 3, 3, N. 1), 53, N. 2; 
 
 H. 185 and fiamXtis (read 186). 
 .Acccn*. — Review G. 13, 1 and 2, 21, 1 and 2, 82, 1 and 2, 23, 
 
 24, 25; H. 78, a and h, 89, 91, 93, 94, 95, 96, 98, 99, 100. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ird\i<!, -eco<s, (^), ciiy. 
 
 e^eraa-K, -e«a?, [rj), review of an army. 
 
 edvoi, -ov<;, (to), nation. 
 
 elpT^vri, -???, (^), peace. 
 
 aa-Tv, -eo?, (to), cify, walled town. 
 
 tTTTrev?, -ews, (o), horseman; ^\. cavalry. 
 
 irevia, -a<r, (rj), poverty. 
 
 \xyjri), -17?, (^), distress. 
 
 The preposition irtpi signifies primarily around (on all sides of). 
 G. 191, VI. 5; H. 649. With the genitive, it is not often used in 
 reference to place, but chiefly in a derived sense, meaning about, 
 for, etc.; as, KfjpvKas en-c/ui/rc wepl o-jroi/Swi/, he sent heralds about a 
 truce. "With dative, about (cnncermng'). With the accusative, arouTid / 
 as, nepl Aiyim-rov (arov/nd, i. e. everywhere in Egypt), about the country 
 : Egypt. 
 
LESSONS XV., XVI. 23 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. TO affTV Tei'^7] ej^et. 2. ra Or/pta ol 'nrvei<; eSuoKOV, 
 3. eTToirja-ev {lie made) e^eraaiv twv 'W\X7}V(ov. 4. 6 
 7ro\e/tio? TOW /iew ^aaiXevai TroWaKt? Tifiriv koI So^av 
 ^epei,, TOi? 8 eOveai irevlav Kai XvTrrjv. 5. ot TroXe/iwot 
 TTped/Set? treixTTovcriv et? t'^v TroXtv Trept t^? 6ipr)vij<;. 
 
 Translate into Greek, 
 
 1. Theking^iswise. 2. Wars often bring glory to kings. 
 3. I see the review of the soldiers. 4. The cavalry were pur- 
 suing the wild animals. 5. The enemy were fleeing into the 
 city. 6. The soldiers were fleeing out of the city. 7. They 
 marched into the city. 8. The cities have walls. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 II. STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL (continued). — SYNCO- 
 PATED NOUNS. 
 
 Gender. — G. 58, 1, 2, and 3; H. 152. 
 
 Declension. — Ct. 54, 55, 56, 57, 1 and 2; H. 53, 189, 193. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 a-Tepyw, f. aTep^m, love. 
 
 fiov<i, 000^, (o or ^), OcV or cow. 
 iroXvXoyov, -ov, * talkative. 
 
 •irarr\p, ■jraTpo';, (o), father. 
 Bv^aTrjp, OvyaTpo'i, (??), daughter. 
 
 Ifpe6<s, -€&)?, (o), priest. 
 
 0v<o, f. ffuam, sacrifice. 
 
 «aXQ)?, ndv., well, nobly. 
 
 )i.T[Tt)p, fj,7}Tpd<;, (^), mother, 
 
 avrip, di/Spo<!, (o), man. 
 
 ' When jSairiXciJs refers to the Persian king, the article may be omitted. 
 
24 GKEEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate Into Engillsii. 
 
 1. 01 lepei<; rot? 6eoi(s 0ov<i Ovovffiv. 2. ai iypae<s 
 iroXv\o<yoi, eiaiv. 3. o /Sao-tXeu? koXw? apx^i- 4. Kii- 
 pov, Tou Twv Ilepaaiv ^aaCKea} eiri re t^ apery kui rrj 
 ao(j)ia davfid^ofiev. 5. arepyova-i tov irarepa xai rrjv 
 fiijTepa, 6. rj dvyuTTjp aTepyei ttjv firjrepa. 7. o irar-qp 
 rrjv dvyarepa crrepyei. 8. rriv tuv ■^pojoav apeT7\v 6av- 
 p-a^ofiev. 
 
 Translate into Greek* 
 
 1. The kings rule well. 2. The priest has sacrificed 
 the ox. 3. The ships are large. 4. Cyrus pursues with 
 ships. 5. The father loves his daughter. 6. The mother 
 loves her beautiful daughter. 7. We admii'e the man on 
 account of his wisdom. 
 
 1 G. 137; H. 499. " G. 141, K. 2; H. 527, d. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.— 
 VERBS: IMPERATIVE ACTIVE. 
 
 Adjectives of One Ending. — G. 66 and N. 4; H. 317, 218. 
 Inflection and Personal Endings. — Gr. 95, 2, 96, 116 (active), 
 
 no, I., II., and III., 213, 4, 283, 1 and 2; H. 270, ff., 358, 
 
 369, 372, 385, 723, 832, 833. 
 Genitive. — G. 172, 1, 180, 1 ; H. 575, 584. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ■X^alpere, w TTotSe?, rejoice, children. 
 
 Xeyere, speak you. 
 
 (17) Xeyere, do not speak. 
 
 ov Xeyere (indie), you do not speak. 
 
LEnsONiS XVL, XVII. 25 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 a7p.09,i -.a, .,0V [aypo,, a, field), J ^^^^^ ^.^^_ 
 
 Kara^ai/T)?, -e? [Kara, intens., (j>aiv(o, ) . , . . , 
 
 irXriprj^, -e? {irXewi, full), full, 
 
 irpavri'i, -e?, steep. 
 
 evSaifiajv, -ov (ev, well, atid Satacov, ] 
 
 , .■ s > prosperous, 
 
 destiny), ) -* ■* 
 
 , u(j>avq<!, -e? (a priv. and <f)aiv(o, show), out of sight. 
 
 awtfo, t. aaaxo, a. eo-fijcra, pf. aea-WKa, save. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ^evye tov9 6ripa<i. 2. jxt] 0avfj,d^6Te. 3. w ^iXr/ 
 dvyarep, arepye rrjv /j.rjTepa, 4. o irapaBeityoi; aypiwv 
 67)pLtov 7r\rjpr]<! rjV. 5. at ra^eit Karat^aveZt rjcrav. 
 6. ot nnr€i<! rjcrav a^avel<i. 7. o Kvpo<; e^eXavvei et? 
 iroXiv evSatfteva. 8. o • ttoto/uo? irXirjpri's lyOvav eariv. 
 9. 04 iroXefiioi tTnrew (^Evyovai, kutol^ irpavov's y7]Xd(j)ov, 
 
 Translate into Greelc. 
 
 1. Kejoice, young man. 2. You do not wonder. 
 3. Write the letter. 4. Do not write the letter. 5. You 
 do not write the letter. 6. Cyrus was marching into a 
 prosperous city. 7. The park is full of wild animals. 
 8. The cities are prosperous. 9. The cavalry are out of 
 sight. 10. They ran down a steep hiU. 11. The rivers 
 are full of fishes. 
 
 1 Notice change of accent in aypws. G. 25, 1, 22, 1 and 2, 37, 2, 
 N. 2 ; H. 120, 93, b, 94, c. 
 
 ^ With which cases can xatA be used ? Its meaning.? 
 
26 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XTIII. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 
 
 Declension, — G. 67, 1 and 2, 68; H. 818, 1, and xa-pi-fK. 
 Accent. — G. 86 (read N. 1, 2, and 3); H. 89 (read fine print), 
 91, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ijSw, r)hela, r)hv, sweet, pleasant. 
 
 <y\vicv<s, -eia, -v, sweet. 
 
 Ta'xy<{, -eta, -v, swift, fleet. 
 
 evpv<!, -eia, -v, wide. 
 
 atrai;, airacra, airav, ) ,, , ,j 77 
 
 , 1 ,„,>«« toaetner, whole. 
 
 (a cop/ and ttos), ) '' 
 
 fipaBvi;, -eia, -v, slow. 
 
 ,1, A ( '"^'^'"'ting half, half full. 
 
 Translate Into S^igllsh. 
 
 1. o veaviat epj^et Ta^uv l-mrov. 2. oTvo<s yXvKvv 
 eartv. 3. oc tmroi ra^el<; eiaiv. 4. l3paBei<s liriroi ev 
 rrj /j.a'XT] 7roWaKt<; KU'Sui/ouf; ^epovaiv. 5. rj oho<s evpeld 
 effTiv. 6. rj firiTTip ■^(apieaad ecrjiu. 7. i^tX^ rjv onra^a^ 
 rj 'xwpa. 8. o Trait p,e\av Ifiuriop e^ev. 9. Kvpo^ 
 eirefiTre ^iicov^ oivov rj/j.iSeel': •jroXKaKit. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The horses are fleet. 2. The young man has a fleet 
 horse. 3. The cloaks are black. 4. The enemy were not 
 in sight. 5. The river is deep. 6. Cyrus has a park full 
 
 ' The prefix o- is sometimes copulative, i.e. denotes union; as, i-Xoxos, 
 bedfellow. See Liddell and Scott's Lexicon. 
 2 G. 142, 4, N. 5; H. 537. 
 
LESSONS XVIII., XIX. 27 
 
 of wild animals. 7. All the country is bare. 8. The 
 enemy are fleeing out of the prosperous city. 9. The 
 whole ^ country was bare. 
 
 1 G. 142, 4, N. 5; H. 537. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. — VERBS ; INDICATIVE, IMPERA- 
 TIVE, AND INFINITIVE, ACTIVE. 
 
 I>eclension, — G. 70 (read Note 2); H. 219 (read Rem. a). 
 Review the InfleetUm and Personal Endings, and learn G. IIT, 1 
 
 (active), 203, 1, 258, 259, 95 and 2; H. 352, rf, 359 (active), 
 
 and read 269, 36T, 763. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 eirj^oTo?, -7), -ov, furthest, last. 
 
 eyitTrXeea?, -mj', full of. 
 
 o\ iroXXot, gen. Tcov "TroWcov, the many, the majority. 
 
 afjb-TreKo^, -ov, (jj), vine. 
 
 Bti>Spov (or BevSpoi;, to), -ov, (to), tree. 
 
 jravroBdirov (stem iravr- of Tras ) , , • 7 
 
 J ^ .ft ) of every kind. 
 + o, and -oaTTo?), -1), -ov, ) '' '' 
 
 eirlppxno'i {eiri, upon, pea, ") flowing upon, overflowedf, 
 
 flow), -ov, ) well watered. 
 
 Preposition. 
 
 The prepositioii jrpds (cf. jrpd, G. 191, VI. 6; H. 652) signifies 
 primarily a position in front of; with the genitive, npos 6ewv, (in 
 presence of the) by the Gods; with dative, Kiipos ^v npas MiKrjTia, 
 Cyrus was (in front of) near Miletus ; with accusative, epxomai. nptis 
 Tov Kvpov TrpcVjSfir, ambassadors come (into a position in front of) to 
 Cyrus. 
 
28 GREEK LESSUNS. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. rj ■xwpa fieyoKr) Koi Kokri etrrtv. 2. Kvpo<! e^eXavvei 
 61? Iffcrou?, Tw? KiXiiKLat ecr')(iirr)v voXiv, evi Trj daXazTi^ 
 fieyaXriv icai evSaifiova. 3. Kvpoi eyei ttoXv aTparev/ia. 
 4. Uep^r]<! rjv SecrTroTT]^^ irdari'i Acriat. 5. o Kupot rjv 
 Trpo? Ba^vXaivi. 6. evjevdev Kari/3aivev^ et? TreStoif 
 fieya Koi koKov, eirippvrov, xai BevBptov iravTooawaiv 
 e/nirXecov Kai dfnreXwv. 7. fxeXXco ypa<fieiv. 8. ov 
 Kaicov e<ni 0aa-iXeveiv. 9. vrotSai; ev jracSfiveifV ovTf 
 fUKpou 0VT6 paSiov irpayfia ea-Tov. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The cities are large and prosperous. 2. C3TUS 
 marched through a friendly country. 3. Cyrus rode 
 through the large and beautiful plain. 4. Cyrus rode by 
 not veiy near'^ to the army. 5. They have broken dowir 
 the bridge. , 6. They will break down the bridge. 7. Break 
 down the bridge. 8. Do not break down the bridgS.' 
 9. You are breaking down the bridge. 10. The soldiers 
 broke down the. bridge. 11. It is easy to run. 12. It is 
 not easy to educate boys. 
 
 1 G. 37, 2, N. 1 ; H. 135, «.. 2 Qive the force of the preposition. 
 ^ To ride by not vet-y near to, irapeKaivciii oi Trdvv irp6s. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Compai-ison. — G. 71, N. 1-5, 72 and 2; H. 220, 221, a, d, 1, 222. 
 Syntax. — G. 168, 175, 1 ; H. 559, a, 583, 586. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 o irarrip ao^anepof rov viov eanv, or o Trarrjp ao^ai- 
 Tepdt eaTLv 17 o wo'?, tlw. father is loiser than his son. 
 
LESSONS XIX., XX. 29 
 
 o ^aaiKevs SiKacorepo'i */ ffo^u)Tepo<i ^v, the king was 
 more just than wise. 
 
 ScoKpa.Trj'i (TO(f)a>Taro^ r)v, Socrates was very wise. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 /3a..W. i^aacXev,, king), | ^^^ ^^^,^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 TLfii,o<;^ {Tifiri, honor), -La, -uov, held in honor. 
 
 veot, -a, -ov, young. 
 
 d6vuo9 (a priv. and dviwi, ) ,. . .^ , ,. , 
 
 , . r.\ > msptntea, dkscouraqed. 
 
 soul, spirit), -oKj 3 
 
 ala-xpo'} (alffvo!;, ro, dis- ) ,. . , 
 
 \ I ' > disqracejm. 
 
 grace), -a, -ov, ) "^ ■' 
 
 agio's, -la, -iov, worthy, deserving. 
 
 XaXeTTor, -7j, -ov, hard to deal with, hostile. 
 
 ri (conj.), or, than. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 1. o avr^p ^affiKlKunaTOf; Kai a^io}Taro<; eoTlv. 2. oo- 
 (j)i,a ttXovtov TLiMUorepa earrlv. 3. rj fJ'rjrrip ^(apiearepa 
 T?7? Ovjarpoi; ecrrcv. 4. Tajy fiev veooreptav ra epya, rSiv 
 Be irpea^vrepoiv rovi \oyov<; davtia^ofiev. 5. Ta Kpea 
 ij^iara r)v. 6. ol aTpaTt&Tai- r]<Tav advfiorepoi. 7. o 
 
 ej(6pO<}. T^oXe'TTCOTOTO? ecTTiv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He is a most worthy man. 2. The cloud is blacker 
 than night. 3. The generals were more dispirited than 
 the soldiers. 4. The king was most unprepared. 5. We 
 admire the deeds of Cyrus the younger. 6. The son is 
 more worthy than the father. 7. Cyrus marched into a 
 very wealthy city in Cilicia. 
 
 ' Notice the change in accent. 
 
so GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 IKREGULAE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Irregular Comparison. — 6. 73 (read 2 and 3), review Tl, 
 73, 2; H. 233,324. 
 
 Euphonic Changes. — G. 15, 16, 1 (N. 2), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (read 
 N. 1, 2, 3, 4), 7, N. a, 4, c, and rf, 17, 1, 2; H. 41, 43, 44, 
 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 52, 54, 55, 57 to 63, 65, a. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Kaxoi^ -rj, -ov, bad; KaKov, -ov, (to), evi/. 
 Xafi^avo), f. Xri^ofjLai, pf. etXrj^a, take, capture, 
 api^a, gen. apfiaroi, (to), chariot. 
 
 dSiKia (aBiKoi;, umust, a priv. and ? . . 
 
 t» \ / '\ r inmsttce. 
 
 otKTj), -a?, (77), ) -^ 
 
 aTTo-n-tfiireo [diro, prep., ireiitrto), send away or iac^, 
 
 a(orr)pLa {ffcorrip, Savior), ■a<;, (rj), safety. 
 
 oTi^ (conj.), t/iat, because. 
 
 ypd^,a (ypi^., write), -aro., [ro), | ^''I^Jjl'^ ^'''^'' 
 
 Translate Into EngUBli. 
 
 1. o avr\p KUKOv eariv. 2. to apfia rov jSao'tX.ea)? 
 KtiWtaTov ecTTtv. S. o Kvpov e^eXavvei Bia fiea-rit t»5? 
 "ffoXew?. 4. Kvpoi travTcov twv iraihwv KpaTi<TTO<; e(niv. 
 5. KoKLOvi 6UTI TU>v ^ap^apcov. 6. Xafi^avei avBpa<; oti 
 7r\ei<rrov<s Koi ^eXTia-rov;. 7, S> <j)iKe iral, (f)ev'ye Trjv 
 aSiKiav, aSlKtav yap ovk eari /lel^ov kukov. 8. 6 Kvpa 
 T-qv KiXiaaav avoTri/jiTrei, ttjv TaylcrTTjv oSop.^ 
 
 1 Often used to strengthen the superlative, like Lat. guam; as Sti iira- 
 PfldKevlyraTov, as unprepared as possible. 
 » G. 160, 2; H. 552. 
 
LESSONS XXI., XXII. 31 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The chariot is very beautiful. 2. There are very 
 many wild asses in the plain. 3. He takes the best soldiers 
 of the king. 4. The men are worse than the barbarians. 
 
 5. The enemy flee as quickly as possible from the plain. 
 
 6. He takes as many men as possible. 7. The father is 
 better than his son. 8. They are the bravest of the 
 soldiers. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.— VERBS: SUBJUNCTIVE AND OP- 
 TATIVE MOODS; ACTIVE VOICE; HISTORICAL PRESENT. 
 
 Adverbs G. 74, 1, 2, 75 with Notes 1 and 2; II. 225, 226, 228. 
 
 Learn the Inflection of the Subjunctive and Optative of Xiiu; also 
 
 the Personal Endings. 
 Syntaac — G. 200, N. 1, 201, Rem., 202 and 1, 203, 213, 2 and 3, 
 
 215, 216 (read 2 and 3), 217, 218 ; H. 699, 720, 721, 733, 
 
 734, 736, 739 (read 740, 742), 743. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 6 TTats T&j TTOTpt pohov <p€p€i, ivu x^'^Pj)' ^'^^ ^"^ hriifigs 
 a rose to Ids father in order that he may rejoice. 
 
 6 iral'i Tft) -Trarpi poBov e(j)epev, iva xaipoi, the boy was 
 bringing a rose to his father in order that he might 
 rejoice. 
 
 SeBoiKa jiT) ovK e^to (subj\) licavov<;, I fear that I 
 shall not have 'men enough. 
 
 eSeBoiiceiv fiTj ovk exoi/jti lKavov<;, J feared that I 
 should not have men enough. 
 
 T{,aaa^kpv'i)<i Bia^dWei tov Kvpov, Tissaphemes ac- 
 cused Cyrus. 
 
32 ' GREEK LKSSONS. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 dXrjdooi, truly. 
 
 a-vfi^opd(ffvv and ^6pa)),-a(i,{'^), event, mishap. 
 
 'iva (conj.), that, in order that. 
 
 SeiBo), f. mid. Beiffo/jiai, a. eSeiaa, ) 
 
 pf. SeBoixa (in pres. sense), y 
 
 „ , /ST S with difficulty, griev- 
 
 XaXeirm [xaXeTro^), adv., ^ ^^^^^_ 
 
 OavaTo^ {6v'l}<TK<o\ -ov, (o), death. * 
 
 Seji/oj? i^eivot, fearful, Seo<!, to, fear), terribly, 
 riovei, (root yei. in y/yi^oMat. 3^ j 
 ^ora), -^0,?, (o), ^y«?Ae/-, ^i. parents. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. 'ypa<f)a> ttjv evca-ToXrjv , iva xt^iprj^. 2. eypacpov Trjv 
 eiriaroXrjv, iva ^atpot?. 3. oKrjBw Xeyei. 4. ;;^a\67rdj? 
 ijiepofiev Ta? <Tvp,(^opa^ tov /3iov. 5. o TraTTjp Xeyei ra 
 /SeXTtcTTa.^ 6. Xvco/j,ev. Xva-cofiev. 7. ot TraiSe? ra 
 ypafifiara iiavOavouaiv, iva ot yovei^ ■^''-''P^'^''^- 8. o 
 ■Tratif Tn ypafifiara efxavOavev, iva 6 iruTrip xp-ipoi. 9. ot 
 iroXe/j,ioi 0)9 raxJ-O'Ta ^evyovcnv €k rov TreSiov. 10. toi/ 
 Taji/ TratScdi' davarov ot yoveh ov paBia)<: ^epovcnv. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They speak wisely; he speaks truly; they rule justly. 
 2. The enemy fled as quickly as possible. 3. "We do not 
 easily bear the death of (our) friends. 4. Children bring 
 roses to their parents in order that they may rejoice. 
 5. The children were bringing the roses to their parents in 
 order that they might rejoice. 
 
 ' 0. 139; H. 496. 
 
LESSONS XXII., XXIII. 33 
 
 Note. — Form adverbs from the following adjectives : — 1. aa- 
 (jjrjs, clear ; p^api'eis, graceful. 2. evSaijiaiv, happy ; alarxpos, dis- 
 graceful. 3. ijSus, agreeable; raxvs, quick. 4. Compare these 
 adverbs. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 YEEBS: PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE, PASSIVE 
 AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection of \v<o in Present and Imperfect; Personal 
 
 Endings. 
 Voices.— G. 95, 2, IT., 195, 196, 197, 198, 199 with 1, 2, and 3; 
 
 H. 684, 687, 688, 689, 690, 693, 693, 694. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 TO tTTpdrev/jia e-rropl^eTo acrov, the army provided 
 itself with food. 
 
 Kvpov neTa-TrefJ-ireTai diro t^9 dpxV'^, ^'^ sends for 
 Cyrus from //.is province {to come to Aim). 
 
 6 ^acn\ev<; e^ovXeveTo, the ki7ig formed his own 
 plans, '\.&. planned. 
 
 iraT^p BiSdffKerai tov vlov, the father has Ms son 
 instructed. 
 
 OL TToKlrai toi? vofioK Treidovrai, the citizens obey the 
 laws. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 01 (TTpaTiairai viro rwv Tro\efj,lo}v hiwKOvrai, the soldiers 
 art; [heitu/) pursued ky the enemy. 
 
 ;i 
 
34 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 T/JCT-O), f. rpe^Jrco, a. erpe^fra, ) furh ; mid. turn {one's 
 
 pf. Terpo^a or rerpa^ia, ) self), betake one's self. 
 
 a ^ I c a ^ ' 'a I (take counscl ; mid. take' 
 
 povXevoaA.povXevcrco.n.epov- \ , -,7 > 7^ 
 
 » „ „ - { counsel vnth onesselj, 
 
 Xe.aa, pf. /3./3o.Xe..a, | deliberate. 
 
 iravto, f. TTauo-Q), a. eiravaa, ) #(fojO; mid. stop one's self, 
 
 pf. nreiravKa, y cease, 
 
 vopevo) [iTopov, passage), f. > ?Ma>^e /o yo ; pass. j;/a/te 
 
 •Kopevam, a. eiropevaa, ) one's self go, proceed, 
 irXTJOot (-eo?), -ow?, (to), tnultitucle. 
 
 opiLT), -^?, (r;), movement onward, attack. 
 
 To^evfia (rofei^w from -ro^ov. 
 
 TO, Oow), -aroii, (Toj, 
 
 (poveva) {(povoi, murder), f. ^0- ? » , -t. 
 veucrm, ) ' 
 
 The preposition {mo (cf. Lat. .'!u6; G. 191, VI. 7; H. 655) signi- 
 fies under. With the genitive, under; as, ino x^r apiiaros. under the 
 chariot: with passive verbs, by; as, iuro ran noXiTwv davfia^cTai, he ii 
 admired by the citizens. With the dative, under; as, in-o t^ opn, 
 unrfer (a/ the foot of) the mountaiti. With the accusative, motion to a 
 position under an object; as, Uvat ino t^v yrjv, to go under the earth. 
 
 Translate Into Knglish. 
 
 1. Xverai, Xvovrai, iXvero, eXvovro. 2, erpfTreTO, 
 eiropi^ovTO.^ 3. o 0acnXev<; fiereirefiveTO tov<s vpea^ei<i. 
 . €1? Tat Kwnw! 01 cTTpaTKOTai TpeTTovrai. 0. vtto rtov 
 TO^oTwi/ /ueya irXrjOoi; iroXefiiiov e^ovevero. 6. 01 iro- 
 Xe/iioi Sta TO 7rX?5^o<;' tuv TO^evfiaTcov eiravovTO tj}? 
 opp.rj'i? 7. 'irep\ elprivr]'; effovXeveade. 8. Xverai vtto 
 Twi/ iroXiTmi/. 9. IffTt^ Se /cat fueyaXov fiaaiXea)<s ^affi- 
 
 ■1 G. 108, IV., 1, i; H. 376. 2 G. 174; H. 580. 
 
 ° G. 28, 3, N. 1 (1); H. Ill, a. 
 
LESSONS XXIII., XXIV. 35 
 
 \eia ev K^Xaivait epvfiva 67rt rat? •jnjyal'i tov Mapavov 
 iroTUfiov, vwo Ttj aKpoTToXei. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The king sends for his soldiers. 2. Cyrus v/aa con- 
 sulting. 3. The boys are (being) educated by (their) 
 teachers. 4. The citizens were killed by the arrows. 
 5. The soldiers proceeded to the river. 6. Cyrus halts ^ 
 his army at the foot of (i. e. under) the mountain, and seuds 
 for the generals and the captains. 
 
 1 Use (TT^iras, a participle ; lit. halting his army, &c. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 NUMERALS. —VERBS: FUTURE AND AORIST INDICATIVE 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Numerals. — G. T6, 77, 1 and 2; H. 353, 355, 256, 257. 
 
 Learn the Inflection of \ia, and the Personal Endings. Also, 
 G. 92, II., 101, 2, no, 11. 2 (read N. 1, h and c), III. 1, 2, 
 137, 161 ; H. 47, 319, rt-rf, 344, 372, a, 373 (read 374, 
 375, 376), 380, 381, 382, 499, 550. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Tj/ieTepo';, -a, -ov, Our. 
 
 (TTadfiot, -ov, (o), day's march, stage. 
 
 lureveeu {^vOev, thence), ?^^^^^ j^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 ■nXedpov, -ov, (to), jo/i?i'/^raw,,= 100 Grecian feet. 
 
 , /<\ S parascmo, = 30 stadia, or 
 
 -rrapa.ayy.,,, -ov, (o), J ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 fj.dxofJ.ai, f. fiaxovfiai, ) 
 pf. fj.efJ.dxritJ-ai', y 
 
36 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 aTparevoa (arparov (o), ( make an expedition ; mid. 
 army), f. a-rpatevam, a. J take part in an expedition 
 ecnparevda, pf. ecrrpd- ) (said of both commander 
 revKu, l and soldiers). 
 
 The preposition jrapa (cf. Eng. parallel) signifies beside (G. 191, 
 VI. 4; H. 646). With the genitive, /rom ftesirfc , as, epjiovrdi napa 
 (Sao'tXe'd); KTjpvKfs, heralds came from (i. e. from beside, from the neigh- 
 borhood of) the kiny. With the dative, beside; as, irapa t& ^aa-CKei fju, 
 he was near (i.e. beside, in the neighborhood of) the king. With -the 
 accusative, to a position beside; as, Kvpos 7re/«r« tov cp/iijvea irapa 
 Tovs aTparrfyois, ■Cyrus sends the interpreter to (i.e. into a position be- 
 side, or into the neighborhood of) the generals. 
 
 Translate Into Eiiglisli. 
 
 1. Xvaerai, Xvaovrai. 2. eBvaare, €Trayaap.eda. 3. "t 
 nroKefiioi enl rrfv rj/xerepav rrroXiv arpatevcrovrai} 4. tow 
 iraihai irathevaovrat. 5. evjeuOev e^eXavvei aTa6fiov<; 
 Bvo, vapaawyya^ Beica, evi top Wapov iroTafiov, 6. eva 
 araOfjiov e^eXavvet. 7. e^^i j^iXtovs oirXtra?. 8. fior 
 yovTai^ vTrep* Kvpov. 9. tov TroTa/nov to ev/309 ijv Tpia 
 trXedpa. 10. to Se irXeOpov e-xei exaiov Tr6Sa<;. 11. 6 
 •jrapaadyyrj^ , Uepa-iKOV fterpov, e^et rpiaKOvra araSia 77 
 OKTfflK/cTYtXtov? KUi fivpiov<; TToSo?. 1 2. wopa Toi/ ^aaCKea 
 airriXavvev. 13. ^aaiXew ^Kovtre irapa Tia-aa^epvovv tov 
 Kvpov ffToXov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. They will take part iu an expedition against our city. 
 
 2. We rode out; we will guard; we were deliberating. 
 
 3. The breadth of the river was four plethra. 4. Cyrus has 
 sixty ships. 5. He sent for one ship. 6. From here Cyrus 
 inarched one stage, five parasangs. 7. We shall cease. 
 8. He sends a messenger to the Idng. 
 
 1 G. 101, 2; H. 319, 5. " G. 105; H. 313. 
 
 » G. 110, II. 2, N.l; H. 376. * Over, i.e. m defence of. 
 
LESSONS XXIV., XXV. 37 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 VERBS: PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE 
 AND MIDDLE. IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Personal Endings of \va. G. 109, 2, 
 110, I., II. 2, III. 2, and IV.; H. 342, 344, 345 with 1 
 and 2, 372, a and b, 373, 380, 381, 382, 386, 388. 
 
 Syntaac — G. 134,2, 3, 213, 5, 258-262 (coarse print) ; H. 763, 
 764, 767, 773. 
 
 Accent. — G. 26, N. 1, 2, 3, (1) and (3); H. 365, 367, a, h, c, d, 
 Kem., e, 368, a and b. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 KeXevoi, f. -evaco, a. -evaa, pf. -evKa, pf. pass. ) , 
 
 KeKeXevcrfiai, ) 
 
 ISpvai, f. -va-ai, a. -vera, pf. -i>«a, found. 
 
 \iga-Trj'i{\'ql,^oiJ,ai,, plunder), -ov, (o), rodder. 
 
 BLBacTKaXoi; (StSatr/cw, feacli), -ov, (o), teacher. 
 
 Xot/ft) (reg.), commouly used in mid., 
 \oi;o/j.a(, i. Xovaofiai, XeKovfiai, 
 
 xXeico, f. /i;\6K7£a, a. exXsLda, pf. K£(f\e{Ka, 
 pf. pass. KeKXec/iai or KeKXeiaixai, 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. KeKeXevarat, KeKeXeverOe. 2. XeXovneOo., eXeXov- 
 fieOa. k 3. jKwjOO? eTratSewero trw rot? aWot? {other) 
 iraiaiv. 4. o Trat? eiri,(noXa<^ eyey pa^ei, 5. Svo aSeX- 
 00) UTTO SioacTKaXoif ireiraiZevcrdov. 6. /*■»; ctw Kaxm 
 avBpi povXevov. 7. ^ 0i/pa KeKXebaOco. 8. AXe^av^pot 
 a^ifO^ e<rrt Bavnal^ecrOai. 9. toi? ^eot? utto Adrjvaicov 
 voXXol vem ISpwTai, 10. ttjOO tov epyov ev ^ovXevaai. 
 
 1 SeeG. 42, N.; H. Ul, «. 
 
38 CRKEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The robber has been pursued. 2. The robber had 
 been pursued. 3. The letter had been written by the boy. 
 4. The boys have been educated by (their) teachers. 5. They 
 were founding temples, they have founded temples, they 
 had founded temples. 6. The door had been closed. 
 7. Let him have deliberated. 8. He is worthy to rule. 
 9. He is worthy to be admired. 10. The soldiers have 
 been commanded to proceed. 11. The soldiers have pro- 
 ceeded into the city. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 Pronouns. — G. 79, 1 (N. 1) and 2 ; H. 330, 832, 234. 
 Syntax.— G. 134 and N. 1, 135, N. 1, 2, and 3, 138, N. 1, 6, 
 
 and N. 2, 144, 1 and 2, 145, 1 and 2; H. 498, 504, a, 511, 
 
 a-?i, 517, 520, 669, 6 and c, 671. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 6 avTov avO patron, the Same man. 
 avTo<i 6 avdpeoiTo<;, the man Immelf. 
 T} fj-rjTTjp aujou utroTre/jfTrei, his mother sends him. away, 
 o 6/cto? varijp, or o Trarrjp /xov, or fiov 6 iraTrjp, mil 
 father. 
 
 TO apiia airav, or ammv to ap/ia, their chariot. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 Tratfeo (ira'l's, child), f. trai^ovfiai, a. evataa, ) - 
 
 pf, ireiraLKa, pf. mid. ireTraiafiai, ^ -^ "' 
 
 d«ova), f. mid. uKovaofiae, a. i^Kovaa, hear. 
 
LESSONS XXV., XXVI. 39 
 
 Xapi^ofiai (jjja'jot?, yrace), f. mid. -lov- ) . 
 
 liai, a. fr)(apiaa\j/ir\v, pi. Ke^apiafiai, J " '''' 
 CTTTouSa/o)? [a-irovSaio<i, in hoste), adv., hastily, rapidly, 
 (lavdavw, tmid. fia6'^aoij,ai,,pi.fiefid07iKa, learn. 
 rviTTm, f. Ti/TTTj/ffft), a. ervyfra, deal, strike. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. eyeo fiev ypa^co, av he irai^eii;. 2. o variip vfiai 
 trrepyei. 3. ■>] p/ijrijp vco a-repyei. 4. w iral, axove 
 fiov.^ 5. 01 yovel<i fiev arepyovaiv ^/ua?, ^/iets Se arepyo- 
 fiev TOW yoz/ea?. 6. 6 ^aaiXem avTo<! aTpaT7)yo<! eariv. 
 7. Oavfia^ofiev avrrjv. 8. Oav/id^ofiev ttjv firfrepa av- 
 Tr)V. 1). aiiT09 o av^jO toi' TratSa TVinei. 10. dav/Mi^o- 
 fj,ev Tov avTOv avBpa. 1 1 . cyipco ej^ere <f)i,\ov via-ToraTov. 
 
 12. ff^aji' iraTrjp j^api^erai' <7<f>a} yap ffirovBaico^ ra 
 ypa/ifjLara /lavddveTe. 13.. to) aSeX^w /iot^ eireadov. 
 14. eiyo) «ai an ypd(j>ofiev. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We are writing, but you are reading.* 2. We are 
 both writing, but you two are reading. 3. Hear me, boys. 
 
 4. We gratify our father, for we have both leariled rapidly. 
 
 5. We love our parents. 6. You love your parents. 7. I 
 am writing, but thou art reading. 8. Let both the boys 
 follow you. 9. You and I learn rapidly. 10. Cyrus and 
 I will march into the city. 11. Menon and you will pro- 
 ceed with the soldiers. 12. I myself admire the man. 
 
 13. The same man admires you. 14. His mother sends 
 for him. 15. Their chariots are ready. 
 
 I G. 171, 2 ; H. 576. ^ g. 31, 110, II. 2, c; H. 113, 376. 
 
 8 O. 186; H. 602, 1. * ivaycyviiaKW. 
 
40 GEEEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 EEFLEXIVE, EECIPEOCAL, AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Declension. — G. 80 (read note), 81, 82 ; H. 235, 236, 237, 238. 
 Syntax. — G. 146, 147, N. 3 and 4, 141, N. 2, 142, 4, N. 3; 
 
 H. 527, cl, 670 with a and b, 671, a, 673, 674, 675, a, b, 
 
 676, 538, a-e. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ea-^a^ev iavrov, he slew himself. 
 
 o efiavTov iraTijp, or 6 irarrip 6 efiavTOv, my own 
 father. 
 
 fiereTrefiylraTO - AffTvayrji; rrfv eaurov dwyarepa Kat, tov 
 iralSa a^T^?, Astyages sent for his own daughter and 
 her son. 
 
 o efioi trarrip, or o irarrip o e/xof, or irajTjp o efioi, 
 my father. 
 
 trvveXe^e to ainov ffTparevfia, he collected his own 
 army. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 yvoifiri ['yiyvwaKta, st. yvw-), -7)<i, {rj), opinion, judgment. 
 
 hi,Kaio<i ipmr), justice), -aia, -aiov, just.. 
 
 subst. Biicaiov, -ov, (to), justice, pi. rights, 
 
 iraica, f. -aiam, a. -aura, strike, heat, 
 
 fieva, f. fievSt, a. ep,eiva, pf. fteiievtjKa, remain, continue. 
 
 ffXavTO}, f. -yfrca, a. -^a, pf. -(pa, injure. 
 
 Xvirri, -rn, (»;), g'^'icf, distress, 
 
 ohovi, -ovTOi, (o), tooth. 
 
 e\€^a<!, -avToi, (o), elephant, 
 
 onoto-! [ofioi,, the same), -a, -ov, like, similar. 
 
LESSON XXVII. 41 
 
 Translate Into EngUeli. 
 
 1. flUTO? jSai7t\evs arpaTrjiyoi eariv} 2. o /8tos 
 TToWa? Xi/Tra? ev eavrm (ayToo) <j)epei,. 3. o e/io? "Trarrip 
 ayaucK eo'Tiv. 4. Travres aTepyovai tou? Trarepas rou? 
 eavTwv, or TravTe? arepyovai rov<; a^erepov; TraTepo?, or 
 7ravT6s a-Tepyovai, tou? eaKTtuv TroTe/ja?. o. Trotoe? to)!/ 
 avjwv yovicov ovk aei aWrjXoiii^ op,oioi ecaiv. 6. ot eXe- 
 ^amev vaiovat, Tot? oSoOfft* a^a? auroi)?. 7. aperi) 
 KaQ' eavTTjv i^per se) effri koXij. 8. ouSei/ aet Tauro 
 /tievet.* 9. ot /caxot aW»j\ous ^KcmTOWiv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The robber has killed himself. 2. The kings them- 
 selves are generals. 3. The same kings are generals. 
 4. You -yourself have written the letter. 5. The elephant 
 strikes himself 6. The soldiers of Cyrus were drawn up 
 before him.^ 7. These men are similar to each other. 
 8. My father, not yours, wrote the letter. 9. My father 
 himself wrote the letter. 10. A brother of yours® wrote 
 the letter. 11. My father is good, but yours is bad.'' 
 12. He wishes to exercise himself. 13. He himself refused 
 to go. 14. My own brother and my friend's brother. 
 
 ' Or 6 PacriXeis airis, etc. 
 2 G. 186 ; H. 602 and 603. 
 ' G. 188 ; H. 606. 
 
 * G. 110, 2, III. 2 ; H. 373 and 382. 
 
 5 Eemember that, when him, her, U, etc. denote the same person or 
 thing as the subject, they are to be translated by the proper case of ^auroC ; 
 if they denote a different person or thing, translate them by the proper 
 case of ain-bi. 
 
 * Possessive pronouns take the article only when a particular object is 
 referred to: ifi^i 0ttos, a friend ofiniae; o ^/tJs <j>iKos, my friend (the par. 
 ticular one). H. 538, c. 
 
 ' Use Kaxbi. 
 
42 GKEEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XXYIII. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Seclension. — G. 83 and N. 1 ; H. 239, 240 (read 241). 
 Syntax. — G. 142, 4 (read N. 1), 148 and N. 1 (read N. 3); 
 H. 678, 679. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 amip owTO?, or owto? 6 avqp, this mdn. 
 6 dv-qp e/ceivo'i, or SKelvo^ 6 av-qp, that man. 
 7] r^vwixTf) aiiTT], oT avTTj T] yvoifii], this opinion. 
 ■>} ypcofir] ^8e, or 7]Se rj yi/wfiij, this opinion. 
 6 e/io? iraTTip koI o tov ^i\ov, my father and my 
 friend 'sfatlier. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 yfreyo), f.-fcu, a.-^a, pf. pass, e^freyfiai, blame. 
 
 ■jrXrjyTJ (-n-XTjTTtB, strike), -^9, (^), 6low. 
 
 yvvr), yvvaiKo^, (ly), woman, wife. 
 
 hwpov (^SiSeofii, give), -ov, (to), S^ift- 
 
 yiyvo/jLM, f. yevTjao/jLai, pf. yeyevrjfjtai, be born, become, be. 
 
 a^nnreva) (aTTO, and lirTreiiai, ride, \ 
 
 from, tTTTrev?, horseman), f. -evato, > ride away. 
 
 etc., -' 
 
 TranBlate Into English. 
 
 1. avr)p ovTOt ayado<! eaTiv. 2. o avrjp SKelvo^ 
 /SactXeii? ear IV, or eeetKOS o avrjp ^aaiXev^ eerriv. 3. ij 
 yvvr}^ rjSe kuXt) eoTiv. 4. to rjfi&v avruv rexva ^freyo- 
 fiev, or Ttt reKva ra rjfia>v avTwv yjreyofj.ev. 5. 6 Kvpov 
 
 ' G. 60, 5, 7 ; H. 202, 4. 
 
LESSONS XXVIII., XXIX. 43 
 
 e\e^6 TaBe. 6. Kvpo's fiera raiv aWwv e^eKavvet. 7 . o 
 arpaTTiyoii Xeyei, ravTa, o. TavTr)<s ovv ttj? r}fiepa<; tovto 
 TO T6X.0? eyeveTo. 9. aij>nnrevei eni, ttjv eavrov aKrjvrjv 
 Sia Tov M.iv(ovo<i (TTpaTevfiaTo<i <rvv o\iyoi<i rot? vepl 
 avTov} 10. ovToi ftev (fiiXoi, euaiv, exelvoi Se TToXefuoi, 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. These men are good. 2. Those boys are writing. 
 3. Cyrus speaks as. follows. 4. Another army is collected 
 for him in the following manner.^ 5. Menon says this. 
 
 6. These soldiers are brave, but those are cowardly.^ 
 
 7. This man is my friend, but that one is yours. 8. The 
 army of Cyrus and that* of Menon marched into the city. 
 9. After this Cyrus rides away. 
 
 1 Account for the use of airSv. ' xaKds. 
 
 z G. 160, 2; H. 552. « G. 141, 5. 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE, AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Declension. — G. 84, 1, 2, N. 2, 3, 85, 86, N. 1 ; H. 243, 244 
 
 with Rem. a and b, 246. 
 Svntax.~G. 135, 1, 2, 149, 1, 2, 150, 151 with N. 2, 152, 282; 
 
 H. 503, 515, 681 with b, 682, 683. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Ti? ypdtfiei, rav-rrfu T7]v etnaToXriv ; who is writing this 
 
 letter ? 
 
 Tt irpot e/il (or Ti cfioV) Xe'yei'i; what do you say to me? 
 
44 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 <yvvrj Tt? opviv el)(ev, a certain (or a) woman had a hen. 
 6pS> avOpwirdv Tiva, I see a certain (a) man. 
 6 vah, 0? Xe<yet, the boy who speaks. 
 Xe'ye /loi, oVrt? TavTijv ttjv eiriffToXrjv ypa^ei, tell me 
 who is writing this letter. 
 
 VPCABULARV. 
 
 daXKta, f. 6aXKr\<Ta.i a. edr/Xa, 2 pf. } jj 
 
 •TiQ'r\Ka (as present), ) 
 
 •n-apexo {"Ta'pa, e)(m), offer, ffive. 
 
 ovofjui, -oTos, (to), name. 
 
 yjreXlov, -ov, (to), bracelet. 
 
 «jjiro9, -ov, (o), garden. 
 
 poBov, -ov, (to), rose. 
 
 €^(0, f. e^to or (T'^riffo), pf. effxrjica, have, hold. 
 
 , , , , ^ ,<s ^ turn, manner, 
 
 ■rpo-rro, {rpe-^o,, turn), -ov, (o). j character. 
 
 dff-TTK, -t'So?, (jj), shield. 
 
 dfieXrji (a priv. and /ie\fo, be a I , 
 
 ,, f f \ " I careless, 
 
 care to), -e?, gen. {-eo^) -ou?, ) 
 
 Translate Into Ensllsh. 
 1. eariv av6p(OTro<! tk ev t£ irapaBeiao). 2. Tt? eariv 
 eKelvrj fj yvvr) ; 3. \eye fioi, fjTK eaTiv eicuvrj rj ywr}. 
 
 4. Tama ra poSa, a 6a\Xei ev too Kryirw, xaXa eariv. 
 
 5. tov^ eX^tSj rovrwv^ aX\oi<; irapi')(av. 6. Tt? ea-riv, 
 OTca fiaWov "TriffTevetv r/ rca irarpc toS a^ rf ry firjrpl ; 
 7. ovTov evSaifioveaTaTov etrnv, b? tok? TrXeto'Toi'? <^t\oi;? 
 e^et. 8. a efioi Kai vp.lv pacrra eari, Tavra aWoK 
 TToWa/ci? p^aXeTTwraTa eaTtv. 
 
 ' By attraction for «. G. 153 ; H. 808. 
 '' Some of those things. G. 170 ; H. 574. 
 
LESSONS XXIX., XXX. 45 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. Who is writing these letters? 2. Tell me who is 
 writing these letters. 3. I have the letters which these 
 men wrote. 4 The soldiers came from the cities which 
 Menon is guarding. 5. These men are friendly to me, but 
 those are hostile. 6. What do you wish ? 7. TeU me what , 
 you wish. 8. A certain soldier rides into the city. 9. The 
 same thing which is easy for you is difficult for me. 10. Who 
 are those men? 11. His {ejv£) son is good. 12. Cyrus and 
 his soldiers will never again be in the power of the king. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 VERBS: SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection, of Xtiu in the Subjunctive and Optative 
 Middle ; also Tense-Signs, mode-Signs, Connecting 
 Vmvels, and Endings. Also G. 110, I., 112, 1, 113, 1, 
 114 (Middle), read N. 1, 115, 1 (Middle); H. 344, 346, 
 347, 348, Rem. a, 349, 355 (Middle), 357. 
 
 Syntax. — G. 201, 203, 243, 251, 1, 253; H. 720 with a, 
 721, 1, a, 734, 736. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 TrpaTTco, f. -fo), a. -?a, pf. 'ireirpa-)(a \ 
 (trans. I have done), 2 pf. veirpaya V do, perform. 
 (intrans, I have fared)., -' 
 
 avev, prep, with gen. only, without. 
 
 ^av\o\xaL, f. /SouXjjo-o/iat, pf. ^e^o^rniat, wish, be willinff. 
 
 iraiSela (^vaiSevm fr. Trat?, child), -a?, (57), education. 
 
 op'^n., -^i, {v), anger. 
 
 eWe, particle used with ind. and opt., would that. 
 
46 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 ] . vopevdifieOa, avavavactifjteda, w (j}i\oi, 2. ^ovKevm- 
 jjbeda irepi t^? twv iraiSeov iraiSetai}. 3. TrpaTTovaiP U 
 av ^ovKavrat} 4. eirpwnov a ^ovXoIvto? 5. eKe^ev 
 on rovTO BoxiXoivro? G. o irarrip fioi eXeyev on iropev- 
 aoiTO. 7. eiOe trdvTe<i avev opyrji l3ovXevotvTO .* 8. e\e- 
 yev on iravra vnto tov ffrparriyov ev ^ovXevaono. 
 
 1 Whatever they vrish. ^ Wished for this. 
 
 " Whatever they wished. ' G. 651 ; H. 721, 1, a. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 INDICATIVE, IMPERATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND OPTATIVE 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection of Xuu ; also the Tense-Signs, Mode- 
 Signs, Connecting Vowels, and Endings. G. 110, III., 
 IV., VI., 113 and 3, 113, II., 114, 115, 1, 116, 1, 2: 
 H. 343, 344, 346-351, 355, 357. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 "EKTwp, -opot, (o), Hector. 
 
 'A')^iWev<!, -ews, (o), Achilles. 
 
 avvOrjici) (avv and TlOij/n), -17?, (^), ) 
 
 commonly used in plur., 3 
 
 apyov (a priv. and epyov, work), -ov, without work, idle. 
 <j)ovev(o, f. -evaa, a. -evcra, murder, kill. 
 
 Translnte Into EngllBb. 
 
 1 . ^ovXeifOri(T6Tai,, iraiSevffria-oprat, 2. eXvdrjaav, €if)o- 
 vevffr]. 3. o X'pffTT]^ ^ovevdrjaerat. 4. to) aSeX^co vtto 
 TOW auTOv BtBacrieaXov fTTM^evBrfrriv. 5. ' EKrtop vtro 
 
LESSONS XXXI., XXXII. 47 
 
 i^j^tWe'cM e^'ovevdr). 6. ei6e Trarre? KaXw TraihevBelev} 
 7. eKe'yev on iravra v-no rov arpaTrjyov ev ^e^ovKev- 
 aono. 8. fieyw! <p6^o<; rovt TroXtVa? e^et, (Ji'^i al crvvdrj- 
 Kai viro Ta>v iroXefilcov \v6ax7iv? 
 
 1 G. 251, 2; H. 72, 1, b. ^ G. 218; H. 743. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 INFINITIVE ACTIVE, MIDDLE, AND PASSIVE. 
 
 liearn the Infinitive Active, Middle, and Passive of Xiiw; also 
 Present and Imperfect Indicative of ct>T)|jiC G. 95, 2, 117, 
 127, IV. ; H. 269, 349, 352, d, 359, 367, 6, c, 404, 2. 
 
 Syntaac — G. 134,2,3, 246, 258, 259, 260, 1 (read 2, N. 1), 
 261, 1 ; H. 734, c, 763, 767, 773. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 jSouXerat ypu^eiv, he wishes to write. 
 (f>r]trl ypd^etv, he says that he is writing. 
 e^ovXeTO to) nralhe dfji<f)OTepa) irapeivai, he wished both 
 his sons to be present. 
 
 7)hv<; uKoveiv, sweet to hear. 
 
 vofjii^m vtMi etvai <f)iXov^, I consider that you are 
 
 friends. 
 
 KeXevas ere Taina 'ypd(j>eiv, I order you to write this. 
 
 iSoKet aiiTw ^Srj iropeveaBai ava, it seemed to him 
 already time to proceed inland. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Zev<i, Aio^., voc. Zev, (o), Zeus. 
 
 aX^jdevca [dXtjOij'!, true, from a- and X-t)6(o, ) speak the 
 Xadelv, — see XavOdvw in Vocab.), reg., 5 truth. 
 
encawp, bivouac. 
 
 48 GREEK LESSONS. ,, 
 
 KivSwevw {kivBvvo<!, danger), reg., encounter danger. 
 a8enrvo<i (a priv., heltrvov, supper), -ov, supperless. 
 e^eXavveo (e^, eXavvco), f. eXoj, a. ^Xa- ) march (said of 
 
 aa, pt'. IXrjXaKa, pf. pass. lXr)XaiMb, 5 the general). 
 
 ffT/aaToireSeuo) (^aTparoireSov, camp, " 
 from arpaTOf, army, and ireBov, 
 ground), f. -euo-o), a. -evaa, pf . -eu/ca 
 (generally used as dep. mid.), 
 
 Translate Into EngllBh. 
 
 1. ^ovXofiai aXt]6eveiv. 2. Xejerai rov<s 6eov<! inro 
 Tov ^lot ^aaiXeveaOai. 3. ov kukov ea-Tt ^aaiXev- 
 etv. 4. r^v TToXiv Xeyovai, fieyav kivBwov leivBvveverat. 
 5. ireiraihevaOai, ^ovXivaai, vopeveaBai. 6. lovt iraif 
 Ba<i ev iraiBeveiv ovie fnxpov ovre paBiov irpay/jiu eariv. 
 7. ouTO? 6 iavr)p a^io^ ea-ri, Oavfia^eaSai, 8. BiSaaKO} 
 ae ypa^eiv. 9. fiovXo/xai, fiavdaveiv. 10. e^aaav fiav- 
 Baveiv. 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 PARTICIPLES: ACTIVE, PASSIVE, AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Declension of X-iav, XiJiras, XvScCs, and XeXvKtis. G. 16, 
 6, N. 1, 6a, 3 (end), 68, 95, 2, 117, 2; H. 156 and 6, 158, 
 Rem./, ai4, 316, 361, 6, 269, 352, e, 360, 362. 
 
 Accent. — G. 26, N. 2 and 3 with (1) and (2); H. 160, a, 367, d. 
 
 Syntax. — G. 204, 275, 276, 1, 2, 277, 1-6 ; H. 785, 786, 787, 
 788 (read 789, b-f), 790 a-e (read 796-799). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Toi)? (fievyovTai vTroXafi^avei, he takes those who are 
 fleeing (or the fugitives) under his protection. 
 
LESSONS XXXII., XXXIII. 49 
 
 04 Xeyovre?, those who are speaking, or the speakers. 
 
 javra eirparTe ^aaiXevcov, he did this while he was 
 king. 
 
 ava^aivet e')(asv TiaaatjiepvTjv, he goes up with Tissa- 
 phernes. 
 
 fio'^eLTai dBe\(l>o<; wv avrov, he will fight because he is 
 a brother of his. 
 
 efidxero dBeX(f)o<i mv avrov, he fought because he was 
 a brother of his. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 0/31/4?, -400?, (o or y]\ bird. 
 
 air^r), -^s, (77), silence. 
 
 TiKTo), f. 7€^o/iai, a. pass. erevS'nv, } , . ^ ,, , 
 o V > onnq forth, lay. 
 
 Z a. ereicov, \ '' •' ' <? 
 
 airoixniiTui [aito, nre/jLiroa), send back, away. 
 
 Tjhovr] {^Sofiai, be pleased), -^?, (^), pleasure. 
 
 ^\a0r], -r)<i, (^), injury. 
 
 va-Tepov, -a, -ov, later, varepov (adv.), subsequently. 
 
 dvairavm [ava, Travm, stop, end), stop, end; mid. rest. 
 
 £7ri<l>epa> (etri, ifiepco, f. oiaa, a. tjveyKa, \ 
 
 pf. Ivrjvoxa, pf. pass. evr)ve<ynat, >bear against. 
 
 a. pass. rive^Ojjv, 2 a. rjveyKov, bear), J 
 avvOrjKT], -7]<i, (tj), commonly pi., treaty. 
 
 Translate into Enelish. 
 
 1. o TTarrjp avairavo'a/j.evo';^ vopevcreTai. 2. 6 ^aai- 
 \ev<! ftereTrefiTrero tok? irpeffBett rov<; vtto tSsv A9r]vaiwp 
 aTTOTrefiTTOfievovi. 3. raina Xtycov Oopvffov rjKovere. 
 4. 04 voXcfiioi, Twv crvv6r)KS)v XvOeiawv? rjjuv^ iroKefiov 
 
 1 Decline like O-O04S. a G. 26, N. 3 (2); H. 367, («. » G. 187; H. 605. 
 
 i 
 
-50 GEEEK LESSONS. 
 
 e'7ruj>epovaiv. 5. ^evye ■^Sovrjv va-Tepov tj>epova-av ^SXa- 
 /8ijv. 6. aireTrefiire tou? ycyvouevovi Baafiovi 'fiaaiXei. 
 7. 6 Se^ (i.e. Kt/pos) KivSwevaa^ kui aTiiJi,aa06i<; 0ov- 
 \eveTai ottw? ^aaiXeva-ei, avrl'^ ' Apra^ep^ov. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They wished to write. 2. They wished to be edu- 
 cated. 3. It is not easy to be king. 4. It is difficult to 
 educate children. 5. He wishes to be king instead of his 
 brother. 6. They wish to learn. 7. They say they are 
 learning. 8. When they had heard this, they marched 
 away. 9. The soldiers obey those who command. 10. Cyrus 
 goes up with many hoplites. 11. He was ready to make 
 an expedition against^ the king. 12. When he had col- 
 lected an army, he made an expedition against the king. 
 13. After they had said this, they marched away. 14. The 
 soldiers rejoiced because Cyrus had arrived. 
 
 1 G. 143, N. 2; H. 525 (7). » Use ivl with acousatJTe. 
 
 2 G. 191, I. 1 ; H. 622. 
 
 lESSON XXXIV. 
 
 VERBS: PEESKNT STEM; PRESENT AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 Review the Tense-Signs, Mode-Signs, Connecting Votvels, 
 Personal Endings. Learn the Synopsis of \ia in the 
 Present. G. 88-91, 92 (read 2 and N.), 3, 4 and I., VII., 5, 
 93 with 2 (4), 94 (Synopsis, p. 86), 95, 2, 96 (Inflection), 
 99, 1, 2, a-c, 100, 1, 2 (read the notes), 107, 108, I. 
 (read N.), 11., 110, 112, 4; H. 260-266 (read fine print 
 under 265 and 266), 267, 268, 269, 270, 306-310, 324, 
 325, 346, 347, 348, 352, 368 b (read 355 and 356). 
 
LESSONS XXXIII., XXXIV. 51 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 , drjpevo) (dijp, wild bsasf), f. Orfpeva-to, a. e6i^ ) 
 pevaa, pf. redijpevxa, a. pass. e6rjpev6t]v, 3 
 voiMx;, -ov, (d), law. 
 
 Seivo^, -77, -dv (heihto, fear), fearful, 
 
 heivov, -ov, [to), danger, 
 
 ow, ttiT09, (to), ear. 
 
 ir\eia>v or irXetov, -ov (comp. of iroXv^), more. 
 
 KvPepvrjTi)<} {icv^epvdm, steer), -ov, (6), j)ilot. 
 
 •yXmTTa, -»??, [rj), tongue. 
 apxa>, f. ap^oa, a. rjp^a, pf. »Wa,' pf. paSS. ) , . , 
 
 9 1 ' 1 1 I 6ra?,K, rule. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. Xvofiev^ Tj)i/ lyeipvpav. 2. 6 (TTparrjyoi; eKeXeve tov<; 
 TofoTO? ei9 TOi;? TToXe/itov? To^eveiv. 3. ot woXtTat toi»v 
 vofiov; (fivXaTTOvrav.^ 4. diroTpeTroite, a> 6eoi, to Setfoi/ 
 a^ rifiwv. 5. /itTj* (f>evje, w arpaTiara.^ 6. Xvcofiev, 
 Xvaoi/Mev,^ 'ypd(j)0}nev, iraihevaiiev. 7. Sta touto Suo (uto 
 e'^ofiev, yXSiTTav Se fiiav, iva irXeim' fiev aKovcufiev, tjttq) 
 
 1 G. 110, IV. 6. Stems in ^ and x remain unchanged in the perfect 
 and the pluperfect active. 
 
 ^ Form for parsing in the indicative mood : — Xio/iev is a verb of the 
 first class (G. 108, 1 ; H. 325). Simple stem, \v- ; principal parts, \iu, 
 f. \6<ra, ix, l\v<ra, pf. \4\vKa, pf. pass. XiXvfJuii, a. pass. iMBTiv; present 
 tense, indicative, active ; synopsis, XiJw, Xi)a, \ioifu, XOe, \ieiv, \iiiiv. 
 Present tense ; inflection, \i>(d, \ieis, Mei ; Merov, XiieTOK ; Xiofiev, Mere, 
 \6ov(Ti. ; formation, \v- simple stem, connecting vowel, -/lev personal 
 ending; plural number, first person, agreeing with TjfieTs (G. 134, N. 1, — 
 read foot-note on p. 142; H. 356), understood. Rule: A verb agrees with 
 its subject nominative in number and person. 
 
 ' G. 108. IV. ; H. 328. ' § 72, 2. 
 
 * Account for the use of ^ut}. 
 
 ^ Account for the accent. 
 
 8 How do Mu/uv and Mffufiev difler in meaning? G. 202, 1; H. 705. 
 
52 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Se Xeyeafiev. 8. eav xaXov ^XV^ ''^" (rafia koI ■^w^tji' 
 KaK7]v, KOMiv ej(et vavv Koi Kv^epvrfT'qv kukov. 
 
 Translate Into Gr^ek. 
 
 1. You are speaking, you two are speaking, we were 
 speaking. 2. Let us loose him, you are loosing him. 
 3. You do not speak. 4. Do not speak. 5. Let the 
 Greeks send the heralds. 6. The child is writing ^ a 
 letter to^ his father. 7. But thence Cyrus marches into 
 the plain. 8. The generals were leading the hoplites into 
 the city. 9. When the messenger had said* this, he rode 
 away. 10. Cyrus orders the captjain to lead the soldiers 
 into the plain. 
 
 ' G. 225; H. 747. * Use vapd with accusative. 
 
 2 G. 110, IV. b. See note 1, p. 51. * Use the participle. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 VERBS: PRESENT STEM; PRESENT AND IMPERECT, 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Connecting Voivels, Personal EniUngs, Synopsis 
 
 of Xiiu in Present, Passive, and Middle ; the Inflection in 
 the Present and Imperfect. Review the Grammar Lesson 
 under Lesson XXXIV. G. 88, 2, N., 95, 1., 108, III. (read 
 fine print), IV. with 1, 6, 2, d, and 3; H. 326, 327, 328 
 with a, b, Rem., c, d, and e, 413. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 epuffvevi, -60)?, (o), interpreter. 
 
 irpaTTO) (stem trpay-), f. wpa^o), a. eirpa^a, pf. veirpaxn 
 
 (trans. I have done), 2 pf. -n-eirpaya (intrans. I have 
 fared'), pf. pass, vkirpayyiai, do, perform ; KoXwi 
 
 irpcmetv, to be well off. 
 
reffardas acus- 
 totn, think. 
 
 LESSONS XXXIV., XXXV. TjS 
 
 i^uXoTTft) (stem <f>v\aK'), f. -fa), a. i^v- ) 
 
 Xa^a, pf. •Tre^vXa'xa, y '' 
 
 vo/jbl^co (stem vofjilS-, from vo/j,o<!, custom, " 
 
 law, v€fiai, assign), f. -tcrw, Att. vo/iio), 
 
 pf. vevofiiica, pf. pass, vevo/xianai, 
 
 a. pass. evofiia-6r)v, > 
 (jtevyo) (stem ^vy-), f. mid. (fiev^ofiai ) 
 
 and ^eufoOytiat, pf. iri^evya, y 
 
 epyd^ofiai (epyov, to, work), f . epyaaofiai,, ) , 
 
 pi. mid . eipyatrfjiai, a. mid. ei/ayao'a/u.i^i', ^ 
 
 Tranglace into Englisli. 
 
 1 . ^ovXevmfieOa irepi rrj<! rav traiBmv ^ iratSeiav. 
 2. Kvpov /leraTrefj-TreTai airo t?}? apy(fl<i. 3. Kvpoi errai- 
 SeneTo^ cri'i' Tots aX,X.ots Traiaiv. 4. Xlierat wtto tqji; 
 TToXtToij'. 5. iropeverai, <U9* ^aaiXta. 6. ft ^ovKei, Ka- 
 \S)<! TrpaTTeiv, epya^ov. 7. eai/ jSovXi] KaXw irpaTTSiv, 
 epya^ov. 8. o . ipfiTjvevv, bv Eei.o<j)cov irpovnep.'tre, viro 
 Twv voXep^iav e<f>oveveTO. 9. oi "n-oXe/tttot Bia ro irXrjGoi 
 tS)v 70^evp,a7a>v eiravovTO tjj? 6p(irj<i^ 
 
 Translate Into Greek. ' 
 
 1. The interpreter was killed by the enemy. 2. He 
 sends for Cyrus from his government.- 3. The bridge is 
 (being) destroyed by the enemy. 4. He wishes an army 
 to be collected. 5. An army was (being) collected. 
 
 1 Write out the declension of irais. 
 
 2 Analyze, — pointing out the present stem, augment, tense-stem, connect- 
 ing vowel, and personal eliding. 
 
 ' In what is the declension of fiXXos irregular ? 
 
 * G. 191, III. 2 ; H. 621. 
 
 6 G. 9, 2, IL, 2; H. 32, d, 68. « Why genitive? 
 
54 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 6. Let us deliberate concerning this. 7. They cease from 
 their work. 8. Deliberate, do not deliberate, do not 
 send for him. 9. He is worthy to be king. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 CONTRACT YEEBS IN ao) : PKESENT STEM; PRESENT AND 
 IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of ti|ii5, G. 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 
 24, 1-3, and 109, 1, and the Declension of tiiiuv, 69 ; 
 H. 28, 29, and the portions under 32 and 34 relating to 
 Ti|i.u, 98, 285, 370, 371, and the Declension of ti|i.»v, 215. 
 
 viKcuo {vUrj, victory'), f. -i7o-w, etc., 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 TeXevTotd (reXewTT;, Te\o9, end), f. -r)cra>, etc., end, finish, 
 aiwn-aco (o-hbttjj, silence), f. -^aa), etc., ■ keej} silent. 
 
 ( be victorious, 
 \ conquer. 
 
 ayairaco, f. -ija-o), etc., love and esteem, 
 
 •jreipao), f. -aaat, a. evetpaaa, pf. TTSTrej- "I 
 
 pa.a a. pass. J.«paV, pf. pass. I ^ _ 
 
 ire-n-eipajxai, commonly mid. dep. '' ^ 
 
 ireipwfiai,, f. ireipaaofiai, etc. J 
 
 ToXfiojco (ToXfia, boldness), f. -?;cra), etc., venture. 
 X-rrapri,aTr)<i, -ov, (o), a Spartan. 
 
 SoKmv, -wvoi;, (o), Solon. 
 
 a0\ico<! [a6\i,o<!, wretched, from a^Xov, 1 
 
 contr. from aeOxov, prize of contest),] 
 ^dco, f. ^rjam, a. e^rjaa, pf. e^rjKa, live. 
 
LESSONS XXXVI., XXXVII. 55 
 
 Translate Into Engllgli. 
 
 1. Tov irarepa Tifia. 2. tov irarepa Tifia. 3. tok? 
 ayaOovi Ti/iS)fj,ei>. 4. Rvpo^ ereXevTrja-ev. 5. ^/ttet? vi- 
 Kw/iev. 6. Kvpo<! viKo, Tou? ' trpo /SafftXe'iu?. 7. "^e 
 TravTe? TTatSe? tou? •yovea'i ayairaiev. 8. tt^? aw to\- 
 fimrjv TOV tj>i\ov ^\a-meiv ; 9. ^ aianra ^ Xtye afjueivova? 
 10. /2 Trat, aicoTra. 11. oi Adufvalot XoXmva Sia ttjv 
 <To<j>i,av Kat rrjv apeTT]v fiaXa eTifiaiv, 12. /cpetTTov to /it^ 
 f^f^ eariv r) ^rjv ddXieo^. 13. al twv ^irapTiarajv p,rjT€pe<i 
 eKi\6vov Tovt iralSav r] vixav rf TeKjevrav. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We honor him. 2. They honor that man. 3. Let 
 us honor those men. 4. tmit the child would love 
 and esteem his father ! 5. Honor thy father. 6. They 
 call the river Psarus. 7. They order their soldiers to 
 conquer. 8. It is necessary* to conquer. 9. They live, 
 they lived, they wish to live. 
 
 1 G. 141, N. 3; H. 492,/. ' G. 98, N. 2; H. 371, «. 
 
 » G. 139, 1; H. 496. * Set. 
 
 L"ESSON XXXVII. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN ew: PRESENT STEM; PRESENT 
 AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of ({■■'^^"i and the Declension 
 of i|)i\<Sv, G. 69; H. 215. Also, G. 9, with 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, 
 20, 1, 98, N. 1, 2, 4, 5, 108, V. with 1, 2, 3, 4; H. 32, 33, 
 34, 98, 287, 371, 6, c, also 329 with a-d. 
 
 Syntax. — G. 164, 165 ; H. 553, 556. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 iroieo), f. -Tjo-a, etc., make, do ; ev or /ea/cw? voielp, 
 fo treat loell or ill. 
 
56 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 pea, f. mid. pevaofiai, 2 f. pvi^ffo/iai, a. ep-^ „ 
 
 j , >jiow. 
 
 pevtra, pi. eppvrjKa, ) 
 
 reKeco {reXoi, end)^ f. reKeffeo, Att. reXa, \ 
 
 a. -ecra, pf. -exa, pf. pass, -ea/iai, a. pass. Vanish, fulfil, 
 
 -ecrdrjv, ^ 
 
 ev'xi'i {evxop.ai, pray), ■^<s, (^), prayer, 
 
 opam, f. mid. (in active sense) o-^op.ai, \ 
 
 pf. eiopaxa or eopaica, pf. pasS. ea>pap,ai Vsee. 
 
 or mfifiat, a. pass. &<^6r]v, J 
 
 irKew, f. mid. 7r\6wo/*at or 7r\ei»o"oi5M<*ti "^ 
 
 a. eirXevaa, pf. Tre'TrX.evKa, pf. pass, ire- Vsfli/. 
 
 •jrXeva-fiai, a. pass. eirXtvadrfv, > 
 
 ply^, gen. pjTro's, (jj), wicker-voork. 
 
 Translate into Engllgli, 
 
 1. o waTT]p ^iXel Tov iraiha. 2. Tt •7roir]<rop,ev ; 
 3. 8ta |iie(TOi;i Toi) TrapaSeiaov pel o MaiavSpo^ irora- 
 p-of. 4. <f>iXwp.ev Tou? wyadovi. 5. e^iXei tod? ^(\ov9. 
 6. Kvpo<! airel nrXoia. 7. et^e. w 0eo?, reXotTj? /lot ttjw 
 eiixv"- 8. o Tt^ aw iroirJTe, vop,i^eTe opav deov. 9. 6eov 
 GeXovroi;^ kuv^ em, piiro'i TrXeot?. 10. iroXKoi <re p,i<n}- 
 trovaiv, f)V aavrov ^iKrjii.^, 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They ask for ships. 2. The mother loved Cyrus. 
 3. Cyrus was besieging the city. 4. The soldiers ask 
 Cyrus for pay.® 5. They wish to do this. 6. The river 
 flows through the city. 7. He besieges the city. 8. We 
 see the men. 9. Let us love our friends. 10. The soldiers 
 sail away. 
 
 1 0. 142, 4, N. 4; H. 536. 
 
 » G. 233; H. 757. ' G. 278, 1; H. 790. 
 
 * K&v ttX^is, i.e. KuX — trXiois Sv, thou canst even sail, 
 » G. 223; H. 747. "" G. 164; H. 553. 
 
LESSONS XXXVII., XXXVIIl. 57 
 
 LESSON XXXVIIl. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN 00): PRESENT STEM; PRESENT 
 AND IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of 8r]\d(i). Also Gr. 8, 9 with 
 1-5, 13 with 1 and 2 and N. 2, 69 (end), 108, VI. (read 
 notes) ; H. 32, 34, 35, 68 with Eem. a and c, 70 with a-f, 
 71, 72, 215, 330. 
 
 / VOCABULARY. 
 
 BoXdm {So\o<!, bait for fish, hence \ 
 
 any cunning contrivance for \beguile, deceive. 
 
 deceiving), f. -aam, etc., ' 
 
 fijXo'a) (fijXo?, zeal), f. -mcro), etc., strive after, emulate. 
 
 fpaco, f. pass. epa<T0r]ao/j,ai, H.\ i 
 tin i Love, 
 
 rjpaffariv, J 
 
 TrXrja-ia^co (vXTjaioi, TTe\a<;, near), ) , 
 
 f. -ao-Qj, etc., j 
 
 alyaoKaTo^ (afyuv, spear, and ) , , . i ,. 
 
 , / 7 "T TV r fciKen in war, captive. 
 
 aXiffKOfiai, to be captured), -ov, J 
 
 eaOXot, -^, -6v, noble. 
 
 craKf)pasv, -ov, wise. 
 
 BeiXov (Beo<!,fear), -rj, -ov, cotoardly. 
 
 /Sto'm (/St'o?, life), f. -waofiai, pf. ) ,. 
 
 ^efiieoKa, 2 a. efiimv, j 
 
 eXevdepom {eXevdepo<!,free), reg., /reff, set free. 
 
 elpi^vTi, -T)<:, (t)), peace. 
 
 Translate Into Euglisli. 
 
 1. o\ troXenioi to aTpdrevna rjfiSsv iSoXovv.^ 2. tijv 
 dperrjv Koi rriv eTO<l)iav l^rjXSsiiev. 3. fijXoi/ top ec&Kov 
 
 1 For the verbs in this Lesson, see the vocabularj- above. 
 
58 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 avSpa Kai rov <Ta)<f)pova. 4. 6 fiev SetXos TroXtTT;? d^ioi 
 ev eipr\vri 0iovv, 6 S avSpeiot o-t/sotkwti;? €pa rov noXe- 
 fnov,^ 5. n veavia, 8r)\,ov Tol<i ^iXott rr]v yviofiriv, rjv 
 6;Y^t?. 6. 01 iroXefiioi eTrXrjiTia^oi/, ina tok? ai^/MaXioTOvv 
 eXevBepolev. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We deceive^ the enemy. 2. Let us emulate the 
 wise man. 3. Do not deceive your friends. 4. The good 
 citizen asks to live in peace. 5. Would that you would 
 emulate the good. 6. The army is approaching in order 
 to free the captives. 7. They come in order that they 
 may see. 
 
 1 G. 171, 2 ; H. 576. ^ See vooabnlary under this Lesson. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN aco : PRESENT STEM; PRESENT 
 AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of Tifidu, Passive and Middle. 
 Also, G., review 8, 9 with 1-5, 11, 2, 24 with 2 and 3, 100 
 with 1 and 2 (read notes) ; H. 33, 34, 68 and Rem. a, 307 
 with 1 and 2, 308, Rem. a, 309, 310, 313, 365. 
 
 Syntax. — G. 166, 171, 3, 260, 1; H. 553, 581, a, 764. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 opfiam {opiirj, movement), f. -tjVw, ) put in motion, mid. 
 
 etc., J set out. 
 
 tTTidu/iim {evl, upon, 6vim<i, soul), \ set one's heart upon, 
 
 f. -ri<T(o, etc., j desire. 
 
LESSONS XXXVIII., XXXIX. 59 
 
 voXiopxea (tto'Xw, ciff, eipya, in-l , . 
 
 On / . y OBSflGQG. 
 
 , I. -rjaco, etc., j "^ 
 
 Xvvr), -rjt, (97), ^?"2e/'- 
 
 laofiai, f. mid. laa-oaai, a. mid.) , , 
 
 iacTa/xrjv, 1 
 
 evepysTeco (euepyerrj?, benefactor, 1 ^e benefactor, do 
 
 from eu, we//, and epyoi', work), \ good to one. 
 Kpareco (/fjoaro?, strengtli), reg., be master of, control. 
 
 ehe . . . e'ire, cotlj., ^ i ^'''^^'''^'' " ' • ^^' '^^ '^ 
 
 1 that ...or, if... or. 
 
 eao), I. eacrco, a. etaaco, pi. eiaxa, | 
 
 pf. pass. eiap,ai, a. pass, eladrjv, \ permit, allow., let go, 
 impf. et'toi^, f. mid. eaa-o/j-at (in 
 pass, sense), 
 
 /e/ a/o;»2e. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. e-yo) K^ vfxwv Tifiwfiai. 2. apjiaro a-rro XapSeav. 
 3. o ayaBo'i vko iravTCOV ri/iarai. 4. ^Xmttt;? ireipm 
 Kparelv. 5. et^e iravrei; yoveif vwo reicpeov ayairipvro. 
 6. rj^iov TifiaaOai. 7. evvov! \oyo<i Xvtttjv larai. 8. etre 
 UTTO <f)L\.a)v e6e\£i<! uyaTraaBai, lovi (j)i\ov<; evepyerei^ • 
 
 6476 VTTO Ttl/O? TToXeW? eiTldufieK TlfJ-UCrOai,, TTjV TToXlU 
 
 coipeX-ei' €176 VTTO TTj? JSWaSo? "jTaarfti a^tot? eir apery 
 6av/j.u^ea-6at, tj)v EWtiSa ireipS) ev iroielv. 
 
 Translate into Greeli. 
 
 1. The father is honored by his son. 2. We were 
 honored by you. 3. The army of Cyrus set out from 
 Sardis. 4. He does them good. 5. Would that all parents 
 were honored by their children. 6. You desire to he 
 honored. 7. They are inferior, you are inferior, we are 
 inferior. 8. They treat us well. 9. I am treated ill by 
 
 you. 
 
 1 G. 103, N.; H. 316. 
 
60 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 IES80N XI. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN €0): PRESENT STEM; PRESENT 
 AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of ^CKia, Passive and Middle. 
 Also, G. 17, 2, 108, VII. and VIII., 103 (read note), 104 
 (read notes), 105 (with N. 1, 2, 3), 2, 3, lOG; H. 65, a, 
 331, 332, 333, 334 with a and 6, 313 with Rem. a, 313, 314 
 (read 315), 316, 317, 320, 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 'y I /' 'f e T L ' / 7\ f asi, mid. Oea off, 
 
 etanem (eic, eE, CI. Lat. ecc, aireco, ask), | . '' , 
 
 ,. , ^ < aam a person s 
 
 I. -T]<7m, etc., \ 1 
 
 ^ release. 
 
 Ao^eiu {d)d0o<i, fear), f. -vcrw, etc., \ - . ,, -j 
 
 ^ . , y^a' e ' e \frigUen, mid. 
 
 inici. fflopeo/iat, I. •r}(TOfiai,, m. -r)fj,ai, y J' 
 
 a. pass. -rid'Tiv, } •' 
 
 ^paofjuii, f. -^a-oiiai,, pf. -rjfiai, a. mid. ) 
 
 -riadfiriv, a. pass. ■^<rOr)v, j 
 
 eirifieXeofiai (eTrt and fiikofiai, concern), ) . 
 
 c > c 'a I (^O/f^ jOT, 
 
 I. -rjo-ofjuai, pi. pass. -7)ixai, a. -tjotjv, j 
 
 aAiKveouai (otto and iKveouai, come), ) 
 \ »^ c 1 } come, arrive. 
 
 I. -L^ofiai, pi. -lyfiai, ) 
 
 riy^of^a, {&y^, lead), f. -T^Wat. pf- j ;^^^^ ^;,,-^^ 
 
 -7] flat, a. -Tj(Ta/j,Tiv, j 
 
 Sea), f. SejyffO), a. eBerjaa, pf. heSerjKa, a. \ «ca«#, «ee£?, mid. 
 
 pass. eSejj^Tji', pf. pass. SeSeij/iot, mid. |- «2S;t, impers. 
 
 Beofiai, f. herjaofiai, etc., impers, Set, J #//ere «s Meeaf. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 6 TToi? UTTO Tou "TTaTpov ^iKetTat. 2. ?j Se firiTTfp 
 e^atTrjaafievi] avrov aTrpirefiirei iraKiv CTri tt^u dp')(riv. 
 
LESSONS XL., XLL 61 
 
 o(TTi<i aipiKveno irpof; avrov, iravraf anreireinreTO. 
 4. o iroTafi,o<i KaXelrai M.ap<Tva<;? 5. ol TroXtTot e^o- 
 0OVVTO, fiT) r) troXt.ii iroXcop/colTo. 6. ^tXowTes /ttei' ^(Xov- 
 fieda, iMLaovvret Se fitaovfieOe. 7. Sei^ toi' <npari,a>Ti}v 
 <j>ol3eL(Tdat fiaWov rov a-Tpari^yov rj Tovt iroKefiiovi. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The child is loved by his father. 2. They were 
 loved by their friends. 3. This man loves those who love 
 him. 4. A soldier ought not to fear the enemy. 5. The 
 citizens fear lest the city may be besieged. 6. The river 
 is called Psarus. 7. He orders the army to besiege the 
 city. 8. They wish to be loved. 9. Cyrus made the levy 
 in the following manner. 
 
 » G. 86 ; H. 246. ^ G. 136 ; H. 499. » What is the subject of Sei? 
 
 LESSON !LI. 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS IN oo): PRESENT STEM; PRESENT 
 AND IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of BtiXou, Passive and Middle. 
 
 Eeview the Rules for Contraction. Also, G. 92, I., 98, 
 
 notes 1-5, 101, 1-4, 102, 103 (read note), 104 (read notes) ; 
 
 H 335 with 1 and exception a, 3T1 with b-e. 
 Syntax. — G. 137, 202, 1, 204, 260, 1, 261, 1 ; H. 499, 763, 
 
 764, 767. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SovXoQ) (SoCXo?, slave), f. -axrco, etc., enslave, subjugate, 
 are^avoat {uTe^avo^, crown), f. -oxrw, etc., crown. 
 
62 GKEKK LESSONS. 
 
 SoKeco, f. BoPa>, a. eSo^a, pf. pass. ) ,z • / 
 
 otooyfMi, a. pass, eoo-x^orjv, ) 
 
 ^ocio, (^o^, cry) f.^Wa. (with act- i ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 ive meaning), pi. pass, pe^oniiav,] "^ 
 
 (Tmrvpi'O- {ccoTrjp, savior), -a?, (»/), safety. 
 
 evoTT\o<; (ev, well, and ottXov, iniple- ) „ , 
 
 J \ . > well-armed, 
 
 ment, p!. arms), -o?, -ov, j 
 
 olo/iai, Att. olfMai, f. olr)ao)xai, a. pass. ) , 7 ■ 7, 
 
 ari\ar)v, unpi. a)0fj.r]v OV (pfi^V^, } 
 
 ,f. , /yy. J7 \ e ' c ( deem worthy or fit; 
 
 atioa (attot}, wortkv), I. -maa, pi. J , i j ■ 
 
 ,^, n ."£/,/ "i hence asK, claim, 
 
 rjJ^itOKa, I. pass. a^i(otfij(TOfjLai, I „ 
 
 as iiL. 
 
 Translate Into Bngllgh. 
 
 1. ot Kpiirimoi ap-}(eiv a^iovvTai. 2. ktto Kvpov, rov 
 irpcoTov ^aai\ea}<i rwv Hepawv, iroWa edvr) eBovKovro. 
 3. ot (nparwrai vtto rwv ^apffdptov eSoXovvro, 4. ot 
 ev Tot? aySiai viKa)VTe<; aretpavovvrac. 5. o Tpoirot; rov 
 avdpcoTTOv fjbaXtara SijXotTO av ovk ex twv Xoycov, aX\ 
 €K T&v epyoav. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 , 1. Cyrus thought himself worthy to rule. 2. They 
 were conquered by us. 3. Many nations were subjugated^ 
 by Cyrus. 4. Subjugate these nations. 5. He wishes to 
 subjugate the enemy. 6. He came from the king to us. 
 7. Men do not wish to be deceived. 8. They were honor- 
 ing, they were loving, they were subjugating. 9. They 
 were honored, they were loved, they were subjugated. 
 10. He cries out, they cry out, we cry out. 11. It seems 
 expedient to set out. 12, They were crowned, he was 
 crowned, we were crowned. 
 
 ' See' the vocabulary above. 
 
LESSONS XLI., XLII. 63 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 
 VERBS: FUTURE STEM; FUTURE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 Learn the Infieetion and Synapsis of \ia, Future Active and 
 Middle. Also, G. 16, 2, 92, II., 110, II. with 2, N. 1, 
 (b), (c), and (cl); H. 47, 373 with a, b, and c, 373-379. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^pvTTToy, I -ylfw, a. -yfra, pf. -^a, pf. pasS. | ^^^^^^^ 
 
 KeKpuiJufxai, a. piis.«. -<}>6r)v, j 
 
 ev-)(^ofiat, f. mid. ev^o/jiat, a. mid. riv^afirjv, fray. 
 
 avWe-ya {crvv, Xeyco, collect), f. -^o), etc., collect. 
 
 l3\dino} (stem /S\a/8-), f. ^xdylreo, etc., injure. 
 
 vpdaam (stem "Trpaie-), f. irpd^m, etc., do, perform. 
 
 ,n c I L ( persuade, mid. persuade 
 
 ireiOa), t. ireicrco, etc., < , ij. i 
 
 { one s self, obey, 
 ypdtfxo, f. ypdylra, etc., icrite. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 6ea>^ ixaXKov iteiaop.ai T) avBpwiTOK. 2. oi iTo\ep.ioi 
 fiiya arparevfia avWe^overi Kai iifxlv iroKep-tjaovaiv. 
 3. 'wai' o-oi X-e'fw Tn\7?06?^ Kat ou Kpxf^onai. 4. rot? 
 0eot? ev^o/xeOa, iva ev TjjSe ry fia^rj viKare^ 5. af<u 
 u/xa? OTTOt af /SovXr/crde.- C). ri aya6o<; vioi tou? yoveat 
 Kpvyjrei ; 7. f vpo<; Tr)v ' EXKrjviicrjv Bvvafuv aOpoiaei. 
 8. ypa'^ojxai Tr]v eirKnaXrjv. 9. KX€ap^o<; tou? aurou 
 cTTjoaTtwTa? e0ia^eTO* levai [to (jo). 
 
 1 0. 184, 2; H. 595, *. « G. 11, 2; H. 68. 
 
 >= G. 180; H. 602. * G. 200, N. 2 ; H. 702. 
 
64 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. Cyrus will collect a large army. 2. He will write 
 the letter. B. They will conceal nothing from you. 
 4. They will lead us wherever we wish. 5. He will ob- 
 tain his request from the king. 6. They will guard the 
 tents. 
 
 LESSON XLIII. 
 
 VERBS : FIRST AORIST STEM ; AORIST ACTIVE AND 
 MIDDLE; GNOMIC AORIST. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synapsis of Xiu, Aorist Active and 
 Middle. Review the Tense-Signs, Mode-Signs, Personal 
 Endings, and Eupliony of Consonants. Also, G. 92, III., 
 110, III., 2, aOO, N. 5, 205, 2; H. 380, 381, 382, 705, 707. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 StwKSj, f. -fw, a. -fa, pf. SeSt'&);^a, a. pass. I 
 
 , V pursue. 
 
 ^PX<o, f. ^pIo,, a. ^p?a pf. ?,pxa, pf. pass. | ^ .^^ ^^^^ 
 
 ■rjpy/iai,, a. pass. rjpxorjv, j 
 
 piTTTW, f. pifa>, a. e/jpn^a, pf. eppi^a, ) ^^^^^ j^^^^ 
 
 pf. pass, eppififiac, a. pass. €ppi<l3dr]v, j 
 
 , ,, , I 111- \ f'\ { sillv tali, xil. 
 
 (fiXvapta {^Xvapoi, babbling), -a<s. [ri), | nonsense. 
 
 vBwp, gen. uSaTo?, (to), water. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. ot '£\\i;i/e9 67r4 tou? Uepa-ai; ecrTpmevaavro. 
 2. avairavffcofieda, co ipiXoi. 3. o Trarrjp avaTrava-afievo<t 
 vopevaerai. 4. Kvpov tt/oov aSeXc^oj'* arpaTevao/ievoi 
 
 1 Rerasmher the accent of the vocative. 
 
LESSONS XLIIL, XLIV. 65 
 
 K.\eap-)(ov rov tok Qpa^i woXefirjaavTa ex t^? OpaxTj^ 
 fi€T6TrefiyjraTo, 5. o Krjpv^ airo tov rjyefiovo'; ap^afievov 
 •jravrai; tov<! (npajiwTa^ etceXevcre rot? Oeoi'i ev^aadai. 
 6. r) firjTTjp e^atrtjaafitvr) avTOv a'n-oirefnrei iraXiv etri 
 TTjV ap'XT]v. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. Cyrus made an expedition against his brother. 
 2. Cyrus, when he was going to make an expedition ^ 
 against his brother, sent for Clearchus. 3. Clearchus 
 collected a large army. 4. He compelled his soldiers to 
 march. 5. We admired the bravery of the soldiers. 
 6. They will sail away, they sailed away. 7. They turned 
 about ; they urged on the work. 
 
 ' Use the fut. partie. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 VERBS: PERFECT STEM; PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT 
 ACTIVE AND MIDDLE, AND FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of X««, Perfect, Pluperfect, 
 and Future Perfect, Active and Middle, and the Declen- 
 sion of XcXvKiis. Review Euphony of Consonants. Also, 
 a. 92, IV., 110, IV. with (l)-(5), (4), (l)-(5), and (c), 
 9T with 1-3, 118 with 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; H. 284, 350, 351, 
 385, 386 with a-c, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393. 
 
 Syntax. — G. 2T6, 1,2; H. 785, 786. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^eifidiv, -ajfo?, (o), winter, storm. 
 
 fiaKapi^co (^/j,dKap, -apo<;, blessed ), 1 think or account 
 t'. -taJ, a. -laa, \ happy. 
 
66 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 eX^yX^. f. ixh^co, a. ^'Xey^a pf. pass. 1 
 
 eXTjXey/iat,! a. pass. TjXeyx^Vf' ) 
 
 vXeKco, f. TrXe^co, a. eirXe^a (lare and -j 
 
 late), pf. pass. vtirXeyfiai., a. pass. >- weave. 
 
 eirXex^VV, ., -' 
 
 Xafiffdvco, f. Xri'y^ofiai, pf. etXri^a, \ . , , 
 
 pr. pass. eiXtj/jL/iai, a. pass. eXr}<p07}v, ) 
 
 rapaVr^ (stem Tapa^"), f- -P«'?«' | ^^^,,3, ^;,,,„, 
 a. erapata, pr. pass, rerapayaai, > . . . . 
 
 > , n I «»™ confusion. 
 
 a. pass. erapaxOrjv, ) '' 
 
 'Ia)ve<s, -mv, (pL), lonians. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. o vowTi;? o T'^w vaOi/ ew itapea/cevaifo}!; ov <f)o^enai 
 Tov p^et/iuj'a. 2. 01 tTTpafrjyoi, avv€iXr]p,iJ,evoi ijaav. 
 3. d Kvpov ffovXeverai bvax; ^aaiXevaei aVTi rov oBeX- 
 <f>ov. 4. Tov TereXevTqKora p,aKapi^e. 5. o t'^i' Tra- 
 •tpiZa €« KtvSvvQJv aetj(OKa)<s fieyienwv rifimv afto? /iot 
 SoK». 6. CTv /i.61' vTT efiov Trev€i<Tai, ot 8 aWot ovirat 
 TreTreia/ievoi, eiaiv. 7. Eep^i;? ai/XXe^a? t^v peyaXv" 
 arpariav mpp,aTo eirc ttjv EXXaSa «? Tip,(opriaop.evo<i'^ 
 rows AdT]vaiov<i, ot toi? €v t!) Acria Imcriv^ e^e^o'q67]ke- 
 aav. 8. TO ev rerayfievov arparevfia paSuoi viKT]aei to 
 te-iapayfidvov. 9. ol TeTeXevrrjicoTet ^aTrtiXXay/ievoi uai 
 voatov^ Kai Xvirr)<i km twv aXXtov kukoiv tovtov tov 
 ^lov. 
 
 ' For the euphonic changes, see G. 97, 4, N. 2, and 16, 1-4; H. 44, 
 45, and 46. 
 
 2 G. 277, 3 and 6, N. 2 ; H. 795, e, and 789, d. 
 
 'Why dative? ' Why genitive ? 
 
 ' Account for the position of roirov. 
 
LESSONS XLlV., XLV. 67 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They have prepared, they had prepared ; they have 
 collected, they had collected. 2. They have saved,^ they 
 had saved, they have been saved, they had been saved. 
 3. They have hit, they had hit. 4. An army has been 
 collected, an army had been collected. 5. They have 
 obtained their request from the king. 6. They had ob- 
 tained their request from the king. 7. The soldiers have 
 packed up their baggage, the soldiers had packed up their 
 baggage. 8. We have been persuaded, we had been 
 persuaded. 9. They have guarded, they had guarded. 
 10. The tent has been guarded, the tent had been 
 guarded. 
 
 1 Use the proper tense of <r(6j'ai. 
 
 LESSON XLT. 
 
 VERBS: FIEST PASSIVE STEM; FUTURE AND AOEIST 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of Ma, Future aiid Aorist 
 Passive, and the Inflection of XvBeIs. Review Euphony of 
 Consonants. Also, G. 92, VI., 97, 3 and 4 (read the notes), 
 110, VI. ; H. 266, 284, 395, 396 with b, 397 with a and 6. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 oirXi^oa (oir\ov, implement, implement of' 
 
 war, pi. arm,s), f. mid. -iffofiai, a. wTrXto-o, 
 
 „ ' ' '' ^ -J ' \arm,eqmp. 
 
 pf. onrXiiiea, pi. mirKiaiiai,, a. mirl. wtta.*- 
 
 vdfirjv, a. pass. airXiaGrjv, 
 
68 GREEK LESSORS. 
 
 BiaraTra) (Bia-, rdrTce), i. -rd^co, a. -erafa, -s draw up in 
 pf. -^eraxa, pf. pass. -Ttrayfj-ai, a. pass. >- military 
 -eTixyBr^v, ' order. 
 
 Kripirrco {icrjpv^, herald), f. -fw, a. WTjpvfa, 1 ^g^i^^^^ 
 pf. pass. KSKTipvyfiai, a. pass. eK7)pv')(j9'qv, j 
 
 Tpi/So), f. T/3ti/ra), a. erpi-yfra, pf. rerpiipa, 1 , 
 pf. pass. T€T pififiai, a. pass. irpi<f>dTjv, J 
 
 (jivXarTca, f.<})v\.d^to, a. e(f>v\a^a, T^i. ire(f)v\dj(a, 1 , 
 
 pf. mid. irecfivXayiJ.aL, a. pass. ej)v\cf)(67]V, | "^ 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1 . 01 iroXe'fiioL t^<? £ca/3ui7Ecuf i tou Trora/jiov v(f> rjficiov 
 eKfoXvOrjirav. 2. eai* to arparevfia hiarw^dBy, oi KijpvKev 
 TTjv apj(r]v T^? fiaj(T]^ K7}pv^ovaiv, 8. voaasv oi avdpca- 
 iroi ovTTore airaWaj(driaovrat. 4. a7raj/T6?, yepovTet; Kai 
 veaviai, Sia tov fieyav kivSvvov oirXiaOrjaovTat. 5. &£fii- 
 o-tokX^s ^aaiXei eiriaroXriv etrefi-^ev, ev r/ eyeypa-irro • 
 £J<ya> ©e/LttCTTo/rX^?, b? /iaXto"Ta Toii' i/XXryvo)!/ toi/ 
 Vfierepov oIkov e^Xa^^Ira, irpo^ ae eiropevBriv «? tow 
 Ilepaa^ co^eXrjffcov.^ 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The satrap was sent. 2. The letters shall be writ- 
 ten. 3. The tents were guarded, the tents will be guarded, 
 
 4. He was greatly benefited, he has been greatly benefited. 
 
 5. The bridge will be broken down. 6. He was defeated, 
 he will be defeated. 7. An army was collected together, 
 an army will be collected together. 8. The army was cut 
 in pieces. 9. They have joined in war against the king. 
 10. They joined in war against the king. 11. They were 
 killed, they have been plundered. --' 
 
 » G. 174; H. 579, a. = Why genitive! 
 
 » G. 277, 3 and 5, N. 2 ; H. 789, d, and 795, e. 
 
LESSONS XLV., XLVI. 69 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 VEKBS: SECOND AOEIST AND SECOND PERFECT STEMS; 
 ' TENSES OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of Xetiroi through the Second 
 Aorist Active, G. 95, II. and 96, II. ; H. 276 ; Tense- 
 Signs, Connecting Vowels, and Personal Endings. 
 Also, G. 26, N. 3, 90, N. 1, 92, V., 93, c, 100, N. 3, 108, 
 I., II. 2, III., 109, 1-7, 110, IV. d, N. 2, v., 112, 2, 113, 2 
 (Endings of Active), 202 ; H. 277, 325, 326, 327, 334, o, h, 
 352, d, 366, 367, 383. 
 
 Syntaac — Q. 202, 1; H. 705. 
 
 > take. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 \a/i^ava) (Xo/S-), f. Xrf^ojjLai (w. active mean- 
 ing), pf. el\r)^a, pf. pass. eiXrififiai, a. pass. 
 eKri(j>9r]v, 2 a. eKa^ov, , 
 
 dfiapravo) (dfiapT-), f . -rjao/jLai, pf . -rjKa, pf. pasS. 
 
 '/I r» f/ / miss, GTT. 
 
 -r)/Mai, a. pass. -T]0r]v, Z a. 7]/j,apTov, ) 
 
 aipeco {e\-), f. alprjaio, pf. jjprjKa, pf. pass. ? . ». 
 
 ^prjfiai, a. pass, ypedfjv, 2 a. etXov, 3 
 
 aya). f. a^io, y)f. ^;j;a, pf. pasS. rj'yfiai, a. pass. \ j i 
 
 w /) .-, V ) lead. 
 
 rj^OrjV, Z a. rjyayov, ) 
 
 aTro6vr)(TK(o (ostto, Ovtjo'kw, 6av-, 6va-\ f. -0o- ) flSe, ^g- 
 
 vov/iai, pf. -TeOvrjKa, 2 a. -kOavov, ) killed. 
 
 ex<o{crex-),t.e^a>oraxvo-0),Tpf.earxV'(O;Tpf-V^S. ) ^^^^^ 
 
 ecr;j^77/Hot, a. pass, ea-'xedriv, 2 a. eax°^> J 
 
 irelOto {irW-), f. ireiaea, a. eiretaa, pf. veireiKa, \ 
 
 pf. pass. •n-eireiafjLM, a. pass, hrreladrfv, 2 pf. > persuade. 
 
 ireiroida (J trust), 3 f^. e-mOov (poetic), -' 
 
70 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Trannlate Into English. 
 
 1. 6*9 T'^i; iroXiv e^vyofxev} 2. 'Adrivaloc e^e^aXov 
 TOP QefiiaroKKea, ovto? 8' e^vye Trpo? ^aaikea. 3. Kv- 
 po? eXa^e ra "TraXTa etv ra? ^etpa?. 4. rjXdev iva Tovro 
 iSoi. 5. avafiaivei ovv 6 Kvp'x;, XajSmv Tit7aa<f)epvr)v to? 
 <J3iXov. 6. ?7 §6 KlXiaaa, iBova-a r-qv \afj,TrpoTi]Ta km 
 T7)v Ta^tv Tov o-T/jaTeu/iUTov, edavfiaae. 7. rot;? arpct- 
 Tjjiyow €/c6\6V£i/ OTrXtVa? dyayelv.^ 8. Kiipot ai/TO? awe- 
 dave? 9. ouTO? ai/Tjp apiaro<s (eariv), oaTK eXiTLari, 
 ireiroidsp aei. 
 
 Translate into Greelc. 
 
 1. Let us fiee into the city. 2. We came in order that 
 we might learn. 3. Take* this. 4. They took the spears. 
 5. You erred. 6. The soldiers escaped out of the village. 
 7. They banished these men. 8. They wished to banish 
 the citizens. 9. They wish to learn. 10. Banish the citi- 
 zens. 11. They do not wish to die. 12. He has trusted 
 you. 
 
 ^ Verb stem, 4>vy-; present stem, <tieuy-. G. 92 with 2, N., and 3, and 
 108, II. ; H. 324, 326, and 383. 
 
 2 G. 100, N. 4 ; H. 384. » 6. 109, 7 ; H. 340. 
 
 * Remember the accent. 
 
 LESSON XITII. 
 
 VEEBS : SECOND AOEIST STEM ; TENSES OF THE 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Leam the Inflection and Synopsis of XcCiru through Second 
 Aorist Middle. Also, G. 9a with 1, 2 and N., and 3, V., 
 96, II., 108, N. with 2, IV., 1, b, 2, of, 3, V. 1-4, 109, 7, 8, 
 110, v., 112,4; H. 276, 328, a-e, 329, a-rf, 335,1, 336, 
 352, 366, a, b, 367 with a-d, and Rem., 368, a, b, 383. 
 
LESSONS XLVI., XLVII. 71 
 
 come, arrive. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 a^iKveojiai (i/ic-), f. -i^o/jLai, pf. -lyfiai, 
 
 2 a. -IKOfJLtjV, 
 
 ryiyvofiai (yev-), f. yevijao/Mai, pf. yeyevrj- 
 
 l^ai, 2 a. eyevofirjv, 2 pf. yeyova, 
 tt/tttq) (^irer-^, f. "jreaov/jiai, pf. vetTToaKa, 
 
 2 a. eirecrov, 
 viriff'^veofiat, f. (nroa'xrjaofjiai, pf. virea-y^ri- 
 
 fj-ai, 2 a. inrea-^ofifjv, 
 evpiaKco{eup-),i.evp7}a-a),iptevpr)Ka,TpLY>SiSS. \ ^ , 
 
 evprifiai, a. pass, evpedrjv, 2 a. eupoi/, 5 
 
 XavddvoD {\ad-), f. Xj^o-a), 2 pf. \eXTj0a, \ j. , . 7 
 
 a. e\aOov, I. mid. Xr/aofiai, I. pi. Xe- >- , . . 
 
 ^ I Cite itObt'Ce 07m 
 
 Mjaofiai, f "^ 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. fOvroi vaTepoi a^iKovro. 2. irapa ^aaiXeox; TroWot 
 TTpot; Kvpov anrfjkdov^ eveiSr] TroXefiioi aX-XrjXoi?^ ejtvov- 
 TO. 3. Ob A6r]vaioi Oe/iiuTOKXea^ (7TpaTT]yov e'lXovTO ev 
 rat UeptTiKO) iroXefj-o). 4. t/7re<rv670 avSpi eKua-rm Sojcreiv 
 (to (/ive) irevre dpyvpiov nva^. 5. 'E,evia<; fxev Si) tow 
 e« T&v iroXecov Xa^eop irapeytvtro ei<; SapBeK. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They promised, tliey arrived, they died. 2. "We 
 arrived, we promised, we found. 3. He became king. 
 4. They wish to arrive in Sardis. 5. He wishes to become 
 king.- 6. Cyrus became hostile to liis brother. 7. They 
 chose him general. 8. They wish to choose him general. 
 9. Choose him general. 
 
 1 G. 105 and 26, N.; H. 365 and 368, b. 
 
 2 Why dative? '' G. 166; H. 656. 
 
72 GBEEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. ^ 
 
 VERBS: SECOND AORIST PASSIVE STEM. 
 
 Leam the Inflection and Synopsis of \tCito and ijiaCvu, Second 
 Aorist Passive. Also, G. 96, II., 108, VI. with N. 1-4, 
 VII., VIII., 109, 1-8, 110, VII., lia, 3, 115, 3, 116, 3; 
 H. 278, 330 with Rem., 331, 332, 333, 336, 3, 337, 
 339-342, 343, 348, 353, 395. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 KaTairXijTTio [Kara, ttXj^tto)), f. -irXrj^ca, pf. 1 strike dovm, 
 
 pass. -TTiirXrj'yp.M, 2 a. pass. -evXayijv, j friglden. 
 KKeiTTO}, f. KXe-\jrci>, pf. KexXo^a, pf. pass. \ 
 KeKXefifiai, a. pass. eKXe(j>0r]v, 2 a. e'/fXa- > steal. 
 
 KaraKOTnoi (^xara, Kotnw), f . -i^ft), a. -e«o- \ 
 
 ■^a, pf. -K£KO(f)a, pf. pass. -Kexofifiai, > cut down. 
 
 2 a. pass. -eKOirrjv, ' 
 
 Sia/Saivto {Sia, fialvay, 0a-, fidv-), f. -0r)-\ 
 
 ffo/iai, pf. -^e^rjKa, pf. pasS. -jSe^a/iai, V cross. 
 
 2 a. -e0r,v, ■' 
 
 CTTjoe^ft), f. arpei^o}, a. iarrpe^a, pf. pass. \ 
 
 effrpafifiai, a. pass. etTTpetjiffrjv, 2 a. pass. /- ^W?5^, #«r». 
 
 earpa^r)v, ' 
 
 rpeirto, f. rpeifro), a. erpeijra, pf. Terpo^a\ turn ; mid. 
 
 or TeTpa<f)a, pf. pass. Terpa/i/^ai, a. pass. V betake ones 
 
 erpe^9i^v, 2 a. mid. eTpairofiTjv, J self. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. ot 0dp0apoi /caTOTrXaiyef T6? ^ a7re<j)vyov, 2. 6<j)aiTap 
 Tou? Xo'j^ows KaTaKOTTTJvai^ inro rStv KiXixav. 3. tovtov 
 
 1 G. 110, VII., N. 2; «. 397, ft. » G. 203; H. 734, «, and 735. 
 
LESSONS XLVIII., XLIX. 
 
 73 
 
 SiajSa? e^eXavvei Bia ^pvyia<; ara0fi6v eva. 4. ol arpa- 
 Tiwrai ft? TTjv TtoXtv eiae^dXovTO. 5. ev Ttj iiaj(ri Bie^6a- 
 prjcrav vrje'; tqjv EWrivtov. 6. Trot TpaTTCOfiai,^ w Tral, 
 irol (f)vyto ; 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. We were sent, they were sent, you were slain. 
 2. ' They were taken. 3. They received favors from him. 
 4. He saw the man. 5. He said this to Cyrus. 6. I choose 
 freedom. ' § 256. 
 
 LESSON ILIX. 
 
 LIQUID VEEBS. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis, G. 95, III., 96, III.; H. 282, 
 283. Also, G. 92, 4 and II., 108, IV., 2 with d, V. with 
 1, 2, and 3, 109 (read fine print) with 4, 5, and 6, 110, 11. 2 
 (read fine print). III. 2; H. 324, 328, c aild d, 329, a-d, 
 334, a, 337, 340, 345 with 1, 2, and 6, 373, 382, 386, c, 
 391, 394. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 atroaTeWta {a-iro, ffTeWw, o-reX-), f. -o-re- 
 
 \Si, a. -eaTetXa, pf. -eaTokKa, pf. pass. > setld away. 
 
 -ea-ToXfiai, 2 a. pasS. -ea-ToKrjv, 
 aiTOKTeivo) (aTTO, KTeivco, Kjev-Y f. -KrevS), \ 
 
 a. -exTeiva, pf. -eKTajKa (rare), 2 pf. Vput to death. 
 
 -e/cTova, Z a. -eKjavov, 
 
 ']■ 
 
 
 atro^aivo) {mro, <^a[v(o, cfyav-), f. -<f>avSi, 
 a. -e(f>r]va, pf. -irKJiayKa, -Tre^aafiai, 
 a. pass. -6(pav6i)v, 2 a. pass. -e^avTjv, 
 2 pf. -ire^va, f. mid. -jiavovfmi. 
 
 show forth, 
 mid. </2jj- 
 jo/ffly, de- 
 clare. 
 
74 GKEEK LESSONS. 
 
 ar^eipm {ayep-), a. vjeipa, a. pass. > „ , 
 
 ■qytporiv, z a. miu. ayepofjLTjv, ) 
 
 ar)fj.aivo) {arifiav-), {a-rjfia, sign^ f. at)- \ 
 
 (lavay, a. earjp.'qva, pf. pass, aearj- V show by a sign. 
 
 tj,aafj,ai, a. pass. ecrT]iJ,dvdr]v, -' 
 
 ' fiiaivo} (/itai/-), f. fiiavai, a. epuava, ) . , 
 
 n / ''/If jjCtVftv OVGl, 
 
 Tpi.pass. fiefiiaa-fiai, a.^tass. e/JLiavativ. ) 
 atff;j^i;i'(» (ato-;)(;w-), (alffj^os, disgrace,) \ disgrace, mid.^e 
 f. -alayvvS), a. Tjayyva, a, pass. >- ashatned, stand 
 rja-yyvdriv, J in awe of. 
 
 Translate Into EngUsb. 
 
 1. evTavOa efieive Kvpo<i rj/iepa^ rpiaKoma. 2. 6 
 ayyeXo^ rjyyeiKe ttjv viktjv. 3. Tiaaa^epvrjt Sta^aWei 
 Tou Kvpov irpof Tov aSeXtpov. 4. uTroaTeWei tov<! 
 dyye\ov<;i 5. tow ftev avTwv aireKretve, row 8 efe/So- 
 \ev. 6. edavfia^ov on ovSafiov Kvpo^ ^alverai} 7. o 
 Kpijrft; Ttjv yv(i)fj,rjv aTre^T]vaio. 8. o 0atriKev<; ti]v tnpa- 
 Tidv rjyeipev. 9. ovk aiaj^yveaOe ovre 6eov<i ovre avOpw- 
 iTOVi. 10. Kpcvat^ <f)i\ov<i ov paSiov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He will announce the victory, he aniTOunced the vic- 
 tory. 2. Cyrus will remain there six days. 3. Cyrus 
 remained there six days. 4. The messenger was sent 
 away. 6. The messenger will be sent away. 6. He will 
 put these to death. 7. They will appear, they appeared, 
 they have appeared. 8. I will answer, he answered. 
 
 1 To what class of verbs does this helong? What is the verb stem? 
 the present stem? connecting "owel ? personal ending? 
 
 2 G. 261, 1; H. 767. 
 
LESSONS XLIX., L. 75 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 REGULAB VERBS IN )Lll : ACTIVE OF l<TTrjfll. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of Himiiii, Active Voice, and 
 the JDeelension of lo-rds, G. 68 and 123; H. 214 (Xuo-as), 
 399. Also, G., p. 156 (read Rem.), 110, IV. c, N. 2, 
 121 (read notes), 3, 122 with 1 and 2, 123 with fine print; 
 H. 267, II., 336 with a and 6, 347, 348, 353 with a and b, 
 355, 356 with c, 399 (read 400, 1-4), 4034 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 eiTTov (eV-), 2 a. no present, 1 a. el-n-a; 
 
 other tenses are supplied hy e'lpa (ep-) i ., 
 
 and a stem pe-; t. epw, pi. eiprjKa, pi. pass. 
 
 eipij/xai, a. pass. epprjQrjv, 
 Se^oyLtai, f. he^op^ai, pf. SeSey/tot, a. pnss. 
 
 , , , receive. 
 
 <f>9eip(0, f. ^depw, a. KJideipa, pf. e<^dapKa, } / f , 
 pf. pass. e(j>9appai, 2 a. pass. £(f)6dpriv,_ ) ^ 
 
 Xpaoi^a,, f. x/»;c^<'/^«, pf- '^W'/M''^ a- pass, j ^,^^ ^^^^o_^^ 
 
 eXPV^^V, . ) 
 
 ^povTi^o)^ (^pvv, mind), f. -/o-®, Att. f. ) take thought 
 
 -im, a. -to-a, pf. -tKffl, . 5 y^* 
 
 T.;7X«''« (^^X;. -r^-^X-). f- T6v'^/.at, pf. re- ) ^^.^^ happen. 
 
 Tvyi\Ka or T€T6w;(;a, 2 a. eTV)(pv, ) 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 'la-T7}p,i^ <TTr\aoi, effrrjaa, eaTrjica, eaTqv. 2. tous 
 avBpa<! laTTjatv. 3. tou? avSpa<; Icnaaiv. 4. wat «a- 
 
 1 G. 110, II. 2, N. i, c, and d; H. 375, 376, and 377. 
 
 2 Verb stem o-to-, present stem i-o-ra (o-i-irTa). Give the personal 
 ending. 
 
76 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 recrrr]^ et? ffaaiXeiav 'Apia^ep^rjt.y 5. ol tTTTrets "Trapa 
 K\eap^(^ eoTijaav. 6. d^eaT^Keaav vpoi; Kvpov iracrai 
 TTp\ei<i vXrjv MiXrjTov. 7. tttJ trraj ; vr] /Soj ; 8. JJi* 
 <7iij/ To« LOTaaiv.^ y. larTm/Mev, arwfiev, 10. \oyo? 
 Bieairdpr) tow? avfifi.u^ov'i^ diro rrjv Tro\e(o<i airoarfivai. 
 
 Note. — In some VM-bs the forms of the active voice are divided 
 between a transitive and an intransitive sense. The future and 
 first aorist are then transitive ; the second aorist and the perfect are 
 intransitive: thus, Itrrrnu, I set; 2 a. eori/i/ (set myself), I stood; 
 pf. eoTijKa (have set myself ) , I am standing; f. pf. eorrj^a, shall stand. 
 — Hadley, p. 148. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. They station the soldiers. 2. They were stationing 
 the soldiers. 3. They will station the soldiers. 4. They 
 stood, he stood, they are standing, they were standing. 
 5. They were with those who were stationing. 6. Let us 
 station. 7. The cities have revolted to Cyrus. 8. They 
 have stationed* the soldiers. 9. Station thou the men. 
 10. They \(^ished to cross. 11. When he had said® this, he 
 rode away. 
 
 1 See KaOi(7Tvu, G. 17, 1 ; H. 272. " G. 134, 2 ; U. 773. 
 
 8 G. 27B, 2 ; H. 786 
 
 ' Use Tatro-u for tlie intrans. fonns of hriitu. * Use the participle. 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 EEGULAE VERBS IN flL (continued) : ACTIVE VOICE OF 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsia of rC9r\\u, Active Voice, and 
 the Declension of TiBeis or XuScCs, G. 68; H. 214. Also, 
 G. 110, III., N. 1, H4i N. 2, 121, 3 (read the notes), 122, 
 1, 2 (read notes 1, 2, 3, 4), 125, 1, 2, 3, N. 1, 2; H., review 
 325, 329, 332, — learn 399 (read 400, 1-4, and 401, b-n), 
 402, 403, 2. 
 
LESSONS L., LI. 77 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ji/yvoiaKa) (yvo-V f. yvwao/xai, pf. eyvwKa, \ 
 
 n Jf ''/if P^^C€W€f 
 
 pi. pass. eyvma/jLui, a. pass, eyvcocrariv, V'' , 
 2 a. eyvmv, J 
 
 SiSaaKoy (St,Sa^-V f. Siha^m, a. eBiSa^a, \ 
 pf. SeSiBaxa, pf. pasg. BeBlSayfiai, a. pass. V ^eac^. 
 
 /8a Wo) (/3aX,-, /3\a-), f. ^oKm, pf. ^e^Xtjaa, \ 
 pf. pass. ^e^Xrjfiat, a. pass. e^ijOrjv, > throw. 
 2 a. €/3a\oj/, J 
 
 fiav0aveo (^fiad-^, f. fj,r]6ri<ro/iai, pf. fiend- } , 
 
 6j]Ka, 2 a. efiaOov, ) 
 
 Xayx^avm (XaX"), f. \r\^otiai, pf. f t\7;;)^a, ) obtain by lot, 
 
 a. pass. eKrf)(Qt)v^ 2 a. eXaxof, ) obtain. 
 
 opvK,^ -ido'i, (o or r;), bird, fowl. 
 
 avfi^ovXr] {avv, ^ovKi\), -rj^, (?/), advice, counsel. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 ^. TiOijfii, Orjaoo, eBriKU, teOeiKa, eOrjv. 2. ot aTpariai- 
 rai TiOeaa-t ra owXa. 3. e^ere ra oTrXa exelva. 4. ^u- 
 Kovpyov, Tov devra^ AaiC€Sai/j.ovioi<; vofiovt, fiaXi(na 6av- 
 fia^ofiev. 5. offTt? a^iKvelro toiv irapa ^acn\ew<; 7rpo9 
 avTOV, TTavTa<; ovtio BiaTiOei,^ aireTrefiveTO. 0. aywva 
 effrjxe. 7. AvKovpyov, o deK AaKeSai/iovioiii vofiovi, cro- 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He puts, he was putting, he will put. 2. You at- 
 tacked us. 3. They can put. 4. Cyrus will put him to 
 death. 5. Put thou, put ye. 6. We admire him who 
 enacts laws for us. 7. He enacted laws for you. 8. Cyrus 
 exercised in the park. 
 
 1 G. 47, 2; H. 171. ^ ti'Sij.ui with x^/ios means to enact 
 
78 6KEEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LII. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS IN flL (continued) : ACTIVE VOICE OF 
 SiScofii. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of SCSu|u, and the Declen- 
 sion of SiSoiJs. Revie'vr the references of the last Lesson. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 irXea (ttXiJ-), f. irXevaofiai or ir\ev- -^ 
 
 aovjjiai, a. eTrXevaa, pf. ireirXevKa, >sail. 
 
 pf. pass. ireirXevafiai, •' 
 
 rpexfo {rpex- for 6pex-^ Bpafj^),\ 
 
 f . .Bpafiov/JLM, pf. -SeSpa/iriKa (in > r«?f. 
 
 com p.), 2 a. eBpafiov, * 
 
 yvwuv (yiyvaaKO), stein 7i'o-, ^M02«), ) . . . , , 
 
 V '^ ( opinion, judgment. 
 
 TTopitjoa {TTopa, way across, means), \ 
 f. -KB, a. -laa, pf. -taa, pf. pass. > procure, 
 -ifffiai, a. pass. -ia0r]v, ^ 
 
 (leWw, f. /ieXXjj'o-cB, a. efieWrjcra or ) intend, be about, 
 
 '^fieWrjaa,^ ) delay. 
 
 , ^ I , ■ T K 7\ / ^ unfinis/ied, exempt 
 
 aTe\r]<s, (a priv. and reXoi, end), -es, < ^, . ^ 
 
 '^ ' ( Jrom service. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. SiScifii, Stoaa), eScaaa, SeBcoKci, 2. BiBov /loi to 
 ^ipKiov. 3. Kvpo<; BcBwatv avrm /jbvptovv BapeiKOV<:, 
 4. ToS ^aaiKem'i aarpairr)': Trjv Be^iav rm KXeapxfp 
 
 1 0. n, 2, N.; H. 66, c. ■' G. 100,2, N. 2; H. 308, Rem. a. 
 
LESSONS LII., LIII. 79 
 
 eBiSov, 5. 0ov\eTai SiSdvai, rjfuv ttjv xdpiv TavTT/v. 
 6. So? iMOi TO ^ifiXiov. 7. ^ovXerai Sovvai rrjv eiriaro- 
 \r]v. 8. 01 0601 iravTa SiBoacrcv. 0. 0eo<s fioi Boirj (j}i- 
 X.OU? TTtarov^. 10. oi Oeoi fioi avTi kukwv uyaBa BiSolei/. 
 \ 1 . KM 8ovvai KM Xa^elv Tnerra iQiKofiev. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. He gives, he will give, he gave, he has given. 2. They 
 will give, let us give, thou art giving. 3. Give this talent 
 to me. 4. They wish to give me this book. 5. He ad- 
 mires those who are giving. 6. He was with those who 
 were giving. 7. He gave pay to the soldiers. 8. Do not 
 give the book. 9. We wish to give the book. 
 
 LESSON LIII. 
 
 EEGULAR VERBS IN /xt (continued) : ACTIVE VOICE OF 
 Setfffu/ii. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis of Se£Kv«ii.i, and the Declen^ 
 sion of SeiKviis, G. 68 ; H. 214. Also, G. 108, V., 4, 122, 2, 
 125 with 5; H. 300, 399, 400, 401, 442, 3. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 o/jivv/jLi, iind ofivveo {ofj,-, OflO-), f. OflOV-^ , J 
 
 fiai, a. afioera, pi. ofico/jiOKa, pt. pass. >■ ,, 
 
 ofJ,(0/JLo(a-)fiM, a. pass. wfi6{a)6riv, ' 
 
 diroWv/jLi (airo, oWv/jli, o\-), f. -o\a>, \ i ,^ // ./ 
 
 a. -(uXeo-a, pr. -o\&)Xe/ta, 2 pt. -o\a>Xa, > . , . , 
 
 *^ ■ I / I vsx\A. perisli,. 
 
 am undone, 2 a. mid -taXoiJ.'nv, 
 
80 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 ^evyvvfit i^y-), f. ^ev^o, a. e§'ev-\ 
 
 fa, pf. e^evyfiai, a. pass, e^ev- Vyoke,join. 
 yQriv, 2 a. pass, e^vyriv, J 
 
 ,a ,-> I ,a \ ^ Piit away, mid. lay 
 
 aiTOT 1,071111, [atro, TitfTj/ii,), \ -j 
 
 ,,, ,,-,,, , ( stop, intrans. forms, 
 
 6^.<XT,^. (e,r., *<.T^^.), I ftand Still. 
 
 dfj.a^iToi (a/xa^a, waguii), -6v, passable for waffons. 
 
 aKovTitio (axeov, javeliri), f. -tw, 1 , , ■ j- i ■. 
 , , ^ -^ ' \ hurl a mvekn, hit. 
 
 a. TjKOVTiaa, \ 
 
 hew, f. hnam, a. ehvaa, pf. SE^e/ca, ) , . , 
 pi. pass. oeSefiai, a. pass, ebeorjv, J 
 
 Translate into Sngligh. 
 
 1. SeiKvvfii, Bei^co, eSei^a, SeSetj^a. 2. tnpaTqyov 
 avTov iiTTfSei^ev. 3. avSpo<; vovv oivo<; eSei^ev. 4. o ySa- 
 aiXevt Tnv ainov v'Cov aTparriyov atToBeBei-)^6v. 5. eSv, 
 eSv(Tav, ehoaav, edeaav, etntiffav. 6. Kvpo^ top dtopoKa 
 eueSv. 7. T^ ouv arpajia uTreBeoice f' vpo<; fiiadov 7677 a- 
 poav fii]vwv. o. e7reo"Tij o Avpo? ctw Toti? Trept av70v 
 dp[a7oi<! Kai evBai/iovea-7a70K. 9. ye<pvpa Be eTrrjv e^ev~ 
 yp,evri irKoiOK evTa. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. They are showing, they were showing, they will show. 
 2. Thou wast showing, he was showing. 3; We entered, 
 they entered, he entered. 4. Let us enter. 5. The king 
 appointed him general. 6. Cyrus appointed '•his own friend 
 i,reneral. 7. He appoints, he appointed, he has appointed. 
 8. They join with him.^ 9. Many soldiers perished. 
 
 1 Dative. 
 
LESSONS LIII., LIV. 81 
 
 LESSON LIV. 
 
 REGULAR VEEBS IN flL (continued) : PASSIVE AND 
 MIDDLE OF LCTTrflJiL. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis, Passive and Middle. Re- 
 view the references in Lesson L. Also, G. 107, 108, 1., II. 
 and 2, TIL, IV. with 1 (ft, N. 1), 2, d (N. 1, 2, and 3), and 3, 
 125, 1-4; H. 334, 325, 326, 327, 328 with a, b (Rem.), 
 c, d, and e, 401, k, 413. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 EvDafiai,^ f. Bwrjaofjuai, pf. BeBwri/MM, 1 , ,j 
 
 a. pass. eSvvTjdrjv, ) 
 
 l-rricrTafiai^ f. einaTqao^at, a. rjViarT]- ) J 4 J 
 
 6r)v, impf. ^TTtaTafiiiv, ) 
 
 7]Sofiai,^ f. pass, r/adijaofiai, a. pass, ^crdriv, 6e pleased. 
 a'yafiot^(f.aya'a-o/iatrare), a.pass.^yaff^iji', admire, esteem. 
 Sia> f. S.^c.» a. iBev<.a, pf. SeSeVa, ^ ^^^^^^ ^^^f . 
 
 pt. pass. SeSevfiai, a. pass. eberjOriv, V . , , 
 
 liud. oeo/jLUi, I. ber)O-0/j,ai,, J 
 
 eirofiai (active e-rro) (aeir-), be after 0T\ 
 
 busy with), f. eijrofiai, 2 a. iairofjtrjv, V follow. 
 
 iinpf. emotLrtv? and ktroyutiv, ' 
 
 , , j «« agreement, 
 
 avvevi^a {aw, TLevfii), -aro,, (to), | ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 irlirTO) (ttet- for "Tri-TreT-), f, -n-eaov/Mai, \ ^ jj 
 c ' f> " yjaii. 
 
 pi. ireTrrroKa, z a. eireaov, j 
 
 Translate into EngUsh. 
 
 1. to"TOTat, iffTOTO, "(TTacro. 2. eav LffiwvTai,. 3. to'TOj- 
 ^e^a. .4. Tov<; IcTTafievovi optofiev. 5. oi fiera Aptaiov 
 
 1 Passive deponent. '^ G. 104; H. 312. 
 
82 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 oviceri IffTavrai, aXKa (fievyovaiv. 6. aviffravro, avir 
 <navrai, 7. irparre /j/rjSev wv^ fi'q eiriaraaai. 8. ol 
 iroXe/jUot ovk avo<7Tr]aovTai, irpw av ektoai ri^v iro\iv. 
 !). TO Se <7TpaTev/j.a 6 atro? eTreXiire, Kat irpiaavai ovk rjv. 
 10. ^wfiev^ ov)(_ fo<i eOeXo/j-ev, a\X oj? Svva/J.eda. 
 
 Trauslate luto Greek. 
 
 1. They are stationing the men (for themselves). 
 2. They were stationing the men (for themselves). 3. Be 
 thou stationing (for thyself). 4. Let us be stationing 
 (for ourselves). 5. You are stationing (for yourselves). 
 6. Thou art stationing. 7. They stopped, they did not 
 stop. 8. He lives as he is able. 9. It was not possible to 
 buy corn. 10. They were able to station the men. 
 
 » By attraction for /«!«*>' To&rt.iy, i. ^ G. 98, N. 2; H. 371, e. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 REGULAE VERBS IN flL (continued) : PASSIVE AND 
 MIDDLE OF TlBtjiji,!.. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis, Passive and Middle. G. 108, 
 V. with 2, 3, and 4 (read notes), VI. (read notes), 121 (read 
 notes), 3, 123 and 2, 125 with 1, 2, and 3 (read the notes); 
 H. 329 with a-(l, 330, 401 with b-n, 402, 403, 404 with 
 4 and 5, 407. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 rpv\\o<;, -ov, (o), Grylhs, son of Xenophon. 
 
 MavTweia, -a?, (97), Mantinea. 
 
 e-n-iTi0rifM (eVt, rWrifii), place upon, mid. attach. 
 
LESSONS LIV., LV. 83 
 
 ffre'^avos (<7Te<f>co, encircIe),-ov, (6), crown. 
 
 BiareXeo) (Sid, TeXeco, finis//), f . \ , . , , ■,■, 
 
 , aL - r I onn/7 to an end ; with 
 
 -eCTft), Alt. -«, a. -6ffO, pt. -6KO, V " ,. ,. 
 
 „ ^ , . I a partic, continue. 
 
 pi. pass, -ea-fiai, a. pass, -eaorjv, J 
 
 Saafi6<;, -ov, (o), tax, impost. 
 
 Sapov, -ov, (to), ffifi- 
 
 irwdavofiai {-Triid-), f. -ireva-ofiai, ) /e«rM ^j/ asking, learn, 
 
 pf. ireirvanaL, 2 a. eirvBofirjv, ) inquire. 
 Buvafut (Svvaiiai, he able), -ew?, ) ability, power, mili- 
 
 (»;), > fary force, troops. 
 
 '•ft , 7 V /'\ ^ transaction, undertak- 
 
 trpa^Ki [irpaTTco, do), -ew9, (n), < 
 
 ( mg. 
 
 Translate Into EngUgli. 
 
 1. TiOejai, eTidero, eOero, edevro. 2. icat Uevia^ 6 
 ApKat, arpaTTjyov, Kai Uaaicov 6 Meyapev<i, efi0avTe<; et? 
 trXoiov Koi TO, irXetarov a^ia ^ evdefievoi, direTrXevaav. 
 3. 01 -TToXlrac <j)o0ovvrai fir) oi iroXefitoi tj/ troXei eirni,- 
 6a)vrai? 4. Uevofftavri, Bvovtl^ ^acs tk ck Mavrivet,a<i 
 ayyeXoif Xeycov tov viov avTOV tov TpvXXov reOvavai'^ xai 
 exetvo? aireBsTO fiev rov a-re<pavov, StertXet Se ^vtoi' ■ e-rrel 
 Se o ayyeXo<; irpoaeBrjKe Kai exeivo, on vikuv TeOvr/ice, 
 iraXiv Pievo(f>a)v enreOero tov are^avov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. You are putting (for yourselves), they are putting 
 (for themselves), he is putting (for himself). 2. He was 
 with those who were putting (for themselves). 3. The 
 
 ^ Those things of the most value. G. 180, 1 ; H. 584. 
 
 2 G. 218; H. 743. 
 
 ' To Xeiiophon, while he was sacrificing. 
 
 * For tedvTiKivai. 
 
84 GKKEK LESSONS. 
 
 enemy have attacked the city. 4. The enemy are attack- 
 ing the city. 5. The citizens fear that the enemy will 
 attack the city. 6. You are not putting (for yourselves). 
 7. Be thou putting (for thyself). 8. We will sail away. 
 9. They made an agreement. 10. The soldiers wish to 
 station themselves under arms. 
 
 LESSON IVI. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS IN fii (continued) : PASSIVE AND 
 MIDDLE OF SCScafii. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synopsis, Passive and Middle. G. 108, 
 VII. and VIII., 109 (read notes) with 1, 2, 3 (Notes 
 1 and 2), 4 (N. 1), 5, 6, 7 with a-c, 8 (read a, h, and N.); 
 H. 331, 332, 334 with a-d, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 
 341, 342. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ^avepoi (<f)aiv(o, stem 4*^v-), -a, -6v, plain, conspicuous. 
 
 \oxayo<s {\oxo<i, company of soldiers, ) , . 
 , I V 7 7\ "/<\ ( captain, 
 
 Tjyeofiai, aym, lead), -ov, [o), ) 
 
 trlfj.irXrj/ii,^ (prXa-), i.irXrjau), a. eirXij-"^ 
 
 aa, pf. -TreTrXrjKa (in comp.), pf. 1 .,, 
 
 pass. irkirX-qanai, a. pass. lirXri- '' 
 
 a6rjv, a. mid. eirXrjcrafiTjv, ^ 
 
 "^jreXiov, -ov, (to'), bracelet. 
 
 Xpvaio. (dim. of xP^-o,, gold), -ov, | ^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 1 a. 125,' 2 and N. 1 ; H. 403, 7. 
 
LESSONS LV., LVI. 85 
 
 hear, carry, bring. 
 
 <j>epa> (o6-, eveK-, eveyic- for ev-eveK-'),'' 
 f. oto-ft), a. ^veyua, pf. ev^po'^a, 
 pf. pass. evTjveyfuu, a. pass, rivi- 
 X^VV, 2 a. ^veyKOV, 
 s,,^ / / ?/? \ ^ ^'^t'e heforehand, 
 
 VpoOlOtOfll ( TTDO, OliOCOfM ), < 7 7 7 
 
 ( abandon, betray. 
 dSiKia (aStKo?, unjust, a priv. and ) . . ,. 
 
 oiKi], justice), -OS, (jj), J "^ 
 
 /cto/i?;, -7j?, (97), village. 
 
 olKeTri<i (o'kos, house), -ov, (o), house-servant. 
 
 fiavOavw (^fidd-), f. iia6r\(T0fiai, pf. ) , 
 
 /^ _ V « / learn. 
 
 fiefJba07}Ka, 2 a. efiaaov, ) 
 
 Translate Into SngUslia 
 
 1. StSorat, SiSofj,e0d, eStBoro, eSoTO, eSovTo. 2. Tok? 
 TCtvja SiBovTai; op&fiev. 3. TroWa Sciipa SeSoxat toZs av- 
 dpwiroK Trapa rmv Oeaiv. 4. ot TroXtrat (po^ovvrai,, fir) r] 
 ttoKk irpoSiSuTac. 5. firprore vito tccv <f)t\o)v -rrpoBtBolo. 
 
 6. TO arparevfia inr avTOV tov arpaTrjyov TrpovBiBoTO, 
 
 7. TT/aos Se ^aaiXea irefiirav ijftou Bodrjvai 01 TavTa<; ra? 
 7ro\et?. 8. Kol Be^ia<; Bovrev koI \a^ovTe<s, airrfKavvov, 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. They are giving (for themselves, or of their own re- 
 sources), he was giving (for himself), he is giving (for him- 
 self). 2. They wish to give (of their own resources). 
 3. He gives, he gave, he will give, he has given. 4. Cyrus 
 gives pay to the army. 5. We see those who are giving. 
 6. Give me this sabre. 7. The general fears that the city 
 will be betrayed. 8. They have betrayed the city. 9. A 
 friend will not be betrayed by a friend. 10. They wish to 
 give (second aorist) me the book. 
 
86 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LVII. 
 
 REGULAE VERBS IN [ll, (continued) : PASSIVE AND 
 MIDDLE OF SetKVVflL. 
 
 Learn the Inflection and Synapsis, Passive and Middle. Also, 
 G. 09 and 2 with a-c, 100, 1, 2 (read notes), 101 with 1-4 
 (read notes) ; H. 306, SOT with 1 and 2, 308, 309, 310, 
 311, 312, 318, 319 with exceptions a, b, c, d, 320. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 iiriSeiKWfii {ivi, Setkvviii), show, exhibit. 
 
 iroiriTTi'; (jiroiem, make), -ov, (6), poet. 
 
 viaTK {•n-eiBm), -ew?, (jj), trust, confidence, 
 
 (oveofiai, f. mvr)<rofiai, pf. etovrifiac, 1 , , 
 
 a. f)ass. emv^drjv,^ ) 
 
 •X^pri<Tifioi{ (^j^paofiai, use), -V, -ov, useful. ' 
 
 Kaim or kojod, I. Kavaa, a. eKavaa, \ 
 
 -KSKuvKa (ill comp.), pf. pass, ice- >burn. 
 
 xavfiai, a. pass. eicavBriv, -' 
 
 •yvij,vd<!, -r\, -ov, naked, lightly clad. 
 
 aafia, -aTO<s, (to), oody. 
 
 dXiaicQiiai {d\-, oKo-), 1. oKmaofiai, -\ 
 
 pf. rjXasica or edXaica, 2 a. rJKav >be captured. 
 
 or eaXcov? ^ 
 
 Translate Into EngUgh. 
 
 1 . SeiKVVVTai, eSeiKvvcro, heiicvvtrde. 2. oi aXridw " 
 ffodioi ov ffTrevBovaiv e-TriBeiKwaOai rrjv avTOiv (TO(j)iav. 
 3. MiXTidSr)'! imo rmv ^AOr)vaieov aTpaTrjyoi! aveZei-)(dr). 
 
 1 For 2(1 aorist middle iirpidiniv is used, instead of the later livTjird/iijx. 
 
 2 iXla-Koiuu is used as the passive of alpiui. 
 
 ' Truly. How are adverbs formed from adjectives ? 
 
LESSONS LVIL, LVIU. 87 
 
 4. ^ov\o(ievo^ ovv eviSel^at to arpaTevfia, 6 Kt/po? e^e- 
 Taaiv TToielrai ev TreStp twv 'EXXrjvmv Kai twv ^ap^aptov. 
 
 5. avrip hiKauK ecTTlv, 6(7Ti? aBlKeiv Svvap,evo<s firj /Son- 
 Xerai. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. He entered, they entered, let us enter. 2. He wishes 
 to show the army. 3. He is showing (for himself), they 
 are showing (for themselves). 4. Clearchus was appointed 
 general by Cyrus. , 5. He appoints, he appointed, he will 
 appoint, he has appointed him general. 6. We enter, you 
 enter, enter thou. 7. We are giving, we are showing, we 
 are stationing, (for ourselves). 8. Give thou, station thou, 
 show thou. 9. Give thou (for thyself), station thou (for 
 thyself), show thou (for thyself). 10. He wishes to give, 
 to station, to show. 11. They wish to give (2d aorist) the 
 book. 12. He gives, he gave, he will give, he has given. 
 13. He stations, he was stationing, he will station, he has 
 stationed. 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 lEEEGULAE VERBS IN flL -. THE VERBS elfli AND etjUl. 
 
 G. 118, 1, N., 137, I., N. 1, II., N. 1, 2; H. 393, a, 405 with 
 a-c, 406 with Rems. a, h, 1-3, c. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 (iifivi^aKa) {fivor), f. /jLvrjffo), a. efivrjaa, \ remind, mid. and 
 pf. fie'fjivrjfiai (as present), a. pass. >- pass, remetnber, 
 efjLvija-Orjv (as mid.), ' mention. 
 
88 GREEK LESSONS. . 
 
 TTore, enclitic, at some time, ever. 
 
 , ,,. {old man; also as 
 
 avOpfOTTo^, -ov, (o), (Lat. homo,) man, human being. 
 Kpavyrj {Kpa^a, cry out), -^?, {r\), outcry, noise. 
 
 veo<s, -a, -ov, younff. 
 
 XeuKo?, -j;', -ov, white, bright. 
 
 Xeya), f. Xefto, a eKe^a, pf. eL\oj(a, \ 
 
 pf. pass. e'lKeyfiai. or \e\eyfiai, a. |- collect, gather. 
 
 pass. eXex'^ifv, 2 a. pass. eXiyriv, J 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. etr/tev, eare, effrat, eaovrai. 2. o iSotrtXew effTtv 
 ayado<!. 3. on 7ra<7ii» avOpatroi^^ o avTo<s vovv eariv. 
 4. dvrjTol^ e<T/iev. b.^em,^ rat aBeXtpm ea-riv. 6. ^ffav 
 oui' ovToi eKarov oirKlrai,. 7. Si'/caio? 1<t6\ 'iva Koi 8t- 
 KUitov * Tv^^jj?. 8. fiefivrjao i/eo? we, m? yeptov ear] iroTe. 
 9. aTreini, aiTifiev. 10. oi aTpariwrai airijetTav. 11. o-uj' 
 v/i4J' et/ii." 12. t<u/tei/ eTTt toi" /Sao-tXea. 13. ouSa? 
 aTTTjei TTjOOs ^aiTiKea. 14. rjaav, jjeffav, ea-TCV, eiaiv. 
 
 eivai, levat. 
 
 Translate Into Greelc. 
 
 1. Cyrus was king. 2. The king is good. 3. Be thou 
 good. 4 There were six soldiers. 6. Let us be good. 
 6. He is in the power of his brother. 7. We were good. 
 8. The men are wise. 9. The soldiers are brave. 10. The 
 river is deep. 11. The men were wise. 12. Let us go. 
 13. I will go in company with you. 14. Let us go into 
 the city. 15. The soldiers went to the king, 16. Already 
 
 > G. 184, 4; H. 598, 2. * Also. 
 
 2 G. 138; H. 498. 6 G. 171; H. 574, c. 
 
 » In the power of. » G. 200, N. 3 (6); H. 405, Rem. a. 
 
LESSONS LVIII., LIX. 89 
 
 it seemed expedient to depart. 17. I was going. 18. We 
 were going. 19. The brave soldier went into the presence 
 of the king. 20. He wishes to be king. 21. They wish 
 to go. 
 
 'fix, freeze. 
 
 LESSON LIX. 
 
 lEEEGULAR VERBS OF THE /ni-FORM : ll^jLtl, ^■q\l.L, AND 
 
 G. 127, III., IV., v., VI. ; H. 403, 1, 2, 404, 2, 405, 2. 
 VOCABULARY. , 
 
 . , / , : / w . f send aioay, dismiss. 
 
 afnjfjLi, [a-no, l.rit''t), < /r ^ 
 
 ( suffer to go. 
 Sopv, SopaToi;, (to), spear. 
 
 e0vo^, -609 (-ov^), (to), nation, 
 
 irrjyvvixi (nay-), f. •jrrj^to, a. eirr)- 
 
 fa, 2 f. pf. TTO'yricroiJ.at, 2 pt". 
 
 Tre-rrrjya (as [)resent), de fixed, 
 
 2 a. pas?. €Trayr]v, 
 Bepco, f. Sepo), a. eBeipa, pf. pass. ) „ 
 
 BeSapfmi, 2 a. pass. eSaprjv, )•' 
 . ,,, ,^ I o ' \ i'\ ] crossing over, a m.eans 
 
 ^ ' ■< \'i y^ of crossing, bridge. 
 
 a-^dofMii., f. a-xdeaofiai, f. pass. \ 
 
 dx9e<rdi]crofjLat, a. pass, vx^^' r ^^ displeased. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 . laaiv, iiop,ev, atpietrav. 2- tiyo"* ro-oopv. 6. let, 
 teffai/, eiaiv, eariv, eiaiv. 4. teTO cTrt toi/ paaiKea. 
 
 1 Notice the meaning of ilTjyitt in the mid., —to throw (me' s sol f, to hasten, 
 to rush. 
 
90 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 5rf tiff fx ff «5j,/ rt '.k-v*'' 
 
 . tei/TO €7r avTOV, o. fJjo-t tq a^tvr), I. oKK eym 
 
 ^TjfjLi^ TavTo ((>\uapia<s etvai. 8. ^rjalv^ 6 impoi. 
 
 9. awTOS ovK e^i) uvai. 10. Kvpo<i avTOS aTredave, koi 
 
 o«T(u 01 apiaroi rSiv irepX avrov iKe,iVTO eir avTm. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. He throws his spear, they throw their spears, we 
 throw our spears, let us throw our spears. 2. Throw thy 
 spear, throw your spears. 3. He threw his spear, he was 
 throwing his spear, he has thrown his spears. 4. He rushes 
 against the king. 5. We rush, they rush, let us rush against 
 him. 6. He was hastening, we were hastening, they were 
 liastening, let us hasten against the king. 7. " Let us," 
 said Cyrus, " hasten against the king." 8. They lay upon 
 the ground. 9. " The soldiers," says Cyrus, " lie upon 
 the ground." 
 
 > G. 27, 3; H. 105, o. " G. 28, 3, Note; H. Ill, a. 
 
 LESSON LX. 
 
 SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE /Al-FORM. 
 
 G. 103 (read notes), 103, N., 104, N. 1, 105, 1 (and Notes 1-3), 
 2, 3, 106, 124 with 1 and 2, 137, VII., 300, N. 6; H. 305, 
 313, 314, 316, 318, 321, 322, 409, 1-6. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 jSatVo) {0a-, 0dv-), f. -0ijao/iai (in comp.), pf, /Se- -v 
 0riKa {liave gone, standfast), pf. pass. -/Se/Sa- \ffQ. 
 f/,ai, -e^adriv (rare), 2 a. e^rjv, 2 pf. 0e0aai, J 
 
LESSONS LIX., LX. 91 
 
 fflyvotiai and yivofiai (yev, <ya-), 2 pf. ) 7 
 
 yeyova, I am, 3 
 
 \jiiiivt\tTKai (fivd-), f. fivrjaai, etc., pf. /J-e- \ • j 'A 
 
 CI. Lat. meiinni ), 1 have re- > , 
 
 „,,.,, / , ( remember, 
 
 called to mind, hence 1 remember, ■' 
 
 ireideo, etc., 2 pf. irkvoiOa {I have put \ persuade, m. & 
 confidence), I have confidence in, >- ^ass., persuade 
 I trust, J one's self, obey. 
 
 oWvfii, etc., 2 pf. o\eo\a {I have suf- ) destroy, mid. 
 
 fered destruction), am. undone, ) perish. 
 
 QvqaKw, etc., pf. Ttdvrsica {^I have died, \ ,■ , , . 
 T ,\ ( ate, oe siazn. 
 
 am dead), > 
 
 SetSo) (St-, Set-), etc., pf. hkhoiKa} 2 pf. ) - 
 
 beoia, each pi. in pres. sense, ) 
 
 irKTjyrj {wXrjTTui, -jrXrjy-, stride), -^s, (^,) 6lotO. 
 
 evirpaKTOf {ev, icell, TTpaTTto, do), -ov, easy to do. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. €(TTacriv, ecna)fj,ev. 2. Kot irparov eBaiepve iroKvv 
 j(^povov^ e<TTa><!. 3. ev tare. 4. eyio vfia,'; etSoi? StSa^o). 
 5. rjheaav, rjaav, iffaaiv, laaiv, eio-tf, taaiv. (5. to-^t, 
 ifft, Lcrdi, lei, eiSevai, levai, eivat, eivai. 7. TroWot av- 
 ffpcoTTOt ovT€ BiKai; rfieaav ovre vo/MOVf. 8. on yap rjheaav 
 avrov TedvrjKora. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He knows, he knew. 2. I did not know that he had 
 died. 3. They knew where Cyrus had gone. 4. I do not 
 know where he has gone. 5. He wept a long time stand- 
 ing. 6. They stood, they stand. 7. You know welL 
 8. They are dead. 9. He is afraid. 
 
 ' 6. 109, 3, N. 2 ; H. 334. » That he had been slain. 
 
 " Q. 161; H. 550. 
 
92 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXI. 
 
 rOEMATION OF WORDS. — DEKIVATIOK ; (a.) FORMATION 
 OF SIMPLE WORDS. 
 
 Study G. 128, 1, 2, b, 3, 129, 1-8; H. 452-456, 457-466; learn- 
 ing the chief suffixes and reading the finer print. Notice 
 carefully the rules for accent. 
 
 I. 
 
 Explain the formation of tlie f olloTPing vrords : — 
 
 1. apxVt^ Xoyo-ypa^o?,^ ap-^alo'i? Xoyot.^ 2. TTOtTj- 
 
 T?js, "TTOiTjfia, rypaipevv, nnrev<i. 6. aiorrip, prirap, 
 
 I 11 ' 11 -v ' 12 A "y \Z ' 14 
 
 iroiTjTpia, (rwreipa, TroXtr?;? 4. vpa^K;, yeveo'i^, 
 
 irpay/ia. teko^,^^ aporpov}^ aKpoarripiov. 5. Xoyelov, 
 
 ve6Tri<;^ evBeup-ovla,^^ TraiBiov,^ iraiBdpiov,^ vatBiaxr].^ 
 
 1 Simple word, i.e. formed from a single stem. This word is also formed 
 directly from the verb-stem dpx- (stem of S.px-ui), by means of the suffix d, 
 nom. ti. ^ 
 
 ^ Compound word, 1. e. formed from two stems, >jsy- (\ayo-) and ypatp-. 
 In the first word, a change of vowel takes place. Remember that com- 
 pounds are formed from stems or roots. 
 
 ' Denominatvue, i. e. formed by the suffix to-s, directly from the stem 
 ipX"- (stem of dpx'i). with contraction of vowels. 
 
 * Suffix 0, nom. o-s, and stem \ey; with interchange of vowel. 
 
 ' Suffix Tij-s. The verb-stem iroie- (ttoi^-u), with the general meaning 
 of making or composing, is limited by means of the suffix to some particular 
 act ; i. e. person composing, poet. The final vowel of the stem is lengthened, 
 as is often the case, especially before a consonant. The accent is usually 
 recessive, i. e. aa far as possible from the end : verbals in tijs, especially 
 when the penult is long by nature or position, are exceptions. 
 
 ° Suffix /HOT-, nom. ;iia, meaning thing composed, poem: final vowel of 
 the stem lengthened. 
 
 ' Suffix eu-s (always oxytones), denoting agency : In verbals, denoting 
 the person who performs some action ; in denominatives, the person who 
 
LESSON LXI. 93 
 
 has to do with some object. The verb-stem is ypa<t>-, present ypArpoi (cl. 1) ; 
 hence ypa^-ei-s, writer. 
 
 " Denominative; no^n-stem Iwo-, nominative ??riro-s. A final vowel 
 is often dropped before a vowel in the suffix. 
 
 ' Verbal ; suffix rip-, from verb-stem au-, present ailm, aad-, criifia. 
 (See general Vocab. for 1st aorist passive.) 
 
 w Suffix TOP-, nom. rap ; verb-stem ^e-, future ipw, from Fep- (cf. Lat. 
 ver-burn), and by metathesis Fpe-, and by loss of F, ^e-, from the stem pe-. 
 
 11 Feminine termination. See p. 92, N. 5, for the formation. 
 
 i'^ Stem TToXixa-, nom. ToXirris ; primitive noun-stem ttoXi-, nom. jriXt-s. 
 
 1' Verb-stem irpaK- {irpaKioi ^ irpiaaa, cl. 4) = irpoK-ffis = ir/3a|(s. 
 See G. 128, 3, N. 2; H. 455, e. 
 
 1* Suffix ai, which is for ti (see H. 62); present middle yi-yv-op-ai; 
 present stem yi.--Y(i)v = ytv- (2 pf. 7^01/0, G. 128, 3, N. 5); verb-stem ytv-, 
 whence Yey-os (from ytvea-oi) or 76W-, whence yhe-cris. 
 
 15 Verb-stem irpaic-, present irp&aaw (cl. 4). As to accent, neuter sub- 
 stantives take the accent as far back as possible (recessive accent). 
 
 1° Suffix e-s, nom. o-i; verb-stem rex-, present ri/crw (t£k-), cl. 3. 
 
 " Suffix Tpo, nom. rpo-v ; verb-stem d/)o-, present apbui, plmigh (cl. 1), 
 (Lat. ara-tru-m, from aros-o, ara). 
 
 18 Suffix TTipLO; nom. TTipio-v ; verb-stem &Kpoa-, present iKpoiopui, 
 hear, cl. 1. 
 
 w Suffix eio, nom. eio-K (perispomenon) ; noun-stem Xoyo-, nom. X67o-s. 
 The final vowel is elided. 
 
 ^ Suffix TjjT-, nom. ti;-s; adjective-stem wo-, nom. v4o-s, youiig. 
 
 21 Suffix m, nom. £a (paroxytone) ; adjective-stem eiSaipAiv, nom. eMoi- 
 
 JUUI'. 
 
 ^ Suffix 10, nom. lo-;- ; noun-stem iroiS-, nom. irai-s. For accent, see 
 H. 465, a. 
 
 ^ Suffix apm-, nom. ipio-v. 
 
 "* Suffix lo-Ko, fern. urKa, nom. fo-co-s. 
 
 II. 
 Form words with the following meanings: — 
 
 1. Fight,! writer,^ judge,^ poet,* citizen.^ 2. Origin.s 
 action,^ child,8 word.^ 3. Court of justice,!" little garden," 
 barber.'^ 4. House-servant.^^ faith.^* 
 
 1 Verb-stem nax; present nix-op^^- For suffix, see p: 92, N. 1. 
 
 2 Verb-stem ypa<l>-, present yp6.<j)W. See p. 92, N. 7. 
 
 * Verb-stem icpi-, present Kpivu (k/jixiw = Kpivu). See p. 92, N. 5. 
 
94 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 * Verb-stem n-oie-, present jroi^w j see p. 92, N. 5. What are words 
 called that are immediately formed from verb-stems ? 
 
 ' Noim-stem ttoXi-, nom. t6\i-5. See p. 92, N. 5. 
 
 ° Verb-stem 7ei'(e)-, present middle yiyvoimi. See p. 93, N. 14. 
 
 ' Verb-stem rpaK-, present irpasaiii. See p. 93, N. 13. 
 
 " Verb-stem re/t-, present tIktu (cl. 3). See p. 93, N. 16. 
 
 ' Verb-stem X67- ; c changed to 0. See p. 92, N. 4. 
 
 1" Verb-stern StKoS-, present SiKdia (cl. 4). See p. 93, N. 18. A t- 
 mute before another t- mute is changed to a. 
 
 11 Noun-stem ktjtto-, nom. KrjTro-i (parox. when the first syllable is long 
 by nature or position). See p. 93, N. 22; also last of N. 19. 
 
 •2 Verb-stem Kep-, present Kclpa {Kepiu, cl. 4). See p. 92, N. 7. 
 
 " Noun-stem oIko-, nom. ol/co-s; interchange of vowel. For suffix, 
 see p. 93, N. 12. 
 
 " Verb-stejn wtB-, present middle TeWo/nai (cl. 2). For suffix, see 
 p. 93, N. 14; for euphonic change, see N. 10, above. 
 
 III. 
 
 Read G. 129, 9-17, and 130, 1-8, and notes; H. 466-473. Notice 
 carefully the rales for accent. 
 
 Explain the formation of the following vrords : — 
 
 1. Ilpiafil^^,^ TlpiafiK, Qea-Tldbqt!? &ea-nd'!. 2. ZIi;- 
 XetSi;?,* ArjToiSr)!;,^ Meyapev^,^ TeyeaTrji:.^ 3. 8iKaio<;J 
 ovpiivio<;, A6r]valo<i. 4. ypa(j>iKd^,^ ffacnXiKo'i,^ ^vXir 
 fo?.^" 5. ^apieK,^^ Beiv6<;,^^ fidxtf'Ol,^^ iiiaOdw, Tifida, 
 ^i\ea>, ^affiXevto, eKTtiijco, epyd^ofiai, (nj/jbaivta}* 
 
 ' Suffix masc. Sa, nom. Sri-s (paroxytone) ; noun-stem IIpio/no-, nom. 
 Upla/w-t, — feminines end in d, nom. s (oxytone). Stems of the second 
 declension substitute 1 for ; those in ev and of the third declension 
 take I as a connecting vowel, before which the v of ev is dropped (G. 53, 
 2, N. 1 ; H. 39). 
 
 ^ Noun-stem Ofano-, nom. Qia-Tio-s. Stems of second declension in 10 
 change this to 10. 
 
 8 Noun-stem IIijXeB-, nom. ni)Xci!-s ; u is dropped, > is taken as con- 
 necting vowel. 
 
LESSON LXI. 95 
 
 * Noun-stem Atjto-, nom. Kifri. For change of vowel, see p. 94, 
 N. 1. Feminine stems end in S, nom. s. 
 
 5 Suffix eu, uom. ei)-s; noun-stem Me7apo-, nom. Miyapa (nom. pi.); 
 is elided. See p. 93, N. 8. 
 
 s Te7^a, gen. -as, the tovm of Tegea. 
 
 ' Suffix 10, nom. lo-s (pioparaxytone) ; stem 5oco-, nom. SIkii. 
 
 ' From 'kdrfiat. 
 
 ' Suffix K0-, nom. kS-s (oxytone), with the connecting vowel i. 
 
 ^^ Suffix LVO-, uom. ivo-s (propavoxytone); stem fuXo-, nom. fi5\o-y. 
 
 ^1 Stem X"/"-! uom. xdpi-s, suffix -ckt, nom. mase. -ii.-s, fern, -eo-o-o, 
 n. -ex ; vr (in forming the nom. ) is dropped before a, and the preceding 
 vow^l lengthened to ei. 
 
 1'^ Suffix V0-, nom. kj-s (oxytone), stem Sei- (see G. 32, N. 1; H. 30), 
 verb SeiSui, VBib-stem Si.-, lengthened to Jei-. 
 
 18 Suffix |Uo-s (proparoxytoue), connecting vowel i, stem/iox-. 
 
 1* From ff^/io, sigm. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Form words with the f oUo'wins meanings : — 
 
 1. Son of Priam, daughter of Priaui, son of Peleus.' 
 2. Son of 'Tantalus,^ Megarian. 3. Domestic,^ kingly,* 
 Milesian,* suited for action.^ 4. Golden,'' woody,® useful* 
 5. To be hungry,^" to take counsel," to judge,^* to num- 
 ber,'^ to use force,'* to be asliamed.^^ 
 
 ' Noun-stem IIi;X6i;.. 
 
 ^ Noun-stem Tan-oXo-. 
 
 = Noun-stem mVo-. G. 128, 3, N. 3; H. 455 c. 
 
 « See N. 3. 
 
 '' Noun-stem MiXijro- ; t before t often passes into a. 
 
 '' Stem irpay-; y and t become co-ordinate {yr = kt). G. 16, 1; 
 H. 44. 
 
 ' Stem xpvo'o-, nom. xpwi-!. 
 
 ' , Stem fuXo-, nom. f liXo-x. 
 
 ° Verb-stem x/"»-, present mid. xP'^of^^i final vowel being lengthened, 
 l" ireira or Tebri, hnnger, noun-stem iretva-, ending -dw. Form the 
 first person singular, present indicative. 
 
 " /SouX^ -5s, (ij), advice. '* ^I'o, ending -dfo/iot. 
 
 i'^ SiKi;, ending -if-dj. 15 olirxos, ending -iJi/OjEioi. 
 
 1' afii,8ii6s, ending -^u. 
 
9G GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXII. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. — DERIVATION ; (i.) FORMATION 
 OF COMPOUND WORDS. 
 
 G. 131, 1-7, 132, 1-3; H. 473-483. 
 
 I. 
 Give tbe meaning and composition of the f oUovrlne ivaTdg : — 
 
 1. It aTpoKT ova's ^ •jrarpdBe\(f>o^.^ 2. Tetj^o/itaj^io,' Ojoe- 
 ra\6yo<!,^ \i0ol3o\ia.^ 3. ireiOap'yo'i^ 4. BaKeOvfiov.^ 
 5. p^opoSi8a<7«aX.09.* 6. a/Saros.^ 7. <j>i\oiTO<f)ia}'^ 8. ^t- 
 Xdpyvpoi;,^^ <f)l\ofj,ad-^fP 9. j^eipoTrX.jj^i^?,''^ a^to'Xoiyo?,^* 
 aStKo?,-'^ a^eo?.^® 10. crT/aaToTreSoj/.''^' 1 1 . j^et/jo7rot»7To?.^^ 
 12. Beia-iSai/ituv}^ 13. yXou/icaiTrts.^ 14. dxpoTroXK.^^ 
 15. dru;)^?;?.^ 
 
 ' Noun-stem irarp-, nom. TroTiip, father; yerb-stem (tTen-, present ktcIpu 
 (noun KT6ro-s), to fc'W. o is assumed as a connecting vowel. 
 
 ^ No connecting vowel is assumed, because the second word begins 
 with a vowel. v 
 
 ' Stem Tftx^s, nom. retxos, wall, and /idx'/i 6«Wfc. 
 
 * Stem ipera-, nom. dptTij, uiriMc, retains final vowel; Xiy-a (see 
 p. 92, N. 4), prate. 
 
 6 Mflos, s«™e, and /3(iXXw (nonn-.9tem /SouXa-, nom. ^ouXii), to <Aroi«. 
 « veieoimL, to obey, and apxis (^TOi^), "«^«''. *W". <» »•«'«■ 
 ' SaKK-oj (cl. .^) and fiu^i-s ; t is assumed as connecting vowel. 
 
 * xipof, chorus, and SMitku), to teach. 
 ' &- and /Soii-oj (stem /3a-), <o lyo. 
 
 ^1 ipiK^a, to love, and <ro<pia, wisdom. 
 
 " i^iX^u and fip7i;po!, silver money, money. 
 
 ^2 0iX^(i) and p,avBi,vij>. 
 
 1' X^'P, ^Wf^, and 7rXi)9u, to become full. 
 
 '* tffios, worthy, and X670S, jmtiWoji. 
 
 >' fiSi/cos, from d- and SUti. 
 
 1' d- and Seis, god. 
 
 " aTparis, an army encamped, and ir^Sov, ground. 
 
LESSON Lxn. 97 
 
 w x'^lpi Tiand, voiia, to make. 
 
 1' ielSu, to fear, Sal/juav, divinity. 
 
 ^'' 7XauKis, bright, and &>j/ (from root iv; t^ofuu, fut. of bp&ia), eye. 
 
 ^1 &Kpbs, high, and rriXts, city. 
 
 ^ a- and rixtt fortune. 
 
 II. 
 Form -words ivith the folloiving meanings: — 
 
 1. Land-describer,^ matricide,^ slaying with the 
 sword.^ 2. Honor-loving,* ship-fight.^ 3. Invisible,^ 
 unjust.^ 4. Fond of horses,^ fond of danger.® 5. 
 Horse-driving,^" fighting in ships.^' 6. Ship-builder,^^ 
 speech-writer.^* 7. Long-handed.^* 8. False herald.'* 
 9. Childless.16 10. Unwritten." 11. Difacult to cross.^s 
 12. Learning with difficulty. 13. Ill-advised. 14. Gen- 
 eral.^® 
 
 1 X(4/)a, country, a changed to o, and ypiipu, to write. 
 
 2 fi'/iTrfp, mother, and ktcIvoi {KTei>-), to kill; o is assumed as a connect- 
 ing vowel. 
 
 ' |(<^os (stem ^i</>es), sivord, and Kreivoj (stem ktcv-), to slay; o is 
 assumed as a connecting vowel. 
 
 * Ttp.'/i, honor, and (piXia, to love ; interchange of e with o. 6. 131, 6 ; 
 H. 474. 
 
 ' toOs, ship, p-ixt, fight. 
 
 * d- and (palvta (stem (pav-), to he visible. 
 ' d- and SIkt\, justice. 
 
 * <l>l\ot, fond, and tiriroi, horse. 
 
 ' 0(Xos, fond, and kIvSvvos, danger. 
 
 1" TrX-ijo-ffw (stem ttXijv-), «o drive, and Vttos. G. 17, 1; H. 72. 
 ^' raOs, ship, and Mdx'7, ^jrAi. 
 
 ^2 raCs, sAjp, and iriqyi>vp.i, to build (stem 5ra7-, lengthened to irijv-, cl. 1 1) . 
 ^ X670S, speech; 7pd0u, io wWZe. • 
 
 '* IxaKpbi, long, and x^^Pj hand. 
 15 yj/evS-qs, false, and ic^/3u|, herald. 
 1' d- and irals, cAj7(i 
 " d- and 7pd0w, io lan'te. 
 
 M Suff. (an inseparable prefix), ill, bad, denoting difficult, and /So/ku 
 (stem (3a-), to go. 
 
 1' crTpardii and a7wi' (a7w), army-leading. 
 
 7 
 
98 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXIII. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. — SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 
 AND OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Subject and Predicate. — G. 133, 134, 1-3, N. 2, 135, 1-3, 
 N. 1, 2, 4, 136 (read N. 1-4); H. 485-490, 497, a, h, 504 
 (a, h, c), 511, a-r/, 513, 514, </, 515, 517 (read 530-523). 
 
 Aitposition ; Agreetnent of Adjectives, — G. 137, 138 with 
 Rem., N. 8, 139; H. 496, 498, 499 (read 500, a-d). 
 
 ArHele. — G. 140, 141, N. 1-8, 142, 1, N., 2 (read N. 1-5), 3, 4, 
 N. 1-6, 143, 1, N. 2, 2; H., read 524, 525, a-y, 526, o, 6, 
 527, a, d, 529, 531-538 with a and c. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. eyo) Kai av ypa^ofiev. 2. eyo) koI eKeivo<s ypd^o- 
 fiev. 3. ffv Kai eKeivov ypcupeTe. 4. ao(f>oi iyo) koI av 
 T)fiev. 5. 7a ^ma rpe'^ei. 6. aBe\<})(0 Svo r/aav KoXoi. 
 7. Kvpoi 7]v 0aai,\ev<i. 8. o ttotij/j fiovXerai, etvai 
 (To^o<:. 9. Sio)Ka)fiev to, KoKa. 10. Bavfid^onev MiKrici- 
 Srjv Tov arpaTT\yov. 1 1 . KoXovaiv avTov ffTpaTrjyov. 
 12. rjv Tj irapoBoi; arevr}. 13. o arpaTTiyo^ £<j)r) irpoOv- 
 lJio<i evvai 14. Seofj,ai a-ov^ irpodv/jLOv elvai. 15. <rv/j,- 
 0ov\eva) aoi Trpoffvfuo) eivai. 16. e(j>r} ere evSaip,ova 
 eivai. 17. Beofiai aov irpodvfMOv eivat. 18. Eevtov iiev 
 Br) Ton? eK TQiv iroXeeav Xa^cov irapeyeveTo ei? XdpBeK. 
 19. ei'x^e Be to fi€v Se^iov Mevmv koI ol aw avrai, ro 
 B evcovvfjLov FXeap'^oi Kai oi eiceivov, ro Be fietrov ol 
 aWot (TTpaTriyoi. 20. e\o/86 ra vakra ets rav p^etjoo?. 
 21. ■f}nMi rjv iraaa rj ')(wpa. 22. 6 Be Xa^mv to ^(pvaiop, 
 
 ' G. 172, 1 and 2, N. 1; H. 575 and u. ^ G. 187; H. 605. 
 
LESSONS LXIII., LXIV. 99 
 
 arpaTevfia wveXe^ev airo toutiop tujv •^prjij.aTtov. 23. tou? 
 fiev avTcov aireicTeive, Toi/? S €^e^a\ev. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. He and I wrote the letter. 2. Thou and I are writ- 
 ing the letter. 3. We admire Cyrus, the king. 4. You 
 and he are wise. 5. The road is narrow. 6. He wishes 
 to be wise. 7. They asked (begged) Cyrus to be ready. 
 8. He says that he is happy. 9. I advise you to be zeal- 
 ous. 10. The man is wise. 11. The wise man wrote the 
 letter. 12. Cyrus marches through a friendly country. 
 13. Let us go to the king. 14. There are many wild ani- 
 mals in the park. 15. Some are good, others are base. 
 16. Cyrus sent for his generals, and they came. 17. Me- 
 iion and those with him take their javelins into their hands. 
 18. Virtue is beautiful. 19. Menon's soldiers and those 
 of Clearchus march into the city. 20. All the country is 
 bare. 
 
 LESSON IXIV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 Pronouns. — G. 144, 1, 2, 145, 1, 2, 146, 147, N. 1-4, 148, N. 1, 
 149, 1, 2, 150, 151, 152, 153 with N. 1 and 2, 154, 15&; 
 H. 667, 668, 669, h and c, 670 with a, 671, 673, 674, 675, 
 676, 678, 679, 807, 808, 809, 810, 818. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. eyo) /lev airei/jLC, av he fieveK. 2. o Trat? eavrov 
 eiraivei. 3. o arpaTrjyo^ vtto rmv eavrov inpaTimiwv 
 anredavev. 4. auTo? ovk e<f}7) levai. 5. oi TroXe/iioi 
 
100 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 vapeBoaav eavTOV^ (or tr^a? avTovs;) tow ' EWr/a-iv. 
 G. 01 "TToXirai ra a^erepa a-ai^eiv eireipSturo. 7. avjov 
 aaTpavqv 6Troiijae. 8. trvX\e^a<! ro avrov <tt parev/j-a 
 eXe^e raBe. 9. Kvpo<! Be avTO<i re aireOave, Kai, oktq) o^ 
 apia-Toi tS)v irepL uvtov eKeivro ev out to. 10. Kvpov fie- 
 TaTTf/ttireTat airo t^? ap^rjii, t^? avrov aa-rpaiTrjv eiroirjae. 
 1 1 . eXa^ev a €0ovXeTo. 1 2. ravTu enrwv €t? Trjv eav- 
 Tov j^wpav dvTqXavve. 1 3. (ov ej^et?, tovtcov ^ aXXoK 
 irape'-xpv. 14. 6efM<7T0KXfj<i rjicco irapa ae. 15. Kvpo<i 
 wrpoa-rjXde aw y etj^e Bvvafiei. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. I myself wrote the letter. 2. Cyrus was not killed 
 by his own soldiers. 3. We all love ourselves. 4. The 
 boy insults (v^pl^ei) his own father. 5. I insult my own 
 father.^ 6. We insult our own father. 7. They insult 
 their own father. 8. The boys insult their own father. 
 9. Cyrus wished to make him satrap. 10. I will praise 
 them on account of their braver)'. 11. The men praise 
 themselves. 12. Cyrus and those with him were killed. 
 13. The soldiers themselves marched into the city. 14. Let 
 us conquer the army which the king has. 15. He banished 
 those who were plotting* these same things. 16. Cyrus 
 spoke as follows. 17. Cyrus collected his own army. 
 18. Menon marches with the others. 19. He collected 
 his army, and spoke as follows. 20. Cyrus put on his 
 breastplate. 21. The generals praise themselves. 22. I 
 will praise them on account of their bravery. 23. The 
 soldiers themselves marched, some through this city, others 
 through that. 
 
 1 Some of those things.. G. 170, 2; H. 574, e. 
 
 '^ Not tAk i/iiv airov iraripa. H. 676. 
 
 ' " Those who were plotting," use the participle. 
 
LESSONS LXIV., LXV. 101 
 
 LESSON LXV. 
 
 NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND VOCATIVE CASES. 
 
 Nominative and, Vocative. — G. 157, 1, 2; H. 539, 540, 543. 
 
 Accusative. — G. 158, 159 (read N. 1-5), 160, 1, 2, 161, 163 with 
 N. 1 and 2, 164, 165 with N. 1 and 2, 166 ; H. 544 (read 
 a, h, c, (I), 545, 546, 547 with a and b, 549, 550, 552 (read 
 the fine print), 553, 555, 556 with a and b. 
 
 Translate Into Snglish. 
 
 1. ava^aivei ovv 6 KOpo? Xa^wv Tia-era^epvrjv m? <j)l- 
 "Kov, 2. K\eap'xp<s AaKeSaifiovio^ ^i/ya? ■^v. 3. KXeap- 
 ^6 Kui Ilpo^eve, Kai oi aWoi ot irapovre'; ' ' E\\r)ve<;, ovk 
 ko-re o Tl TTOieiTe. 4. avOpmire, /xr] Spa tovi TeOvrjKOTai: 
 KUKOKi, 5. ev Xeiye rov ev Xeyovra ical ev voiei tou ev 
 TToiovvTa. 6. fia')(r]v €fia^ovTO. 7. Sea fiearji; Trj<; wo- 
 Xera? pel W0Tafw<!, KvSvov ovo/j,a, evpo<s Bvo m-XeOpav. 
 8. evjevOev Kvpoi ttjv KiXiaaav et? ttiv h iXiKian diro- 
 Tre/iTret T-qv Ta'^iffTTjv oSov. 9. evraiida efieiie Tpelt 
 rjfiepaif. 10. e^eXavvei 8ta ^pvyiat crTaOfiov kva, vapa- 
 aay<ya<i oktw. 11. vtj At , e^ri 6 Kvpo's. 12. Kvpov 
 an el irXoia. 13. Kat, arpaTqyov avrov aweSei^e. 
 1-1. rjyovfiai ae avBpa ayaOov, 15. (TTparevfia crvveXe- 
 yero Tovhe rov rpoTTOV. 16. fJ-a Tovi 6eov<i ovk eycoye 
 avTov<; Biw^eo. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The man wrote the letter. 2. The letter was written' 
 by the man. 3. Tissaphernes accuses Cyrus to^ his brother. 
 4. He was an exile. 5. Cyrus made the levy in the follow- 
 
 1 Present participle of Trdpei/n. ° Use the preposition irpds. 
 
 " G. 127, VII.; H. 409, 6. 
 
102 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 ing manner. 6. Cyrus, you do not know what you are 
 doing. 7. Cyrus remained here thirty days. 8. Cyrus 
 made a review of the army in the park, 9. Cyrus and the 
 army remained here twenty days. 10. The soldiers asked 
 Cyrus for their pay. 11. Cyrus appointed him general. 
 12. Yes, by Jupiter, he will fight. 13. Do not, Cyrus, 
 appoint him commander. 14 Do not speak ill of your 
 friends. 
 
 LESSON IXYI. 
 
 GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 Genitive after Nouns. — G. 167, 1-6, 168; H. 557, 558, a-i, 
 
 559-568. 
 Genitive after Verbs. — G. 169, 1, 2, 3, 170, 1, 2, 171, 1, 2, 3, 
 
 172, 1, 2, 173, 1, 2, 3; H. 570, 571, 572, a-h, 574, a-e, 575 
 
 (read fine print), 576, 577. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. e^eTaaiv iroieiTai ev rm ireSip r&v 'EXKr\v(ov Koi 
 rwu ^ap^apcov. 2. ea-ri ' Koi fieyoKov /SacriXe'euv /Saai- 
 \€ia 6v Kekaivaii epvfiva, eirl Tal<; ifrfyaK tov Mapavov 
 iroTafiov. 3. aZevTTvoi rjaav oi, irXelaTot tojv ' EXKr^voav . 
 4. avBp6<! ecTTtv^ ayadov ev "TToielv tov<; (f)i\ovi;. 5. to 
 TeiT^o? XiOov ireTToi'qTai. 6. Aapeiov Kai UapvaaJihoK 
 f/LyvoVTai,^ TTOtSe? Si/o, 7. eXa^ov rrj^ ^iovt}<} tw 'Opop- 
 Tiji/. 8. Bi^Bepai eiri/jLvXaaav 'XppTov kou^ov. 9. 6av- 
 fia^co ScoKpaTtj tJjs ao^ia<i. 10. rov arpaTov eXa^ev, 
 
 1 See G. 29, 8, N. ; H. 406, Eem. b. ^ What is the subject of IffTiv ! 
 3 Historical present. G. 200, N. 1 ; H. 699. 
 
LESSONS LXVI., LXVII. 103 
 
 11. T^s e\€v6epia<; vfia^ eyco evSaifiovi^o), 12. ^aaikevi 
 rfj<; trpot eaprov evi^ovKr)^ ovk rjaBavero. 13. Tavra 
 Xeycov dopv^ov r/Kovcre Bia rwv ra^ecov tovroi} 14. ij 
 omia Tov a-rpaTiryov ejevero. 15. ol •jroXefjbioi rfp^av 
 aSiKcov epycov. 16. riv erwv m? rpiaKovra. 17. to Telr 
 ^09 ■qv evpo'i eiKOffL ttoocov. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The king's sons are in the park. 2. There is a palace 
 of the great king in the park. 3. The book belongs to the 
 boy. 4. Most of the Greeks are brave. 5. It was charac- 
 teristic of Cyrus to benefit his friends. 6. Cyrus sends 
 away some of his friends. 7. After this, they took Orontas 
 by the girdle. 8. He heard the noise. 9. He thought he 
 was worthy to rule the cities. 10. I admire the man for 
 his wisdom. 11. The king did not perceive the danger. 
 
 12. I am in need of your counsel. 13. We have a multi- 
 tude, not only of horsemen, but also^ of hoplites. 14. He 
 began his speech^ as follows. 
 
 1 See G. 127, II. ; H. 406. ^ \j^ t^e proper case of \lr/ot (o). 
 
 2 See Lesson LXXI. 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 GEIHTIVE CASE (continued). 
 
 Genitive after Verbs (continued). — G. 174, 175, 1, 2, 176, 1, 2, 
 
 177; H. 578, a, 579, a-c, 580, 581, a, 583. 
 Genitive with Adjeetii'es. — G. 178, N., 180, 1, 2, 181; H. 584, 
 
 a-ff, 585, 580, 587, a-f. 
 Genitive with Adverbs. — Gr. 182, 1, 2; H. 588, 589 (read fine 
 
 print). 
 Genitive of Time, Genitive Absolute. — G. 179, 1, 183 ; 
 
 H. 591, 592,593. 
 
104 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate Into Engllgh. 
 
 1. aaiea>p Se7]aoftai. 2. Ti<r(Ta^epv7ji O'PX^^ '^'^'^ """" 
 \e6)i'. 3. Soi5\o? irevje fivmv Tifiarai,. 4. fi av8pe<: 
 EXXrjve^, ovk avOpairmv aTropmv ^ fiap^apcov aviJi,naj(pv'i 
 vfjt,a<; ayto, aWa vo/jll^wv afieivova<s Kat Kpemov} iroWmv 
 ^ap^apcov vp-at etvai, Sia tovto TrpoaeXajSop. 5. evravOa 
 Stea'y(pv aWriXtov /SacrtXeu? re xal ol ' EWrive<; m? Tpia- 
 Kovra araSia. 6. Soieel rovro) tov Trpo? e/te iroXefiov irav- 
 aaaOai. 7. o vio<i fiei^cov eart tov ttot/jo?. 8. o irarr^p 
 pet^cov eanv jj 6 wos. 9. oi irdKepiioi virepe^avrjaav tov 
 Xo^ov. 10. ^atriXevs ov p.a'xeiTai^ Sexa r^fiepStv. 
 1 1 . evravda rjaav Ka)p,ai voWai p,eaTai ctitov kui ol- 
 vov. 1 2. /' vpo<i sTrep.'rre^ I3ikov<s olvov ^/itSeetv iroWaKK. 
 13. evTavOa Kvpeo ^acriXeia r)v km irapaheiaof; p,eyav 
 aypicov 0r)pitov irXripriv. 14. e/ia^ovTO a^i(o<s \oyov, 
 15. Sojptov^ avTov<; eSioo^ev. 16. BaySi/XfUfo? ov iroXv 
 mre'^ovcTtv, 17. nrirov p,voiv Tpia>v eirpiaTo. 18. 0ep,i- 
 aTOKXiov<! r}yovp.6VOV TroWei Kai KaXa epya aveBei^avTO oi 
 A67jvaioi. 19. av60i) eTTi to, opt) ov8evo(; kcoXvovtoi:, 
 20. OTrXiTa<s aTTo^i^a^ei etcut koi e^to tS)v ttvXwv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. Cyrus and the army remained here twenty days. 
 2. We were in need of your counsel. 3. He values the slave 
 at five minse. 4. I think the Greeks are better and braver 
 than the barbarians. 5. The son is wiser than his father. 
 6. Cyrus will not fight within ten days. 7. The river is full 
 of water. 8. He was not worthy to rule the men. 9. The 
 country was full of wild animals. 10. He was braver 
 than his soldiers. 11. The soldiers encamped near a park 
 
 1 G. 277, 2; H. 789, c. » G. 200, N. 5; H. 701. 
 
 » G. 110, II. 2, N. 1; H. 374, 422, 10. « Fcyr bribery. 
 
LESSONS LXVll., LXVIII. lOS 
 
 full of wild animals. 12. He took (a part) of his army 
 and marched within the walls. 13. At the command of 
 Cyrus, the soldiers rushed against the enemy. 14. While 
 we were present,^ Cyrus spoke. 15. These things happened 
 on that day. 16. There is a palace of the great king (sit- 
 uated) near the sources of the river Marsyas. 17. The 
 soldiers marched away as rapidly as possible, because ^ the 
 enemy were pursuing them. 18. Because the army has 
 been collected, we shall fight with the king. 
 
 1 G. 277, 1, 278, 1; H. 788, a, also^OO. ^ (j. 277, 2; H. 790. 
 
 LESSON LXVIII. 
 
 , DATIVE CASE. 
 
 Dative of Influence and of Interest, — G. 184, 1-5, 185 ; 
 
 H. 595, a, b, 596-601. 
 Dative of Association and Likeness, — G. 186; H. 60%, 1, 
 
 603, 604. 
 Dative with Compound Verbs, — G. 187 ; H. 605. 
 
 Translate Into Euglish. 
 
 1 . BlBaxri nia&ov rm <n pa-rev iiaTt. 2. Toi<s vouok 
 TreiOeTai. 3. ovtqi; Kvpm eivev. 4. Tots <TTpaTicorai<; 
 a>(j>€iXeTO fit(706'}. 5. Ilapva-aTK Sr) rj /J-Tfrrip vTrfjp)^e rat 
 Kvpm, (f)iX.ovffa avTov /xaXKov r) rov ^aatXevovra Apra- 
 ^tp^Tjv. G. Koi avTT] av aWi} Trpo^ao-t? rjv avrcp rod 
 adpoi^eiv aTpaT€v/J,a. 7. trapa /SacrtXeo)? ttoWoi ttjOO? 
 Kvpov aTTrjXdov, eneiSri •rroXep.ioi, aXX7)X.ot? ejevovTo. 
 8. STrel S' eBoxei ainw ^Stj iropeveaOai avto, r-^v wpo^aa-iv 
 
lOG aUKEK LESSONS. 
 
 eTToieiTo, to? ^ niaiBa<s ffovXo/jLevoi; cK^aXelv iravravaffiv 
 €K T^? y(^ci)pa<s. 1). xal ovto<; 8ij, ov mero viarov oi eivai, 
 Taxy avTov evpe Kvpw (fnXatrepov ^ iavim. 10. Kvpoi 
 e\£^£i/ 071 ovTTca hrj iroWov y^povov tovtov ^ rjStovt oivcp 
 eTrtrv)(oi? 11. evravda Kvp^ fiaffiXeia rjv. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He gave the book to me. 2. He was angry with the 
 man. 3. They obey the king. 4. The soldiers trust the 
 words of the general. 5. They speak to Cyrus. 6. He 
 had this pretext for raising an army. 7. The soldiers will 
 follow the guide. 8. Many deserted from the king after 
 he and Cyrus became hostile to each other. 9. The king 
 found the guide more faithful to Cyrus than to himself. 
 
 1 G. 277, N. 2; H. 795, v. » G. 243; H. 736. 
 
 * Why genitive ? 
 
 LESSON IXIX. 
 
 DATIVE C.-iSE (continued). 
 
 Dative of Cause, Manner, &e. — G. 188, 1-5, 281, 1, 2 ; 
 
 H. 606-611, 804, a, h, 805. 
 naUve of Time. — G. 189 ; H. 613. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. ot nroKefuai, (^OjS^) aTrfjXdov. 2. to yap TrXrjdo^ 
 (^ea-Ti) iroXv, kcu xpavyy ttoW^ eviaaiv. 3. axovTi^et 
 Tt? avTov nraXrm viro top o^daXfwv ^laicoiJ' 4. oipdaK- 
 
 • How are adverbs formed from adjectives ? 
 
LESSONS LXVIII., LXIX. 107 
 
 (lOK opaifiev, (oalv atcovofiev. 5-. TroXt? avrodi atKelro fie- 
 yaXri Kai evSai,fiiov, 6ayjraico<s ovofiaTi. 6. off^) av Out- 
 top e\d(0, TOffovTa oTTapaffKevoTipm ^acriKei /iw^ov/iai. 
 7. Travd rjfiiv ireirolriTai. 8. TavTa rjiuv iroiijTeov 
 (ea-Tiv). 9. o)6TO yap Tavrj) tt] rjfiepa fia'^tiaOai 0a<Tir 
 Xea/' 1 0. Mi\r)TO<; ainm <pi\T) rjv. ] ' . Spofiot; ryevero 
 Tot? aTparicoTaii; eiri ra? i7Kr]va<;. l.i. iroTUfj.O'i i fur yeaTiJ 
 Sta/Sareos. 13. j^aXe'Jra)? (jtepo) Tot? Trapovcn^- Trpay/xacn. 
 14. efioi TovTO ov TTonjTiov. 15. i^aXev avrov \i6(p. 
 IG. tTTeaOai v/uv fiovXofiai. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. Tliey advanced with a loud shout. 2. Cyrus has a 
 palace here. 3. They hit him with a dart. 4. They cast 
 stones at him. 5. We must do these things. 6. We 
 must cross the river. 7. The king will fight on the follow- 
 ing day. 8. They all came on the same day. 9. Those 
 hostile to the king came on that day. 10. He speaks to 
 the soldiers, and they advance with a loud shout. 11. We 
 see with our eyes. 12. The soldiers advance on the run.* 
 13. Cyrus plots against his brother. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES ON THE CASES. 
 
 1. You are not ashamed either before gods or men. 
 2. By the gods, I will not pursue them. 3. By Jove, I 
 will follow them both by land and by sea. 4. Some of the 
 soldiers were present. 5. They threw stone§ at him. 
 6. The soldiers were angry with Menon. 7. The soldiers 
 
 1 G. 232, 3 ; H. 728, 747, 757. = g. 134, 2 ; H. 773. 
 
 ^ Present particip. dat. pluv. of vipHiu, he present. 
 * Use bplijioi (6). 
 
108 GRKEK LESSONS. , 
 
 were faithful to Cyrus. 8. He gave pay to the army. 
 9. He wishes to assist the king. 10. I wish to follow the 
 king. 11. Cyrus wishes to fight with the king. 12. They 
 will teach for pay. 13. Let us not forget our friends. 
 14. The wall was thirty feet in breadth. 15. It is the 
 duty of a soldier to fight bravely. 16. The soldiers asked 
 for six months' pay. 17. He gives the soldiers six. months' 
 pay. 18. They remained there six days. 19. The slave 
 was sold for four minse. 20. It is possible to cross the 
 river, if the enemy do not hinder. 21. We differ with you 
 in this. 22. We will choose these (men) as generals. 
 23. He was plotting against the generals of the army. 
 
 LESSON LXX. 
 
 REVIEW OF THE MOST IMPORTANT PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 G. 191-193; H. 619-657. 
 
 Note. — The pupil is advised to learn only the primary mean- 
 ings of the prepo.sitious, and then to modify tlje translation of 
 them according to the cases before which they stand. 
 
 Trsmslate Into Engllgli. 
 
 1. TTpo Tov ep'yov ev /SonXeutrat. 2. a^iKvelio irapa, 
 ^aaikdasi; trpot Kvpov, 3. at troKei's dtfteaTriKetTav tt/oo? 
 Kvpov tTaaai irX^v MiXrjTOu, 4. ^aaiKevaei, avT exeivov. 
 5. KaraiTr)hr]aa'i utto tov apfiarot tov dcopaxa eveBv, koI 
 ava^at eirl tov nrirov airrfKavve. 6. to TraXra 6« tu? 
 •veipai eXa/Se. 7. sTroXiopxei MiXtjtov kiu kutu >y^v 
 
LESSONS LXIX., LXX. 109 
 
 icai Kara ffaXarrav. S. Koi yap rjoav al 'ImviKoi TToXew 
 Ti,a-(Ta(j)epvov^^ to dp'^alov, eic /SaatXe'ojs SeSo/xevai. 9. Bia 
 fieaov Tov trapaheiaov pel o iroTafjt.o^. 10. Kvpo^t fiera 
 Ttov aXKcov e^eXavvei. 1 1 . imep Tfj<; Ka>fj.Tj<i yr[Ko^o<; rjv. 
 1 ,2. arrjaa'; to apfta irpo Trjv (jsaXayyo'; irefiTrei tov 
 epfiTjvea irapa tow trTpaTriyov;. 13. ip^ovrai irapa 
 ^acnXeoi'i KTipvKe<!. 14. etp^ev ij Kikieraa ^vKaKa<s Trepl 
 avTTjv. 15. Kvpo<; irapeKavvei, e<j) ap/xaTOi. 16. KvpQ<i 
 B ovv ave07} eirl to, oprj. 17. Kal apxr op ttotc eiri^e- 
 po/j,evr)v ovK sTpeaev,^ dWa aviMTreaaiv ^ KaTeatrdaOr) diro 
 TOK nnrov, 18. rots TroXe/ntot? eiri^ou\evo/jiev. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The river flows tlirougli the park. 2. The messengers 
 came from the king. 3. Both the general and the soldiers 
 were dispirited (ddvfio<;) before the battle, on account of 
 the multitude of the enemy. 4. The enemy sent into 
 the city about (concerning) a truce. 5. Cyrus marches 
 with (after) the others. 6. They encamped beside (near) 
 Clearchus. 7. They w-ere marching away to* the king. 
 8. There was a hill above ^ the village. 9. He wishes to 
 rule instead of his brother. 10. The cities were given to 
 Cyrus by his brother. 11. After this, the soldiers marched 
 away to their tents. 12. The chariots were borne 
 through the enemy. 13. They ran down the hiU. 14. He 
 besieged the city both by land and by sea. 15. He sends 
 for Cyrus from his government. 16. He took his javelins 
 into his hand. 17. The cities plot against the king 
 18. The army marches into the city. 19. The soldiers 
 joined Cyrus in war against the king. 
 
 1 Belonged to Tissaphemes, pred. gen. * To a position beside the king. 
 ^ See Tp4u. * Over. 
 
 3 See (rvfiTriTTia. 
 
110 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. — USE OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Sead the chapter in Hadley on Conjunctions. Analyze the follow- 
 ing sentences, uamihg th^ class to which each' Conjunction 
 belongs, and pointing out the Substantive, Adjective, and 
 Adverbial Clauses. 
 
 Sentences G. 133, 1 (N. 1 and 2), 2, 282, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ; 
 
 H. 724, a, 725, 824, 825, 830, 831. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Kvpo<s SiSoaai fiiadov tqj o-rparevfiaTi, Cyrus gives pay 
 to the army} 
 
 ovTOi airexpivavTo oti ovk evTavda eitf, they answered 
 that he was not there? * 
 
 01 fiev ^dp^apoi e^evfOP, o'l S" "EWiji/es e'j^oi; to 
 axpov^ the barbarians were fleeing, but the Greeks 
 occupied the height. ■ 
 
 T« Tama eTrot'ijcre ; who did this ? 
 
 apa Tavra eirolrja-a'; ; did you do this ? 
 
 OVK oiha., oatvi to irpdyfia evpa^ev, or ovk otSa, tk 
 TavTa eTTpa^ev, J do not know who did this. 
 
 ovk oiBa, iTOTepov ^y r) TedvTjKep, I do not know 
 whethei' he is alive or dead. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 1 . Kal (Lat. et ), re' (Lat. que\ and. 
 
 2. ouSe, /tti^Se, or owre, ^Tjre, and not, nor either. 
 
 3. 0VT6 . . . ome, or iir\Te . . . jtt^re, neither . . . nor. 
 
 1 Simple declarative sentence. ' Compound sentence. 
 
 ^ Complex sentence. 
 

 
 LESSON LXXI. 
 
 4. 
 
 Kot . . . Kai, or 
 or re . . . T6, 
 
 T6 . 
 
 . . KM, 
 
 Iboik..., 
 
 5. 
 
 V V 
 
 >; . . . »7. 
 
 
 
 either . . 
 
 6. 
 
 ^, 
 
 
 
 or, than. 
 
 7. 
 
 V V 
 
 etre . . . eire, 
 
 
 
 whether . 
 
 8. 
 
 Se (|jostpo&itive), 
 
 
 hut, and. 
 
 9. 
 
 fiev . . . Se, 
 
 
 
 indeed . . 
 
 Ill 
 
 or. 
 
 or. 
 
 but. 
 
 10. o t^iv ...b li (see G. 243, H. 525, a). 
 
 1 1 . aXKa, but, yet ; apa, accordingly. 
 
 12. ov ^ovov . . . aXKa kui, not only . . . but also. 
 
 13. ovv, therefore, consequently. 
 
 14. oTi, that. 
 
 15. oTt, because ; ore and enrd, since. 
 
 16. yap (postpositive), for. 
 
 17. el Kul, if even, although. 
 
 18. K.dt 6t, even if. 
 
 19. to? (Lat. ut\ . as, that. 
 
 20. oTe, biroTS, when. 
 
 Note. — The first four classes of conjunctions — viz. copulative 
 (1-4), disjunctive (5-7), adversative (8-11), and inferential (12, 13) — 
 connect co-nrdinale sentences; so, too, the causal yap. The otlier 
 classes — viz. declarative (14), causal (15), final (G. 215, H. 739), 
 conditional (G. 219, H. 744), concessive (17, 18), comparative (19), 
 and temporal (20, and G. 239, H. 758) — connect subordinate sen- 
 tences with principal sentences. 
 
 Translate into Engllsli. 
 
 1. etnev on tovto "rroioiij. 2. dav/j,a^ofiev SmxpaTi^, 
 
 avrjp yap r}V KaXot /cat ayaOol. 3. SeaKpaTTji; avrjp rjv 
 
 KaXo!; Kai ayado'S- Oavfid^ofiev apa avrov. 4. eav re 
 
 varrip ypd^lrr}, eav re p,Tr}Tt)p. 5. hrjKov eartv, on, ei 
 
 Taina eXeyet, rjp,apTave<; av. 6. Tavra ypa^co, iv 
 
112 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 eXSrii (^ut venias). 7. el n eti^e, eSlSav. , 8. Kvpov 
 fieTairefiTrerai airo t^? ap'xrj':, 979 avTOv aarpanrjv eTroirja-e, 
 9. w?' rifjjepa Td)(^ca-Ta iyeyoveii^ airrfKdov. 10. SwKpa- 
 Tijs ov fiovov a-o(j}0<! ^v, aWa Kwyado'i? 1 1 . ava^aivei 
 ovv o Kvpo^ Xa^wv Ti(rera(f)epvr]v (b? ^iXop, 12. o oe 
 ireiBsTai re koI av\\afj,^avei Kvpov. 13. »/ o iraTrip rj 
 6 vlo^ aireOavev. 14. ap.ovK eariv aadevrfi ; 15. a/sa 
 /tiTj effTti/ aadevTryi ; ^ 
 
 Questions. 
 How are sentences classified? How are conjunctions classified? 
 What is a co-ordinate conjunction? How many classes of subordi- 
 nate conjunctions ? What offices do subordinate clauses perform ? 
 Give an example, in English, of an adjective, an adverbial, and a 
 substantive clause ; in Greek. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. Both the general and the soldiers went away. 2. He 
 said that he would write. 3. If he does this, it is well. 
 4. I gave this to you that you might rejoice. 5. For 
 Cyrus was both good and wise. 6. But he was neither 
 good nor wise 7. Cyrus commanded the Greeks who 
 made an expedition against the king. 8. The generals 
 wished to advance against the enemy, but the soldiers 
 went away to their tents. 9. Cyrus not only paid his 
 soldiers, but also gave them presents. 10. We admire 
 Cyrus, for he was a brave general. 11. There Cyrus and 
 the army remained for twenty days, for the soldiers refused 
 to go further. 12. Both his own soldiers and those of 
 Menon praised him. 13. Cyrus was a brave general, 
 therefore the soldiers admired him. 
 
 1 (is Tdx'CTo = cum primnm. ^ ylymimi. 
 
 8 G. 139; H. 496. 
 
 * Noniie aegrotat? cegrotat. G. 282; H. 828, a, i, and Rem. c, and 829. 
 
 ' Num cegrotat ? non aigrotat. 
 
LESSONS LXXI., LXXII. 113 
 
 LESSON LXXII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB: VOICES, TENSES OF THE INDICA- 
 TIVE; GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES; HISTORICAL 
 PRESENT. 
 
 roiees. — G. 195 (N. 2), 196, 197 (N. 1), 2, 198, 199, 1, 2, 3 
 
 (read the notes) ; H. G84-694. 
 Tenses G. 200, N. 1-6, 201, 202, 205, 1, 2, 3, 206; 
 
 H. 695, 1, 696, 697, 698, 699, 701-718. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. 6 irarrip (fjiKel rou iralSa. 2. 6 va2<s vtro rov ira-r 
 Tpoi (fiiXeiTai. 8. ^iipelo<; Kvpov fieTaTrefiirerai^ otto 
 rr]<! ap^rjv, rjv avrov (raTpdwriv eiroiTjere. 4. KXtap^xpt 
 Tovi ffT/3OTt£0Tai? 6/8ta'feTO^ levai. 5. r/ a-rpaTtii eiropi- 
 ^ero aljov. fi. Kvpo<} eirep.Tre ffiKout oivov, 7. S(o- 
 KpaTTj'! Kot nXarcov a-o(j)oi -qaav, 8. 04 TTOtSes ra 
 ypififiara fj,av6(ivovaiv,^ 'iva ol yovei'i ■)(aip(0(Tt,i'.* 9. o 
 Trai? Ta ypa/M/Mara efiavOavev, iva 6 iraTrip '^aipoi. 
 1 0. (f)€pe, CO ^ovXe, rov veov 0licov rm veavia. 1 1 . evrav- 
 6a Kvpw /Saa-iXeta rjV koI Trapa8eiffo<; p-eyai aypiav dr]plcav 
 irXrjpTj'i, a e/celvo^ e6r\pevev airo tTMrou, ottots yvfivaaai 
 ^ovXotTO^ eavTov re Kai tov<; tTnrou?. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The Greeks were pursuing. 2. Clearchus attempted 
 to cross the river. 3. Cyrus was accustomed to send 
 presents to his friends. 4. I shall do good to them. 
 
 1 Hist, present. ' G. 201; H. 263. 
 
 " Attempted to compel. * G. 216; H. 739. 
 
 6 Whenever he wished. G. 233 ; H. 729 and 757. 
 
114 GREKK LESSONS. 
 
 5. The barbarians were pursued by the Greeks. 6. Cyrus 
 often sent presents to his friends. 7. He attempted to 
 compel his soldiers to go forward. 8. He sent for Cyrus. 
 9. Having said this, he dismisses the messenger. 10. They 
 chose him instead of his brother. 11. They will choose 
 him instead of his brother. 12. The messengers, who had 
 come from the king before the battle, told this. 13. He 
 attempted to do this, he was accustoined to do this, he was 
 doing this, he did this, he will do this. 
 
 LESSON LXXIII. 
 
 MODES IN SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
 
 Imperative; Expression of a Wish. — G. 202, 1, 2, N. 1, 213, 
 1-5, 251, 1, 2, N. 1, 2, 252; H. 710, 719, 720, a, b, 721, 
 1, A, 723, o, b. 
 
 Interrogative Subjunctive, — G. 256, 257, 282, 2, end of ex- 
 amples; H. 682, 720, c, d. 
 
 Subjunctive in Eashortations and, Prohibitions,— U. 253, 
 254 ; H. 720, a, b, 723, o. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 fjiavOave, a> veavla, tt)v ao^iav, learn wisdom, young 
 man. 
 
 Tctvra iroiufiev, let US do this. 
 
 fiT} ravra TToiufiev, let US not do this. 
 
 eWe (TV <j)l\ois rjfuv yevoio, that thou WOuldst be- 
 come a friend to us. 
 
 eide TovTo eyevero, zoould that this had happened. 
 
LrSHONS LXXII., LXXIII. 115 
 
 ci(f)e\e Kupot ^rjv, would thai Cyrus were alive. 
 fiTj 'ypd(f>e, do not write (habitually). 
 ILT] ypaylri^'i, do not write (simply). 
 TovTou? o\ 6eo\ airoTlaaivTo, may the gods requite 
 these. 
 
 Translate Into Engllsli. 
 
 1. ^epe, 0) SovXe, tov otvov rm veavtq. 2. ia> fiev ; fiT) 
 icofiev ; Tt TTotrjo-o) ; 3. f^ri 'X^aXevaive. 4. fir) j^aXe-n-r)- 
 V7)v. 5. w avS/je? atpariSnai, firj davfia^ere on '^aXeTra><s 
 <f)epco Tolv Trapovai, ' irpay/iaa-iv.'^ 0. fir)Bei,<i vp,wv Xeyeriu 
 rovTO vepl efiov, 7. P'V tovto iroiaifjiev, 8. etOe roino 
 a\r)6e<! r)v. 9. el avfi^ovXevoip,!, a ^eXriOTa /ioi, SoKel 
 eivai, "TroXka fiot, Kayada^ yevono. 10. (o^eXev o 7ral<i 
 ^rjv. 11. 64^6 epioX ol 9eoi TavTrjv Tr]v Bwa/jLiv irapaOelev. 
 12. etOe TOVTO yiyvoiTo {yevono^. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. Do not wonder. 2. Do not steal (single act). 
 3. Would that Cyrus were living. 4. Let us write the 
 letter. 5. Let us not write the letter. 6. Write the 
 letter. 7. What shall I do ? 8. Would that he were 
 (now) doing this. 9. Call Menon, for he is nearest. 
 10. Let us not fear that the king will lead his army in 
 this direction. 11. What shall I say ? 12. May you not 
 be slain, Cyrus ? 13. Do you wish that I should write 
 the letter ? 14. May we arrive at a large and prosperous 
 city. In. Let us, fellow-soldiers, die fighting for our 
 country. 16. Do not ask Cyrus for ships. 17. May you 
 and I not be slain. 
 
 ' Present particip. dat. plur. of iripuiu. 
 
 2 G. 188, 1 ; H. 611, a. ' G. 139 ; H. 496. 
 
116 GBEEK LESSONS, 
 
 LESSON imv. 
 
 MODES IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 
 
 mnal Clauses. — G. 215, A, 216, 2,3; H. 729, a, 739, 740. 
 Object Clauses after Verbs of Strtviny, Jkc. — G. 215, B, 217, 
 
 N. 2, 4; H. 742, 756. 
 Object Clauses after Verbs of X'earing. — 6. 218 ; H. 743. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tavra ypa^o), yefpai^a, ypa-^co, Iva ekOiys, I iprile, 
 I have toritten, I will write thin, that you, may come. 
 
 ravTa typa^ov, €yeypa<peiv, eypa-y^a, iva e\0oi^, J was 
 writiny, I had written, I wrote this, that you miyht 
 come. 
 
 a-Kovet OTTtot ra irpayiMaTa aco9r]aeTai, see to it that 
 the state nhall be preserved. 
 
 ^o^eiToi fj,ri rovTo yevr/rai, He fears that this may 
 happen. 
 
 e^o^eiTo fir] tovto ov yevotTo, He feared that this 
 miyht not happen. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ep^erat iva tovto iSjj. 2. rjXOev iva tovto iBoi. 
 3. Xeyaj TOVTO iva fir) ypa^t. 4. SeSoi*fa /xtj airada- 
 V7].^ 5. eSeSoiKeiv /it] aTrodavoi. 0. SeBoixa firj TeOvrjKev. 
 7. SeSoiKU fiT] ovK airoQavr)? 8. ehehoimiv fiTj ovk mro- 
 ddvoi.^ 9. SiBoiKa fjLr) ov TedvqKev, 10. ew Kaipov 
 
 1 Metuo ne inoriattir. ' Ne non mortuus est. 
 
 2 Ne non moriatii/r. 
 
LESSON LXXIV. 117 
 
 »j««s OTTO)? T^? SiKTjis aKovatj^. 11. eiropevofJMjv tva a)<j>e- 
 XoiTjv avTov, 13. TrXoia Karexavaev iva jMq ICvpov 
 hva^r), 13. ZahoiKa fit) eTTiXadwfxeda tj;? oiKuBe oBov. 
 
 14. ev ^o^(p rjp fiTj eKijivyoi, ra irpajfiaTa avrov. 15. ot 
 TToXlrai e(j>ol3ovvTo fiT] rj ttoKk TToXtopkolTO. Hi. ravTrji; 
 evexa t^9 "jrapoSov Kvpot; ra? vaw /j.eTeTrefj,-\jraTo,^ ottoj? 
 OTr\tTa? aTTO/St/Saffetei/ euaco Koi e^oj twv ttvXwv. 17. e/f€- 
 Xeve Tov<i aTparTj'yov'; eXdovTa<! Kvpov airelv vXoia, to? 
 aTTOTrXeotev. 18. t'^v 'EXXrjvvKriv Svvafiiv tjBpoi^ev <b9 
 fiaXicna eBvvaTo eTrt/tpwTrTO/ievos, ottus ort airapaaKevora- 
 rov Xa^oi ^aaiXea. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. He writes for you to come. 2. He wrote for you to 
 come. 3. He is coming to see this. 4. He came to see 
 this. 5. He assembles his forces as quickly as possible, so 
 that he may take the king unprepared. 6. Cyrus sends 
 for ships in order that he may land the hoplites. 7. Cyrus 
 sent for ships in order that he might laud the hoplites. 
 8. He fears lest this may happen. 9. He feared lest this 
 should happen. 10. He feared lest Cyrus should assemble 
 his forces. 11. They asked Cyrus for vessels in order that 
 they might sail away. 12. I proceed that I may assist 
 him. 13. i proceeded that I might assist him. 14. Cyrus 
 feared that the king would not come on the following day. 
 
 15. The soldiers feared that Cyrus had been slain. 16. The 
 soldiers marched in order that they might fight as quickly 
 as possible. 17. Let us march away in order that we may 
 arrive in the village as quickly as possible. 18. He went 
 to Cyrus to announce this. 19. The soldiers came to the 
 tent that they might see Cyrus. 
 
 ' Composition ? formation ? force of the preposition ? Why middle 
 voice ? 
 
118 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXXV. 
 
 MODES IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES (continued). 
 
 Ordinary Conditional Sentences. — G. 319, 1, 2, 3, read 
 220, I., a, 1, 2, 6, 1, 2, learn 221, 222, 223, 224 ; H. 744, 
 745, 746, 747, 748. 
 
 General Suppositions. — G., read 220, II., a, b, learn 225; 
 H. 747, 748, a. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 FOUR FORMS OF ORDINARY CONDITIONAI, SENTENCES. 
 
 6t vpaTTei TovTo, Ka\Ss<s ey(ei,, if he is doing this, it is 
 well. 
 
 el eirparre tovto, KoK&'i av et'^ev, if he were (now) 
 doing this, it would be well. 
 
 lav irpaTTrj tovto, Ka\Si<i e^ei, if he shall do this, it 
 will be well. 
 
 el irpaa-aoi (or irpa^eie) tovto, KaX&i av ey(pt, if he 
 should do this, it would be well. 
 
 GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS. 
 
 el TK KXevToi, eieoXa^eTo, if any one (ever) stole, he 
 was (in all such cases) punished. 
 
 ei Tts irpaTTOi (or vpa^eie) toiovtov tc, ey^dKeiraivofiev 
 atnm, if any one (ever) did such a thing, we were 
 (always) angry with him. 
 
 Translate into IHngliBh. 
 
 ] . et T( e-)(€i, BiSaxTiv, 2. ei, ti etj^ev, iBiSov av. 
 3. el Ti eo'T^fi', eSo)Kev av. 4. tav tl e^rj, Bwcrei. 0. et 
 Ti 'ex°''i S'^""? ""• 6. ei TOVTO XeysK, dfiapTavei<i, 7. « 
 
LESSON LXXV. 119 
 
 rovro eXe^at, fffiaprei} av. 8. eav rovTo Xeytj^, d/j,ap- 
 Trja-r). 9. eav aXrjdeva-'pf, u-mar'xyov fial aoi Bixa laXavrai 
 10. -^yefjiovai; av Soirj, el ^ovXoivro aTrievai. 11. elf rt? 
 opa ^t\T(,ov} Xe^aro). 1 2. eiropevofiTjv, iva, e'l tv Seono, 
 fo<f>eXoi,riv avTov. 13. eSrjXwae Kvpo<; oti eToifiof t(nt 
 p.a'xeaOai, « Tt? e^tp'ypiro. 14. eav e^cofiev pjjpjj^aTo, 
 e^ofiev <ptXov<;. 1 5. ^v eyyvi tXdr} ddvaTov, ovSeli: /Sou- 
 Xerai Baveiv. 16. et Se riva opayq Seivov ovra olicov6ij.ov, 
 Kai KaracTKeva^ovTa re jj? ap'xpt ')((opa'i Koi -TrpoaoSovi 
 iroiovvTa, ovSeva av iranroTe a<f)eiX6To, aXXa del irXelto 
 •TrpoaeBiSov. 17. « ttou t^eXavvoi, Aarvayij^, e<l> imrov 
 j(pvao'^aXivov Trepirjye top Kvpov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. If he is doing this, it is well. 2. If he was doing 
 this, it was well. 3. If he did this, it was well. 4. If he 
 were doing this, it would be well. 5. If he had done this, 
 it would have been well. 6. If he does (shall do) this, it 
 will be well. 7. If there are altars, there are also gods. 
 8. If he had anything, he would give it. 9. If he . should 
 have anything, he would give it. 10. If I had a mina, I 
 would give it to the slave. II. If you had said this, you 
 would have erred. 12. If you say this, you will err. 
 13. If any of them steal, they are (always) punished. 14. If 
 any of them stole,^ they were (always) punished. 15. If 
 Cyrus rode out, he took a friend with him. 16. If any of 
 those appointed for this (work) seemed to liim to loiter, he 
 beat tliera. 17. If any one assisted him, he never per- 
 mitted his zeal (to go) unrewarded. 18. If they should do 
 this (habitually), they would prosper. 19. If they should 
 (once) do this, they would prosper. 20. If any one counts 
 upon two or more days, he is a fool. 
 
 1 Better (plan). » G. 225; H. 749, a. 
 
120 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON IXXVI. 
 
 EELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Definite Antecedent. — G. 229, 330 ; H. 755, review 807-811. 
 Inaeflnite Antecedent. — G. 231, 232, 1-4, 233, 239, 1, 2, 240 
 
 (read 2) ; H. 757, 758, 759, 760, a-rf, 761. 
 Future Indicative. — G. 236, 237 (read Kem.) ; H. 756. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 avveTrefiyJrev avTTJ aTparia)Ta<s ov<; Mevmv ft^er, /le sent 
 along with her the soldiers whom Menon had. 
 
 o Ti ^ovXerac Stiaio, I will give him whatever he now 
 wishes. 
 
 a firi e^ovXero Bovvat, ovtc av eBcoKev, he would not 
 have given tchat he had not wished to give. 
 
 travra a av ^ovXcovrai e^ovcriv, theg will have all 
 things which Iheg way wish. 
 
 o Ti ^ovXono, SoiTjv av, I should give him whatever 
 he might toish. 
 
 o Tt av fiovXijTai, SiBoa/ii, I (always) give him what- 
 ever he wants. 
 
 o Tt ^ov\ono, eSiBow, I (always) gave him whatever 
 he wanted. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1, "S.KOVCIV rjye/j.ove'i oi avTOvi a^ovaiv. 2. ore e/Sou- 
 Xero rj/Kdev. 3. evjavda Kvp^ ^ ^aa-ikeia r)v koI Trapa- 
 heiao<i fieyat; ayptrnv drjptcov TrXrjprii, a €K£i,vo<; edrjpevev 
 airi) nrirov, oirore yv/J,vaffai ^ovXoiro eavrov re Kai rovs 
 
 ' Why dative ? 
 
LESSONS LXXVI., LXXVII. 121 
 
 tTTTTou?. 4. VTreo'X^eTO avSpi eicaaTcp Soxreti' vevre apyv- 
 piov /ai/a?, eirav ets Ba^vXwva rjKoaai, Kai lov p.ia6ov 
 evreXiJ, P'iyjpi' clv KaTaa-Trjo-rj tov<s ' E\\r)va<i et? Iioviav 
 iraXiv. 5. KOI, (Tvv vfilv b ti av Sen] Treicro/jLai. 6. fTTefi- 
 ire yap ^iicovi oivov, oiroje irauv f]Svv Xa/Sot. 7- ottots 
 01 E\\7ive<i Tot? 7ro\e/j,ioi<i eirioiev, paBi,co<; ane^evyov. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. You see those (things) which I have. 2. I will give 
 hitn whatever he (now) wishes. 3. I will give him what- 
 ever he may wish. 4. I will follow the guide (i.e. any 
 guide) which Cyrus may give. 5. The soldiers promised 
 to advance until they should come to Babylon. 6. With 
 you I am respected wherever I am. 7. With you I will 
 submit to whatever may be necessary. 8. Cyrus hunted 
 on horseback whenever he wished to exercise himself. 
 9. They fought until the enemy sailed away. 10. He did 
 not stop until he had taken the city. 11. When you wish 
 to talk {SiaXeyea-dai), I will talk with you. 
 
 LESSON IXXVII. 
 
 SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 G. 241, 1-3, 248, 1-4, 243 (study the examples), 244, 260, 2, N. 1 ; 
 H. 733, 734 (n, 6, c), 735 (a, b, c), 730 (1, a), 737 (2, a). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 6 avdpcoiroi; 6vr)To<; eariv, mail is mortal. 
 Xeyw oil 6 aeffpeoTTov 9i/7]t6<; eaiiv, I nay that man is 
 Mortal. 
 
122 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 e\e^6V^ on 6 avdpwiro'i QvrjTO'i eirj (or eo'Tti'), he said 
 Hint man wna morfril. 
 
 o't TToXeiiioi TTj oTparia eTTifSovXeuovTiv, the enemy are 
 loyinfj snares for the. army. 
 
 ayyeXov ayyeWei, otj, ol TroXefiioi i-fj cnparia tiri- 
 ^ovXevovaiv, the DieHsenger announces that the enemy 
 are laying snares for the army. 
 
 01 -TToXefJiioi, Ty aTparia eire^ovXevaav, the enemy laid 
 snares for the army. 
 
 6 ayyeXoi; rjyyetXev, oTt ol iroXefiioi ry arparia eiri- 
 ^ovXeixreiav (or eiri0ovXevcraiev, or eireffovXevaav^, the 
 messenger announced that the enemy had laid snares 
 for the army. 
 
 Translate Into EngUeh. 
 
 1. ol "noXkix-ioi diro^evyovcri. 2. o ayyeXo^ dyyeWei 
 oTi 01 TToXifUot awoipevyoven. 3. ot iroXe/j-ioi, aTre(pvyov, 
 4. o ayyeXo<! rjyyeiXev on oi iroXefitoi aTro(j)vyoiev (or 
 aireijyvyov). 5. Xeyet, vTrep rrj'i kw/utj? yT)Xo(f)o<i ean. 
 0. Xeyei on virep rrj'i Kcofir]^ yriXo^o<; ecni. 7. etTrej/, 
 inrep t^? xatfi'rj'i yr]Xo(f)oi; rjV. H. eiirev on vrrep rj}? 
 Kio/j.rj'; yr]Xo(pQ<; ^v (eti;). \). koc Kijpo<! fieTaTre/xifrdfievov 
 Toi;? o'Tparriyovv tcov EXXtjvodv eXeyev on rj oSot ecrono 
 TT/ao? ^aaiXea ea Ba^vXcava. 10. BLrjXde Xoyo<! on 
 SiwKoi avTov; Kvpo^ rpi-qpeai. 1 1 . enrev on tovto 
 irotolr). 12. ettrev ori tovto iroir}aoi. 13. etwev on 
 TOVTO TTOLTiaeiev. 14. eiTTev oti tovto iron^aei. 15. Tiir- 
 aaipepvr)<; Sia^dXXei ^ toi/ Kvpov vpoi tov dBeX(j)dv, (b? 3 
 eirt^ovXevoi avTw. 
 
 1 See Lesson LXXIX., Note. » (Saying) timt. 
 
 2 His)l. iiieseiit. 
 
LESSONS LXXVn., LXXVIII. 123 
 
 Translate Into Greek* 
 
 1. He is writing the letter. 2. He says that he is 
 writing the letter. 3. He was writing the letter. 4. He 
 said that he was writing the letter. 5. He said that he 
 had written the letter. 6. The report spread that Cyrus 
 would pursue^ them with galleys. 7. Cyrus said that his 
 march was directed to Babylon, against the king. 8. He 
 said that Cyrus had spoken as follows. 9. He replied that 
 he would be friendly to Cyrus. 10. The messengers said 
 that Cyrus was plotting against the king. 11. The soldiers 
 knew that Cyrus was leading them against (his) brother. 
 
 ^ Determine first the form of the verb in direct discourse, and then 
 remember that the original tense does not change in indirect discourse. 
 
 LESSON IXXVIII. 
 
 INFINITIVE AND rABTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 G. 134, 2, 3, 138, N. 8, ail, 246, N., 259, 200, 1 (with N. 1), 
 2, N. 1 ; II. 730, 734, c, 773, 6, 783. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ^770-4 jpd<peiv. 111' says that he is writing (direct dis- 
 romsr, jpd(f)co, I write). 
 
 <i>i)a\ jpii-^ai; he says thai he wrote (eypai/ra). 
 
 e^yr) jpii.(peiv, he said that he toas writinff. 
 
 'icj)i) ypdyjrai, he said that he had written. 
 
 Ti<r(Ta(f>(pi'rj^ Kvpov enriCTpaTevovTa irpaJTO? r/yyetXe, 
 Tvssripheriies toas the Jirsl to aniioaiice that Cyrus teas 
 carryiiiy on war. 
 
 Xeym tov avdpeoirov dvijrov elvai, I say that man is 
 mortal. 
 
1-4 c;ui:ek lessoxs. 
 
 TrRllglate Into Eiiglisll. 
 
 1. ayyeWei Tovt •n-nXefj.cov; dirocfievyeiv. '2. dyjeWei 
 Tovt voXefiiov^ utroipevyovrai;. 3. rjyyeiXe rovf TroXf/xtous 
 WTTo^uyeiv. 4. rjyyeiXev av tok? 7ro\e/ii/ou9 (nrn^uyoi'Ta^. 
 "). tXe^e o-e, ec tovto \eyoc<;, dfiapTriireaSai. 0. rjyyeiXav 
 rov Kvpov viKrjaai. 7. S^\.o? rju Kvpo<i (nrevBtav traauv 
 TijV oSov. 8. ot arpajiSnai ovk tcftaaav iti/ai' tov 
 irpoao). i). aXk eytoye (f)rj/j,i ravTa (^Xiiapja? eivai. 
 10. vTTtoTnevov yap em ^aaiXea levai. 1 I. e<^ri Kiipuv 
 ap^ai TOV Xoyov^ mSe. 1.2. rjKOvae I vpoi> ev KiXlxia 
 ovTa. 1 3. Kiipov S 67r6t rjadero tou? aTpaTitoTw; Sia- 
 ^e^riKOTav, rjadrj* 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. The enemy are fleeing at full speed. 2. The messen- 
 ger announces that the enemy are fleeing at full speed. 
 3. He announced to the soldiers that they were advancing 
 against the king. 4. I heard that the king was in Baby- 
 lon. 5. It was evident that Cyrus was" defeated. 6. I say^ 
 that man is mortal.^ 7. Eemember that man is mgj^tal. 
 8. The man is conscious to himself that he has spoken the 
 truth. 9. It is evident that Cyrus is advancing against 
 his brother. 10. It was evident that Cyrus was advancing 
 against his brother. 11. He thinks that his brother has 
 been killed in the battle. 
 
 1 G. 13, 2; H. 80. 
 
 2 G. 200, N. 3 (6); H. 699, a (end). 
 8 G. 171, 1 ; H. 574, b. 
 
 * See ijdo/Mi. 
 
 * Use the participle only when the principal verb is one of those men- 
 tioned in G. 280 ; H. 797-801. 
 
LESSONS LXXVIIL, LXXIX. 125 
 
 LESSON LXXIX. 
 
 COMPOUND SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 G. 226, 3, 247, 248 with 1-4 and N., 250, N., 260, 2, N. 1; 
 H. 731 with a and J, 736 with 1 and a, 737 with a, 738. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 DIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 el Tovjo XeyoK, d/iapTcivoK av, if yott should mean 
 this, you would err. 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 Xeyet bxi et toOto Xeyot?, dfiapravoii av, he says that, 
 if you should mean this, you would err. 
 
 > e\e^6v on, ei rovro Xeyoii, dfiapravoii; av, he said that, 
 if you should mean this, you would err. 
 
 ZrfKo'i €i d/iapravav av, ec tovto \eyoK, 01' BfjXov eariv 
 ori, dfiapravoii av, ei tovto XeyoK, it is evident that you 
 would err, if you should wean this. 
 
 DIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 et Tiva <f>evyovTa XT)y}ro/j,ai, o)? iroXefMca y^prjaofiai, if I 
 shall catch any one fleeing, I will treat him as an 
 enemy} 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 Xeyet oti et Tiva <j>evyovTa \j;T|r6TOi, to? iroXefilip 'Xpr)- 
 aerat, he says that, if he shall catch any one Jteeing, he 
 will treat him as an enemy. ' 
 
 eXe^ev oti ei rtva ^evyovTa Xritp'ono, &>? iroXefiiq) XP'T' 
 aono, he said that, if he should catch any one fleeiny, 
 he would treat him as an enemy. 
 
 1 G. 223, N. 1 ; H. 747. 
 
126 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 DIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 eroifio'! ei/ii nayetrOai, edv Tt? e^ep^TjTai, I am ready 
 to Jiijht, if any one shall come out. 
 
 inCirect discourse. 
 
 eorjKiiXTe Kvpo<; oti, eTOtfio<! eari /iox^eaaai, et res egep- 
 XotTo, Cyrim showed that he ivas ready to fiyht, if any 
 one should come out} 
 
 Translate into Englieh. 
 
 1. eav TovTO Xeyp?, dfiaprrjcry. 2. Xeyet on tav 
 TOVTO Xeyr]'!, dfiapTr)(T'p. 3. eXe^ev on ei tovto Xeyot?, 
 dfiapTavoi<! av. 4. eXe^e ae, et tovto Xeyoii, dfiapTrj- 
 aeadai. 5. av vjj,a<; optocriv adv/iov;, irapTev kukoi eaov- 
 rai. 6. Xeyei oti av vfj.dv opmaiv advfiov<i, iravTei; kukoI 
 eaovTot, 7. e\e^ev oti et u/j,d<s opmev aOv/j,ov<!, 7ruvTe<i 
 KUKOi eaoiVTO. S. e^oa ayeiv to aTpaTevp,a xma fiecrov 
 tS>v TToXefiiav oti eicei ^affiXevt eiTj, 1). i^Treo-^eTo 2 
 avBpi SKaaTtp Saxretv Trevre apyvpiov ixvat, tirav ^ el* 
 Ba^vXwva TjKODtrt,* icai tov fiiadov tvTeXri p-expi av KOTa- 
 arrjiTT) tov<; EXXTjvai et? Icoviav vaXiv. 1 0. atreKplvaTO 
 OTI fxavOavoiev a ovk eiricrTaivTO. 1 1 . kui afia i6avp,a^ov 
 OTI ovBa/j,ov Kvpot ^alvoiTO, ovB aXXov un avTov oi/Set? 
 TrapeiT], 12. dfxa Be tt/ ^fitpa^ avveX6ovTe<i ol aTpaTijyol 
 edavfia^ov brt Evpot oure aXXov Trefiiroi ffrj/iavovvTu'' 
 Ti 'x^pri ' TToielv, ovT auTO<! (j)aivoiro. 1 3. okto? Hvpat 
 
 1 G. 247 anil N. 1; H. 735. 
 
 2 See inritrxvio/jLat. 
 
 ' Give the composition of this word. 
 * G. 200, N. 3 ; H. 698. 
 
 ' As soon as it was day. G. 186 ; H. 602, a and J. 
 » G. 277, 3; H. 789, d. 
 
 ' Tlie indieativp is i-etainod here merely to avoid confusion with iriniroi 
 and ^ab'oiTo. 
 
LESSON LXXIX. 127 
 
 etvev, el amai Sotiji tiTTrea? j^tXt'oti?, on tok? irpoicaTa- 
 Kaovraf nrirea^ rj icaTaxavoi av ivehpevaa^ rj ^aivra^ iroX- 
 \ou? avTWv e\oi,^ kuI KtoKvcreie^ -roii Kaeiv eTrtovTa?, koI 
 TTOirjaetev^ (0<ne fjitjiroTe hvvaadai avrov: iSovTa<i to Mv- 
 pov errparevfia ^aaiXel SiayyelXai,. 
 
 Translate Into Greelc. 
 
 1. The satrap said that, if the Greeks had followed 
 Tissaphernes, they would have perished. 2. He anDOuiiced 
 that, if we had not come, they would be marching against 
 the king. 3. He said that the passage was difficult to 
 enter, if any one attempted^ to oppose. 4. He promised to 
 give eacli man five miuse of silver when they should arrive 
 in Babylon. 5: The soldiers refused to go farther, for they 
 already began to suspect that they were going against the 
 king. 6. On the next day, a messenger came to say* that 
 Syennesis had left the heights after he had perceived that 
 the army was already in Cilicia. 7. It is evident that, if 
 yo>i do this, you will conquer your enemies. 8. Cyrus 
 said that, if (ever) he made an agreement with any one, he 
 never deceive;! him in any respect. 9. He said that he 
 would do this, if it were possible. 10. He cried out that 
 he would lead the army against the centre of the enemy, 
 because the king was there. 
 
 NoTK. — Of the three common verbs meaning to say, ^r^jil regu- 
 larly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse, elnov takes on or iis 
 with the indicative or optative, and Xeym allows either construction ; 
 on or as, however, is more common after the active voice of Ae-ym. — 
 Goodwin, p. 293. 
 
 ^ Optative In the direct discourse, and is therefore unchanged. 
 ^ With several co-ordinate verbs, av is generally expressed only with 
 the first. 
 
 » G. 200, N. 2; H. 702. « 
 
128 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXXX. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 4s Subject, as Object. — G. 358, 259, 360, 1 (with N. 1), 
 
 2, N. 1; H. 763,704. 
 With Adjectives and- Substantives. — G. 261, 1, 2 ; H. 767 
 
 (read a). 
 With an Article. — G. 262, 1, 2; H. 778, 779 (read 780-782). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 eBo^e irpoievai, it seemed best to proceed. 
 
 ^ov\o/j,ai, 'ypd(f)6i,v, I wish to torite. 
 
 a^io<i eari TrA.jjya? Xa^elv, he deserves to get blows. 
 
 (lipa aTTievai, it is time to go away. 
 
 TO dOpoi^eiv arpd7evfj,a, the gathering of an army. 
 
 Tov aOpoL^eiv arpdrevfjia, of the gathering of an 
 
 army. 
 
 I 
 
 -Translate Into Engllgta. 
 
 1. ^ovXerai eXBelv. 2. ^evyeiv avT0i<; aa^dKeinepov 
 ea-Tiv 7] rifiiv. 3. a^ioi; eari tovto \a0e2v. 4. Bvvap,ai 
 •Troieiv ravra. 5. ovtoi ikovoi rjcrav tck; axpoTToXeK (bv- 
 \aTTeiv. (). rifia<; eiri6vp,el fieveiv Sia^ to hieairdpOai to 
 aTparevfia. . avTO to aTTo6vriaKei,v^ ovhei<; ^o/Selrai. 
 
 H. KOI avTT) av aWri iTpo<l)atTi<; rjv avrm tov adpoi^eiv 
 arparev/jia. !). Eiipo<; d^i6<t etXTi davfin^etrOai. 10. r)?iv 
 eari to ep^etv* 'x^prj/j.aTa. 1 1 . koXou Ictti to €v woXefi^ 
 aTTo6vT)<TKei,v. 1 2. ocTTts ^rjv einffvfiel, ireipaeTdco vikuv. 
 
 1 Because the army has been scattered. • Lit. the hamng. 
 
 2 Dying itself. 
 
LESSONS LXXX., LXXXI. 129 
 
 LESSON IXXXI. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE (continued). 
 
 With Verbs of Bindranee. — G. 263, 1, 2, 264. 
 Infinitive of Purpose. — G. 265 ; H. 592, 6, 765. 
 After dio-Tt or Trp£v. — G. 266, 1, 2, 274; H. 768, 769, 770, 771. 
 Subject of Infinitive. — G. 134, 1, 3, 138, N. 8 ; H. 485, c, 
 773 (read 774, 1, 775, 776, 777). 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Kvpot Sia TO ^i\ofiadri<! eivai iroWa tov<; irapovra^ 
 dvTjpdtTa, Cyrus, tkroufjh bei'ng eager for knowledge, 
 asked those present about many tilings. 
 
 KtoXva ae ravra irotelv, I hinder thee from, doing this. 
 
 rjKOfiev /Ji,av0av6i,v, we have come lo learn. 
 
 e-)(m rpiripwi ajcrre eXelv to ttXoIov, I have triremes SO 
 as to capture the boat. 
 
 6 Kvpoi rjyyeXdrj viK^aai, Cyrus was reported to 
 have conquered ; or, •^yyeXOr] tov Kvpov viK^aai, if was 
 reported that Cyrus had conquered. 
 
 Translate Into English. 
 
 1. ol TToXiTai avhpeio}^^ efia'^eaavTO, ware fit) tou? tto- 
 Xefiiovt; eit ttjv ttoXiv eicr^aXelv. 2- ovSev KtoXvei pe /j,t] 
 oiiK^ airoOaveiv. 3. Beofj.ai crov TrpoOvfiov eivai. 4. Trptu 
 KUTaXva-ai to <tt paTevfia ^atrtXev! e^avr). 5. Koi rwv 
 Trap eaVTtS ^ap^aptov eirefieXetTO, m? TToXefieiv iKavol 
 eirjaav. (). Mevcov, irpiv hrfXov elvai ti Troir/trovaiv oi 
 nKXoi a-TpaTca)Tai, •jrorepov e-^ovrai Kvpoj rj ov, avveXe^e 
 TO auTOV c7TpaT€Vfj,a x^P''^ ''"'"'' '*^^-'«>*' Kai eXe^e ToSe. 
 
 i Bravely. ^ q. 283, 7; H. 847, 2. » G. 142, N.; H. 531. 
 
 9 
 
130 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 7. avfiffovXevas eym lov avSpa tovtov eKVoBoov voiela-Oai 
 (B? ra-^ierra, ws firjxeTi, Serj tovtov (f>vXaTTeadai, aXXa 
 tr^oXr) 7} Tjfjuv tou? (piXovv tovtov(s ev woieiv. 8. Oevo- 
 (poiv TO rjfjLiiTV Toi) aTpaTevfj,aTo<; KaTeXiire <f)vXaTTetv to 
 aTpaTOTtehov, 9. XeyeTai ' AttoXXcov exSelpai Mapa-vav, 
 10. e^ovXeTo tov iralSa -jrapelvai. 
 
 Translate into Greek* 
 
 1. He wishes to go. 2. It is necessary to do this. 
 3. He must remain iu the city. 4. He is worthy to re- 
 ceive this gift. 5. They are ready to make war. 6. It is 
 possible to lead the army through the plain. 7. They will 
 conquer by marching against the right wing. 8. I shall 
 proceed because the army has arrived. 9. It seemed best 
 to Cyrus to proceed, because the army had arrived. 10. I 
 will hinder you from doing this. 11. They came to make 
 war against the king. 12. He requested that these cities 
 should be given to him. 13. He proceeded before the 
 army had arrived. 14. The citizens fought, so that the 
 enemy might not take the city. 15. It is said that Cyrus 
 advanced against the king with a large army. 16. He 
 wishes the generals to be -present. 
 
 LESSON LXXXII. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 AttribuUve. — G. 204, 275, 276, 1,2; H. 717, 718, 785, 786. 
 Circumstantial. — G. 277, 1-6, N. 2, 278, 1, 2 ; H. 787, 788, a, 
 789, b-f, 790, a-e (read 791, a-d, 792, a, b, 793), 795, c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 TOV ypa^ovTu e-rraivS), I praise him that writes. 
 TOV ypa^avTa evaiva), F praise him that wrote. 
 
LESSONS LXXXI., LXXXII. 131 
 
 a^ir/at toi/? e^ eavrov aTpaTevuafievovs, he dismisses 
 those who hciv ; made an expedition against himself. 
 
 rjxev e'xpav ottXitov, he is come with hoplites. 
 
 aireXde raina Xa/Smi', ta^e this, and depart. 
 
 Kvpo<; TOP iroTa/Mov Sta/Sa? fieyaXrjv ap'xrjv icaraXvaei, 
 Cyrus, after crossing the river, witl overthrow a great 
 empire. 
 
 exeivov etTroi'To?, iravre^ ealyasv, when he had spoken, 
 all were silent. 
 
 TOVTO TTOtrjcrai'Te? eu Trpd^ovcriv, if they do this, they 
 will prosper. 
 
 ' Apral^npirit avWafi^avei, Kvpov w? airoKrevaiv, Arta- 
 xerxes apprehends Cyrus, for the purpose of putting 
 him to death. 
 
 Translate Into Engllgli. 
 
 1 . Kvpo<! vTroXa^Qiv tou? ^6vyovTa<;, crvXXe^a<! 
 (TTpaTevfia, eTroXiopK€i MiXtjtov koI kutu y^v Kai Kara 
 uaXaTrav, xai eTreiparo xaTayeiv tou? eKTreirraKOTa^. 
 2. OefiiaroKXeov; riyovfievov iroXXa Kai KaXa epya arre- 
 Sei^avTO. 3. ci)cne oi/Sev^ r/y^OeTO avrwv TroXefiovvrtov, 
 4. J? fiTjTTjp i^amjcra/jbevt] avrov aTToireixirei iraXiv eiri, 
 rrjv ap'^riv. 5. o ^aa-iXev; ttJ? ij,ev ttjOOS eavTov ewi^ov- 
 Xfj<; ovK yaSavero, Tiat7a<f>epvei ^ Se evdfui^e -iroXe/iovvTa 
 avTOV ufj,<j)l ra aTpaTevfiara SaTravav. 6. Kvpo<; ovv 
 avi^T) em tu opr] ovSevo<; KcoXvovro'i. 7. tovtov StaySa? 
 e^eXavveo Sia ^pvyia<!. 8. Trpot Se ^aauXea 7re/j,iroav 
 Tj^iov, aSeX^Of o)v avtov, Bodjjvai ot Tavra<; ra? iroXei<s. 
 
 9. Se irecderai, re icai avXXaiM^avei Evpov «»? avoKTevSiv. 
 
 10. eiri^ovXevovTOi; Tiaaa<f)epvov<;, o Kvpot crvveXe^e to 
 cnparevixa. 1 1 . Kvpo<;, m? TroXeyU.Tjcrwi' Tiaaa<pepvei, 
 avveicaXeae tov<; <TTpaTriyov<i. 
 
 1 G. 160, 2; H. 552. '^ G. 186, N. 1; H. 602, 1. 
 
132 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 LESSON LXXXIII. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 
 
 Supplementary. — G. 879, 1-4, N., 380, N. 1, 3, 4 ; H. 734, c, 
 795, e, 796-802. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 apxofiai XeyoJi', / 6e^in to speak, 
 opai 70V avdpwiTov Tpe)(pvTa, I see the man running. 
 a-Kovai aiiTov Xeyofro?, / //ear Mm speaking. 
 tXade Tou Kvpov direXdcov, he departed withcut the 
 knoivlt'dffe of Cyrus. 
 
 fiavddi/et ffo^o<s av, he learns that he is loise. 
 fiavSavei ao^ot elvai, he learns to be wise. 
 
 irpecj^vTepoi irapmv eivyx""^! the elder happened 
 to be present, or was by chance, or just then, present. 
 
 Sfj\o<! ^v ol6fievo<i, it was evident that he thought. 
 
 Translate Into EngllBh. 
 
 1. ^A^poKop.a'i ov TovTo eiroiriaev, aXK evei rjKovae 
 Kvpov 61/ KiXiKia ovra, avaarpeylrav eic ^oivikt)^ irapa 
 ^aiTiKea. arrr)\avvev, e'^^tov, m? eXeyero, rpiaicovTa /jLvpiaSai 
 (nparia'i. 2. oiysTai, aTrio)v vvKTOt ervv avSpwTroK Q)9^ 
 eticoai. 3. rovTO ro crTpciTevfia ovtco rpeipofievov iXav- 
 6av6v. 4. Upo^evov Se rov Boiwtiov, ^evov ovra avrm, 
 eiceXevere Xa^ovra avSpa^ oti TrXeterToi;? TrapayeveaOat, ) 
 tu? ei<s riia-iBa<i j3ovXofi6vo<! arpaieveadai, eov vpayp^ara 
 
 1 The proclitic (G. 29, H. 103, c), with words denoting number, means 
 abovi, not far from. 
 
LESSON LXXXIII. 133 
 
 vapS'XOVTWv IIktiBwv rrj eavTov'^ X'^PI" ^- ^o.pV'y'y^''^^ 
 TOK '^poupapj(OL'i \ap,/3av€iv avBpat on TrKHarov; q)9 evrt- 
 ffovKevovTO'i Ticr(Ta(jiepvov<! Tat? TToXeai. 6. o Se eXTTiSav 
 Xeytov Strjye, xal SrjXoq rfv avia)fjievo<;. 
 
 Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The king dismisses those who are making war. 2. The 
 king dismisses those who were making war. 3. Cyrus 
 sent the tribute which accrued from the cities. 4. The 
 king conquers those who are making an expedition against 
 him. 5. Cyrus besieged the city when he liad collected 
 an army. 6. He did this while he was general. 7. Cyrus 
 was thought to be the best of all while still a boy. 8. He 
 was not at all concerned because they were engaged in 
 war. 9. He arrests Cyrus With the intention of putting 
 him to death. 10. He did^ this secretly. 11. The king 
 hears that Cyrus is in Cilicia. 12. They went^ to his tent 
 and asked for their pay. 13. He departs quickly. 14. He 
 happened to be his guest. 15. The soldiers came and en- 
 camped near one another. 16. The messenger announced 
 that Cyrus was in Cilicia. 17. The soldiers attacked them 
 while crossing the river. 18. After hearing these things, 
 they departed. 19. I praise him that writes about* the 
 war. 
 
 ' Account for the position of ^outoO. 
 
 2 Notice that the aorist participle in certain constructions does not 
 denote past time with reference to the leading verb, but expresses a simple 
 occurrence. G. 204, N. 2. 
 
 ' Lit. having gone, they oislced. If two verbs haying the same subject 
 are connected by and, and one is less emphatic than the other, it is gener- 
 ally tran.slated into Greek by the participle. 
 
 * Use a preposition. 
 
ADDITIOIJTAL EXEEOISES 
 
 TO BE TRANSLATED INTO GREEK. 
 
 SUBJECT AND PKEDICATE. G. 133-139 ; H. 485-523. 
 
 1. I wish to be present. 2. They wish to be present 
 3. They wish you to be present. 4. He wishes his two 
 sons to be present. 5. Cyrus happened to be present. 6. 
 He wishes his elder son to be present. 7. The general 
 sent for you. 8. You sent for the generals. 9. The gen- 
 eral sent for me. 10. They sent for the heavy-armed men. 
 11. Tliey sent the soldiers into the city. 12. He is king. 
 13. I am king instead of you. 14 He wishes to be wise. 
 15. The men wish to be wise. 16. They say that^ he was 
 made king. 17. The men are wise. 18. The soldiers are 
 brave. 19. You and I are^ brave. 20. They are brave. 
 21. The man is called good. 22. The soldiers are called 
 brave. 23. The prizes are^ golden flesh-scrapere. 24. 
 Cyrus is called brave. 25. Darius the king has departed. 
 26. I, the king, am come. 27. The soldiers came to the 
 king. 28. The wise men departed into-the city. 29. That 
 man is come. 30. Those soldiers have advanced. 31. The 
 men of that time were wise. 32. The men in the city are 
 worthy of praise. 33. He advances to the Euphrates river.* 
 34. The brave soldiers are worthy of praise. 35. The sol- 
 dier was brave. 36. This road is steep. 37. He is riding 
 at full speed with his head uncovered. 38. Some remained, 
 others went away. 39. The rest of the army were drawn 
 up four deep. 40. They rode on horseback. 41. They 
 
IHK AKIICLE. 135 
 
 were drawn np in * companies of infantry and horse. 42. 
 J admire your virtue and that of your friend. 43. 1 admire 
 the beauty of the city. 44. Jove, grant unto me to ap- 
 pear^ a friend' worthy of Cyrus. 45. He became from^ 
 this time a good man. 46. 1 am he, whom you seek 47 
 He wrote a letter to the king. 
 
 1 G. 134, 2; H. 773. ^ gge /cord. 
 
 2 G. 135, N. 2; H. 511, c, d. <> Use <pavrji>ai. 
 8 G. 135, N. 4; H. 513. ' Dat. 
 
 * G. 142, 2, N. 6. 8 Use airi. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. G. 140-143; H. 524-53*. 
 
 1. I admire the beauty of the city. 2. The soldiers ad- 
 mire the beauty of the city. 3. Goodness is better than 
 wealth. 4. I am reading the letter. 5. We read tlie letter 
 of the judge. 6. He assembles liis Grecian force. 7. He 
 besieged the city of the king. 8. We besieged the city of 
 the king by land and sea. 9. Both the king and the sol- 
 diers came to the city. 10. A wise man is honored. 11. 
 The barbarians were fleeing, but the Greeks occupied the 
 heights. 12. The desire of wisdom actuates us. 13. All 
 the citizens admire the virtue of the general. 14. The 
 army of the king marches against the city. 15. Those with 
 Cyrus will march a^inst the king of the Persians. 16. 
 The men of that time did this. 17. Those in the city ad- 
 mire the wisdom of the king. 18. Cyrus will lead his 
 army against the king's son. 19. We admire those who 
 transact the affairs of the state. 20. The men in the city 
 admire those who transact the affairs of the state. 21. The 
 generals lead the army of Cyrus and that of the king. 22. 
 
136 GRKEK LESSONS. 
 
 He rode with his head uncovered. 23. He has a beautiful 
 park situated at the sources of the river. 24. He will 
 inarch through Phrygia to a city large and prosperou.s. 
 25. The river flows through this city. 26. The rivers 
 flow through the middle of the park. 27. He hastened 
 from this city. 28. Both this man and his brother have 
 spoken of these rivers. 29. The soldiers of Cyrus and 
 those of the general hastened through the friendly country. 
 30. He hastened from our city. 31. The commander 
 arranged the rest of the soldiers. 32. This river flows 
 through the midst of the city. 33. Some were cut in 
 pieces by the barbarians ; others perished by liunger. 34. 
 They left the other army behind. 35. The soldiers of 
 Clearchus and those of Cyrus narrowly escaped. 
 
 PRONOUNS. G. 144-156 ; H. 667-683. 
 
 1. These soldiers came. 2. The same soldiers will fight. 
 3. The general himself will come. 4. He loved us more 
 than the general. 5. We love him. 6. He loves liimself. 
 7. They are friendly to you. 8. We are plotting tliese 
 same things. 9. They are plotting against me. 10. You 
 did this yourself. 11. I will advance to this city. 12. 
 They came to a river the breadth of which was five hun- 
 dred feet. 13. Both this man and the king remained in 
 the city. 14. Cyrus had a park full of wild beasts which 
 lie used' to hunt on horseback. 15. The rivers flow' 
 through this city. 16. They demand the pay which is due. 
 
 17. I will ask them for what ^ they wish to employ us. 
 
 18. For what do you wish to employ them. 19. He 
 came when he saw this. 20. They took what they 
 wished. 21. He came with the forces which he had. 22. 
 They took back the slaves which had been seized. 23. A 
 
PRONOUNS. 137 
 
 certain person hit him. 24. And he'' is persuaded and 
 seizes Cyrus. 25. The same general came as quickly as 
 possible with the army. 26. You speak well, but * you do 
 nothing. 27. The citizens requested the generals to become 
 their ^ leaders. 28. He did no one (of those things) fef the 
 sake of which he^ came. 29. He came with the man^ 
 whom you see. 
 
 1 G. 206; H. 704. ^ g. 144, 2; H. 670, «. 
 
 2 G. 149, 2 (fine print); H. 682. « 0. 152; H. 810. 
 
 8 G. 143, N. 2; H. 525 (7). 1 G. 154, .M.; H. 808, 809. 
 
 * See Lesson VIII. N. 2. 
 
 PRONOUNS (continued). 
 
 1. Cjrrus himself speaks. 2. The same man speaks to 
 the soldiers. 3. I saw the man himself. 4. I fear this 
 more than death itself 5. I ^ myself said this. 6. They 
 will give him the money. 7. Cyrus himself is laying 
 waste the rest of the country. 8. The enemy laid waste 
 the whole country. 9. He has a large ^ hand. 10. He as- 
 sembled his own soldiers and those of Cyrus. 11. The 
 king arrived iii the city sooner than I. 12. Cyrus sent for 
 a certain man. 13. They sent for the soldiers themselves. 
 14. The general himself sent for us. 15. AU the cities 
 were plundered by us. 16. The same army plundered the 
 city itself. 17. He concealed as much as he could all the 
 forces which he assembled on the plain. 18. Both this man 
 and Cyrus observed these same things. 19. These brave sol- 
 diers came as fast as they could. 20. They went as fast as 
 they could with ^ about a thousand soldiers. 21. He sent to 
 Cyrus the army which he had. 22. About midnight,* Cy- 
 rus makes a review of the Greeks and the barbarians on 
 the plain. 23. I will endure these things. 24. They will 
 come as quickly as possible. 25. You are worthy of the 
 
1"'>8 CnEKK LESSONS. 
 
 liberty which you possess. 26. Cyrus was arranging his 
 own soldiers. 
 
 ' G. 145, N.; H. 668, » Lit., 
 
 =! G. 142, 3; H. 535, b. « wepl floras viicras. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. G. 158-166 ; H. 544-556. 
 
 1. He appointed a contest. 2. They did these things. 
 3. They conquered us. 4. He promised to call me. 5. 
 He will call us. 6. We admire them. 7. They asked the 
 generals for money. 8. They remained in that place ten 
 days. 9. The king remained in that place twenty days. 
 10. The soldiers left the mountains. 11. They came into 
 the presence of the king. 12. They besieged the city sixty 
 days. 18. They hesieged the same city. 14. He carried 
 on war against the Thracians. 15. The breadth of this 
 river was six hundred feet. 16. They came with ^ heavy- 
 armed men to the number^ of fifteen hundred, and with 
 about five hundred targeteers. 17. He sent for the trihnte 
 accruing to the king from the cities which ^ Tissaphel'nes 
 holds. 18. They went home. 19. They went into the 
 city. 20. Did he arrive before the battle ? 21. They an- 
 nounced these things. 22. I promise to give you* a tal- 
 ent. 23. A river, Cydiius by name, flowed thrrmgli the 
 midst of the city. 24. He appointed him as general. 25. 
 For what do they wish to employ me ? 2G. Do not ask 
 them for what they wish to employ you. 27. The soldiers 
 went to the city by the speediest way. 28. We lead you 
 as allies.^ 29. They teach their boys three things only ; 
 to ride on horseback, to use the bow, and to speak the truth. 
 30. It is difficult to err in nothing. 
 
 1 Lit. having. " G. 153; H. 808, 809. « G. 137; H. 489. 
 
 ^ els, lit. up to. * Lit. to you. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 139 
 
 THE GENITIVE. G. 167-183; H. 557-593. 
 
 1. The brother of Cyrus came. 2. The two s()ns of Da- 
 rius came into the city. 3. Many of the soldiers have 
 departed. 4. The cities belonged to Cyrus. 5. AH the 
 cities belong to you. 6. These cities belong to me. 7.. Six 
 cities belong to us. 8. He was appointed one of the gen- 
 erals. 9. He sends away some of the soldiers. 10. Cyrus 
 commanded the mercenary army. 11. We commanded the 
 army. 12. He took care of the barbarians. 13. We will 
 take care of the soldiers. 14. The park was large and fuU 
 of wild beasts. 15. Cyrus made a review of both the 
 Greeks and the barbarians on the plain. 16. Wisdom is 
 better than wealth. 17. The judge is wiser than the king. 
 18. The mother is more beautiful than the daughter. 19. 
 He wiU not fight within ten days. 20. This was done 
 when Cyrus ims general. 21. We do not begin the war. 
 22. These things happened on that day. 23. They de- 
 parted in the night. 24. I gave you some of my money. 
 25. He gave three minae for the horse. 26. The mother 
 leads her daughter by the hand. 27. The boy is wiser 
 than his father. 28. None of the Greeks came. 29. He 
 was a man of great wealth. 30. The king did not perceive 
 the plot against himself. 31. For how much will you sell 
 the horse ? 32. They asked (wanted) him to exhibit the 
 army to them. 33. He wanted little of being cut in 
 pieces. 34. I threw my spear at him, but I missed him. 
 35. I hear the orator. 36. The just man needs no law. 
 37. You need money. 38. I gave you some money. 
 
 THE GENITIVE (continued). 
 
 1. He ordered Clearchus to take command of the right 
 ing. 2. I think you are better than many barbarians. 
 
140 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 3. It is not because I am in want^ of barbarians that I took 
 you as allies.^ 4. He seemed both to Cyrus and to the 
 others to ;have given up the idea of fighting,^ so that 
 on the following day Cyrus proceeded more* carelessly. 5. 
 Tlie soldiers gave up the idea of crossing the river. 6. I 
 entreat (of) thee to be zealous.^ 7. The armies were near* 
 each other. 8. I know that these two men are worthy of 
 freedom. 9. The best counsels priginate' with the beat 
 men.^ 10. It is characteristic of a good man to benefit his 
 friends. 1 1. Cyrus stood with the best and most wealthy 
 about him, and ordered Glus and Pigres to take" a part 
 of the barbarian army and extricate the wagons. 12. The 
 house became the property of the general. 13. The slave 
 is valued at five minae. 14. Aristippus, having been asked 
 by Dionysius why^" philosophers go to the doors of the 
 rich, but the rich no longer to those of the philosophers, 
 said, " Because the latter know what tliey want, but the 
 former do not know." 15. The same general commanded 
 the army in both battles. 
 
 ' G. 271, 2; H. 790, c. ° G. 182, 2; H. 589. 
 
 ■^ G. 166, N. 2; H. 566, a. ' G. 135, 2; H. 615. 
 
 3 G. 177; H. 583. 8 g. 169, 1; H. 572, d. 
 
 * Use fn-cLWov. ' \a/36i'Tas. 
 
 6 G. laS, N. 8: H. 498. " SiiH. 
 
 THE DATIVE. G. 184-189; H. 694-613. 
 
 1. They will give pay to the soldiers. 2. He does not 
 trust his friends. 3. They are friendly to him. 4. We 
 have many friends. 5. Darius had two sons. 6. He had 
 three sons. 7. He gave four talents to him. 8. They ad- 
 vanced with a loud shout. 9. They mingle wine with this 
 fountain. 10. A certain person hit him with a dart. 11. 
 The king will fight on the tenth day. 12. These tilings 
 
FINAL AND OBJECr CLAUSES. 141 
 
 have been done by you. 13. The next day he departed. 
 14. It seemed expedient to Cyrus to advance. 15. In that 
 place Cyrus had a palace. 16. With these ships they be- 
 sieged the city forty days. 17. They joined him in war 
 against Cyrus. 18. He joined Cyrus in the expedition 
 against the king. 19. We must do this. 20. I must 
 do this. 21. I will give the money to you. 22. We see 
 with our eyes. 23. I wiU give you a guide. 24. He was 
 conquered in battle by a slave. 25. Pay was due to the 
 soldiers. 26. He contended with him in^ skill. 27. He 
 was angiy with the generals. 28. I think that everything 
 should be done by us. 29. I read his letter the same day. 
 30. The soldiers began to run^ towards the tents of the 
 barbarians. 31. The generals arrived at break of day. 
 32. The exiles arrived upon the following morning. 33. 
 They were cut to pieces by the barbarians on the same day. 
 34. He thinks that the faster he shall go, that he will fight ' 
 with the king so much the more unprepared. 35. He cried 
 out to all whom* he met, that the king was advancing with 
 a large army. 36. I nmst obey this man. 37. The soldiers 
 plot against the general. 
 
 ' U.se Trepi. ■' Lit. a running Icgins. 
 
 " Use the future infinitive. Sometimes the present infinitive is used 
 Wiieii wf .should expect the future infinitive. 
 * G. 187; H. 605. 
 
 -iriNAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. G. 215-218; H. 739-743. 
 
 1. He is present that he may see the battle 2. He was 
 present that he might see the battle. 3. He fears lest this 
 may happen. 4. I write this that you may come. 5. I 
 wrote this that you might come. 6. He pays attention to 
 the barbarians, that they may be friendly to him. 7. He 
 paid attention to the barbarians, that they might be friendly 
 
142 (;.,i:i:k lkssons 
 
 to him 8. He made his levy, that he might take the king 
 as unprepared as possible. 9. I feared lest we should for- 
 get the road home. 10. I fear that he may not be con- 
 quered. 11. He burned up the boats, in order that Cyrus 
 might not cross the river. 12. He is burning up the boats, 
 in order that Cyrus may not cross the river. 13. They 
 feared that the enemy would attack them. 14. He is tak- 
 ing counsel, that he may never be in the power of the king. 
 15. I fear lest we may forget the road home. 16. He asked 
 for boats, in order that he might sail away. 17. We will 
 seize the heights beforehand, in order that the enemy may 
 not anticipate us in having seized them. 18. I fear that 
 we may not be able to purchase provisions. 19. Cyrus be- 
 sieged Miletus by land and sea, in order that he might re- 
 store the exiles. 20. It was the custom among the Per-' 
 sians,^ whenever the king died,^ that there should be a 
 suspension of law for' five days, in order that they might 
 perceive of how much ^ value * the king and the laws were. 
 
 21. Menon evidently ^ desired ^ to be rich, in order that lie 
 might receive the more ; ' and he desired to be honored, in 
 order that he lyight gain the more ; and ^ he wished to be 
 a friend to those who ^ were most po-\^erful, in order that, 
 committing injustice, he might not^" suffer punishment. 
 
 22. Cyrus sent for the ships, that he might land heavy- 
 armed soldiers, and that these, having overpowered the 
 enemy, might effect a passage, in case they (the enemy) 
 should be keeping guard" at the Syrian pass. 
 
 I G. 184, 4; H. 598. ' G. 280, K. 1; H. 797. 
 
 ^ G. 233; H. 757. ' Use present participle. 
 
 " iio-os. " Use neut. plur. of roXis. 
 
 * alios. 8 Lesson VIII. N. 2. 
 
 ' Who were most powerful. Use the neut. of udyurros and the article, 
 with the pres, partic. of Siva/iai. 
 
 "> G. 283, 2; H. 833. » G. 248, 2; H. 753. 
 
COKUITIOXAL SnXTKN'CES. 143 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. G. 219-228; II. 7-44-754. 
 
 1. If it is so, he is glad. 2. If it should be so, he would 
 he glad. 3. If it is (ever) so, he is glad. 4. If it shall be 
 so, he will be glad. 5. If it were so (now), he would be 
 glad. 6. If it was (ever) so, he was glad. 7. If it had 
 been so, he would have been glad. 8. If it was so, he was 
 glad. 9. If you ilght with me, you will be defeated. 1(J. 
 If you should fight with me, you would be defeated. 11. 
 If you had fought with me, you would have been defeated. 
 12. If the king leads his army in this direction, we will cut 
 them iu pieces. 13. If the king should lead his army in 
 this direction, we would cut them in pieces. 14. If the 
 king were to lead his army in this direction, we would 
 cut them in pieces. 15. If any one is able to restore the 
 exiles, it is Cyrus. 16. If I do this, I shall act justly. 
 17. If (ever) any one fights with me, he is (always) de^ 
 feated. 18. If he is (ever) able to do this, he (always) does 
 it. 19. If he should Temember, he would give the pay. 
 20. If you sliall be diligent, you will be wise. 21. If you 
 were (now) diligent, you would be wise. 22. If they (ever) 
 have anything, they (always) give it. 23. If they should 
 have anything, they would give it. 24. If any one should 
 do this, he would err. 25. If any one (ever) does this, he 
 (always) errs. 26. If the generals have anything they (al- 
 ways) give it to the soldiers. 27. If they sliould have any- 
 thing, they woidd give it. ^28. If he should run, he would 
 conquer. 29. If you should do this, it would be well 
 
 30. If the soldiers should conquer, they would be honored. 
 
 31. If he should wish anything, I would give it. 32. If 
 he (ever) wishes anything, I (always) give it. 33. If he 
 (ever) wished anything, I (always) gave it. 34. If the king 
 does not fight in these days, then he 'w^ill not fight at all. 
 35. If those with the king had fought bravely, they would 
 have conquered. 36. If they had been good men, they 
 
144 GRKKK LESSONS. 
 
 would never have suffered^ these things. 37. If you 
 (shall) speak the truth, I will give you ten talents. 38. 
 if we (shall) take this, they will not be able to remain. 
 39. If they are doing^ this, they are prosperous. 40. If 
 they (shall) do^ this, they will prosper. 41. If you do 
 (shall) not gives them the boats, they will not sail away. 
 42. If I should go away^ against the will* of Cyrus, I 
 should wish ^ to ge); away unobserved * by him. 4^3. If he 
 had not done this and that,^ lie would not have died. 
 
 1 Use iiraaxov : referring to several cases in past time. 
 
 2 Use the participle. G. 226 ; H. 751. < aKwv (gen. absol.). 
 s Pai-tic. of diruiu. <• G. 226, 2 ; H. 752. 
 ' Use Xoyfiawj and aor. partic. of iiTipxo,ua.i. G. 279, 4 ; H. 801. 
 
 7 G. 143, 2 ; H. 525, a. 
 
 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. G. 229-240 ; 
 H. 755-761, 875-879. 
 
 1. I will give him whatever I (now) have. 2. I will 
 give him whatever I may have. 3. I would give him 
 whatever I had. 4. I would give him wliatever I might 
 have. 5. I (always) give him whatever I have. 6. I (al- 
 ways) gave him whatever I had. 7. He would eat what- 
 ever he wished. 8. He will eat whatever he wishes. 9. 
 He (always) eats whatever he wishes. 10. He will eat 
 whatever he may wish. 11. He (always) ate whatever he 
 wished. 12. Whoever does ^ this is punished. 13. Who- 
 ever steals is punished. 14. He will burn whatever^ is 
 useful to the army. 15. He (always) burns whatever is 
 useful to the army. 16. He wUl burn whatever maybe 
 useful to the army. 17. Cyrus ! you do not know what 
 you aje doing. 18. I will do to^ this Orontas whatever is 
 just in the sight of* gods and men. 19. He will do what- 
 ever he may promise. 20. He will do whatever he prom- 
 ises. 21. He (always) does whatever he promises. 22. I 
 
RELATIVK AXD TKMI'ORAL SKN lENCES. 145 
 
 will remain until he shall come. 23. I departed before my 
 brother came. 24. I should not wish to depart before yoti 
 came (might come).^ 25. Whoever should do this would 
 benefit me greatly. 26. He (always) says whatever he 
 thinks. 27. He will say whatever he may (tlien) think. 
 28. "Whenever he may wish, he will make thee a slave in- 
 stead of a king. 29. They (always) alloweil ^ him to take 
 whatever he wished. 30. When they see this, tliey will fear. 
 
 1 G. 233, N. 1 ; H. 761. ^ '' Use Trp^s with gen. 
 
 2 Usee? 7-1. ' (;. 240, 1, 2o2, 4; H. 771, 758. 
 " Use irepl with gen. ^ Use iSiSoircw. 
 
 RELATIVE AND TJiMPORAL SENTENCES (continued). 
 
 1. Who is able to give what he has not himself? 2. 
 Tliis is the man whom you saw. 3. Cyrus had a park full 
 of wild beasts, which he used to luint on horseback. 4. I 
 will send for him from the government of which I have 
 made him satrap. 5. Whoever came to Cyrus from the 
 king, he paid attention to them. 6. They said that they 
 trusted in tlie guide (i. e. any guide) which Cyrus might 
 gi\'e them. 7. When he shall come, I will do this. 8. It 
 was not in accordance with the character of Cyrus, not to 
 give to the army the pay which was due. 9. They took 
 back the slaves which had been seized. 10. When any one 
 comes, I (always) do this. 11. Whenever any one came, I 
 (always) did this. 12. You do not know what 3'Ou are do- 
 ing. 13. Do not go away until. I come. 14. I will not 
 cease fighting until I have conquered you. 15. I will 
 come whenever you command me. 16. Those whom I 
 iiave mentioned are the wisest. 17. On the next day he 
 gave them what he promised. 18. The same men were 
 present when these things happened. 19. They went wher- 
 ever, he desired. 20. They immediately cast away their 
 
IJfi OKKKK LKSSONS. 
 
 bracelets wherever they happened to be standing. 21. He 
 (always) gives what he promises. 22. He cried out to all 
 whom he met, that the king was advancing with a large 
 army. 23. We will not follow the guide whom Cyrus shall 
 give, lest he lead us (to a place) whence it will not be pos- 
 sible to go forward. 24. Cyrus rode on horseback when- 
 ever he wished to exercise himself. 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. G. 241-248 : H. 733-738. 
 
 1. We are able. 2. They said.i " We are able." 3. They 
 said that they were able. 4. They answered that they did 
 not know. 5. They answered, " We do not know." 6. The 
 soldiers said that Cyrus was dead. 7. He says that he is 
 doing this. 8. He says* that he is writing. J). He says 
 that if he should (hereafter) have anything, he would give 
 it. 10. He said that if he had a mina, he would (now) 
 give it to the slave. 11. The road is steep. 12. He says 
 that the road is steep. 13. He said that he was writing. 
 14. He said that he would write. 15. Tliey say that he 
 would come if this should happen. 16. They said that 
 they came there to see the battle. 17. He said tliathe did 
 not remember me. 18. He says that he would give liim a 
 talent, if he should speak the truth. 19. He says that he 
 would not trust the guide which Cyrus should give. 20. 
 He thought that if he should desire to announce an.ything 
 to the army, they would perceive^ it in half the time. 21. 
 I wro.te a letter to liim, (saying) that I would come on the 
 next day. 22. I wonder that no one among you is angry. 
 23. He announced to the king that lie would come. 24. 
 He asked whether there was any one wiser than I. 25. Tis- 
 saphernes accuses Cyrus to his brother, (saying) that he was 
 plotting against liim. 26. He perceived that the army of 
 
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 147 
 
 Menon was already in Cilicia. 27. He says^ that he should 
 have written,* if he had been able. 28. He says ^ that he 
 should write, if he should (ever) be able. 29. He says^^ 
 that he should be writing, if he were able. 30. I first an- 
 nounced to hiin that Cyrus was marching^ against him. 
 31. I know that he would write, if he should be able. 32. 
 I know that he would have written, if he had been able. 
 33. They say^ that if you should remember, you would 
 not be able to give what® you promised. Cyrus, when he 
 heard this, said: " But we ^ have, men, the paternal empire 
 (which) both (extends) to the south to that region where 
 men are not able to dwell on account of heat, and to the 
 north to that region where (they cannot live) on account 
 of the cold, but the friends of my brother govern as satraps 
 aU (the countries situated) in the middle of these. But if 
 we shall conquer, it becomes us to make our friends masters 
 of these (coimtries). So tliat I do not fear this, that I may 
 not have anything which ^ I may give to each of my friends 
 if we shall be successful,^ but that I may not have (friends) 
 enough to whom I may give. But to each of you Greeks 
 I will also ^^ give a golden crown." 
 
 1 See Lesson LXXIX., N. * Use the partici) Ic. 
 
 2 Use <t,nid. 8 «<ros. 
 
 3 G. 211 ; H. 734, c. ' G. 184, 4 ; H. 508. 
 
 * What would this be in direct discourse? ' AnylMng ichich, S tl. 
 " Ifu'e shall be successful, &» eS yivrrrai. ' 
 
 "» Use Kai. 
 
 CAUSAL SENTENCES, &c. G. 250-257 ; H. 720-722, 731. 
 
 1. I will give him a talent, because he spoke the truth, 
 2. Wo honor the general, because he is brave. 3. We are 
 astonished, because the wise are not honored. 4. Would 
 that my son had conquered. 5. that Cyrus would come ! 
 
148 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 6. that I had this power ! 7. that Cyrus were living ! 
 8. that we had done these things ! 9. Let us go to the 
 camp. 10. Let us not fear that the king will lead his 
 army in this direction. 11. Let us deliberate whether we 
 will send the soldiers, or will go ourselves to the camp. 
 12. Call Menon, for he is nearest. 13. Would that he had 
 arrived before the battle. 14. Be not astonished. 15. 
 Would that he were alive, for he would not fear these dan- 
 gers. 16. that these things had happened as he wished ! 
 17. May you never see this. 18. He gave to him ten tal- 
 ents, because he said to him that the king would not fight 
 within^ ten days. 19. When the generals had come to- 
 gether, they were surprised because Cyrus neither sent 
 another to signify^ what they should^ do, nor appeared 
 himself. 20. Cyrus cried out to Clearchus to lead the 
 army against * the ^ centre of the enemy, because the king 
 was ® there. 
 
 1 G. 179, 1 ; H. 591. « Use mrd. 
 
 2 G. 277, 3; H. 789, d. » q. 142, 2; H. 531-633. 
 8 G. 2U; H. 733, 736. « G. 250, N.; H. 731. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. G. 258-274 ; H. 762-784. 
 
 1. I told him to come.^ 2. I said that he came.^ 3. He 
 wishes to be ^ wise. 4. He said that ■ he had been doing * 
 this at that time. 5. He said that he was doing ^ this. 6. 
 He says that he has done this. 7. He said that he had 
 done this. 8. He commands him to go.^ 9. He says that 
 he did'' this. 10. We are able to carry on war. 11. He 
 wishes to expel the army from the country. 12. I came 
 to see you. 13. Clearchus narrowly escaped being stoned 
 to death. 14. Xenophon left half the army to guard the 
 camp. 15. They announced that Cyrus had conquered. 
 16. It is announced that Cyrus has copquered. 17. He 
 
THE PARTICIPLE. J 49 
 
 said that he wished to go. 18. They learn to do this. 
 
 19. I will tell you, on condition that you remain silent. 
 
 20. The enemy rode towards us, so that our army was ter- 
 riiied. 21. He said to Cyrus, that if he would give him a 
 thousand horsemen, he would prevent the enemy from biirn- 
 ing the grass, and would make them unable to announce to 
 the king that they had seen the army. 22. We are about ^ 
 to do this. 23. We are about to cross the river. 24. Cy- 
 rus wishes to go into the city. 
 
 1 G. 260, 1 ; H. 764. 2 G. 203 ; H. 734, c. 
 
 8 G. 208, N. 1 ; H. 717, b. 
 
 * G. 203, 1 ; H. 717, *. The present infinitive has three distinct uses. 
 What are theyi? 
 
 ' The present infinitive referring to time present, relatively to tlie 
 principal verb l\6|e ; whereas if it had been used as an imperfect (as in the 
 preceding exercise), it would have referred to time past relatively to IAe|E. 
 
 6 G. 260, 1 ; H..764, » G. 118, 6; H. 711. 
 
 ' G. 246; H. 734, c 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. G. 275-280; H. 785-803. 
 
 1. He goes up, taking Tissaphernes as his friend. 2. He 
 happened to be present. 3. He went up, having four hun- 
 dred heavy-armed men. 4. They seized the general for 
 the purpose of putting him to death. 5. They were pres- 
 ent with Cyrus, because they loved him. 6. He paid atten- 
 tion to the king, on the supposition that he was friendly to 
 him. 7. He collects his forces, concealing them as much 
 as, he could. 8. He garve orders to the cities to take as 
 many men as possible, because Tissaphernes is plotting 
 against him. 9. He perceived that some persons in Mile- 
 tus were plotting these same things. 10. He took under 
 his protection those who were fleeing. 11. He asks, be- 
 cause he is his brother, that the king shall give him these 
 
150 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 cities. 12. And thus an army was secretly supported for 
 him. 13. And thus he was supporting an army secretly. 
 14. He urged Socrates, having taken as many men as pos- 
 sible, to come, prefertding tJmt he was about to carry on war 
 against the Thracians. 15. He was not displeased because 
 they were carrying on war. 16. Cyrus was manifestly ^ 
 troubled. 17. They came into the presence of the king 
 with^ golden bracelets. 18. Cyrus, being a boy, was pleased 
 with these things. 19. In the reign of Cyrus ^ these things 
 happened. 20. He sends men to do this. 21. He hap- 
 pened to come. 22. He came secretly. 23. They stood 
 and wept for a long time. 24. When you have read the 
 letter, give it to me. 25. He went away unobserved * by 
 Cyrus. 
 
 I G. 280, N. 1 ; H. 797. ' Usie M with gen. 
 
 * Use the participle. • Use \ai>6dvia with thp participle. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 
 
 1. JT^w Cyrus hears this, he speaks as foUows. 2. The 
 king will come to fight ^ on the following day. 3. He 
 made a review of both the Greeks and the barbarians, while 
 riding upon his horse. 4. It is evident that he acts un- 
 justly.^ 5. I am conscious to myself of knowing nothing. 
 6. Aristippus, having been asked what those things ^ were* 
 which it was necessary to teach ^ boys, replied, " What they 
 will use wlien they become men." 7. In what ^ do those 
 who are educated differ from the uneducated ? 8. Cyrus 
 spoke boastfully when the battle^ was about ^ to take place, 
 but he was not very^ boastful otherwise. 9. Cyrus an- 
 nounced to the soldiers to prepare, hecause (as he thought i") 
 there will be a battle.^ 10., I hear that his brother is 
 dead." 11. He heard that Cyrus was^^ in Cilicia. 12. 
 
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 151 
 
 He assembled his forces as secretly as possible. 13. Cyrus 
 ascended upon the mountain without opposition.^^ 14. He 
 announced to his generals to take their best and bravest 
 men, on pretence that Tissaphernes ^* was plotting against 
 the cities. 15. As they (i. e. the army) were proceeding^* 
 from thence, there appealed tracks of horses. 16. Cyrus 
 received the exiles, and, raising an army, besieged Mi- 
 letus. 
 
 1 G.277, 6, N.; H. 789, rf. ' ;u<£Xa. 
 
 2 Lit. dmng unjust things. w G. 277, 6, N. 2 ; H. 795, e. 
 i What those things, rim. " G. 280 ; H. 734, c, 799. 
 
 ' G. 135, 2 ; H. 515. " G. 280; H. 734, c, 799. 
 
 " G. 164 ; H. 553. i' Lit. no one opposi'og. 
 
 " G. 188, 1, N, 2; H. 609 " Gen. absolute. 
 
 ' Gen. absolute. » g. 278, 1 ; H. 790. 
 8 G. 118, 6; H. 711. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. G. 282; H. 824-831. 
 
 1. Do you wish me to come ? 2. Who is writing ? 3. 
 When will you do this ? 4. Is he not a good man ? 5. 
 What are you doing ? 6. Who is he ? 7. I do not know 
 who he is. 8. Do you see, said he, how many we are ? 
 9. I will ask him for what ^ he wishes to employ us. 10. 
 For what does he wish to employ us ? 11. I asked him for 
 what he wished to employ us. 12. Does he speak the 
 truth? 13. Did he arrive before the battle? 14. Where 
 has your father gone ? 15. WiU they follow Cyrus, or not ? 
 16. They crossed the rivei:, before it was evident whether 
 the others would follow Cyrus or not. 17. He was deliber- 
 ating whether they should send some or should all go. 
 18. I asked whether he wished to go. 19. Shall I do this^? 
 20. Do you wish that I should say this ? 21. He asked 
 him what he was doing.^ 22. He asked him what he should 
 do. 23. Do you speak tamely of it, when I wanted little 
 
152 GREKK LKSSdNS. 
 
 of being stoned to death ? 24. Cyrus, when he had called* 
 together the generals and captains of the Greeks, consulted 
 how he should conduct^ (make) the battle. 25. When® did 
 the soldiers of the king arrive ? 26. Thales, having been 
 asked how we might live best'' and most justly, replied, 
 "If* we do not ourselves do^ (those things) which we 
 blame in others." 27. He heard a noise, and asked i" what 
 the noise was. 
 
 1 G. 160, 2; H. 552. » G. 277, 1; H. 788, i„. 
 
 2 G. 256; H. 720, c. " G. 244; H. 733, 736. 
 * The direct discourse would be ti Troieis. * jrAre. 
 
 ' Use tlie accus. plur. neut. of aptrros. ' Use a form of djidu, 
 
 " Use Hv. 1° Use ijpeTo. 
 
MIS0ELLAI«5"E0TJS EXERCISES. 
 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 As this night, however, advanced,^ fear fell upon the 
 Greeks also, and there was a commotion and such a noise 
 as is natural^ when^ fear falls upon (a company of men). 
 But Clearchus ordered Tolmides, an Eleian, the best herald 
 of (the heralds) of that time,* whom he happened to have 
 with^ him, he ordered this one to proclaim^ silence, and to 
 announce that the commanders publicly give notice that 
 whoever will give information of the one (lit. of him who) 
 who has let loose ^ the ass among the arms, shall receive as 
 a reward a talent of silver. And when this was proclaimed, 
 the soldiers knew that their* fear was groundless, and the 
 commanders safe. But at break of day Clearchus ordered 
 the Greeks to station themselves under arms in the order 
 in which they were ^ when ^^ the battle took place. 
 
 1 G. 183; H. 593. 
 
 ^ Such as would naiurally happen, oCov eUis ylyveirSai. 
 
 8 G. 277, 1 ; H. 788, a. ' G. 276, 2 ; H. 786. 
 
 « G. 141, N. 3; H. 492,/. » G. 141, N. 2; H. 527, d. 
 
 5 Lit. beside himself. 9 Which they were, girep etxov. 
 
 6 G. 277, 6, N. 2 ; H. 789, d. i« G. 230; H. 755. 
 
 II- 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. There Cyrus and the army remained twenty days ; 
 for the soldiers refused to go farther, for they already be- 
 gan to suspect that they were going against the king, and 
 
154 ' GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 they said that they were not hired for this purpose. But 
 Clearchus first attempted to compel his own soldiers to go ; 
 but they threw (stones) both at him and at his beasts of 
 burden when he began to advance. 2. And Clearchus 
 then narrowly escaped being stoned to death. But, after- 
 wards, when he knew that he would not be able to compel 
 (them), he convened an assembly of his own soldiers. And 
 first he stood weeping^ a long time ; but they seeing him 
 wondered and were silent. And then he spoke somewhat 
 as follows : — 
 
 3. " Fellow-soldiers, be not surprised that I am deeply 
 grieved at the present state of affairs. For Cyrus became 
 a friend to me, and honored me while a fugitive from 
 my country both in other ways, and particularly by a gift 
 of ten thousand darics. On receiving these, (lit., which 
 having received) I did not lay (them) up for my private 
 use; nor did I waste them in pleasure, but I expended 
 them on you. 4. And first, indeed, T made war against the 
 Thracians, and, with your assistance, I took vengeance (ou 
 them) in behalf of Greece, by driving^ them out of th& 
 Chersonesus, when they wished^ to take the land from the 
 Greeks dwelling there.^ But when Cyrus called (us), I 
 went taking you, in order that if he should need anything, 
 I might assist him in return for the favors which I had 
 received from him. 6. But since you do ' not wish to go 
 with me, it is quite* necessary for me either to abandon^ 
 you and enjoy the friendship of Cyrus, or to prove ^ false 
 to him and go with you. But since you do not wish to 
 obey nor even to follow me, I will follow in company with 
 you, and suffer whatever may be necessary. I think that 
 you are to me both country, friends, and allies, and with 
 you I think that I shall be honorable wherever I may be." 
 
 6. He spoke these (words). But the soldiers, both his 
 own (lit., those of him himsell') and the rest, when they had 
 heard these things, praised him because he refused to 
 marcli against the kiuj;. And more than two thousand 
 
MISCKLLANEOUS EXFRCISES. 155 
 
 from Zenias and Pasion took^ their arms and beasts of 
 burden and encamped by the side of Clearchus. 7. But 
 Cyrus, being both perplexed and grieved at these things, 
 sent (repeatedly) for Glearchus. But he, however, did. not 
 wish to go, but sending a messenger without the knowl- 
 edge of the soldiers, he told him to be of good cheer, inas- 
 much as these things would be settled favorably. And he 
 bade him (Cyrus) to send for him, but (when this had 
 been done) he himself refused to go. 
 
 1 Lit. standing, he wept for a long time. 
 
 2 Use the paiticijile. . 
 
 2 The Greeks dwelling there, rois ivoiKovuras "EWitvai. 
 * Quite, Sij. 
 
 III. 
 Translate Into Greek. 
 
 1. But what I just now wrote, that the king was struck 
 with alarm at the approach of the Greeks, was evident 
 from this ; for, though on the preceding day he sent and 
 ordered them to deliver up their arms, he then, at the 
 rising of the sun, sent heralds concerning a truce. 2. But 
 when they had come^ to the (advanced) guards, they in- 
 quired (for the commanders. And when the (advanced) 
 guards reported this, Clearchus, happening then to be in- 
 specting the ranks, told the (advanced) guards to bid the 
 heralds wait until he should be at leisure.^ 3. But wheii 
 he had stationed the army so that the dense phalanx was 
 in a favorable condition to be seen on all sides, and (so 
 that) no one^ of the unarmed was visible, he called the 
 messengers, and he himself also came forward with both 
 the best armed and best looking of his own soldiers, and 
 told the rest of the generals (to do) the same.* 
 
 4. But when they were in the presence of the messen- 
 gers, he asked what they wished.^ And they said they had 
 come concerning a truce, as men who will be^ duly author- 
 
156 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 ized to announce both the (messages) from the king to the 
 Greeks and those from the Greeks to the king. 5. But he 
 answered, " Tell him then, that we must have (lit. there is 
 need of a) battle first ; for we have no breakfast, nor is 
 there any one who will dare^ to speak to the Greeks con- 
 cerning a truce without* (first) supplying a breakfast." 
 6. The messengers hearing these things rode away, and 
 came back quickly ; from which it was also evident that 
 the king was somewhere near, or some other person to 
 whom orders^ had been given to transact these things. 
 They said that they (i. e. the' Greeks) seemed to the king 
 to say (what was) reasonable, and that they were come 
 with guides who, if there should be a truce, would lead 
 them whence they would have provisions. 7. But he 
 (Clearchus) asked whether he was making a truce ^'' merely 
 (auTot?) for the men while going and returning (from the 
 king), or (whether) there was to be a truce for the rest 
 also. But they said, " For all ; until the (report^ from you 
 shall be announced^^ to the king." 8. And when they had 
 said this, Clearchus, having caused them to withdraw, con- 
 sulted ; and it seemed expedient to make the truce quick- 
 ly, and to go quietly for the provisions and receive them. 
 9. And Clearchus said, " These (terms), indeed, seem good 
 to me also. I will not, however, announce (our determinaf- 
 tion) hastily, but I will delay until the messengers shall 
 fear lest it may seem inexpedient to us to make the truce. 
 I think, however," said he, " that the same fear will be 
 present also to our soldiers." But when it seemed to be 
 the fit time, he announced that he acceded to tha truce, 
 and immediately ordered them to lead (the way) to the 
 provisions. 
 
 10. And they (the guides) led (the way) ; and Clearchus 
 went (with them), intending, it is true, to make the truce, 
 but nevertheless having his army in order (of battle) ; and 
 he himself guarded the rear. And they met with trenches 
 and canals full of water, so that^^ they were not able to 
 
MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 157 
 
 cross without bridges ; but they made crossings for them- 
 selves from the palm-trees which had faUen,^^ but^* some 
 they also cut down. 11. And there it was possible to 
 learn Clearchus how he commanded, with his spear in his 
 left hand, and his staff in his right. And if any one of those 
 appointed to (work) seemed to him to loiter, selecting (the) 
 one who deserved (it), he would beat him ; and he himself 
 at the same time going into the mud took part in the work, 
 so that every one was ashamed (lit. shame was to all) 
 not^^ to assist in urging on the work. 12. And those 
 thirty years old were appointed by^^ him (to this work) ; 
 but when they saw Clearchus also urging on the work, 
 those (who were) older also took part. 13. But Clearchus 
 was so much the more in haste (on this account) because 
 he suspected that the trenches were not always so full of 
 water; for it was not a suitable season ^'^ (lit. such as) to 
 water the plain. But in order that even now there might 
 appear to the Greeks to be many difficulties for the march, 
 on this account he suspected that the king had let out 
 (axfyiriiJii) the water upon the plain. 
 
 14. But proceeding, they arrived at villages, from whence 
 the guides directed them to take the provisions ; there they 
 remained three days ; and there came from the great king 
 TisSaphernes, and the brother of the wife of the king, and 
 three other Persians, and many slaves followed them. But 
 when the generals of the Greeks met them, Tissaphernes 
 first through an interpreter spoke as follows : 15. " I, 
 men of Greece, dwell a neighbor to Greece ; and when I 
 saw you fallen into many and insuperable evils, I re- 
 garded ^^ it an unexpected gain for myself, if' in any way I 
 should be able to ask from the king to grant to me to 
 restore you safe to Greece. Por I think that it will not be 
 unattended^® with gratitude to me either from you or 
 from the whole of Greece. 1 6. But knowing this, I asked 
 the king, saying to him that he could justly gratify me, 
 both because I first announced to him that Cyrus was 
 
158 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 making an expedition^" against him, and came at the same 
 time with the message with (lit. having) assistance ; and I 
 alone of those arrayed against the Greeks did not flee, but 
 rode through and joined the king in your camp, where the 
 king came after he had killed Cyrus. And I pursued the 
 barbarians who were with Cyrus, in company with those 
 who are now present with me, the very persons who are 
 most faithful to him (i. e. the king). 17. And he also 
 promised me that he would deliberate concerning these 
 things ; and he ordered me to ask you, when I came,^* why 
 (lit. on account of what^) you made the expedition^ 
 against him. And I advise you to reply moderately, in 
 order that it may be easier for me, if I shall be able to 
 obtain any good thing for you from him." 
 
 18. To these things the Greeks, after having withdrawn, 
 deliberated and answered, but Clearchus spoke (for them) : 
 " We neither caine together with the intention of making 
 war on the king nor did we march against the king (in 
 the first instance) ; but Cyrus kept finding many pretences, 
 as you also well know, in order that he might both take 
 you iinprepared, and lead us up here. But when we saw 
 him already beset with danger (lit. being in danger), we 
 were ashamed both before gods and men to betray him, 
 since in a former time we had presented (Ht. presenting) 
 ourselves (so that Cyrus) could do (us) favors. But since 
 Cyrus is dead,^ we neither contend against the king for 
 Iiis kingdom, nor is there anything on account of which 
 we should wish to do harm to the country of the king ; 
 neither should we wish to kill him, but we would proceed 
 homeward, if no one should harass us. We will, however, 
 try with (the help) of the gods to requite any one who 
 injures^ us ; if, however, any one shall be found doing good 
 to us, to the best of our ability at least, we will not be 
 inferior to him also in doing good. Thus he spoke." 
 
 19. But Tissaphernes heard (him) and said, " I will re- 
 port these things to the king, and (will bring) the (mes- 
 
MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES. 159 
 
 sages) from him again to you ; but until I shall come, let 
 the truce remain ^^ ; and we will furnish a market." And 
 on the following day" he did not come ; so that the Greeks 
 were anxious ; but on the third day he came and said 
 that he had come having obtained from the king (his re- 
 quest) to grant to him (the power) to save the Greeks; 
 although^^ very many said in opposition that it was not 
 worthy for the king to let those go who had made an ex- 
 pedition against himself. 20. But at last he said, "And 
 now it is permitted to you to receive pledges from us that 
 in very truth we will furnish ^^ the country friepdly to you, 
 and that we will lead you back into Greece without treach- 
 ery, furnishing a market ; and wherever it may not be 
 possible to purchase (them) we will permit you to take 
 provisions from the country. But it will be necessary that 
 you, in your turn, swear to us, in very truth, to march as 
 through a friendly country, without doing injury, taking 
 food and drink whenever we shall not furnish a market ; 
 but if we shall furnish a market, that you will receive 
 your provisions by purchasing." 21. These things seemed 
 good. Then they made oath, and Tissaphernes and the 
 brother of the king's wife gave their right hands to the 
 commanders and captains of the Greeks, and received 
 (theirs) from the Greeks. But after these things, Tissa- 
 phernes said : " And now I shall go back immediately to 
 the king ; but when I shall have accomplished*" what I 
 want, I will come with my baggage packed up, for the pur- 
 pose of leading you back to Greece, and ^to go back myself 
 to my own government." 
 
 1 The aorist is sometimes used where we should expect the pluperfect, 
 especially after .such adverbs of time as iirei, ivctS^, las, rplv, etc. 
 
 2 G. 248, 1 and 4, N.; H. 735. « G. 236, N. 3; H. 756. 
 8 G. 283, 3 ; H. 837 and 6. ' G. 276, 2 ; H. 786. 
 
 * G. 79, 2, N.; H. 234. » G. 283, 4; H. 839. 
 
 6 G. 244 ; H. 735, J and c. 
 
 ' To whom orders had been given, v iTer^aicTo. 
 
160 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 w G. 244 ; H. 737. The direct question was (rrii/SeTat i) itravrai. 
 " G. 239, 2 ; H. 755. 
 " G. 266, 2, N. 1 ; H. 772. 
 13 G. 118, 1 ; H. 393. 
 
 " Some, Toi>s Si; 6 S4 is often used when no 4 n4v precedes. 
 1* G. 283, 7 ; H. 847. A negative idea is implied iu alffxivriv eXvat. 
 '« G. 197, 1, N. 1; H. 693, 624, c, 653, b. 
 " Suitable seixson, cipa o'la. 
 
 18 / regard it as an unexpected gain for myself, elipriiia iiroiriffdiiriv, 
 la G. 211 ; H. 783. ^^ rims heicer. 
 
 2' G. 246 ; H. 734, c. 28 G. 243 ; H. 734, c. 
 
 ■ii G. 277, 1 ; H. 788, a. 2* G. 200, N. 6 ;H. 712. 
 
 ■'^ G. 276, 2 ; H. 786 and 795, e. 
 ^'' Use the Attic imperative lievivruv for lievirujav. 
 '^ That it should be granted, SoSijvai. 
 28 G. 277, 5 and 6, N. 1 ; H. 788, /, and 795, c. 
 2' fTe will furnish. Use infinitive ; iiiias, understood, is the suhjeot. 
 "> The aorist subjunctive after iweiSiv refers the action of the verb to a 
 moment of time preceding the action of the leading verb. 
 
PAPEES. 
 
 1. What then ? When^ the Athenians and my [fellow] 
 citizens ^ come,^ let us summon * this man also, that we 
 may consult^ together.^ 2. Cyrus said, " If you go "^ now, 
 when ^ shall you be at home ? " ® 3. my country ! '" 
 that all who inhabit ^^ thee would love thee as I now do ! 
 4. Not many days after this. Chares ^^ came from Athena 
 with ^ a few ^^ ships ; and immediately the Lacedaemoni- 
 ans and Athenians fought a naval battle. ^^ The Lacedae- 
 monians were victorious,^® under the lead ^'^ of Hegesandri- 
 das.^8 
 
 1. eVciSav. 2. noKirqg. 3. €p)(oixai. 4. KaXea. 5. (rvju/SovXcva 
 (mid.). 6. Kotv^. 7. etfju, 8. ttots. 9. oikoi. 10. warpis. 
 11. oiKcii). 12. Xdpi;r. 13. e^^uv. 14. okiyos. 15. vaviia\f<o. 
 16. viKoa. 17. fiyeofuu (gen. absol.). 18. ''H.yqiravbpihas. 
 
 IL 
 
 1. After these things, Pericles rose,^ and thus spoke. 
 2. Do not obey ^ these most wicked men. 3. On the next * 
 day he gave them what he promised.* 4. All the Greeks 
 happened ^ to be doing this. 5. Many fear lest these things 
 should happen ® while Philip is king.'' 6. If these things 
 were true,* it would be stUl more terrible.* 
 
 1. avitmiiu. 2. w(i6a. 3. vtrrepaios. 4. fmurxyiopai. 5. Tvy- 
 xdvta with the participle. 6: yiyvoftai. 7. genitive absolute. 
 8. a\7]6^s- 9. dcivos. 
 
162 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 III. 
 
 1. Any one might justly ^ praise ^ him, not only for^ 
 these things, but for what he did about * the same time? 
 2. If you do ® what I just ^ now told ^ you, you wiU have 
 all things which any one could wish.^ 3. that ^° these 
 things had happened ^^ as we wished ! 9 But since ^ we 
 were unfortunate,^* let us do what the wisest of us shall 
 command.^* 4. If these men had not perished,^^ the city 
 would have been saved ^^ and we should now be free.^' 
 
 1. dtKaicuf. 2. cirdivtai. 3. int. 4. irepL 5. xpovos. 6. irottui* 
 
 7. opri. 8. KJipd^a. 9. j3ovXo/ia(. 10. eWe. 11. yiyvopai. 
 
 12. CTTfi. 13. arvxris. 14. KeXeia. 15. oTroXXv/it. 16. aa^ta. 
 1 7. f\ev6epos> 
 
 rv. 
 
 1. If I appear^ to be wrong,^ I will pay* the penalty. 
 2. If you should turn * from evils, you would quickly ^ be- 
 come ^ better. 3. I fear ' lest we have forgotten * the road * 
 home.^° 4. If , Philip had had this opinion,^^ — that it is 
 dif&cult ^^ to fight ^* with the Athenians, — he would have 
 done ^* no one of the things which he has done. 
 
 5. fV 
 10. 
 
 1. 8oKe<o. 2. aStKfa. 3. Stittjv tovvai. 4. diroTpfnoiim, 5. 
 rdxei. 6. ytyvopat. 7. ficifita. 8, tnAavdavofiJii. 9. 686s. 
 outaSf. 1 1 . yvaip.n. 1 2. xaKcTris. 1 3. iroXc/u'o). 1 4. Ttpcurira, 
 
 1. Those who were looking ^ on feared ^ lest their friends * 
 should suffer* anything. 2. They all said ^ that the king ^ 
 had sent ' them, and that they wished * to make an alli- 
 ance ^ with Cyrus. 3. If another shall come ^° in his own 
 name,^^ hira ye will receive.^^ 4. When this had hap- 
 
EXAMINATION PAPERS. 1&3 
 
 pened,^^ all believed i* that an assembly '^ would be sum- 
 moned.^® 
 
 1. Oedofiat (partic). 2. (fm^eoytai. 3. <j>iKos. i. wdtTX<»- 5. 
 Xeyw with on, 6. ^aaCKtvs. 7. irifotai. 8. /SovXoftat. 9. <ru/a- 
 naxiio. 10. cp\oiuu. 11. Svofia. 12. Xafi^dvo). 13. yiyvo/mt. 
 14. ou>;iat. 15. eKKKr/ma. 16. (rvyKaXca). 
 
 VI. 
 
 1. You would be approved,^ should you appear^ not to 
 do those things which you would blame ^ others for doing. 
 2. Swear * by no ^ god for the sake of ® money, not even ^ 
 if you are not about ^ to violate* your faith.^" 3. The 
 king ^^ said ^^ that the messenger ^^ was not then present,^* 
 and that, if he had been, these things would not have oc- 
 curred.i^ 4. Would that I had ^® the wings ^' of an eagle,i^ 
 that leaving ^* the earth ^ I might be numbered ^^ among ^ 
 the stars !^* 
 
 1. evBoKifiiio. 2. (finuofi.ii. 3. eVtr^fuita. 4. S/iwiti. 5. jufieii 
 or ov8c»? 6. fvcKa. 7. ^ijSc. 8. /icXXnv. 9. ttapa^alveiv. 10. 
 m'trrtr. 11. jSao-iXtiJr. 12. Xeycto with on. 13. SyyfXor. 14. 
 wdpfifii. 15. yiyvo/iai. 16. f^""- 1^- i^'i'^pdv. 18. aeror. 19. 
 \fiira>. 20. y^. 21. dpiBjiiio. 22. eV. 23. aarpov. 
 
 VII. 
 
 1. I tried ^ to show ^ him that ^ he thought * hQ was 
 wise, but ^ was not. 2. He says ® that these things hap- 
 pened ^ while Cyrus ^^ was king. ^ 3. Let no one believe ® 
 that I now fear i" lest our state ^^ be ruined.^ 4. If these 
 men were not unjust,^^ they would not have condemned i* 
 these generals ^^ to death.*® 5. He burned ^^ the vessels,*^ 
 that Cyrus *^ might not pass over.^ 
 
 1. jretpdo/jiai. 2. SfiKiw/u. 3. on. 4. o'o/xai (with infin.). 
 
164 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 5. it (with preceding fiiv). 6. 0i7/*i' (with infin.). 7. yiyvofuu. 
 8. participle of ^aatXeia. 9. vo/ii^u (with infin.). 10. <^o;3eo- 
 luu. 11. TToXir. 12. dirdXXv/ii (2d aor. mid.). 13. aSiKta. 
 14. KOTayiyvaxTKa. 15. arpan^yos. 16. Bavaros. 17. xaraiuia). 
 18. 7r\o(OV. 19. KO^oi. 20. diafiaiva. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 1. The king ^ is chosen ^ in order that those who choose ^ 
 him may be benefited^ by* him. 2. They said^ that Cy- 
 rus ® was dead/ and that Ariseus ^ would flee.® 3. If he had 
 been here,^" would he have overlooked ^^ these things, or 
 have punished^ these impious ^^ men? 4 May we desire^* 
 only ^^ those things which we shall rejoice ^® to have ac- 
 quired.i'^ 5. Before ^^ he came,^^ the ships ^^ happened ^^ 
 to have gone ^ to Caria ^ to summon ^ assistance.® 
 
 1. /SamXcv;. 2. aipia. 3. einparreiv. 4. did. 5. Xeyo) (on). 
 
 6. Kvpoi. 7. 6vr](TKa. 8. 'Apialos. 9. <j}tvya. 10. jrapet/u. 11. 
 wepiopaa. 12. KoXd^co. 13. do'c/S^r. 14. eniBvpita. 15. pavov. 
 16. neKTifpai. 17. xaipa. 18. irpii'. 19. fp^opai. 20. vauf. 
 21. TTiyxdvai. 22. ot;(o^ai, 23. Kapia. 24. 7rfp<ayy«XXa> (par- 
 ticiple). 25. PoijOfiv. 
 
 IX. 
 
 1. All of them fear ^ lest they may be compelled ^ to do 
 many* things which now they do not wish* to do. 2. 
 that^ this man had had® strength^ equal* to his mind. ® 
 3. They called in^" physicians" when they were sick,^^ 
 that they might not die.^* 4. He showed " that he was 
 ready ^^ to fight ^* if any one should come out.^^ 
 
 1. (pofiiopai. 2. dvayxd^A). 3. iroKvs. 4. jSovKopxu. 5. tWe. 
 6. ^X'"' ^* P^M- ^- '"'"I- ^- yvmpv- 10. wapoKoKfO. 11. 
 laTpos. 12. voo-eu (partic). 13. airo6vl)<TKO. 14. d^Xom (with 
 ort), 15. CTOtpos. 16. fidxopai. 17. tiepxa/iat. 
 
EXAMINATION PAPERS. 165 
 
 1. He said ^ that he had come ^ that he might see ^ both 
 ■what was doing and what had been done. 2. I told him 
 that, if these things had been true,* this would not have 
 happened.* 3. Would that he were alive ; '' for he would 
 not fear ^ these dangers ^ as you do. 4. Do you wish ^ me 
 to come ? ^ Tell ^ him not to fear * me, thinking ^^ I shall 
 be angry .11 
 
 1~. Xeyco. 2. fp\Of).ai. 3. Spaa. 4. a\r]6iis. 5. ylyl/ofiai. 6. 
 ^ovKoiiai. 7. ida. 8. ^o|3o{)jua(. 9. kIvSwos. 10. oio/tat. 11. 
 
 XI. 
 
 1. It is said^ that the king^ sent them away,^ fearing* 
 lest they should perish* by remaining.* 2. Athens/ al- 
 though it was ® great ® before,!" then became ^ greater, hav- 
 ing been freed ^^ from tyrants. -"^ 3. Who of all the Greeks 
 would not justly i* have hated i* us, if we had fled ^^ and 
 had left " our city to the barbarians ? ^^ 4. Call ^^ no one 
 happy ^^ before 21 he is dead.^^ 
 
 1. Xeyo). 2. /SacrtXcur. 3. aircmiiarai. 4. ^ofieo/iai. 5. ottoX- 
 Xu/it. 6. fieva. 7. 'Afl^rai. 8. Participle of ei^ui. 9. /ilyar. 
 10. irpiv. 11. yiyvopai. 12. aTTtiXXao'O'a). 13. ripavvos. 14. 
 SiKaias. 15. lucreio. IG. tf^iym. 17. icaTaXeiVa). 18. ^ap^apos. 
 19. KaXcffi. 20. oXjStof. 21. TrptV. 22. TcXfurau. 
 
 XII. 
 
 1. Wish 1 to be a friend ^ of the powerful,' in order that 
 you may not suffer punishment * if yoa act unjustly.* 2. 
 We fear* lest,^ if we do^ this, we shall miss* at oncei" 
 what we have gained " and what we hope ^ to gain. 3. 
 The messenger 1* camei* to announce i* that the city had 
 
166 GREEK LESSONS 
 
 been taken,^^ but that the citizens ^' were hidden '* near ^^ 
 the sea.2" 4. Would ^^ that he had died ^^ iu Ms youth,^^ 
 for ^ he now would be happy.^ 
 
 1. jSovXo^ai. 2. (jiiXos. 3. to be powerful, ivmaBai. 4. bi- 
 Kifv hovvai. 5. dSiKelv. 6. (jjo^oifiai. 7. lifj. 8. Trpdrra. 9. 
 ifiapTciva. 10. ^/ua. 11. Tvy\ava. 12. eXtti'^o. 13. ayyfXo;. 
 14. epxofiai. 15. dyYeXXm. 16. dXiiTKO^ot. 17. ttoXi'tijs. 18. 
 Kpvitra. 19. irapa. 20. fldXaTra. 21. «fle. 22. dn-odv^o-Ku. 
 33. a ymi/ag man, veavla-Kos. 24. eVft. 25. tvbaifuav. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 1. I trust 1 that these things which you have heard ^ are 
 true.^ 2. Who would not wish* to leave his country ,5 
 when such base ® men are in power ? ^ 3. The same men 
 were present ^ when these things happened.® 4. He said ^^ 
 that, although he was " a god, l^e wished * to die.^ 
 
 1. wurreitti. 2. aKOvia. 3. aKr]6!jS. 4. /3ovXo/xat. 5. jrarpia 
 6. n'ovijpo;. 7. KpaTcto (partic. ). 8. 7rdpeip,i, 9. ylyvopai. 10. 
 cin-ov. 11. participle. 12. dTrodc^oKo). 
 
 XIV. 
 
 1. After these things, a battle^ having taken place,^ the 
 Greeks were victorious.^ 2. The king himself came as 
 quickly * as possible ^ with thefirmy.* 3. The same general ^ 
 commanded ^ the army in both ® the battles. 4. Many of 
 the children ^° whom he saw feared ^^ lest they should be 
 taken.''^ 5. If these things had been true,^^ it would have 
 been still ^* more terrible.^* 
 
 1. fjidxt- 2. yiyvoyuu. 3. vixda. 4. ra;^v. 5. &s. 6. arpd- 
 Tivfia. 7. errparijydr. 8. ^yfoiiai. 9. d/itjidTepm. 10. wais. 11. 
 ^o/Se'o/xai. 12. Xap^dva. 13. dXiyd^r. 14. ert. 15. Scti/dr. 
 
EXAMINATION PAPERS. 167 
 
 XV. 
 
 1. I told' him that you alP were my' friends.' 2. He 
 acts" thus ° that he may not seem' to wrong'* the state." 
 
 3. Tf he had been just,'" this would not have happened." 
 
 4. Do you think '^ they will flee'' when" they see'^ us? 
 
 1. A-eyo). 2. irSs. 3. possesjive dative. 4. </)t'A.os. 5. wpar- 
 
 T0>. 6. OVTUK. 7. SoKEb). 8. oSlKett). 9. TToAlS. 10. SlKaUK. 
 
 11. yiyvo/juu. 12. oT/iai. 13. ff>evy(o. 14. orav. 15. ojaaid. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 1. They came' in order to destroy^ their' enemies.* 
 2. If you should say" this, he would be angry." 3. The 
 men' reported" that they had seen' no one.'" 4. He de- 
 clares " that he expects '^ to die." 
 
 1. ipxajJiw.. 2. dirdAA«/w. 3. article. 4. ixl^poi. 5. Xiyio. 
 6. xaXeiroiVo). 7. dvijp. 8. d7rayye\A.ei). 9. opdia. 10. ovSeis. 
 11. a.Tro(ji(uvoi. 12. ot/uat. 13. OvrjcrKoi. 
 
 XVII. 
 
 1. While' Alexander" was' in the country^ of the 
 Uxii,* his horse Bucephalus' was* once^ missing." 
 
 1. participle. 2. 'AXefavSpos. 3. x'^P'^- ^- Oi!|toi. 5. Bou- 
 Ke<j>dX.a';. 6. yiyvofiai- 7. omit. 8. d^arijs. 
 
 2. Accordingly,' he proclaimed^ through' the country 
 that he would kill* all the Uxii, unless they brought* 
 him back his horse. 
 
 1. oui'. 2. irpoKTfjpvTTm. 3. d:'d. 4. diroKTCtVo). 5. aTrdyo). 
 
 3. And such' fear "^ of the king had' the barbarians, 
 thaf Bucephalus was sent-* back directlj^" upon' the 
 proclamation.' 
 
 1. TocroirSe. 2. <^oj8os. 3. USe ei/ii. 4. uxrre. 5. d7rt«re)«,7roi- 
 6. (v6vi. 7. em. 8. KT^pvy/jui. 
 
168 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 XVITI. 
 
 1. Did not Homer ^ call ^ Agamemnon ^ shepherd * of the 
 people,^ because a general ® ought ^ to take care-^ that his 
 soldiers ^ be both lo safe " and ^" prosperous ? '^ 
 
 1. 0/17] fios. 2. itpoirayopcia. 3. ' Ayafiifunov. 4. iroifirjv. 5, Xads. 
 0. oTpaiTjyos. 7. fifi. 8. imiiiKtofuu. 9. (rrpaTiaiTijs. 10. t« 
 Kat. 11. crus, 12. tiSalficDV. 
 
 2. For ^ you know^ that generals are chosen^ to be au- 
 thors * of prosperity ^ to those who chose them. 
 
 1. yap. 2. oida. 3. aXpiopai. 4. airios. 5. evSatiiovia, 
 
 3. It seems ^ to me, therefore,'' that Agamemnon would 
 not have been applauded ^ by Homer, had he not been ex- 
 cellent * in this particular.^ 
 
 1. hoKta. 2. oSv. 3. inaivea. 4. from dya66s. 5. omit. 
 
 XIX. 
 
 1. As^ Xenophon ^ was ^ sacrificing,^ a messenger* ar- 
 rived ^ from Mantinea,^ announcing ^ that his son * Gryl- 
 lus ^ was dead.^" 
 
 1. omit. 2. Scvo(jiS)V. 3. Ova. 4. SyytXos. 5. fJKta. 6. 
 MavriWta. 7. Xtyoi. 8. vidy. 9. TpiXKos. 10. to die, BiiijiTKa. 
 
 2. Then^ he^ laid^ aside the garland,* but^ continued to 
 sacrifice.® 
 
 1. (cat. 2. tKflvos. 3. anoriOfnai. 4. are(j)avos. 5. Se pre- 
 ceded by /lev. 6. SiareXem. 
 
 3. But when ^ the messenger had added ^ this ^ also,* that 
 he had died victorious,^ Xenophon put ® the garland on ® 
 again.^ 
 
 1. fwei. 2. TrpoariOriiu. 3. ^Ketrot. 4. Kof. 6. pucdai (parti- 
 ciple). 6. eiriTiBfiiM. 7. TrdXti'. 
 
EXAMINATION PAPERS. 169 
 
 XX. 
 
 1. Themistocles ^ said^ that the tropliies^ of Miltiades* 
 woke^.hira from his sleep.® 
 
 1. QffuaTOKKrjs. 2. Xry<a. 3. rpoiraiov. 4. MiXruiSi;;. 5. dvi- 
 
 OTIJ/ll. 6. V1TU0S 
 
 2. Do not hasten ^ to be ^ rich,^ lest thou speedily ^ be- 
 come * poor.^ 
 
 1. tnrevSa. 2. irXovrea. 3. ra;(u. 4. yiyvonai. 5. ncnjg. 
 
 3. If he shall slay^ his^ enemy,^ he will pollute* his 
 hand.* 
 
 1. diroKTeiva. 2. possess, genit. 3. ixBpos. 4. lualva. 5. 
 
 4. A report ^ was spread ^ abroad ^ that the allies ' had 
 revolted * from the city.^ 
 
 1. Xoyos. 2. dia(T7rfipa. 3. aimuixos- 4. ax^itmnu. 5. irdXis. 
 
 XXI. 
 
 1. It became^ evident,^ that^ the Greeks strongly* 
 feared * lest he should become a tyrant.® 2. The' god, as it 
 seems,^ often ^ rejoices ® in making ^^ the small great, and ^^ 
 the great small. 3. The Thebans after this raised ^ a tro- 
 phy,^^ and gave up^* the dead^* under truce.^® 4 He 
 replied,^'' that he was not marching ^^ that ^^ he might do 
 wrong ^^ to any, but that he might assist ^^ those who were 
 wronged.^ 
 
 1. ytyvofiai. 2. SijKos. 3. on. 4. laxvpSn- 5. ^o^iofiai. 
 6. Tvpavvos. 7. fOiKa. 8. TroXXaici;. 9. ;^ai'pca. 10. participle of 
 n-oico). 11. be (with preceding ftiv). 12. iotthu. 13. rpmraiov. 
 
 14. iiToblhaifUU. 15. pfKpos. 16. virdviroKfiuf. 17. diroKplvoiuu. 
 
 15. orparevo/ucti. 19. tra. 20. odtKEO). 21. ^orjBta. 22. parti- 
 ciple. 
 
170 GRKEK LESSONS. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 1. He thought^ that he needed^ friends ^ for this pur- 
 pose* that he might have helpers." 2. that^ I had 
 as great " power ^ as ^ tliese kings now have 1 3. They were 
 not able ^^ to prevent ^^ Philip from passing through.^ 4. 
 They announced ^^ that they should treat ^* all these as 
 enemies. ^^ 
 
 1. o'ofiai. (w. infin.). 2. hiofiai. 3. (jitXos. 4. evcKa. 5. (rvvip- 
 ■yos. (J. fWe. 7. roaovTos. 8. Biva/xis. 9. oeror. 10. Siva/uu. 
 11. KcuXuQ). 12. Trapipj^o/iat (aor.). 13. irpoayopeva (on). 14. 
 Xpao/ioi (use). 15. rtoKc/uos. 
 
 XXIII. 
 
 1. The king said that whoever killed ' the man should 
 rule ^ the whole city. 2. They feared ^ that the army would 
 bring* aid to the inhabitants,^ for they perceived® that the 
 citizens were not despondent.^ 3. The eagle ^ remained 
 until ® evening ^° came " on ; and, terrified ^^ by the sight,^^ 
 we came to the soothsayers^* to raake^^ communication 
 about 1® the omen.^'' 4. He hoped ^^ that he should die^® 
 that day p^" that he might be released ^^ from his chains.^^ 
 
 5. Take 23 this soldier, and keep''* him until ^ I come^ with^® 
 the king's army. 6. Do not inflict ^ misery ^ on me who 
 am miserable ^ already.*" 
 
 1. dnoKTeiva. 2. ap-)(a>. 3. ^a/3oC/uai. 4. PorjBio). 5. evoixca. 
 
 6. alaBavoiuu. 7. aBvpia. 8. OErdr. 9. coif. 10. cairepa. 11. 
 emyiyvofuii. 12. cxTrX^o'crai. 13. S^jfii. 14. p.aiTis. 15. koivoiu. 
 16. TTepl. 17. 6eiov. 18. iXm^a. 19. dnoBvrjaKoi. 20. Jipipa. 
 21. \i(o. 22. ifap.6s. 23. Xafiffava). 24. o-m^u. 25. cp^o/iau 
 26. cx"- ^7- irpomdij/it. 28. vdo-ot. 29. vocreo). 30. ^di;. 
 
EXAMINATION PAPEBS. 171 
 
 XXIV. 
 
 1. They say that "when animals ^ were endowed ^. with 
 voices, the sheep ^ said to her master * : " You do ^ a curi- 
 ous ® thing/ because ^ to us who provide ^ you wool ^^ and 
 lambs ^^ you give nothing that we don't take ^^^ from ^* 
 the earth,'* while '^ to the dog ^^ you give '' [-some-'] of the 
 food'^ you have yourself." And that the dog, who had 
 been listening,'^ said : " But I am your preserver,^" so that 
 you are not carried^' off by wolves;^ since,^ if I should 
 not guard ^ you, you could not feed,^ through-fear^® of 
 death." 27 
 
 1. ^£ov. 2. ^ayvrjeis, 3. ois. 4. betrirdTris. 5. troiia. 6. 
 fluufiao-TOf. 7. omit. 8. because yoit = relat. pronoun. 9. 
 iraplxa. 10. tpiov. 11. npves (plural). 12. ^afi^ava). 13. «. 
 
 14. yrj. 15. Se. 16. Kvau. 17. fUTahlbajU. 18. (rirpr. 19. 
 anova. 20. aa^a>. 21. d/wrafs). 22. \vkos. 23. iitel. 24. ^u- 
 Xarro). 25. vifiojuu. 26. {fto^ovfiai. 27. an'oXXv/ti. 
 
 XXV. 
 
 1. He was brought up' at^ the court ^ of the king*; so 
 that,^ while ® a boy,'^ he used to converse* with the best^ of 
 the Persians.'" 2. Would that he had given " me what he 
 promised '^ to give him ! 3. Old men '^ say that life '* is 
 burdensome '^ to them ; but if death '® comes ''' near,'* no- 
 body wants '® to die.2" 
 
 1. nmSeia. 2. iiri. 3. 6vpa (plural). 4. ^airiXevs. 5. aarc. 
 6. Participle of etui. 7. nnh. 8. SiaKfyo/iai. 9. dya66s. 10. 
 Deparis. 11- BiSmfu. 12. imurxi'eop.ai. 13. yipiav, 14. fau. 
 
 15. /Sapvc. l6. eaKOTOs. 17. ep)(Oiiat. 18. irXijiriov. 19. j3oi/- 
 Xo//iat. 20. cmoOvTjtTKa. 
 
172 GREEK LKSSONS. 
 
 XXVI. 
 
 1. Seuthes asked, "Would you be willing, Episthenes, 
 to die for this boy ? " And he said, holding up his hands, 
 " Strike, if the boy commands you to strike." 2. He feared 
 that the men from the mountains would not make war 
 with the Gfeeks. 
 
 K B. — The sentences below need correction : write out 
 corrected forms for them with a right translation. 
 
 3. El oiSeis ipX"!'' " I'"' oiKovoi e/jif, oiSeis ao<jja)Tfpos cltrtv. 
 
 4. 'AwoTiyu-.ii' 01 'EXXiji'et Kai elirov rov itais fls Tta iroXetos Tovrif 
 tlvai. 
 
 5. And Xenophon, on arriving, said to Seuthes, that the 
 men were friendly, and would have sent mercenaries if he 
 had asked it. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
 1. The general with all his soldiers sailed away from the 
 island, thinking that Cimon had come from Athens with 
 twenty-suven ships. 2. The gods know well what it is best 
 for inau to have : to some they give much gold, to others a 
 beautiful body, to others neither of these gifts. 3. (Write 
 the following sentence in a corrected form, with the ac- 
 cents.) 
 
 rap eSatra tftavros avTovs iva roXayroK 8e oi dvBpwTroi (iravo-ovrat 
 fiaXovres. 
 
QUESTIOI^rS FOE EEVIEW. 
 
 1. How many letters are there in the Greek alphabet! 
 Name them. How are they divided? Name the vowels. 
 How many long vowels ; how many short vowels 1 Name the 
 doubtful vowels. How many diphthongs 1 Which are the 
 dose vowels? Name the diphthongs. (Notice that when an 
 open vowel precedes a close vowel in the same syllable, the 
 two form a diphthong : if the open vowel is short the diphthong 
 is called proper ; but if the open vowel is long, the diphthong is 
 called improper). Which vowels can take the iota subscript ? 
 
 2. How is the rough breathing marked? The smooth? 
 On which vowel does a dipththong take the breathing ? Write 
 the smooth breathing on the following words : apxrii *«, "r, 
 ayopa, atrros ; write the rough breathing on the following : rnjiepa, 
 dpfia, ovTos, 'EXXijK (Notice that when the word begins with a 
 capital, the accent and breathing are written to the lefi, and 
 not over the vowel), vrnp (Notice that words beginning with v 
 always have the rough breathing), 'Iwjroi, ovtos (Diphthongs al- 
 ways have the accent and breathing over the second vowel even 
 if they are capitals, except 9, 17, y). Write the three last diph- 
 thongs in capitals. Place the smooth breathing on the following 
 ■Words : O187, (Write the words all in capitals ; all in small 
 letters), 'Qiero. How is the consonant p generally written at 
 the beginning of a word ? How in the middle of a word ? 
 Put the breathing on prjTap, pa8ios (Write the last word in 
 capitals), Uippos. 
 
174 GRKEK LESSONS. 
 
 3. How many simple consonants are there 1 Name the 
 labials, the palatals, the linguals. Name the double conso- 
 nants. Of what letters is each composed 1 On what principle 
 are the consonants, as given above, classified 1 Mention another 
 classification. What is a- called 1 Which are nasals ? Name 
 the semi- vowels. Write o- at the beginning and in the middle 
 of a word. Mention the mutes of the same nrder. Mention 
 the rough mutes. Which mutes are co-ordinate, which cognate 1 
 Mention the surds, the sonants. What letters only can end a 
 Greek word ? Are there any exceptions ? 
 
 4. What is Crasis ? What is Elision ? What is the Apos- 
 trophe used for, the Coronis, the Diaeresis 1 To what words is 
 V movable added ■? What does oii become before a smooth 
 vowel, before a rough vowel? 
 
 5. How many syllables can a Greek word have 1 What 
 is a pure syllable ? Which is the pure syllable in ouna, pCa, 
 
 6. What is meant by quantity ? When is a syllable long by 
 nature 1 Which are the long vowels 1 Which the diphthongs 1 
 When is a syllable common? Name the liquids. What is 
 the quantity of the syllable before a middle mute followed by 
 a liquid 1 Name the middle mutes. Repeat the general rules 
 for the quantity of syllables. 
 
 7. How many kinds of Accent ? On what syllables can each 
 stand ? On what syllables only can the circumflex stand ? 
 When is a word called an oxytone; when, perispomenon ; when, 
 barytone ? When can the acute stand on the antepenult ? s 
 What kind of syllables admit the acute ? (Ans. either long or 
 short syllables.) What the circumflex ? When can the cir- 
 cumflex stand on the penult ? What final diphthongs are con- 
 sidered short for accent ? If the last syllable is accented, what 
 accent does it generally take? (Ans. the acute.) When does 
 an oxytone change to the grave 1 How is a dissyllable, with a 
 long penult and short ultimate, accented ? Accent the follow- 
 
QUESTIONS FOE REVIEW. 175 
 
 ing words on the antepenult : avBpwnos, dwajtis, irapabciaos ; the 
 following on the penult : fjiiepa, Sr/nos, Sopv, ^ij/cos, vrjo-os, Tetxos, 
 iSuoTTjs, fieaos ; the following on the last syllable ; d^ifi^or, npo, 
 deos, Saafios. What is the general rule for the accent of nouns 1 
 What does an oxytone of the first or second declension become 
 in the genitive and dative of all numbers 1 What is always 
 the accent of the genitive plural in the first declension 1 
 
 8. What is Inflection 1 What does it include 1 What is the 
 stem of a word 1 How many cases 1 How is gender indicated 
 in Greek 1 Write the declension of the article. What accent in 
 the genitive and dative 1 Write the genitive singular feminine 
 the ace. singular masculine. Decline apx% TeKfvr^, TTT/yi). 
 What accent in the genitive and dative of all numbers 
 Write the declension of olxta, x<"P°> VMP"' "P^''"'l> o'aTpairris, ttoXIt^s, 
 BaXaaaa. What is the rule for nouns ending in a pure and pa 
 What is the quantity of fiual u in BaXaa-aa, fjiJiipa, axopa, x^t""- 
 In what does the vocative singular of the following nuuus 
 end : ti/uij, fraTpcmTji, OTrXixijs, aTpanaiTqs, iroXinji 1 What is the 
 quantity of final a in the vocative of the first declension! 
 What is the accent of o-TpaTtmrijs in the vocative singular! 
 The penult of mKiTrji and jroXiVijr is long ; accent them in the 
 vocative singular ; in the genitive plural. 
 
 9. Decline p.vaa. What is the rule for the accent in con- 
 tracted final syllables ? If the first syllable of the uncontracted 
 form has the accent, what accent will the contracted form 
 have ! Give the rule for the accent of the contracted penult. 
 What case does the proposition « govern ? What does it be- 
 come before a vowel; before a vowel with the rough breathing? 
 Write the dative singular of Si'kij, apxfi, olxia ; write the game 
 in capitals. What is the iota subscript. What case in the 
 first declension has the iota subscript. What does the nomi- 
 native singular of nouns of the first declension end in ! What 
 in the vocative singular ? Accent the following words in the 
 vocative singialar : y\S>aaa, x^P"; "m4 Is there any indefinite 
 
176 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 article in Greek 1 What case does aw6 govern ? Decline 17 n/*^ 
 together. What is the accent in the first declension of the 
 genitive singular, dual, and plural ? What are words with no 
 accent on the last syllable called? With the' acute on the 
 penult ? With the circumflex on the penult ? What are words 
 called which have no accent ? Decline lunxra, and explain the 
 change of accent where it is not the same as in the nominative 
 singular. What nouns of the first declension have as in the 
 genitive singular? Accent the following nouns : ykaaaav, 
 yKtaatrmv, yXaairais, (from •yX£(T<ra) ; 'ArpciSrj, 'ArpetSai, 'Arpeibiou, 
 (from 'ArpEi'Si;?) ; OTpm-jarair, trrpaTuara, (TTparuoTai (from irrpar- 
 larris) ; 6dKaira-av, 6a\aa<rai, diiKaairaiv (from BaXaaaa). 
 
 10. In what does the nominative singular of nouns of the 
 second declension end ? Decline Xo'yos, i/^o-os, Svdpamos ; explain 
 the change of accent in the last two. Decline bao-fios. What 
 do oxytones become in the genitive and dative ? Accent the 
 following words ; itorapov, 7toTap,oiv, noTapoLs (from irorapos) ; vrja-a, 
 vrjcFov, Kijo-oi, itja-av (from vrjo-os). What is the termination of the 
 vocative of nouns ending -or? (Notice that the vocatives of 
 d8e\cj>6s and Seos are aSeX^t, with irregular accent, and Bei'n, the 
 same as the nominative.) Decline together d vopos, 6 klvSwos, ^ 
 oSds, tA ipdriov, to triiKov. 
 
 11. What is the Attic Declension? Decline vfas, dvaiyfav. 
 Give the rule for the accent (see § 22, 2, N. 2). Notice that 
 these words take i subscript where the common ending is i 
 Write the nominative plural of Xaymy. What would the com- 
 mon ending hb ? Write the ace. singular of Xaym; (see § 42, 
 2, Note). Write the nominative plural of avaycav. What 
 would the common ending be ? Write the dative singular and 
 dual of \ayas, wait, avayeas. What prepositions govern the 
 genitive only ? (Ans. dvri, instead of; jrp6, before ; cmo, away 
 from ; Ik, out of). Translate the following into Greek : Out of 
 the house ; before the temple ; instead of the soldier ; away from 
 the sea; out of the temple ; out of the hall. What accent has 
 « ? What the other propositions ? 
 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 177 
 
 12. Eepeat the rules for contraction relating to the second 
 declension. Decline vdoy, TrXo'or. Explain the change of accent 
 in the singular. Kule for the contraction of the nominative, 
 accusative, and vocative dual ? Decline ocrreov, kovcov. What 
 is the position of the governed genitive 1 Translate into Greek : 
 the door of the house ; the pay of the soldier ; out of the door of the 
 house. Write the declension of the following words and mark 
 the quantity of the case endings : oixia, Saa-fios, a-Tpanarris, in the 
 singular ; i/fwy, ttoA/tt/j, and Mpamos in the plural. Give the 
 rule for the quantity of the ending in the ace. singular of 
 oj/tm. Accent ojicia and a-TpanaTris in the genitive plural. 
 
 13. What nouns does the third declension include'! How is 
 the stem found f How is the nominative formed from the stem 1 
 How in neuters ; in masculine and feminine stems t What con- 
 sonants can stand at the end of a Greek word 1 What change 
 must a labial or palatal mute undergo before a lingual mute 
 (see §16)? What mutes can stand before a- 1 From the 
 stems cra>iiaTos, Xfyoprof, irpayiiaTos, (ftiXaKos, ■yuTToy, ^Xej3os form 
 the nominative and account for the euphonic changes. 
 
 14. Decline (^ilXal, ico'pa|, c^Xei^. Give the rule for the accent 
 of <l)\eyjf in the oblique cases. What is generally the ending of 
 the aco. ? What exceptions ] What is the vocative of \eiov 1 
 What does the stem of XfcDK end in ? In what cases is the 
 vocative the same as the stem 1 Decline iroififjv ; write the voc- 
 ative. How does it differ from the last word t Decline 8 linuiv, 
 a-Zfia, tpis. How is the dative plural formed 'i Form the dative 
 plural of the following, and account for the euphonic changes : 
 ipi\a^, ^Xei/f, Kopai, Xe'rai/ (§ 16, 5), tKnis. What nouns in the 
 third declension are contracted 1 
 
 15. Decline rpiTjprjs and yems. Give the rule for the accent 
 of barytones in -tji. What nouns are contracted only in the 
 dative singular, and the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
 plural 1 Decline jrdXit, irflxys, Scnv. Are nouns in -is ever oxy- 
 toiie ; in -eus ? In what does the ace. of nouns in -tvs end,? 
 Accent of the vocative 1 
 
178 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 16. Decline tjniyds, dyav, naU (for voc, see § 48, 2 c), Xifir/v, 
 Svo/ia, aa/ia. What cases are alike in neuter nouns 1 How do 
 they form their nominatives t What is the nominative of dvoiiar, 
 a-afuxT 1 Explain the accent of iroKis, in the genitive singu- 
 lar. Decline together t] bvvaius; 6 yowu'i; to SaKpv. If the 
 stem ends in i, what change is made 1 Decline irp6<j>airis and 
 mark the quantity of the endings. Decline (r6) Spos, (to) eipos. 
 What prepositions govern the dative only ? (Ans. iv (cf Lat. 
 in) in ; o-vv) (cf. Lat. cum. ), vdik, in company mth). Translate 
 into Greek : in the liouses of the villoffe ; in the army of Cyrus ; 
 in company viith the fugitives. 
 
 17. Decline vavs, y'tpas, Kepas. What nouns have o) in the 
 ace. sing. '! What are syncopated nouns ? Where is the accent 
 in the vocative placed 1 Where in the genitive and dative f 
 Decline w&nfp, dv^p. 
 
 18. What is the accent of monosyllables in the genitive and 
 dative of all numbers 1 What exceptions 1 (see § 25, 3, Note.) 
 If the case ending is long what is the accent 1 Accent the fol- 
 lowing words : Sriros, 6r)Tes, ft/ra, Sqras, Srjs (voc), from flijr. 
 
 What is the quantity of -at in the ace. plur. ? What of the 
 ace. plur. of the first declension 1 Accent the following : 
 alvmvf, alvacn, ulvavas, dlvaiioiv (from alvav) ; jSutriXev, fiairiXfig, 
 PaaiXevai (from /SncrtXcvf). 
 
 19. How do adjectives in -or end ? What is the ending of 
 the feminine ; if p precedes the -or 1 How do adjectives in -oos 
 end ? Decline o-o(p6s, a^ios. What is the quantity of the a in 
 the feminine in the ending of the nominative ! The accusative 1 
 How do compound adjectives in -os end ? Decline SSikos, Siropos. 
 Of what are the two last compounded ? 
 
 20. Decline dyiipay. Decline and explain .the accent of 
 eiiyemr. Write out the declension of ;fpuo-fos, and account for 
 the change of accent. Decline dpyi'peos, tSvoas, &jT\dos. 
 
 21. Decline dXijfl^s, neirav. What irregularity has iKwv, i&pis, 
 (^'ds 1 How do most adjectives in -vt end ? Which hav€ the 
 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 179 
 
 endings -as, -aim, -av 1 What is the stem of (uKas 1 Decline 
 yKvKvs, xap«"r- H.OW is the feminine formed (§ 16, 6, N. 1.) ? 
 Decline iie\as and explain how the feminine is formed. Decline 
 TepijK, apcrqv ; which has no feminine form ? Translate every 
 man, all the men, every city, all the soldiers (§ 142, 4, N. 5.). 
 
 22. Write out the declension of \vav, Joras, heixvis. How 
 are aJl participles in -<ov declined ? How are participles in -out 
 declined ; participles in -as ; in -eis ? Decline 'KeXvKas. What 
 participles in -as are irregular in the feminine. Decline la-Tas. 
 
 23. Decline nfimv, ^CKav, drj\S>v. Write out the declension of 
 Ttiidav, both contracted and uncontracted forms, and give the 
 rules for contraction. Write the stem of oKrjdfjs, euflat/ion;. 
 
 24. Decline ttoKvs, /leyas. Notice in jroXiIr that the \ is 
 doubled whenever it precedes any other vowel than v. 
 
 25. How many degrees of comparison 1 Compare Kovipas, 
 <To<j)6s, fUXas, cra(f>rjs, wevris, xap'"E, mKp6s. What is the rule for 
 stems in o with a short penult 1 If the penultimate vowel is 
 followed by a mute and a liquid 1 Compare iu<ros, eivoos, tr&^pav, 
 and give the rule in each case. 
 
 26. How are some adjectives in -vs and -pos compared ? Com- 
 pare ^SiJs, Taxis, p-iyas (§ 16, 6, N. 1.). Compare dya66s, Kaxds, 
 KoKos, TToXur, al(TXpos. 
 
 27. How are adverbs regularly formed from adjectives? 
 Form adverbs from (ro0ds, (j>!\os, raxis, a-aipris. Compare vo^Sis, 
 dXrjBSis, ijSfcos. In what other way are some adverbs compared 1 
 Compare ^e^aias. Compare Sva, iyyvs. 
 
 28. Into how many classes are numeral adjectives divided 1 
 Write the cardinals to 10. Give the first ten ordinals. De- 
 cline eif, Tpeis. Decline riarcrapcs, hlo, ovSels, prjbels. Is 8vo ever 
 indeclinable? How are the cardinals from 1-3 to 19 formed? 
 Repeat them. How are 18 and 19 commonly expressed 
 (ivbs Seoxrej eiKotri). What cardinals are declined and what 
 are indeclinable? Write the Greek for 10, 20, 20th, 100, 300, 
 1000, 1600. 
 
180 GREEK LES^UNS. 
 
 29. What is a pronoun 'i How many classes of pronouns 1 
 Decline eya, <ru, oS. Which forms are enclitics ] Is any pronoun 
 enclitic when governed by an accented preposition? Which 
 forms are then used (§144, N.)? Decline aiiros. Write the 
 Greek for : the same man ; the man himself ; the country itself ; 
 the same country ; I read ; I myself am reading ; I read, hut you 
 write. When is the personal pronoun expressed ? How is 
 BUTos contracted with the article ? When does aurdt mean him, 
 her, it ? 
 
 30. Name the reflexive pronouns. Decline cjiavroD. What 
 are iavrov and aeauToS generally shortened into 1 Explain the 
 difference between avrov and avrov. Write the Greek for : 7ny 
 mmi father (for the position of the article, see § 142,) / his own 
 tent; he wishes to exercise (/SouXerat yviivdaai) himself; I exercise 
 (yviivaCai) ' myself and the horses. What is a reciprocal pro- 
 noun ? Decline aXX^Xuv. 
 
 31. Which are possessives? How formed and declined? 
 Write the Greek for : my father ; my brother; a brother of mine ; 
 my friend. What are demonstrative pronouns ? Decline oJror. 
 How is obe declined. What is the position of the demonstra- 
 tive ? Write in Greek : this country ; that man ; those men ; 
 this general ; those generals ; I see {6pa) the generals themselves ; 
 I see them ; I see that boy ; I see those hoys. 
 
 32. What is an interrogative pronoun? Decline rls. De- 
 cline the indefinite ris. Is the accent of tU ever changed to 
 the grave ? Write in Greek, what men do I see (6p&) 1 I see a 
 certain man. Define a relative pronoun. Decline or, oortr. 
 What kind of a relative is Sotjj. Write in Greek : whom do I 
 see ? a (certain) hoy ; some of the Greeks (gen. § 168). 
 
 33. What are correlative pronouns ? How are they dis- 
 iinguished ? Those with tt ; with t 1 How are pronouns and 
 verbs distinguished ? Write in Greek : where, whither, how, 
 somewhere, to some place, from some place. 
 
 34. What is the general rule for the accent of verbs ? How 
 
QUESTIONS FOB REVIEW. 181 
 
 many voices, how many moods, how many participles, how 
 many tenses? Which are the finite moods? How are the 
 tenses divided ? Which are the historical ? What is a pm-e, 
 mute, and liquid verb 1 Inflect the present indicative of "Kia. 
 Give the personal endings ; the connecting vowel. Inflect the 
 future. Write in Gredk : / loose him ; you vMl loose them ; he 
 looses those meii ; they viill loose that boy. Inflict the impf., and 
 give the personal endings and connecting vowel. Write in 
 Greek : / was loosing him ; they were loosing them ; we were 
 loosing him. Give the aor. of "Kia. Give the synopsis in the 
 indicative mode of fut., 6f aor., of pf Write the present subj. 
 Write the aor., optat. Which form is used (see p. 153, 13.)? 
 
 35. Inflect the pres. mid. Give the stem, the connecting 
 vowel, and the personal endings. Inflect the impf. Give the 
 tense stem ; personal ending. Give the aor. pf and plupf. 
 indie. Give synopses of the present, fut., aor., and pf Write 
 the present subj. Write the aor. indie. 
 
 36. Inflect the fut. pass., the aor. pass., the fut. pf. Give a 
 synopsis of the pres., the fut., the aor., the pf , and fut. pf , pass. 
 Give a synopsis of XtiVm in 2 a. act. and 2 a. mid. Give a syn- 
 opsis of areXXik) in 2 a. pass. Inflect 2 a. indie, of each. Give 
 the imperative of each in the ^ct. 
 
 37. How is the future of liquid verbs formed? Give the 
 future of <l>aiva,. inflect it. Give a synopsis of the future. 
 How is the aorist formed (} 110, III. 2)? Give a synopsis of 
 the aorist. Inflect the a. optat. Decline the future partic. of 
 <^mvu3. Inflect the future mid. ; the optat. 
 
 38. What is meant by periphrastic forms ? Give the pf 
 pass, of T-pi'/So). Inflect and account for the euphonic changes ; 
 do the same for ttXckcd, of ireWa. Give the plupf of each. How is 
 the pf. subj. and optat. of the pass, and mid. formed ? How is 
 the periphrastic fut. formed ? Write in Greek : we are dbo^lt to 
 do this. 
 
 39. What is augment? How many kinds? Give some word 
 
182 gui:ek Missoxs. 
 
 to illustrate each. What words take the syllabic augment? 
 What tenses take the augment, and what the reduplication'! 
 What Verbs reduplicate ? Do all verbs that begin with a single 
 consonant or with a mute and a liquid reduplicate 1 What do 
 verbs beginning with two consonants (not a mute and liquid) 
 or a double consonant take 1 If the verb begins with a rough 
 mute, how is it reduplicated (§ 17, 2.)? 
 
 40. What is the temporal augment? Write the impf. of 
 aya, e\aiva>, fX"- Write the iuipf. of altrddvonai. Which vowel 
 receives the augment if the word begins with a diphthong ? 
 
 41. What is the Attic reduplication 1 Give the pf. of aKova, 
 l\eyxa>, eXavvoT, opva-a-a. Where is the aug. or redupl. placed in 
 verbs compounded with a preposition? Write the impf. of 
 o-uXXeyo), TrpoaypAx^a. If the prep, ends in a vowel, what is 
 done? Where is the aug. or redupl. placed in verbs com- 
 pounded with 8us- with e3- ? What verbs prefix ci instead of the 
 reduplication ? 
 
 42. What is a pure verb? When is the final vowel of the 
 'Stem Ijnirthened ? Write the pres., fut., and pf of fr/Teu, nfiAa, 
 
 <l>t\iio, SijXo'a), fda), Spdto. Give the fut. of xpdai, KaXeo) (§ 120, 2). 
 
 43. Write th'3 pf. of crrepya, yiyvop,ai, rima, (fsalva, Kpd^a>, 
 
 n-X^o-o-ci), <rTpi<^a XfiVo), (f)fiyas. What change is made? What 
 is the stem of o-TeXXm ? What is the rule for e in monosyllabic 
 stems? Write the pf. pass, of oreXXto, rpeirio, rpc^oi. What 
 four verbs in -j/m omit v of the stem before terminations begin- 
 ning with a consonant ? What does v become (when not 
 dropped) before -ca ; -pini ? 
 
 44. How is the future formed 1 Form the future and account 
 for the euphonic changes of the following verbs : Tpi0a>, ypa^a, 
 Xeyo), vfiBca, fiya>, aSo) ; t/j6<^<», rptxa), 6pvttTa), and ri^to, (§ 1 7, 
 2, N.). How is the future of a liquid verb formed ? Write the 
 future of (paivta, o-TcXXo), dyyeWa. Write the aorist of the three 
 last. How is the pf. formed ? Write the pf and account for 
 the euphonic changes of the following : Xttwa, ypdtjta, n\Um, 
 
,. QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 183 
 
 Toxfuai, ^paZfa, Kkkinut (§ 110, IV., (d), Trc/iiro), rpcTrm. How is the 
 aor. pass, formed? 
 
 45. Write the pf. plupf. and aor. pass, of each of the verbs 
 in the last section. Write the pf. pEiss. of Tt/tam, 7re6^a), ypd- 
 4>u), KafiTTTOi, iXiyx"}, (j>aivo) (§ 109, 6), cnrivSw, oivvw; reKeia 
 (§ 109, 2), (TTrdui (stem ctttS.-), aKovo), KeX.€v<o, kv\iu>, \.evu), fuui, 
 iraiw, TrXeu), irpto), How are tli,e pf. suhj. and optat. pass, gen- 
 erally formed (of. Lat. solutus dm, essem). 
 
 46. Inflect the pf. pass, of TcXecu, TrtWia, (ftalvta. How is the 
 flit. pf. formed ? What verbs form the fut. pf. with active end- 
 ings ? Ans. L(rTr]ij,L and dvi^a-Kto. 
 
 47. Inflect the aor. pass, of kvot (§ 115, 3). What two forms 
 are used 1 How derived 1 
 
 48. How do liquid verbs forto their future and aorist? Form 
 
 the future of ayyeXXca, tcXeo), ^ijSd^a, sKavvto, KO/it'^oi, /SiiXXca, KreiVoi, 
 (j>6eipa, dfivva, (T(j)d\Xa, (TTeXXu, alpu) ; fut. mid. of pajfOfiat, irveto, 
 
 TrXea, (pevya. What kind of a future have the last three verbs 1 
 Ans. This fut. with an active meaning is called the Doric. 
 
 49. What verb? form their future without any tense sign 1 
 
 Ans. X^'^f fdojuai and iriopai, 
 
 50. Give the fat. of aSo>, dxovca, dwavrda, dnokavto, /SaSt'^m, ^oda, 
 ■yfXdo), (Tiyda, oljxm^at, iriamdu), o-7rou8df<a. Notice that these verbs 
 have a fut. mid. with an active meaning. 
 
 5 1 . Write the aorist of Kep&aivio, opyaiva, maivia. 
 
 52. Write in the present the unoontracted and contracted 
 forms of npdto, give the rule for contraction. Write in the 
 same way the impf , the imper., and the infin. Write the pres. 
 optat. (§116, 4). 
 
 53. Write both forms of </)iXfoi and dijXdm in the pres. and 
 impf. Write the optat. of both verbs. 
 
 54. Give the pres. pass., both forms, of ripda, t^iXcm, 5ijXda>; 
 the impf. Give synopses of each verb in the present. 
 
 55. What is the rule for the contraction of dissyllabic verbs? 
 Write the present of n-Xem ; of dem. What verba have ij for a in 
 the contracted forms 1 Write the present of (dio. 
 
184 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 56. What verbs omit the connecting vowel ? To what are 
 the terminations added ? What is the stem of fldinu, fiiS<u/i 1 
 Give the synopses of larrnii, riBrnu, SlSaiu, SeiKWfu in the pres- 
 ent. Write the inflection in the present indie, of each verb 
 in the impf. Give the present subj. and optat. of Jonj/ji, diSajxi 
 (§ 122, N. 4). 
 
 57. Give a synopsis of each verb in the 2 a. active. Give 
 the inflection of each in 2 a. indie. Give the present impera- 
 tive of each ; the 2 a. imper. 
 
 58. Inflect each verb in the present pass. Is the accent 
 regular 1 For accent of bwa/iM, iiriaranai, Kpijiafuu,, 2 a. iirpid/triv, 
 avTjfirjv, see § 122, 2, N. 2. Give a synopsis' of each verb in 
 the present ; in the 2 a. Write the present subj. and optat., 
 and account for the accent. What verbs have their 1 a. in -ku 1 
 Give the parts of each verb. What forms are used in the 
 impf. sing, act. of rldrjui and SiSam t How is "irnj/j* used in the 2 
 a. active. Give the iufin. forms of each verl). Give the pf. of 
 Tidriiu, plupf. of t(rrij/u,fut.pf. (§110 IV. (c),N. 2). Difference of 
 meaning of ia-nnu : (1) in act. ; (2) pass. ; (3) middle. 
 
 69. Give a synopsis of «Vt- Inflect the present ; the impf. 
 What is the signification of tt/u in the present (§ 200, 3) t For 
 what verb is it used as a future 1 
 
 60. Give a sj^opsis and inflect «/«, irnu, (jtrjiu, Kctfiot. What is 
 the 2 a. of /SoiVo), yiyvaxTKa 1 How inflected 1 What is the 2 a. 
 of oKia-KOfiM, its pf. ? 
 
 61. What is the 2 pf. of fiatva, "orij/ii 1 Decline the partic. 
 to-rcoy (§ 69, N.). Give the 2 pf of SeiSa. Inflect oiSa. Give 
 the imper., and 2 plupf. of otSa. What verbs have an intransi- 
 tive sense in the 2 pf, 1 Ans. iyelpa, mWa. (paiva, SKXviu, Syvvfu, 
 and a few others. 
 
 62. What is a simple sentence ; the subject, the predicate, 
 the copiila f Give the rule for the subject of a finite verb ; for 
 the infinite mood ; for a verb ; for the neuter pi. ; for a collec- 
 tive noun. Write in Greek : You and I are reading : the 
 prizes were given. 
 
QUESTIONS KUR REVIEW. 185 
 
 63. When does the predicate noun agree with the subject ? 
 Give the rule for apposition : for adjectives. If the word to 
 which the adjective refers is omitted, how is the case of the 
 adjective determined ? 
 
 64. To what does the article correspond in English 1 Men- 
 tion the uses of the article in Attic Greek. Translate the fol- 
 lowing ; o tS>v 'Adrivaitov Sfjiios ; ttoWoi, oi ttoXXoi ; jrXeowi, oi 
 7rXeo«r ; nXXot {=alu}, ol SWoi {=ca;teri), 6 pfirap ; Kipos iyivtro 
 ^aaCKfXis t&v Hepa-av ; to rav 'ABrivaiav ; tj apcTrj. 
 
 65. What is the position of the article when attributive 1 
 Write in Greek : the good man ; the wise men; the arms of the 
 soldier. Translate : 6 dyaflos avrjp ; o'l iv rfj iroKei ; 6 dijuos 6 tS>v 
 'Adrivalau ; 6 ipbs fTatpos ; f/aos iraipos. 
 
 66. What is the position of the article with the demonstra- 
 tive ; the gen. of the personal pronoun 1 Translate : 6 ivfip 
 
 crowds ; oStos 6 avlip ; 17 iraira iroKis ; ■natra ttoXis ; 6 aiirip ovtos ; 
 avTos 6 irarfip or d narfip avTos ; riji r)iiepus o\i]s btfiKBuv {thej pro- 
 ceeded) oi TrXfOi/ Trei/Tf Km eiKoo-i a-Tabiaiv , taxaTOV to opos ; to eo-X'Toi' 
 Spot ; }) dyopa pier'} ; rj pecrn dyopd (cf Latin foruin medium for 
 both). 
 
 67. In Attic prose when does the article retain its original 
 demonstrative force 1 
 
 68. When is the nominative of the personal pronoun ex- 
 pressed] Which forms of the oblique cases are generally used ? 
 When is oS a personal pronoun, when a reflexive, when an in- 
 direct reflexive 1 Mention the uses of avros. What is a reflexive 
 pronoun 1 How is the possessive, the demonstrative, the interro- 
 gative, the relative pronoiin used ? Translate : Zeis Tfjv 'kdi]mv 
 c(f>vaev 6/c (Zeus produced Athene out of) t^s eavroC Ke(^aX^c ; 
 avTov 6 uidy ; o ijpeTepos narfip ', o iraTfjp ^pav ; ris et ; eijre p-oi, 
 oaxts «i or ris tt. 
 
 69. What is Assimilation ; Attraction ? 
 
 70. What is the rule for the nominative the vocative 1 Give 
 the rule for the accusative. What is the cognate accusative ? 
 
186 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 The aco. of specification ; the adverbal aco. ? Give the rule for 
 extent of time or space ; for ace. after adverbs of Swearing ; 
 for two ace. Translate and give the rule for the ace. ivravBa 
 THipos cfieive ; rifupas Treire ; Te'i\os Tei;^tfoi(Tat ; tSiSa^av tov italha rfju 
 HovfriKTiv ; Kcifiva ti]i> Ke<^aKr]V. 
 
 71. What is the rule for the genitive 1 Mention the differ- 
 ent kinds of genitive. Explain the difference l.etween the sub- 
 jective and objective genitive. Give the rule for the genitive 
 after verbs. Mention the verbs that are followed by the geni- 
 tive. 
 
 72. Give the rule for the causal genitive ; the gen. as ablative ; 
 the gen. after the comparative degree ; the gen. after compound 
 verbs ; the gen. of price ; of time and place ; the gen. with 
 adjectives ; with adverbs; the gen. absolute. 
 
 73. Translate and explain the use of the genitive : 6 (t>63os 
 TOiP noKeixtav ; 8ov\os ntitre fivwv : noT^iTov dpeT^ J fj oIkicl tov iraTpb^ 
 iyivtTO ; 6opi^ov ^Kovirfv ; rJKOvira ravra tS>v dyyiXav ; rijs c'lri/SnuX^c 
 ouK jJo-^iii/tTo ; avSpts a^ioi Tfjs (§ 141, N. 1 (a)), IXevdfpi s; 
 jriipadcitros Sripiav rrX^pi/s ; Bavpa^ofitv TiioKpaTrjv T^r troi^ias ; pfi(<ov 
 earl tov 'jTuTpos J 'nov yrjs itrnv J <^X^'^° '"^^ wktos. 
 
 74. Give the general rule for the dative. Rule after transi- 
 tive and intransitive verbs ; the dative of advantage and dis- 
 advantage. Give the rule for dative of possessor, and the 
 dative vdth respect to which. After what class of verbs and adjec- 
 tives is the dative used 1 _ 
 
 7.5. Translate and explain the following : Spowi (like) toIs 
 ('^ > I- ; oStos Kiptt) elirtv ; ttj ijkiKia eirpewe ; SlSiapi <roi ifiavrov. 
 
 . Give the rule for the dative of resemblance and union ; 
 fi cive after compound verbs; the causal and instrumental 
 ri tive. 
 
 77. Give the rule for dative of manner ; agent after verbals 
 ii -Tfos, dative of time, and dative of plac§.* 
 
 78. Translate and explain the dative in the following : eWoifln 
 Kipa ^aaCKfia ^v ; wornpihs fjiuv cari StnjSiircos ; dieomfft tis iraX™ ; 
 'i 7/ wp^TT] fjpfpa atpiKovTO, 
 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIKW. 187 
 
 79. Explain the meaning of the word voice in grammar ; of 
 active, passive, middle. How can the subject be, represented 
 in the middle voice ? 
 
 80. How many tenses in the indicative ? Define each. 
 How do the aorist and imperfect diifer ■) Translate into 
 Greek : He did this ; he was doing this ; he has done this ; I 
 v/rote ; I was writing ; I have written. 
 
 81. How are the tenses of the indicative divided? What 
 tenses are commonly used when not in indirect discourse? 
 How do the present and aorist differ in this construction? 
 Translate into Greek : he did this (once) / he did this (habitu- 
 aUy). 
 
 82. Explain the general principle of indirect discourse. 
 Translate into Greek : he says, he is writing ; he says that he is 
 writing ; he said., T wrote ; he said that he was writing. 
 
 83. What time do the tenses of the participle express ? What 
 exception with aorist participle ? 
 
 84. Explain the historical present and gnomic aorist. How 
 is the imperfect used with the adverb Sv ? Explain the general 
 use of the particle av. 
 
 85. How many moods ? Define each. 
 
 86. Into how many classes are clauses which depend upon 
 final particles divided ? Give the rule for final clauses, for ob- 
 ject clauses after verbs of striving ; after verbs of fearing. 
 
 87. Translate and explain : ypaffxo lua fiaBus ; eypacjiov (iypayjfa) 
 iva fiadois ; 0o/3oCjaai /xij tovto yivr^rai ; wapci/u ipa iSo) ; vap^v iva 
 tSoipi. 
 
 88. What is a conditional sentence 1 How are conditional 
 sentences classiiied ? Give the different forms of particular 
 suppositions, and one example of each. When is the indicative 
 used in both clauses? When the future indicative? Define 
 general suppositions. Give examples of each. 
 
 89. Translate and explain the following : d •ypa^ci, koX&s noiel ; 
 fi eypa^e, Kn\ais evoLrjof ; el ypd\jreL, Ka\Sis iroirjo-ci ; «i fypi<f>e, KciAras 
 Sk CTTOici ; 4av yp<i<p!l ' "a^^s 7ioiri<Tfi ] el toCto Xeyois, apapTavott. 
 
188 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 90. When the protasis is represented by a participle, wtiat 
 tense is the. participle in 1 What is an implied condition 1 
 
 91. What do relative clauses include ? Give the rule for a 
 relative clause with a definite antecedent. How many forms in 
 particular suppositions have relative clauses with an indefinite 
 antecedent ? Mention each and give an illustration. In general 
 suppositions t 
 
 92. Translate and explain : tTvvcireiiyjfev air^ o-rpaTiaTas oJr 
 Mtvav tlxf ; XP^I""' ^'/S^'OT o'r ex" > ^■yff"''"'f l\aj3oi» oi nvTOVs 
 a^ovtriv J eirparrev a So^eiev avrto : ovk etrTiv o Ti nv tis pei^ov rovTov 
 KaKOV Trddoi. 
 
 93. What is the rule for temporal particles after eas, etc. ? 
 lu conditional sentences 1 Give the rule for vpiv. 
 
 94. What is meant by direct discourse? By indirect? 
 How is an indirect quotation introduced ? How are the mood 
 and tense of an indirect question determined ? Give the rule 
 for changing the direct discourse (without Sv) to the indirect. 
 Translate into Greek : / am v/ritiny ; he says I am writing ; I 
 was loriting ; he says I was writing ; he said that he was writing. 
 
 95. Give the rule for indirect questions. What is said of an 
 indicative or optative with &v when changed to the indirect 
 discourse? Of infinitives and participles? - Eule for indirect 
 quotation in compound sentences ? To what class of clauses 
 may the principles of indirect discourse be applied ? 
 
 96. Translate and explain : Xtyfi on 6pa : cxaKenaivtv Sn Xe'yoi ; 
 
 fXeyov on Kipos TidinjKev ; ovk ej^a) ri Xeya ; fine p.oi, rlva yvmtirjv 
 «;(eis ; elirov, rjvTiva yvaiitjv cxotfu : would cittok, ^vriva yi/to^ijv fix'iv 
 be correct? 
 
 97. Give the rule for causal sentences. In how may ways 
 can a wish be expressed ? Define the imperative mood. How 
 is the first person of the subjunctive used ? What is used in 
 prohibition ? In questions of doubt ? 
 
 98. Translate and explain : "afieu : /ifi xXc'^j^r : n Troi&nev : ct 
 fioi yevoiTo (f)d6yyot. 
 
 99. What is the infinitive ? How used when not in indirect 
 
QUESTIONS FOE REVIEW. 189 
 
 discourse ? How with the article 1 With ro fi^ 1 Can the 
 infinitive express purpose 1 How used with aim 1 With i<p' 
 ^1 How with TrpiV? 
 
 100. Translate and explain : /SovXo^ni Xiynv : rJKoiuv fiavBaveiv : 
 fCfXcvGo tre ypd<j)etv ; deo^i cou wpodiifiov eivai : (ntfi^ovXevia croc 
 TTpoBvfua etvai : ij^lov hoBrjvai oi Tavras ras irokfts : vneKairas {riding 
 up) 0)1 avvavrrjam (to JWee^ A»J?l) : fiovXerai ttovciv (to toil), more 
 TToKejielv. 
 
 101. What is a participle? What may it qualify? How 
 used when preceded by an article ? What relations may be ex- 
 pressed by a participle? After what verbs is the participle 
 used like the infinitive ? With what verbs does it contain the 
 leading idea ? With what verbs does it stand in indirect dis- 
 course ? How used with S^Xo's eifu and <j>avep6s clfu ? 
 
 102. Translate and explain : oj 6io\ x"'/""'"'' np^nevoi uttA rav 
 dvOptjiTrav : eKeivov elrrovros, navTss ealyav (were silent) : Kvpos 
 vnnKa^ibv Toiis cjieiyoiiTas, (TvWe^as arpaTevpta, inoXidpKei, MiXrjTov 
 {Cyrus received the exiles and -raising, <Ssc.) ; \a6iiv airov un-iXdmi'. 
 
 103. What constructions are used with the verbal in -t/oi ? 
 Translate into Greek : we must do this, using both constructions. 
 
 .104. How is a question asked in Greek? What are the 
 principal interrogative particles ? What do they imply as to 
 the answer ? How can an indirect question be introduced 1 
 How an alternative question ? 
 
 105. Translate and explain : rroi rpcmapai {I go) ; ovk ?x<», owot 
 Tpcmapai : ti's X/yft : r/popriv (I asked), t'k Xeyoi : Tip6p.rjv Sims \eyoi : 
 ^/jo/xiji/ Ti or o Tt Xe'yot : 2p' eip,\ p.avTis ; Spa (^o/3ei : ov (or Spa ov) 
 
 ^o/3eI : p,ri (or 2pa ptj) <j!)oj3ct. 
 
 106. How many negative adverbs has the Greek ? Mention 
 some of the compounds. How is ov used ? How /j^ ? Which 
 is used in final clauses ; in conditional ? With the infinitive ? 
 With the indirect discourse ? With the participle ? How are oJ 
 (X17 and pjj oi used ? Translate, ov p.r) iroirjora (I certainly shall 
 not do it) ; deSoiKu p.)) oi dejurov g (/ am afraid it may not he 
 lawful.) 
 
MISCELLAIfEOUS QUESTI01JJ"S. 
 
 1. How many letters in Greek alphabet? How divided'! 
 How many breathings t What mutes are of the same order ? 
 Of the same class ? The general rules for contraction of vow- 
 els 1 What is crasis ? elision ? 
 
 2. Contract the following words and give the rule : TipMOfiev, 
 njdSuvoc, alhoa, yivfos, ^i]Xoe, xpvaeov, fy\6eis, deLSa, \ieai, dixuv, 
 
 3. Perform crasis and elision on the following words : 6 « ; 
 
 o eVi ; 01 ifioi ; o avfip ; Kai cira ; ra dyaBd ; to i/iartoK ; ra nWa ; toC 
 uSoTot ; TO vSap ; Ta ojrXa ; ra alaxpd ; 6 tTfpos ; tov kripou ; Kail tiv ; 
 , xai iv. When, does iota become subscript in crasis 1 
 
 4. Give the general rule for euphony of consonants. What 
 mutes can stand before v ? 
 
 5. Write more correctly and give the rule ; nXcKdrivM ; Ary^ij- 
 vai ; avvKa\eia ; fVTffipos ; avvpea ; avvkeyu) ; Trawo-i ; tiBcvt-s ', ouk 
 oJros ; air iarias ', Kor ^p,epau. 
 
 6. Write more correctly, dytra ; de;((rafiat ; rpiBcra ; ypa^a-w ; 
 Xcya&i ; TCTpiffpai , irerrtiOrat. 
 
 7. What syllables admit of accent 1 Which accent can 
 stand on any of three f Which only on the penult or ultimate t 
 What is the quantity of a circumflexed syllable 1 What is a 
 syllable called that has the acute on the last syllable 1 On the 
 penult 1 On the antepenult ? The circumflex on the last syl- 
 lable'! On the penult? 
 
 8. What are proclitics 1 What words are proclitics t What 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 191 
 
 are enclitics ? Wliat words are enclitics ? What is the accent 
 of the interrogative ris'i Are the personal pronouns always 
 enclitic after other words 1 Is flfii in any of the forms always 
 enclitic after other words 1 
 
 9. Write re after apBpcmos; jwi after bCi^av; ris after avr)p\ 
 ^Tjo-iit after Kcikas; ri after n/iav; tIs after ttoo-os ; nvh after 
 iraiSes ; nvis after avSpes. 
 
 10. Write the declension of the following words : Bed ; x^'P" J 
 
 wnXiTrjs ; vavTrjs ', rafiias ; ttoitjtijs ; 'ATpeifijjs ; 'Ep/iiJ! ', KpXrr]s ; crrpa- 
 
 narrjs \ 8f<rirorqs (all regular except the voc. fieWora with irregu- 
 lar accent). 
 
 1 1 . Give principal parts of dyyiWco : aya> ; aiptm ; &aiva ; •yi'yj/o- 
 fiai ; ypa(\)a> ; bizonal ; bfa> {to bind) ; Sim (to want) ; boxia ; iaa ; 
 eAawu); eA,ey;^o); evpLcrKO) ; tX'^'i ^vrjUKm (§ 110, IV. (c), N. 2); 
 icaXecu j Kaw j Aayvai'a). 
 
 1 2. Decline oSds ; Sapov ; avBpamoi ; xivSwos ; iroTa/ids ; Sdva- 
 Tos ; v^aos ; ji^Xou ; ayycXos ; dSiKcfios (notice the irregular accent 
 in the last). 
 
 13. How are adjectives compared 1 Compare Koi(j)os ; yXv/Kvs ; 
 lieXas ; xap'f'r j cn^^s ; paKap ; alaxpos ; raxvs ; ^8vs. 
 
 14. Give the principal parts of TrXefcm; xreWu; ■niiinco ; bepa; 
 Tidrifu ; SeUmiiii \ (pepa ; irlva ; irdax'o J opdoj. 
 
 15. The following verbs are pass, deponents ; give the prin- 
 cipal parts : Syafxai \ fl[;^dn/xa£ \ ^ovXofjLai ] Sfopai ; dvvap,ai j diaXe- 
 yofiai J inlaTap-ai J ^hojiat ; otopat ; em and pera, -pe\opai, 
 
 16. Decline <^uydy, apx<ov, a'i§, jrais, KoXaf, yui/', fXiri'r, xXfls, 
 aapa, (fms, ovs, Srjp, pis, x^'Pi "vcav. 
 
 17. Give the general rule, for accent of nouns. How are 
 monosyllables of the third declension accented in the genitive 
 and dative 1 What nouns are exceptions to this rule ] 
 
 18. Give the vocative of the adjective fiiSaipav. Ans. eilSmp^v. 
 Notice that adjectives in -mi' gen. -ovos take in the vocative the 
 accent on the antepenult. 
 
 19. Give the voc. of 'ArroWav, IIoo-eiSSj', ' hyapijivav, SaiKparijE 
 
 See §47, 2, N.: §52, 2, N. 1. 
 
192 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 20. What is augment 1 reduplication 1 Give the general rules 
 for each. Write the impf. of Syca, ekavva, Uenia, v^pi^a, alirdd- 
 vofiai, ai^avio, olKTeipat, tlied^w, evpiaKto, 
 
 21. Write the Greek for 3, 7, 8, 10, 20, 14, 16, 30, 100. 
 
 22. Give the Greek ordinals from Ist to 10th. Give the 
 numeral adverbs up to the tenth. 
 
 23. Decline eis. Is Sum always declined? Decline oifiei's. 
 
 24. Accent the following : iXBe, dneXBe, I8e, nVtdc, 80s, aTroSos, 
 6es, irapades, tTXfs, itpoaxfs, jrpoaeixov (irpoc and ex"')- 
 
 25. Give the principal parts of 8paa>, x/"«». axOopju, tpofiai, 
 ^ovXopat, fieva, ficXm, p^xopai, oi;(0/ia(, olofiai, OKOva, 8('pa, eiropai, 
 nepirai, <j)fvyio. 
 
 26. Compare altrxpos, ^a6vs, yXu/tils, /xeo-cij, paKp6s, w'os, oXiyof, 
 troKaws. 
 
 27. Form adverbs from the following and compare the ad- 
 verbs : <j)i\os, (ro(^d:, dKrjOiis, iiSis, raxvs, <ra(f>Tis, SUaios. 
 
 28. Give the general rule for sequence of tenses. Which 
 are historical tenses 1 Is the gnomic aorist an historical tense 1 
 
 29. Decline dviip, Kvav, pffrap, Xi/x^v, 8aipav, Kis, ots, /3ovf, ^x^'f 
 
 noXis. Give the rules for forming the vocative of nouns of the 
 third declension. 
 
 30. Write more correctly ivirmTa, trw^aiva, trvvx^a, hXeiira, 
 pfXavs, Avovo'i. 
 
 31. Form the dative plural of the following : riBds, XeW, 8a/- 
 fiau, iiTTds, iirneis. 
 
 32. Write the present subj. active of Xia, dyyeXXm. Tptj3a>. 
 Give the fut. and- aorist active of ^alvta, opi^a, o-ircvfio), av^Ava). 
 
 33. Write both the contracted and uncontracted forms in 
 the impf. of n/idoi, (j)i\fa>, SijXdo). 
 
 34. Perform crasis and elision on the following: leal ertpos; 
 Ktt\ eira ; Koi 6 ; Km 01 ; Kal el ; xai vird ; pivroi av ; d /iri exopai \ p.!/ 
 tvpa ; TTov ianv ; iya> ol8a ; tya oijuui ; orov tueKa ; & av; diri cavroC. 
 
 35. Write the impf. of ida, eBl^a, enopM, ex'"! c2s^cpo>, wposdya, 
 c/x|3dXXa), dittx^ipa, itpo^aivto, Svsrvxea. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 193 
 
 36. What is the Attic reduplication? Write the perfect of 
 oKelfjjto, aKova, opiaira, iXaivio, eXiyxa, eyfipa, &\i(rKOfiai. 
 
 37. Write the second perfect of arepya, yiyvopai, tIkto, ^aivfi), 
 
 XciVo), Kpd^a (see § 110, iv., (d). 
 
 38. How is the perfect formed of stems ending in n- or /3, 
 K or y, (j) or x'i Form the perfect of Knpiacra, aya, kottto), fiKaitToi, 
 xXenrtB, TTf/iTro), X/yo), npaatra (stem izpayj. The last verb has two 
 forms Ttiirpaya (intransitive, / have fared) and iriirpaxa (transi- 
 tive, / have done). 
 
 39. Give the perfect of o-reXXoi (§ 110, iv. (b), (2), Tpc<^<u, 
 fftSeipiD) KpivW) irXvvft), <j>aLvij), ySaXXo). 
 
 40. Decline akr]dris, a-axppav, diirovs, ttoXus. 
 
 41. Give a synopsis of the aorist middle of /SovXcvm ; inflect 
 the present. Give the same of \i<o. 
 
 42. Mention the classes of pronouns. Declme cya>, ode, tIs, 
 
 TiS. 
 
 43. What prepositions govern the genitive only ? Translate 
 into. Greek, a slave instead of a king ; before the city ; away from 
 the house; out of the house. 
 
 44. How is the nominative of nouns of the third declension 
 formed from the stem ? Form the nominative of the following 
 words : (rapar-os, Ti6eiiT-os, <j>v\aK-os, •yinr-os, (jiiKc^os. ulav or, iravr-os, 
 Saipov-os, XeoKT-os. 
 
 45. Write the perfect of <j>iKea), xp^'^j ''P'X'"' Tpe^a, (ftva, ddXXo, 
 xd(TKa, (jjalvio, ;^ati'(a. 
 
 46. Perform crasis and elision on the following : Knl 6 ; xai ol ; 
 Td ipdnov ; ToC irepov ; dsro o5 ; vvKra oXiji/. Form compounds 
 from dno and tr/pi ; SfKa and ^pipa ; eTrra and ^pepa. 
 
 47. Decline yvini, bopv (regular in prose), Zfis, ijpois, Kvau, vovs, 
 oSs, v8a>p, vlos, X^'P- 
 
 48. Form the future of npdw, (piKea, SijXoia, ria, SaKpvai, idto, 
 laopai, KaXlo), ye\aa>. Write the perfect of 8ea> (to bind), 6vio, Xuoj, 
 and mark the quantity of >i in the last two. 
 
 49. Write the principal parts of kXctttib, p'nrra, tvttto), opiaira, 
 
194 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 7rX^(r(r<», irpacrcn) (give both forms of the perfect), Taaira, ipwa^a, 
 aa^U), dyeipto, atpa, /SoXXo), iyeipa, KTeiva, Kpaivai, (l)6eipta. 
 
 50. Compare aya66s, jSufluy, yepai6s, y\vKvs, nkm)!. Form ad- 
 verbs from 6^s, aKri6j]s, ij&is, raxis, and compare them. 
 
 51. Write the declension of So-ns. 
 
 52. Give a synopsis of the 2 aorist active and middle of 
 Aei'iFo). Inflect the indicative of each. 
 
 53. Write the inflection of the perfect middle oi irtlBa, rpifia, 
 dyyiXXa, <j)alv(o, and account for the euphonic changes. 
 
 54. Write the aorist active of KoKia, trmipa, ixiva, (paiva, Bi- 
 bapi, rWripi, Irjiu, malva, KfpSaiva. 
 
 55. How is the Attic future formed 1 Give the future of 
 
 KoKito, iXavvm, Kopi^a, pd](opai., ffi^d^co. 
 
 56. The following verbs have the future middle, in the active 
 sense ; form the future, and account for the euphonic changes : 
 ^\e<i>, <j>evya, (cXaio), vi<o, niirro, irvvOdvnpai, i(r6ia>, irivo). 
 
 57. Give the perfect passive of o-irao) (§ 109., 2), KeXeim, 
 
 Spaa, KKelcD. 
 
 58. Write the perfect of riSTipt and nj/ii ; of 8eo), olnpai. The 
 future of PcniKopai, xa'P^i ide\a}, pe\tt>, peva, axSopm, pdxopm- 
 
 59. Write the principal parts of Kreiva, Paiva, fKaiva, nlva, 
 taKva, Tepva, alaBdvopsi, ipaprdva, ai^dva, Xayxdva, "Kap^dvio. pavBd- 
 va, itvv6dva>, rvyxdva. 
 
 60. Write the perfect passive of Tda-crn, ypd<^, rpi^at, mrda, 
 
 61. Write both contracted and uncontraoted forms of the 
 present optative of ripdw, cjjikeai, SrfKoa (§ 115, 4.). 
 
 62. Give a synopsis of limipi in the present indie. Inflect the 
 present subjunctive and account for the accent. 
 
 63. Inflect the present dpi, elm, tripi. 
 
 64. What prepositions govern the dative onlyf Translate 
 into Greek : in the cUy, vdth the soldiers, at daybreak. 
 
 65. Inflect the present of fda, rrKeio, hea>, XP^<^- 
 
 66. Give the general rules for the use of the article in Attic 
 Greek ; for the Homeric use of the article. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUKSTIOKS. 195 
 
 67. Inflect the present active of laTijfu, tiOtjiu, SiSiu/ii, deixvu/ii. 
 
 68. What is meant by assimilation and attraction in gram- 
 mar^ 
 
 69. Explain the use of o5 in Attic Greek. 
 
 ■ 70. Write the enclitics. Write tis after avBpairos, dvfip, <^i\os. 
 
 71. What prepositions govern the accusative only'! Trans- 
 late into Greek : up the river, into the city, lie sends to the king. 
 
 72. Inflect the present passive of hnu, urrrnu, TiBrjfu, fiiSa/tt, 
 
 73. Decline vtas, dvayecov, Xayco: (§ 42, 2, N.), aSeX0ds, jrXdos, 
 Trait,' Ke pas. 
 
 74. How does the meaning of tarrjiu differ in the first and 
 second aorist 1 Give the first and second aorist of the following 
 and translate each : larriiu, d<piaTrifii (to revolt), KaBivrrifu (to put 
 down), ^aivio, hvat, 
 
 75. The perfect of the following verb is transitive, the 2d 
 perfect intransitive ; form both perfects and translate them : 
 oXXu|u(. 
 
 76. Give the general rule 'for the agreement of adjectives. 
 What is the position of the adjectives with the noun when the 
 article is used 1 Translate in as many ways as possible, the 
 vnse man. 
 
 77. What prepositions are used with the genitive and accu- 
 sative 1 Translate into Greek : through the country, down from, 
 the wall, over the earth. 
 
 78. The second perfect of the following verbs is intransitive. 
 Form and translate it : ayw/u, eyeipm, ire'i6a>, irriyiw/u, pfiyvvpu, 
 ^aiva. 
 
 ,79. Write the inflection of present of i^ij/it ; the second per- 
 fect, olSa, 
 
 80. Give the general rules for the accusative. Translate 
 and explain the following : traTpamiv inoirja-fv ainov ; kuXo; e'ort 
 -a&im ; navra KparuTTos eVo/ii'ffTO ; Kipos e/ieive ^fiepas rpiaKovTa. 
 
 81. Decline outo'i. How is it contracted with the article? 
 
196 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 Translate o jSamXrif dvror ; 6 airis avrip ; ol iroXtrat ttjs airrjs ffjtipas 
 eu ravTa Baviid^oviri ', 6 reais aVTov dyados iariv. 
 
 82. The following verbs form their second aorists like verbs 
 in 111 ; write the saoond aorist : ffaiva, SiSpaaxai, ktcIvu, irtTOfiai, 
 tpdavUf dXiVKO/xaij ^l6(o, ytyvatTKOi, hvva. 
 
 83. Give the general rule for the genitive ; the rule for the 
 partitive genitive ; genitive after verbs. 
 
 84. Translate and explain the following : ot n-peo-jSurarot tSiv 
 OTpanjyav ; ISaiKa aoi tSiv xprmarav J Bopv^ov ^Kovaev ; ^apelov Kal 
 XlapvacLTiSos yiyvuvrui nalhes 8vo. 
 
 85. Inflect the present of the deponents : ayapai, bivapai, iiri- 
 
 irrapai, ipaiiai, Kplfiapju. ' 
 
 86. Write the perfect of the following, and give the rule for 
 its formation : Xd^to, ypa<j)io, raaaa, nXeKa, ^pe}(^a, dyycXXm, anflpa, 
 
 87. Decline the interrogative m ; decline oo-nr. 
 
 88. Translate the following and parse the pronoun : oXjSios a 
 iraiSes (j>iKoi flaiv ; rivn 6 narrip S.wpa^ei ; 
 
 89. Write the futui-e of ynitia. (Notice that the active voice 
 is used of a man marrying, the middle of a woman.) 
 
 90. What prepositions govern three cases? Translate the 
 following: about the head; a messenger from (the side of) the 
 king ; to (the side of) the king ; in presence of the judges ; from, 
 under the chariot ; under the mountain. 
 
 91. Give the principal parts of Tvyxavia, icpepavwpi, SeiKvupi, 
 ^fvyvvpi, piywpi, oXXvfii. o/uw/it, BvijiTKa, hihpaaKa, ptiivr/irKco. 
 
 92. Give the rule for the causal genitive ; the genitive when 
 used as ablative ; the genitive after comparatives ; genitive after 
 compound verbs. 
 
 93. Translate and parse the genitive in the following: IXajSo- 
 Trjs ^avris Tov 'Opovrriv ; roil Xoyov ijp\fTO SSe ; to Tet;^or r/v cupor f t- 
 Koai TTobSiv ) tTTpariaTov ctrri paxftrQai j tov trrpaxov eka^ev j qu-Kav 
 Serjtropai ; Ivrrov pv&P Tpiav cirpiaro ; biapiav (bribery) avToiis eStw^fv 
 (prosecuted) ; rtavTwi oi 6foi Kparovaiv (rule) ; tovto cjuadcv u/iuv ; 
 Ba^vXfovos ov 7ro\v anfxovatv. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 197 
 
 94. The perfect of the following verbs has a present mean- 
 ing. Form the perfect : lUjivriaKoiiai, Kokionai, ireidofiai, oWviii, 
 Kraoixai, laTafiai, fiaiva. 
 
 95. Write out the declension of \e^vKas, Tiiidav ; Sencms, ^cyas. 
 
 96. Give the rule for the genitive after adjectives ; the geni- 
 tive with adverbs ; the genitive absolute. 
 
 97. Translate and parse the genitive in the following : a/xa- 
 
 ^ai, jueoTut dKcvpaiv Kctl oivov ; apfiara, Ktva (destitute) rjvtoxtov ; Sei 
 vjias d/ifiiiovs tov nXrjBovs eivai ; iyyvs aXXijXuv ; e^co toO Seivov ; |3a- 
 mXcvs ov fiupffirui Sikh fjixepav ; Kipos tjei {went) koKovvtos tov irurpos; 
 r« Tav irapovTiav (those present) ; alrel avrbv Tptav prjvSnv purdov. 
 
 98. Give the principal parts of Ovrjo-Koi, ^tfipaxricw, yiyuaaKa, 
 
 TirpaxTKco, i\t<TKopai (used as the pass, to aipeio), iraer;i[iu, yapia, 
 doKEft), yiyvopaij Triirro), TiKTtaj aipea, ep^optu^ eadtaiy opato, rpexa^ (peptOj 
 Qjveopai, fiTTOv. 
 
 99. What is reduplication 1 What tenses take it ? What 
 if the verb begin with a vowel ? What verbs reduplicate f 
 Do all that begin with a single consonant or a mute and a liquid 
 reduplicate 'J What do verbs beginning with two consonants 
 (not a mute and liquid) or a double one take t If the verb 
 begins with a rough mute ? What verbs prefix n instead of the 
 reduplication 1 
 
 100. Where are the following words found? (fniXi^ai, (fiiXa^ai; 
 Troiijtrac, woirjirni, jroiiyaat. 
 
 101. Write the following words and properly dispose the 
 accent : avSpavot tu ; <j)i\os rtr ; (caXdr re ; trSipa rt ; 0iX» ns ; 
 aiidpamoi Tiues ; ^I'Xot nv€S ', KaKos ecrn ; a'&pa irore ; 0£s eari. 
 
 102. Give the general rule for the dative. For the dative 
 after transitive and intransitive verbs ; the dative of advantage 
 
 •and disadvantage ; the dative of possessor ; the dative with 
 respect to which ; the dative of resemblance and union ; after 
 compound verbs. 
 
 103. Translate and parse the following : eSwicf Kipm xRW'"'" ! 
 
 tVTaCSa Kiptp jSaat'Xcta ^v -• K.ipm els ;(eipat Unai oiic ^deXev. 
 
198 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 104. What is voice in grammar t How many 1 Define each. 
 Translate Trurrevovtri t^ jSaortXei ; )iange this to the pass. 
 
 105. The following verbs have a different meaning in the 
 middle and active voices. Give their prinbipal parts ; jrauto (/ 
 cause to stop) ; iraiojiaL (I stop myself, cease) ; (paiva (I show) ; 
 (fialvonai (7 show mysdf, appear) ; itjiu (7 send) ; U/tai (7 send 
 mi/self, hurry). 
 
 106. Give the rule for the causal and instrumental dative ; 
 of manner ; after verbals in -t«'os ; of accompaniment ; of time. 
 
 107. Translate and parse the following : hteaBai hyCiv ^ovKofiia ; 
 (fiaKfV aiiTov \i6<f ; jfaXejrSs </>c'po) rois wnpoiia'i. npayfiainv ; tji avrjj 
 ijliipij. rjKfv arfff^os. 
 
 108. When does the article in Attic prose retain its demon- 
 strative force ? Translate rovs fiiv airiiereive, Toirs 8' clejSaXew. 
 
 109. How many tenses are there f Define each. Write ypd(^<B 
 in the first person singular of each tense, and translate it. 
 Mention two verbs whose present has the force of the perfect ; 
 several whose perfects have a present meaning. 
 
 110. How many distinct uses has the present infinitive'? 
 When it stands in direct discourse, what tenses are used ] De- 
 fine a participle. 
 
 111. Perform crasis and elision on the following: to Svopa:, 
 iroC fo-rii/; toS rjiuTcpmi; Tot &V, 6 mpos; leai amwr; bia ipov; t'ni 
 TipXv; avTi hv. 
 
 112. Mention the chief uses of the particle &v. Translate the 
 following in as many ways as possible ; ?^i; iroiriaai hv tovto. 
 
 113. Give the rule for final clauses. Translate enopfv6p,riv iva 
 (J^eXoiiji/ aitdv ; change the leading verb to the present tense, 
 and write the clause depending on tva correctly. 
 
 114. Give the rule for object clauses after verbs of striving; 
 after verbs of fearing. Translate eBeurav (feared) oi "EXXijves, f«v 
 irpoaayouv irpos to Kepas. 
 
 11.5. Give the rules for the nse of airos. Translate : t!ie king 
 himself ; the same Tang ; airis ovk e(j)rj Uvm. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 199 
 
 116. How are conditional sentences classified? How many 
 kinds of particular suppositions 1 General suppositions 1 What 
 negative particle is used 1 
 
 117. Write the following sentence in all the different forms 
 of particular suppositions : idu n d/id/jrgs, oXy^u-eir. The follow- 
 ing in the different forms of general supposition : ti vrou i^eXa- 
 ivoi 'Aa-Tvdyris, jrepi^ye rhv Kxipov ; if (ever) Astyages rode out, he took 
 Cyrus vrith him. 
 
 118. Translate and parse the following : et fioxei, ttXccu^ev ; eav 
 dkr]6ev<rris inncrx'">viiai (rot Se<a raXmra ; ei 6eoL ti SpaKTtv ala-xpov, ovk 
 fla-lv 6eoi ; el fir] n xai (also) vavTucbv (naval force), (([i^ov, ovk an v^a-av 
 exparei ', ei Ttva <pevyovTa Xrjyj/ofjiai, a>s TToXe/xito ;^p7jo'o/xat ('if J shall 
 catch any one fleeing I will treat him as an enemy); Trporjyopevev 
 oTi €t Tiva (pevyotrra XijT^otro, as nokep^Lta xpr]uoLTo ; vixavTes riva av 
 diroKTeivatpev ; 
 
 119. How are, relative sentences classified? How many 
 forms of conditional relative sentences 1 What is the negative 
 particle 1 Translate and parse : ex^i Sivapiv, ^v iravres op&pev ; 
 
 Kupos idiipevev airo Ittttov, onoTf yvpvdcrai ^ovKoiTO itivTOV Tf Koi Tois 
 iTTTTOvs ; i<e\eva-ev aiiTois cireaBai, oiroi ns ^yoiTo. 
 
 120. How is the indirect discourse introduced? What 
 general rules do indirect quotations follow ? Eule for indirect 
 questions? How is the principle of indirect discourse applied 
 to any dependent clause ? 
 
 121. Translate and parse : Xe'ytt Sn yoii^fi ; eXe^ev Sn ypdcjjoi ; 
 
 eXeyov otl oviraiTroa ovtos 6 irorapos 8ca/3aroy ytuoLTo ttc^ et pfj Tore ; 
 ovTOi cXfyof OTt Kvpos redvrjKfv ; \eyei on tovto &v iyeveTo ; tXeyev oti 
 TOVTO &.V iyivero ; avr^ Kipov a-TpaTfiovra rrpSiTos rjyyeCKa ; Titr(ra<f>ep- 
 frjs oia^dWei (§ 200, N. 1) tov Kiipoif Trpos tov ddf\^6v ©y eVtjSouXeuoi 
 flWTQ) ; av vpas opaKTiv ddvpovs, wdvTfs KciKoi t<rovTat ; Xeyet OTi av iipas 
 6p£i(TLV dSypovs, TTavres KaKoi taovrai j eXe^ev ore ei vpds opmev ddvpovs, 
 irdvTes KaKoi eaoivro. 
 
 122. How is a periphrastic future formed? Translate fiiXKa 
 ipas ayeiv els 'Aaiav. 
 
200 GREEK LESSONS. 
 
 123. Give the rule for causal sentences. Translate and 
 parse the following : tov arparryyov iKoxiifiv on ovk eire^dyoi (they 
 found fault with the general, because (as they said) he did not 
 lead them out). 
 
 124. How is a wish expressed in Greek? Translate into 
 Greek : that this may happen ! that this had happened I 
 
 125. Define the imperative mood. What person is used in 
 exhortations? in prohibitions? How is the first jperson of the 
 subjunctive used ? 
 
 126. Translate and parse : Xeyc; <j>fvyf, eXfleVoj, x<"po>^a»'> «S<a- 
 fiev ; li^ noUi TOVTO, fir) woi^irrjs toiitu, fiov\ft ftwo) Toirro. 
 
 127. The following verbs use tlio future middle in a passive 
 sense ; form the future : aStxiai, dXiaKa, fiKcmria, oiaoKoyito, ri/iam, 
 ^vXdrro). 
 
 128. Give the principal uses of the infinitive when not in 
 indirect discourse. 
 
 1 29. Translate and parse the following ■ effort yxveiv ; biofuu 
 Vfuav fievfiv ; Scivos Xeyttw ; eipyft erf tovto iroictv ; t)(u> rpijjpiK mare 
 cXciv TO iiXolov ; irpiv KaraXOtrni to HTpareviia ^airCKevs e(f>dvri j t/leueov 
 OTjXos ^v eTTiOvpav 7rX0UT€iV, 
 
 130. Define a participle. Mention the chief uses of the 
 participle. 
 
 131. Translate and parse the following : rovro Trouma-iv vopt- 
 
 ^oirres \ ravra elir&iv dnrjei \ vvKKap^dvei Kupof &n anoKTtvav , ap^opat 
 Xeycoc ; pepvrjiiat niiTov tovto 'TTOirjfTiivTa ; dffXos r)V Ku/jos ojs c^evScov ; 
 TovTa aKovtraeTes dini\avvop J fTvy^avev dTTOiv ; to vdtop eiitovoTaTov 
 (cheapest) apurrov Sv ; Toir t^iXovc evepyfroivrfs k:\ Toiis c^Bpoiis 
 Svvqaferdf KoXaft iv (if you benefit your friends you will also be able 
 to punish your enemies) ; Kipoi en iraU i>i> iBavpa^ero ; o?8a auTOK 
 Xxnrripov (troublesome) Svra. 
 
 , 132. What constructions are used with verbal adjectives «> 
 -reoE ? Translate the following : 6 itaTjjp a-oi rj aijre'or eo-Ti'v ; 
 dtoMCTCOV TTiV apcTtpi J ToCra f)piv iroa^eov iari. 
 
 133. How are questions asked in Greek? Translate the 
 
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS. 201 
 
 following : ip ovk e<mv da6evris ; aWo Tt § dSivov/xev ; it&npov Se- 
 SpaKfv fj ov. 
 
 134. How many negative adverbs? Which is used with the 
 indicative in independent sentences 1 Which with causal sen- 
 tences ? With the infinitive 1 With conditional sentences? 
 With the participle expressing condition ? 
 
 135. Translate and parse the following : el tovto a\ri6es «Vt«, 
 
 \alpa ; el eyp:iij/ev. rjXBov av ; ABe toCto oKrjBks ^v ; epana ri eypayjfafiev ; 
 ov jj.rj TOVTO ykvrjTji ; Soicet p.oi KaTaKavtrat ras ipii^as, Iva prj ra (evyri 
 fipMiv a-TpuTTiyj. dWa rroficvaipfda Sirji &i> tJj aTparia irvp<j)ep7i ; tovtuv 
 iireSipfi, Xva eS wpaTTOi \ K\eap)(os e^ov\fvero, el jrepiruiiv Tiv.is ij ndi/Tes 
 ioiev (what was the direct question ? irepiraipev, &.c.) ; n noiSpev ; 
 (j)ria-l ypd(l)eiu ; e0ij ypd<l>eiv ; K^eap}(os Tois avrov orpaTiaras e^u'i^eTO 
 (§ /OO, JN. Zjf tevat I yjpeTO ris 6 Bopv^os e/JJ J tXeye to ffTpdrevpxi 
 p.d)(e(rdai ; eXeye to crTpdTevpa Tjj irpoTepala pd^eadai (§ 203, N, 1) ; 
 (prjat TOVTO irenpa^tvai J e^ tovto ireTrpoxevai J TavTa TTOirja-nvrei OTreA- 
 deiv ^ovKovrai , ^ov\oLp,rfv hif \aBeiv avTov direXBoiv J peXKei tovto 
 jrpdrTeiu ; emev oti ^ovXcTai ', 'iare ^fids iXBouTas Iva tovto Iboipxv, 
 
 136. The following verbs use the future middle in an active 
 sense ; form the future middle, and account for the euphonic 
 
 changes : ^^oi, aKova^ d^aprdva, ^aivto, ^ida^ ^oda, yfXdco, yiyvoKTKat^ 
 SelSto, SiSpda-Ka, Siaxcra, elfii, Bavpd^a, 6vi]tTKa. iCKaio, \ay)^avm., pav- 
 Bdvco, olSa, jra(r;^<o, Spvvpi, Tvivw, TnjSdo), iriwrii, myda, triamda, Tpe)(tt>, 
 Tvy)(ava, <^eiya. 
 
VOCABULAEIES, 
 
 I. GEEEK AND ENGLISH. 
 
 A. 
 
 d- (dv- before a vowel), called alpha 
 privative, denoting privation or 
 negation, like Eng. un-, Lat. in-; 
 as A-iraiSf childless. 
 
 'AppOKO)i,as, -a, (6), AbrocSmas, sa- 
 trap of Phoenicia, and general 
 under Artaxerxes. 
 
 "ApvSos, -ov, (^), Abydus, a city of 
 Asia Minor. 
 
 d^aSos, -^ -bv, good; for its com- 
 parison, see § 73 ; of soldiers, 
 brave; of \a.nA, fertile. 
 
 AYafiai., f. iyiaoimi, a. pass, ifi&a- 
 d-rfu, impf. ifyiiLipi, to admire, to 
 
 dya'trda), (a), f. -ijo-u, a. ■ffy&iniaa, 
 pf. ■^dirriKa, of persons, to ivd- 
 eome, entertain, to love dearly; of 
 things, to be well pleased with; 
 (jiiKiiii, to love ; iyanai, to esteem ; 
 dyairda, to love and esteem^ 
 
 dYacTTos, -i}, -6v, admired, admirable, 
 rwrthy of admiration ; adv. -tGis. 
 
 dYY^^^ -<»s> (v), message, news, an- 
 nouncement. 
 
 dvyAXw, f. dyyeXa (§ 120, 1), a. 
 ijyyeiXa (§ 121), pf. ijyyeXKa, pf. 
 pass. ijyye\ijuii, to bear a message, 
 to report, to tell, to announce ; mid. 
 to announce one's self; pass, to be 
 reported of 
 
 6.yyAos, -ov, (6), a messenger. Eng. 
 Angel. 
 
 &7e Si], come now. 
 
 d7«Cpci), f. dyepHi (§ 120, l),a. ifyeipa, 
 (not used in Att., pf. dy-^epKa 
 (§ 104), pf. pass, dyi^ep/iai., a. 
 pass. -fin/ipB-qv), 2 a. mid. dyepbfiriv, 
 w. part, dypi/iems, to gather, bring 
 together. 
 
 dYKvpa, -as, (^), an anchor. 
 
 d-yvo^ci), (S), f. -i^ffu, a. iiyvliTicra, pf. 
 iiyvbriKa, a. pass. ■^m'fi0T]v, pf. 
 ■iuvirifjuu, not to perceive, to be igno- 
 rant of; pass, not to be known. 
 
 ayopd, -as, (^), place of assembly, 
 market-place, market ; as a mark of 
 time, dyopd, TrXTjfloutra, the time of 
 full market, i. r. from nine o'clock 
 till noon ; opposed to iyopS-s Std- 
 Xuo-is, the time just after noon. 
 
 oyopcvo), f. -ei<ru (in Att. the fut. in 
 use is ipSi), a,. ■Iiybpevira, pf riyo- 
 pevKa, to speak in the assembly, to 
 speak; mid. to get u, thing pro- 
 claimed. 
 
 &7pios, -la, -Lov, (dypbs, Lat. agar, 
 field), living in the fields ; hence, 
 of animals, wild, savage ; of coun. 
 tries, wild, uncultivated. 
 
 &y(a, f. Sfai, pf. jJx". 2 a. ijyayoi', 
 impf. ^ov, a. mid. •^^dp.riv, a. pass. 
 
iyjiiv 
 
 aXria 
 
 flxBiiv, 1 a. act. 5fo (rare), to lead 
 (used of persons), (pipuv being 
 used of things, to bring ; mid. to 
 lead away for one's self; '&ye(r8ai, ' 
 ywaUa, to take to one's self a vnfe, 
 like Lat. ducere uxorem. From 
 same root as Lat. agj, Eng. Agile. 
 
 arfiav, -Qvos, (6), an assembly met to 
 see games ; hence, a contest, a game ; 
 cf. Eng. Agony. 
 
 ASeittvos, -op, voitfuMt supper. 
 
 dS£\<j>os, -oC, (6), a brother, regular 
 except the voc. which is USaXijie 
 with irregular accent. 
 
 oSidPaTos, -ov, impassable 
 
 &8iK^cii, (Ci), f. -■ficra, a,. -qSlKTiiaa, pf. 
 TfdlKrjKa, impf. i]SlK£Ov {ovv), to act 
 unjustly; w. ace. of person, to injure; 
 pres. may have the sense of the 
 pf. I do wrong, or (I have done 
 wrong) am a wrong-doer; for mean- 
 ing of fut. mid. iStK-fiiroixai, I shall 
 be wronged, w. pass, sense, see 
 § 199, 3, N. 4. 
 
 ASiKOS, -ov, unjust, wrong, used of 
 either persons or things ; Ik toC 
 iSiKov, by unjust means, unjustly, 
 p. 61, 9. 
 
 &8Ckus, adv. unjustly. 
 
 &8o|La, -as, [fj), discredit. 
 
 Oil, always, al any lime. 
 
 dcTos, -oZ, ( '), an eaijle, an eagle as a 
 standard. 
 
 'A6r]vaio$, -ala, -aToii, Athenian. 
 
 d6\ov, -ov, {t6), a prize. 
 
 dOpoCju, f. -olffdi, a. ■fiOpotca, pf. pass. 
 ■Ifffpoia/Mi, assemble, levy forces. 
 
 &6paos, -a, -ov, assembled, close to- 
 gether ; comp. iBpoilrepoi, later 
 iSpoiffrepoi. 
 
 &6v|Uw, (fi), f. -7)i7w, to be disheartened, 
 to be despondent al or for a thing. 
 
 £3v|i3s, -ov, without heart or spirit. 
 
 Al-ytpimos, -'a, -lov, Egyptian. 
 
 al}ia, -aros, {to), blood. 
 
 Alvidves, -«>", -ol, Aenianes. 
 
 atp^u, (£), f. -ijirw, pf. wi™. pf- 
 pass. BPTj/toi, 2 a. etXov, 2 a. mid. 
 el\i;j,Tiv, to lake, seize, capture ; mid. 
 to clioose ; els 5i d'j elire .... ffrpa- 
 rriyoiis kXiaBai. &\\ovs ibs Tdxurra, 
 but then one said .... that they 
 should choose other generals as quickly 
 as possible, p. 54, 11 ; cf. Eng. 
 Heketic. 
 
 atpcii, f. apu, pf. ^pxa, a. Ijpa, mid. 
 impf. xip6ixriv, f. ipoS/uu, to raise or 
 lift up. 
 
 alo-6dvo|t(U, f. alaB-riaoixai, pf. ■icBij- 
 fuu, 2 a. ■jffBifiriv, impf. -fftrBavbutiv, 
 to perceive or apprehend by the senses ; 
 hence, sometimes, to feel; some- 
 times, to see or to hear, to learn ; 
 often with ace, § 171, 2 Rem. ; 
 Eng. Aesthetic. 
 
 alirxpas, -d, -6v, also -4s, -iv, causing 
 shame; when opposed to icaXos, 
 ugly ; in a moral sense, disgraceful ; 
 instead of the regular compar. and 
 super., alaxii^v and ahx'CTos are 
 generally used. 
 
 alcrxivT], -7)5, {-fi), shame. 
 
 alirxvvo) (afirxos, shame), f. -wS 
 (§ 120, 1), pf. ^(TxvyKo., p. pass. 
 ^fftTxvfJLfjuii, a. p. TjffxivBrfv, to dis- 
 jrace.-'taid. and pass, tobe ashamed 
 at a thing or before a person ; alir- 
 X'liv'i takes the partic. when the 
 action of which one is ashamed 
 is performed, the infin. when the 
 action is declined through shame ; 
 oix al(rxive(TBe aire Beoiis oSre dx- 
 ffpiiirous, you are not ashamed before 
 either gods or men. 
 
 aWla, {&), f. aiTTJirM, pf. ^Tjjra, to 
 ask, to beg ; with aoc. of the thing 
 
alTi&o|iai 
 
 3 
 
 dtu|>t 
 
 or person, to ask ; with two ace. to 
 ask a person for something ; mid. to 
 ask for one's sdf, to claim. 
 
 alTido|tai, (wjucit), f. -daoficu, n. t/ti- 
 ao-d/iijy, dep. mid., to blame, accuse. 
 
 atrios, -ia, -'<"', causing ; to be the 
 author of; blameworthy^ 9i"%- 
 
 CLKivaKifSf -01^, (6), a short sword. 
 
 aKCvSiivos, -ox, without danger, safe, 
 cowardly; adv. -xuis. 
 
 &Kpov, -ov, (t6), neut. of &.:pos, the 
 highest point. 
 
 oKOVTtJai, f. -lau,, Att. -iS (§ 120, 2), 
 a. ■iiKbriri.aa, to hurl a javelin, to hit. 
 
 UKOvu, f. mid. -aoixai w. active 
 meaning, a. iJKOvira, pf. aK^ma, to 
 hear, VI. bothgen. andacc. ; ace. and 
 Trapd w. gen. ; with gen. alone, to 
 hear, obey ; i( Sv iJKOvov, from what 
 I have heard, the pres. w. sense of 
 the perfect ; j3airi\ei)s 5' aS fjicovae 
 TLcraa(p^pvovs, on the other hand the 
 king had heard from Tissaphernes, 
 p. 69, 5. Cf. Eng. Aoousttcs. 
 
 dKpdiroXiS) -eas, {ri), an acropolis, a 
 citadel {&Kpos, 7r6\is). 
 
 &Kpos, -a, -ov, at the end, i. e. either 
 outermost, or at the top ; highest, 
 extreme ; with the article, see 
 § 142, 4, N. 4. 
 
 &K(DV, dKovo-a, £kov, unwilling. 
 
 dXaXd^oi, f^-d^ot, a. ^XdAa^a, to raise 
 the war-cry. 
 
 bXc^u, act. rare ; mid. dXi^o/xai, f. 
 
 a. mid. ■fiXe^dfiriv, to ward off, to 
 
 ai-enge one's self on, to requite. 
 aXeupa, -lav, (rd), fine flour (plur.). 
 dXT|6£v(o, f. -ci(foi, of persons, to speak 
 
 the truth ; of things, to come true. 
 aXT]9i[i, -h, of persons, true; of 
 
 things, real, actual. 
 kXliTKO^ai, f. aXiiffoiuu, impf. ^Xuric^- 
 
 liiji>, pf. jJXtD/ra, Att. also ^dXuKa, 
 plupf. ■qXiiiKCiv, 2 a. ijXav, Att. also 
 id\ijiv, particip. dXoiis, to be taken, 
 to be captured or seized (used as the 
 pass, of alp4tii) ; el dXibffoivro, if 
 they should be captured, p. 61, 17. 
 
 aXXd, conj. but, yet ; originally the 
 neuter plural of dXXos. It ex- 
 presses opposition more strongly 
 than Si. 
 
 dXXaxov, adv. elxrwhere. 
 
 dXXi^Xtov, (dXXos), a gen. plur. which 
 has no nom. of one another; ^TreiS/) 
 TToXip.f.oi aXX^Xots iyivomo, but when 
 thfy had become hostile to One another, 
 p. 51, 10 ; 61, 16. See § 81. Eng. 
 Parallel. 
 
 AXXcrSev, adv. from another place. 
 
 fiXXos, -r;, -0, indef. pron. other, an- 
 other ; 6 fiXXos, the rest of. 
 
 dXXoTE, adv. another time. 
 
 &XX(i)s, adv. otherwise, in another way. 
 
 &|j.a, adv. at once; prep. w. dat. at 
 the same time with, § 186 ; H/ia ry 
 iip^pq,, as soon as (it was) day ; 
 &/JUI T^ iirioOoTj ijp^pg., at the dawn 
 of thefoUowing day. 
 
 &|jia^a, -1)$, {ii), a wagon, carriage. 
 
 d|j.a$i.T(Ss, -6", passable for wagons; 
 suhst. dfui^irjs (sc. oSls), a wagon- 
 road. 
 
 d|iapTdv<», f. dp/iarijiro/iai, pf. rmdp- 
 'rriKa, 2 a. nj/mprov, pf. pass. 
 ilp.dpTrip.ai, a. ripaprijOTiv, to miss ; 
 to err. 
 
 'A)iPpaKiciTT|S, -ou, (o), anAmhraciot. 
 
 &|j.e{v<iiv, -ov, comp. of dyaBos. 
 
 d|i,^\avos, -ov, difficult, impossible j 
 bios dp.iixavos, a dijfficidt road ; of 
 persons, perplexed. 
 
 &p,ir€Xos, -ov, [ij), a vine. ' 
 
 d,p.(|>{, primarily signifies on both sides 
 of, around ; w. gen. and dat., about. 
 
A.|ii^£ira\i$ 
 
 dv(irrT[|jii 
 
 lymcerning, on account of; vr, ace. 
 mostly with verbs of motion, about. 
 
 'A|u)>Ciro\is i&l'uplt t6Xis), eas, (4), 
 AmphipoUs,a, city in Thrace, almost 
 round which the Strymon flows. 
 
 'A|i<|>i'iraXlTi]$, -ov, {&), an Amphi- 
 politan. 
 
 &|u^6Tcpos, -a, -ov, both. 
 
 d}it^0T^p(ii8cv, adv. on both sides, at 
 both ends. 
 
 &|i(j>cD, gen. and dat. same form in 
 all genders, both. 
 
 &.V, is joined (a) to all the secondary 
 tenses of the indie, and to the 
 optative, infinitive, or participle, 
 to denote that the action of the 
 verb is dependent on some condi- 
 tion ; (b) it is joined to d, j^and 
 to all relative and temporal words 
 (sometimes to final particles) when 
 these are followed by the subjunc- 
 tive, § 207, 2. It never stands at 
 the beginning of a clause, and is 
 thus readily distinguished from 
 &v, with d (contr. from idv). 
 
 avtt, prep, in Att. w. ace. only, ( 1 ) 
 of place, up, throughout; (2) of 
 time, throughout; (3) in numbers, 
 up to, also distributively, ivi iraaav 
 ^liipav, day by day; d,vk Kpiros, 
 at full speed. 
 
 dvapa£vei> (ivA, ^alvu), to go up, to 
 ascend, to make an expedition ; iva- 
 /3is iirl rbv 'iirvov, having mounted 
 his horse. 
 
 &vdpa(ri.s, -etus, (tj), the march up. 
 
 ava^iPila, f. mid. -^i^do-o/ioi, Att. 
 -Pi^&imi (§ 120, 2), a. ive^i^aaa, 
 a. mid. ■a<rdiJ,itv, to cause to lead up, 
 to lead up, to go up, to mount on 
 horseback. 
 
 dvayy^XXu {dvd, dyy4\\oi), to bring 
 back a report. 
 
 avd^Ki), -i)s, (ii),a necessity. 
 avd7ci> (dvd, S,yu), to lead up. 
 dva\a)i,pdv<>> [dvd, Xa/ipdvai), to take 
 
 up, to take with one. 
 avofUva (avd, fUvu), to wait for, to 
 
 wait. 
 dva^pCSes, -iStav, {al), trousers. 
 dvairaiu (aVd, TratJoj), to cause to 
 
 rest ; mid. to rest. 
 dvoirTuao-w, f . -i^lw, a. pass, dveirrix- 
 
 8i)v, 2 a. aveirTir/Tfii, to fdd bach. 
 dvdpuTTOs, -ov, without breakfast. 
 dvao-rpli^u (dvd, dTpirJMi}), to turn 
 
 back, to face about ; mid. to rally. 
 dvare^viu (ivd, reivio), to extend; elf- 
 vote ; derbv dvarerafiivov, an eagk 
 
 with spread wings. 
 dvar^OqiJLt (dvd, TidTj/jii), to placi' 
 
 upon, to consecrate. 
 dvSpd^oSov, -ov, (tu), a slave. 
 dvSpeios, -«'a, -elov, manly, brave. 
 dvctXov. See dvaipc'u. 
 dvctirov, 2 a.; no pres., to proclain,. 
 
 give notice. 
 &vev, prep. w. gen., without. 
 a.vi\a (dvd, ?x<"). '" ^oW up; mid. 
 
 to endure, to control ones self. 
 dv^p, dvSplis, (6), a man, = ha,t. vir ; 
 
 &vdpes (TTpnTiwrai, fellow-soldiers. 
 dv6£(m]|u {dvri, VrrrTj/ti), trans, i'l 
 
 pres., impf., f. and a., to set against, 
 
 especially in battle ; to compare ; 
 
 intrans. in mid. or pass., also w. 
 
 pf. and 2 a. act., to stand against, 
 
 to oppose. 
 dvSpuiros, -ov, (6), « human being, a 
 
 man, = Lat. homo, 
 dvidtii, (fi), f. -dfl-uj, a. ■//vlaffa, pf. 
 
 ijvlaKa ; f. mid. dvida-ofuu, a. i/VLd- 
 
 8riv, to grieve, to trouble ; S^Xos ^v 
 
 dviiliuevos, it was evident that he was 
 
 troubled, 1. 2, 11. 
 dv(o~rT||jii (dvd, Xariipti), trans, in 
 
diroStpoi 
 
 pres., impf., f. and a., to make to 
 stand up, to raise up ; to rouse ; a. 
 mid. also trans. ; intrans. in pass, 
 w. 2 a., pf. and plupf. act., to stand 
 vp, to rise. 
 
 avTCLVOv {dirriy elirov),to speak against, 
 to oppose. 
 
 dvT£, pre])., w.gen., instead of, against. 
 
 avrios, -a, -ok, opposite; w. iXaiveiv, 
 to go against. 
 
 dvT<'''rap<urKCvd^a|UU {6,vtI, irapaCKev- 
 d^u), to prepare against. 
 
 dvTtoTa(ri(STT)s, -ov, (6), an opponent. 
 
 dvTiTttrrw {d.vTi, t&ttu), to draw up 
 in a line against, vv. ace. and dat. 
 
 fivTpov, -OV, (ri), a aive. 
 
 dvvo'Tcs, -Cv, possible, practicable ; <n- 
 yjj ws d,vv(rT6v, as si/.ently as possible. 
 
 &V(o, adv. up; comp. avuripw, sup. 
 afwrdrw. 
 
 «i|fvil, -7)S, (4), an axe. 
 
 d^ios, -a, -ov, of like value, worth as 
 much, w. gen. ; worthy, valuable; 
 iroWou Siio%, worthy of much ; d^iu- 
 Tipas Tiixiis, more adequate honor^ 
 61, 16 ; Apxetv d^cJiraros, most 
 worthy to rule ; adv. d^lois. 
 
 |]£l<!a>, (ui), f. -litroi, pf. ri^liilKa, to 
 think or deem lonrthy of a thino', w. 
 ace. and inf. ; to think ft to do or 
 he ; to think, to demand, to ask ; 
 ^^tou SodTjvai ol Ta&ras ras iriXeis, 
 he asked that these cities might be 
 given to him. 
 
 S^av, -oms, {i), an axle. 
 
 AoirXos, -OK, without armor. 
 
 airayyiKXa (iiri, d77^XXu), to an- 
 nounce. 
 
 dirdYO) (dTri, &y<o), to lead back, to 
 bring back, to march. 
 
 diravria, (w), {arS, alriu), f. -ijo-w, 
 pf. dwgTtiKa, to demand ; pass, to 
 have a thing demanded of one. 
 
 diroXXdo-cru, Att. -ttu {dWdTra, f. 
 
 -dfoi, a. ijWa^a, pf. ^Waxa, 2 a. 
 
 ])ass. T/WdyTfj'), to set fee, release, 
 
 to get rid of a thing ; to free from ; 
 
 to go away, to withdraw ; pass, to 
 
 withdraw. 
 dirc.X\c7^, -/■;«, (ii), deliverance, re- 
 lease. 
 dirci^, adv. once for all. 
 dn-apoo-KevoirTOs, -ok, unprepared. 
 dirapdo-Kevos, -ok, unprepared. 
 &iras, diraira, dirav, strengthened 
 
 form of irSs, all, quite all, all together. 
 dirciBlo), (a)), f. -^irw, to disobey. 
 dircLfu (dn-i, eXiu), to go away. § 200, 
 
 N. 3 (end). 
 direifu (dTTu, (lid), to be absent. 
 dir€kirov {dirb, ehrov), f. divepw, pf. 
 
 direipTjKO,, to refuse, deny, renounce. 
 direXavvd) (iTro, 4Kti,6i'u>), to dislodge, 
 
 to inarch away, to ride away. 
 dircp)(0|j.ai (d7r6, lpxoi'.ai),^togoaway, 
 
 to depart from, to go over ; Trapa 
 
 jSactX^ws TToXXoi irpbs Kupov dirrjX- 
 
 $ov, many went over from the king to 
 
 Cyrus, p. 61, 16. 
 d^4x<D (dTrA, l^u), to hold back; to 
 
 desist from ; intrans. to be distant, 
 
 p. 70,' 8. 
 dirfjXBov, see aie^yfifai, 
 dird, prep. w. gen. only, from, away 
 
 from. Sometimes denotes means, 
 
 and then rendered by. See § 197, 
 
 N. 1. 
 diroPiPd'^u (airo, /Sj/Sdfw, f. -diru, 
 
 &c. ), to cause to go forth; to land. 
 diropX^irci) [dirb, ^X^iru)), tolook away. 
 diroSECKVvp.i {dir!>, deUvvfu), to show. 
 
 forth, a/ipoint ; raid, to express one's 
 
 opinion; produce, display. 
 diroSipu (dxo, d^pu, f. depw (§ 120, 
 
 1), a. Idetpa (§ 121), pf. pa.ss. S^- 
 
 Sapfiai), to flay. 
 
uiroSiSpuo'Koi 
 
 6 
 
 'ApCiminros 
 
 diroSiSpoo-Kci) {i,ir6, SidpAcrKa), to run 
 
 awuy. \ I 
 
 diroSiSupii (avb, SlSujii.), to give back, 
 
 to pay. 
 diroSv^o-Koi (dTTiS, fixiJirKw), to die, to 
 
 be killed ; used in Attic as pass, of 
 
 d.TrOKTiiVt>3, 
 
 dir^Kcifiai. (dir6, Keiiuu), to be laid 
 
 away. 
 diroKtiirTU [airb, koittoj), to cut away. 
 diroKp(vo|i,ai (d7r6, Kplvu), f. d«ra- 
 
 KpivoSfiai (§ 120, 1), pf. iiroKCKpt- 
 
 IMi, to reply, to answer. 
 diroKTcCvii) (airb, KTflvia), to kill, to put 
 
 to death ; for pass, see airo6v^<rK(i>, 
 airoXajipdvu) {diri, Xa/ipdvu), to lake 
 
 back, to receiee. 
 diroXeCirw {aird, Xeiiru), to leave be- 
 hind, to abandon. 
 diriiXXv|U (diro, ^\\v/ii), f. 6,Tro\4<Tu, 
 
 pf. diroXdljKeKa, 2 pf. &Tr6\u\a, to 
 
 destroy utterly, to slay, to loose; In 
 
 2 pf. and 2 plupf. act. to die, 
 
 to perish. 
 'AirdXXuv, -uii'O!, (6), voc. "AjtoXXok, 
 
 § 48, 2, d. N., Apollo. 
 diroir^|jiiru (ciTro, wi/iTu), to send 
 
 back, to send; mid. to dismiss. 
 diroirXcd) (dTri, ir\iw), to sail away. 
 d,7ropl(D, (S), f. -ijiru, to be in want, to 
 
 be perplexed. 
 diropos, -ov, impassable, impracticable, 
 
 insuperable. 
 diroinrdu, (w), [airb, ffwdta, f. utrdffu, 
 
 a. (airaaa {§ 106, N. 2), pf. (inrS- 
 
 Ka (§ 101, 3), p. pass. ((Traff/Mi 
 
 (§113, N.l), to draw away, totbith- 
 
 draw. 
 dirocTT^Xcii (dirb, aTiWw), to send 
 
 away, to send, to despatch. Eng. 
 
 Apostle. 
 diro(rrpo(fi^, -^s, (^), act of turning 
 
 away, a place of refuge. 
 
 diroT^Cvw (airj, Tslvta), to extend, to 
 stretch out. 
 
 diroTc'p,vcD {diri, rifuiu), to cut off. 
 
 diroTl6i]|u {diri, tWijiu), to put away , 
 mid. to lay aside. 
 
 ■iirortvoi (dir6, Tlvtn, f. -(iru, a. ?ri<ra, 
 pf. T^TiKo), to pay back, requite. 
 
 airoTpeirci), f. -^u, to turn away from 
 a thing ; w. ace. to turn away or 
 hack; mid. to turnfom a thing. 
 
 diro<f>a£va> {dir'j, (ftcdvu)), to show forth. 
 
 Liro^eiyu (dirb, ^e&yoi), to escape. 
 
 airo^apita, (2), {ivj, x^P^^i -i<'<', 
 &c.), to withdraw. 
 
 Ultra, f. dif/w, a. -^'/'a, yS. ^(pa, ' p. 
 jiass. ^p./j.ai, a. ^<i>6t}i', generally 
 used in the mid., fiTrro/ia:, f. dtj/o- 
 yiiai, a. mid. ^\pdij,iiv, to touch. 
 
 dpa, illative conj. like oJi', tlien, 
 therefore, accordingly ; oia &pa (ri, 
 then not at all. 
 
 dpo, interrog. particle, stronger than 
 &pa, implying nothing as to the 
 answer expected ; S,pa oi, implies 
 , that an affirmative, and S,pa p-ii 
 that a negative, answer is ex- 
 pected ; see § 282, 2. 
 
 dp'yirpiov, -ou, (rb), (dim. of Apyvpos, 
 silver), a piece of silver, silver money- 
 
 dpcHj, -^s, (17), virtue, good conduct, 
 valor. 
 
 dp'fJY<^f f. t-V^l^^s ^° help, to sficcor. 
 
 'Apiatos, -ou, (6), Ariaeus, com- 
 mander of the Asiatics in the 
 army of Cyras. 
 
 dpiS|i.{<D, {&), f. -^<m, to number, to 
 reckon, to count. 
 
 dptSixcSs, -oC, (6), a number, an enu- 
 meration. 
 
 dpKTOS, -ou, {ii), a bear. 
 
 dpicrrdu, (S), f. -■^ira, pf. ■fiplarriKa, 
 to breakfast ; to take any meal. 
 
 'Apto-Tiiriros, -ou, (i), Aristippus. 
 
dpilTTOS 
 
 d(j>av^S 
 
 opUTTos, best, noblest ; sufi. of dya6!js. 
 'ApKaSj -Ados, (6), an Arcadian. 
 &p|].a, -aros, (rj), a chariot, 
 ap|xd(itt|o, -»)!, (ri), a covered chariot. 
 apvos, ToO or t^s, gen. of an obsolete 
 
 nom. (dpi)!'), the nom. in use being 
 
 dfivJs ; dat. dpvi, ace. fi/)ra, du. 
 
 ipve ; pi. dpi/cs, gen. d.p»u>v, dat. 
 
 apvdffi, ace. Spvas, a Zawift ; a sAep/). 
 apird^ii}, f. dpTrdffiiJj com. apirdoo^j-aL, 
 
 a. ijpiraiTa, pf. fjpTroKO, pf. pass. 
 
 ■flpvairiMi, II. ripTdaS-riv, to plunder, 
 
 to carry off. 
 *ApTaY4p<rr]S, -ou, (4), Artai/erses. 
 'ApTaSip|>]S, -ou, (6), ArtaxM-xes, 
 
 the name of three kings of Persia. 
 
 Artaxerxes II., suvnamed Mnemon, 
 
 from his good memory, was a 
 
 brother of Cyrus, and reigned from 
 , B. 0. 404 to 361. 
 *ApToirdTr]S, -ov, (6), Artapates. 
 fipTi, adv. just, exnclli/, just now. 
 dpxaios, -a, -ov {dpxfl), from the he- 
 
 ginniruj, old, ancient ; Kupos 6 dp- 
 
 Xa^os, Cyrus the Xlder. 
 ^PX^t ""''> (^)> l'^9"">i''9t government, 
 
 province. 
 dpX<i>, f. Ap^to, a. ^pfa, pf. JSpX^i pf' 
 
 pass, ^py/juii., a. pass. iipx^V^i ^^ 
 
 begin, gocern,rule, command. Arch-, 
 
 in compounds. 
 &PXUV, -oiiTos, {6),arHler, commnnder. 
 dceP^s, -h, ungodly, impious. 
 d(r6cv4(D, (w), f. -litroj, to be weak. 
 ikO^tvifs, -es, without strength, weak, 
 
 feeble, sickly. 
 do-iv^Si adv. without hiirm. 
 da-xds, -ou, (6), a leathern bag. 
 'Ao-ir^vSios, -ov, (6), an Aspendian. 
 doTTis, -ISos, {i]), a shield; diTTris 
 
 iivpla, ten thousand shield, i. e. ten 
 
 thousand hoplites, or heavy armed 
 
 infaiit:'7. , 
 
 da-TpdirTu, f. -tj/u, to lighten, to gleam ; 
 impers. daTpdirreL, it lightens. 
 
 ■AorTDd-yT)s, -ovs, (6), Axtyages, king 
 of Media. 
 
 d<r<|)d\Jis, -is, firm; of persons, sure, 
 trusty; of things, sure, certain; iv 
 d<ripaXe(rTdTii>, in the safest position. 
 
 do-<|>dXcos, adv. firmly, secMrdy ; comp. 
 da<j>a\euTepov, sup. -iffrara. 
 
 &Ta»Tos, -ov, in disorder. 
 
 dniid^w, f. dri/ido-M, a. Tfriimtra, pf. 
 •fjTifiaafia.L, to dishonor. 
 
 driix^S, -is (d- priv. and tux""), 
 luckless, unfortunate; adv. -x^s. 
 
 ai, adv. again, back. It often de- 
 notes merely the continuation of 
 the narrative, and cannot well be 
 repdered in English. 
 
 aiiSis, adv. again, back again. 
 
 av\uv, -tSi'os, (o), a canal. 
 
 au|dv(ii or a{i|ii>, f. ai^ijaiii, a. TfS^riffa, 
 pf. TjS^rjKa ; pf. pass. -qS^-qimi, a. 
 r/i^-r'jBriv, to make grow, increase; 
 pass, to be increased, to grow. 
 
 aOpiov, adv. to-morrow. 
 
 aMxa, adv. forthwith, immediately 
 
 avT(S|iaTos, -Ti, -ov, acting of one's own 
 will; of plants, spontaneous; dirb 
 ToS airofidrov, of one's own accord. 
 
 aiTop.oXccD, (iS), f. -ijffta, a. 7)0Topi.j- 
 XT7(7a, to desert ; o'l a.inop.oX'fiaavm, 
 those who (had) deserted. 
 
 avTiJs, -ii, -0, intens. pron. self; pre- 
 ceded by the article, the same, in 
 the oblique cases, him, her, it, them. 
 Auto-, in compounds. 
 
 ovToO, adv. here, in this place. 
 
 aiiToi), -Tjs, contr. from iavrov, -T.s, 
 §80. 
 
 d^iaipEo), (u), (dTfi, alpiu), to take 
 away, to deprive. 
 
 a^a,v(\s, -h (d-, ^alva), unseen, out 
 of sight, invisible, vanished ; missing. 
 
a<|>apn'a^u 
 
 8 
 
 §tdi|«> 
 
 a<))apird^<i> (dir6, apwdtu), f. -liju, 
 
 Att. -dffo; or -dffo/xat, a. pass. 
 
 •ripirdaBriv, pf. -■/ipiraff/iaL, to steal 
 
 from, to plvnder. 
 a^fikov, see d<t>aip^(i>. 
 a<(>CT||U {aird, away, iri/ii, to send), f. 
 
 dtfy'^ffd}, a. d^f^/fa, pf. AipetKa, pf. 
 
 pass. d0et/«ii, a. pass. i^'^lStiv, to 
 
 send away, let go, dismiss, suffer to 
 
 escape. 
 a<|>iKv^o|iai [diri, UvioiMu, f. i^o/tai, 
 
 pf. lyficLi, 2 a. lKhfiTjv),to come to, 
 
 arrive ; liarepoi dtpUovTo, came later, 
 d<|>iinr€vcii {dir6, linredu), f, ~e6ffu, 
 
 &c., to ride away. 
 a^lim\f.i (diri, Utti/u, whiuh see), 
 
 impf. diplarriv, f. dvoariiffa, a. 
 
 oV^crTijffo, a.^mid. dwccT'riadiJ.ip', in 
 
 these tenses it is tians. to put away, 
 
 remove, to make revolt ; intrans. 
 in the pass, with 2 a. act., pf., 
 plupf., and f. mid. to stand, to 
 uiithdraw from, to retire ; difieaTTi- 
 Kecrav 7rp6s Kupov, revolted to Cyrus, 
 I. 1. 6 ; dTrojTrjvcu Trpds, (namely) 
 to revolt to, I. 1. 7. 
 
 'AxatiSs, -oS, (o), an Achaean. 
 
 dxapicrros, -ov, unpleasing, unre- 
 warded; adv. dxaplaruis, without 
 gialitude. 
 
 6,\9o^aA, f. dxOiiropai or d-x0ea0ii- 
 (TO/nai, a. pass, ■^x^^'^^Wi '" ^^ dis- 
 pleased; odd^v iJx&GTO aOruv woXe- 
 fioOvTuv, he u!as displeased in no 
 respect because (§ 277, 2) they 
 were engaged in tear. 
 
 ttXPS before a vowel fixP". "P to, 
 w. gen. ; conj. untU; see § 239, 1. 
 
 B. 
 
 BaPvXuv, -uvos, (4), Babylon, a city 
 
 upon the river Euphrates. 
 PaSvs, -«a, -i), deep or high; comp. 
 
 ^aSirepos, sup. ^aSdraros. 
 PaCvta, f. piiaoimi. (poet, except in 
 
 comp.), pf. j3^|8?7Ko, pf. pass, ^i- 
 
 pSp.iu, a. pass. ^/Sd^iji' (rare), 2 a. 
 
 fjSiji', like larriv, logo, to st<^, walk ; 
 
 (the fut. and aor. are tran.sitive, 
 
 to make to go). 
 PuKTigpla, -OS, (ii), a staff. 
 pdXXu, f. /SaXw (§ 120, 1), pf. /3^- 
 
 jSXijra, 2 u. ^/SaXoi-, pf. pass. /3^- 
 
 pXillMi, 1 a. pass. ipX^fiB-riv, f. mid. 
 
 ^aNou/^ai, (o ^Aroiu a(, cas( a* ,■ the 
 
 object thrown, when expressed, is 
 
 in the dative. 
 PapPapiK(Ss, -4 -6v, barbarian. 
 ^opPapiKus, adv. in a barbarian 
 
 (e. g. Persian) language. 
 
 pdpPapos, -ov, {6), a barbarian. 
 
 PoLpias, adv. heavily. 
 
 Papvs, -ela, -i/, heavy, burdensome; 
 
 comp. pap&repos, sup. ^dpiraros. 
 ^aa-CKaa, -as, {ri), a queen. 
 PairiXcCa, -as, {if), a kingdom ; Kard- 
 
 (TTTj els rijv ^acriKeiav, he became 
 
 established in the kingdom. 
 PacrlXeios, -ov, belonging to a king, 
 
 royal; {ri) PaalXeiov or (rd) /Sao-i- 
 
 \eia, palace. 
 Patrikds, -4ii>s, (6), a king. 
 PamXtia, f. -eifw, to be king, to reign. 
 Pacri.\iK(Ss, -ij, -bv, royal, of a king ; 
 
 subst. Pa<riKi.Kbi, -off, (b), a courtier, 
 
 a nMeman. 
 PeXrfuv, P^Xriov, comp. of dyaSbs, 
 
 better. 
 pCa, -as, (ii), force, violence. 
 Pidjo), f. -dirw, a. pas^, i^iAaO'rpi, pf. 
 
planus 
 
 9 
 
 YiYVOfici 
 
 jSe^iW/xoi, to fircp, w. ace. ; to 
 ccmpd, w. infin. 
 
 PiaCusi adv. violently, severely. 
 
 PipXlov, -ov, (t6), a small book; a 
 treatise. 
 
 P^KOS, -ov, (6), a large earthen vessel. 
 
 ptos, -ov, (i), life. 
 
 pXaKcuoi, f. -ei<ru, to loiter, to be slug- 
 gish. 
 
 pXdimii, f. p\d\j/u, a. ip\a\j/a, pf. 
 p4p\a<pa, pf. pass. ^ipXaii/mi, to 
 injure. 
 
 pX^iru, f. pijxj/a, a. -ijia,, pf. -<j>a, 
 ])f. pass. p^pXe/i/iai, a. i^MipBriv, 
 to look, to look towards. 
 
 Podu, (i3), f. mid. -■//(ro/uu, w. active 
 meaning, pf. pe^iitfun, to cry aloud, 
 to shout. 
 
 PoT|6^m, (w), f. -■^(ra, to assist, to bring 
 aid. 
 
 Bouirios, -ov, (6), a Boeotian. 
 
 PovKe(j>dVas, gen. -a (§ 39), Buceph- 
 alus, name of the horse of Alex- 
 ander the Great. 
 
 PovXIuu, f. -eiJffw, reg, to counsel, 
 advise, plot ; mid: to deliberate ; 
 Ta aiL/Td, TavTo. ^ovXevofi^fovs, plot- 
 ting these same things. 
 
 Poi\o[uu, f. povMiaofmi., pf. j3c/3ot)- 
 'Ktl/iai, impf. i^ovXi/jntv, Att. -fi^ov- 
 Xdiifiv, § 102, 1, N., to wish,he u-illinr/; 
 iyu) ifiwi' rbv lUv otxaSe pov\6fi.evov 
 dwUvat. Tots otKOL ^TfKitirbv woi-Zfata 
 direXOeii', I will cause any one of 
 you who wishes to go home to depart 
 envied by those at home; iSLSoro 
 \iyeu' pov\oii,iiiif, it was granted to 
 him wishing to speak, p. 37, 13. 
 
 Povs, jSoos, (6 or ^), § 54, an oz or cow. 
 
 PpaS^us, adv. slowly. 
 
 Ppa\v5, -do, -6, comp. ppaxirepos, 
 sup. /3|Oaxi)TOTOs,of time and space, 
 short ; of numbers, Jew, little. 
 
 Ppl\a, f. Ppi^u, a. tppe^a, pf. pass. 
 P^Ppeyfiai, to wet. 
 
 PpovT't], -Tjs, {ii), thunder. 
 
 Pdiftos, -ov, (6), any raised place for 
 standing, an altar. 
 
 y&p, conj. for. It is never the first 
 
 word in the clause ; usually the 
 
 second. 
 ■y^, enclitic, even, at least, too,=Lat. 
 
 quidem. 
 yeCruv, -okos, (6 or ^), a neighbor; 
 
 as an adj. neighboring, ■vi. gen. ordat. 
 YcXdu, (fi), f. mid. ye\d<Topai (§ 106, 
 
 N. 2, and § 120, 2), w. active 
 
 meaning, a. iyfKaffa, pf. yeyi- 
 
 XafffMi, to laugh, 
 Y^us, -UTOs, (6), laughter. 
 7^vos, (eos), -ous, (7-6), birth, descent. 
 (From a root which appears in Lat. 
 
 genus, Eng. Geneeous). 
 
 Y^ppov, -ou, (ri), a wicker-shield. 
 
 Yeppoij>iSpos, -on, (6), wicker-shield- 
 bearer. 
 
 y(pav, -oKTos, (6), an old man. 
 
 yi^vpa,, -as, (^), a bridge. 
 
 Y>1, -^s (contracted from 7e-o or 
 ya-a), (■^), earth, land; Kark yijv, 
 by land ; iirl 7?s, upon the ground. 
 6e-, in compounds, as geology. 
 
 Y^Xo(|>o$, -ou, (6), a hill. 
 
 yijpas {yfipaos), y-fipui (§ 56, 2), [t6), 
 dd age. 
 
 Y^YVOiiai, f. yev^crofmi, pf. yeyivriixai, 
 2 pf. (§109, 1) yiyova (§200, N. 
 6), 2 a. mid. iyevkp-rii/, to become, to 
 
■Yi'7'''"''*''' 
 
 10 
 
 Set 
 
 be, happen, occur, be bom, to come ; 
 OLTriTrefiire rods yiyvbiiivovi Satr/wis 
 jSafftXci iK Twv irbKetav, he sent the 
 revenues accruing from the cities to 
 the king. Lat. giguo, Lat. and 
 Eug. Genius. 
 
 yiyv&iTKa, f. yviiffofmi, pf. lyvuKa, 
 2 a. lyvav (§ 127, N. 1), pf. pass. 
 iyvijifTfiai, tt. ^yvdjjdtjv, to know, to 
 recognize, to judge, to determine, w. 
 ace; w. partic, § 280. Cf. Lat. 
 nosco (gnosco). 
 
 7XvKis, -eia, -i, sweet to the taste; 
 agreeable ; comp. yXvKtaii, sup. yXi- 
 KitTToi, also y\vK&repos, -raros. 
 
 rXovs,. -oS, (o), Glus, an officer in 
 the army of Cyrus. 
 
 7V0VS, 2 aor. partic. of yiyyiiiTKio. 
 
 Tvii)!.!], -ijs, (^), opinion, judgment, 
 plan. Eng. Gnome. 
 
 70VV, adv. therefore, now, at least. 
 
 Ypijtijxa, f. ypifa, a. kypafa, pf. 
 y&ypatpa, pf. pass. yiypap.imi,, 2 a. 
 pass. iypi-ipV (§ 199. N. 3), 1 a. 
 pass, not used, to write, to paint, 
 to engrave. 
 
 f\)f,va.\a, f. -itrui, pf. yeyip,vaxa, pf. 
 pass, -aafiat, a. pass, -dffdtji', to 
 exercise, to train. Eng. Gymnas- 
 tic. 
 
 Yii|iv^TT)s> -oil, (6), a light armed 
 soldier. 
 
 'yu|tv(Ssi -1), -hv, naked. 
 
 V"^! (^)> S^''- 7w*"fos, dat. ywaiKl, 
 aoc. 7worKO, voo. yivai ; dual, 
 ywaiKe, gen. and dat. yvvcuKoii' ; 
 plur. nom. yvvaiKes, gen. ywaiKw, 
 dat. 7woif£, ace. vwoi/tas, voc. 
 yvpalKei, a woman, wife. ' 
 
 Saffiuv, -oms, [6), a divinity. 
 
 timia, f. Sii^opju, pf. SiSjixa, 2 a. 
 ISaKov, pf. pass. SiSTj/yiuu, 1 a. 
 pass. iS-/ix9rji>, tobite (esp. of dogs). 
 
 SaxpiSu, f. -liiru, 1 a. idditpvtra, pf. 
 SeSdxpvKa, to weep. 
 
 Adva, -17s, ('4), Dana. 
 
 Saimviiai, (uj, f. -ijiru, 1 a. pass. 
 iSawav/iBriv , pf. SeSairAvri/uu, to 
 expend, to incur expense; mid. to 
 spend of one* s own ; causal, to cause 
 one to incur expense ; dfupl, w. ace. 
 
 SapEiKds, -ov, (6), a daric = about 
 $3.33 in silver, a Persian gold 
 coin = 20 Attic drachmae (said to 
 have been coined first by Darius, 
 but perh. derived from darS. , a 
 king) ; the monthly pay of a com- 
 mon soldier. 
 
 Aapelos, -ov, (A), Darius, king of 
 Persia ; ascended the throne B. c. 
 423. 
 
 Sao-fuSs, -oO, (6), a division; in Att. 
 revenue, tribute. 
 
 81, conj. but, and; corresponds to 
 liiv in the preceding claus* ; it 
 often serves to pass from one thing 
 to another, then rendered and, 
 further ; inseparable enclitic added 
 to names of places to denote mo- 
 tion towards. See § 143, and 
 N. 2. 
 
 S^SoiKU (perf. w. meaning of pres.), 
 see SefSco. 
 
 Set (from Siio), impera. f. Stijo-ei, a. 
 iSiyjae, it is necessary, there is need ; 
 § 172, 2, N. 1 and 2 ; Kal aiv 
 iiuv Sti &i> d^ irelffo/uu, and with, 
 
ScbSw 
 
 11 
 
 SiaKOTTTtt 
 
 you I will suffer whatever may he 
 necessary (§ !iii2, 3), p. 55, 12. 
 
 SeCSu (pres. uuly used in first pers. ), 
 f. mid. SeiJoiMi, a. (Seura, pf. 
 SiSoiKa (j 109, 2), 2 pf. SiSia, 
 § 130, 1, N. 2, to /ear. 
 
 8c(kw|ii, f. del^u, a. ^5ei|a, pf. 5^- 
 Seixttj^pf. pasa. SiSeL-y/jLai,, a. iSdx- 
 Bt/v, to show, to point out. 
 
 Stl\,r\,^-ris, (t;), ajiernoon, evening. 
 
 Seivds, -■/!, -iv, terrible; prudent, skit- 
 ful ; as a subst. SeLv6.>, -ou, (to), 
 danger, peril. 
 
 Sciirvov, -ov, [tu], a meat, niecU-time; 
 either early or late, dinner or sup- 
 per ; in Att. the chief meal, dinner ; 
 a supper. 
 
 tiKa, indeclinable, ten. 
 
 S^vSpov, -ou, {t6), a tree. 
 
 Se|i.<Ss, -A, -ov, right, on the right hand; 
 £e|ids Idoaav, they gave their right 
 (hands) or pledges. 
 
 8lo|tai, f. Beriffofiai, pf. SeS^Tj/mi, a,, 
 pass. iSeijOriv, to need, to want, to 
 ask, entreat, w. gen., see hia ; deirai 
 airov, heasks him, p. 66, 18. 
 
 S^piia, -aros, (t6), skin, hide. 
 
 tipa, f. SepSi (§ 120, 1), a. (Seipa 
 (g 12] ), pf. pass. SiSapiuu, 2 a. pass. 
 iS&priv (§ 109, 3), to flay. 
 
 S«r|i,ds, -ov, (6), a band, a chain; pi. 
 Sea-pial or Seffp.&. 
 
 8e<riri5Tr)s, -ov, (i), a master, properly 
 of slaves ; hence, a despot ; voc. 
 SiiTfroTa, § 37, 2, N. 1. 
 
 SEvTcpos, -a, -ov, second. Eng. Deu- 
 teronomy (Seirepoi, second, vdfws, 
 law). 
 
 6(\oiLai, f. S^^ofiai, pf. SiScy/mi, 
 a. pass. iS^xBifv, a. mid. ISf^d/iriv, 
 of things, to receive, accept ; of per- 
 sons, to receive hospitably. 
 
 8^u (§ 123, !?■. 1), f. Sijo-u, 1 a. 
 
 ISTjoa, pf. iVScKa, pf. pass. diScfiai, 
 a. pass. iSidrfv, to bind, to fasten. 
 
 8lci), f, Se-qaa, a. iSi-qsa, pf. SeSirjKa, 
 pf. pass. Sedirifmi, a. pass. iSeijdTiv, 
 to want, need ; mid. Siopai., to ask ; 
 impers. Sel, there is need, (one) ought ; 
 i. deijo'ei, a. id^i^ae. 
 
 8<i, intensive particle, now, already, 
 indeed. 
 
 8fjXos, -ri, -ov, plain, clear; with 
 participle, see § 280, N. 1 ; Sij\os 
 ^v trpoaiJiv, it was plain that he was 
 approaching ; S^Xos ^v dvtwfievo^, 
 it was plain that he was troubled. 
 
 %-t\KCia, (w), f. -ibau, toshow, tostt forth. 
 
 8'i]|ia$, -ov, (o), the common people. 
 
 AC, for A(a, see Zevs. 
 
 8td, prep, with geu. through ; of tuaae, 
 place, means ; w. ace. poet. 
 
 ACa, ace. of Zevs. 
 
 8iaPalvci> (Std, /SoivuJ, to go through, 
 to cross. 
 
 SiapdWu (Sid, /SdXXiii), to attack, 
 slander, accuse falsely. 
 
 8i.dPao-is, -fus, (17), a crossing over, a 
 means of crossing ; bridge, ferry. 
 
 SiaPar^os,- a, -ov, verH. adj. that must 
 be crossed; § 281, 1 and 2 ; ttoto- 
 p.ds d' ei fi4v tis Kai dXXos dpa rfx'v 
 iari SMparim, oix otSa, but whether 
 there is then any other river for us to 
 cross, J do not know, p. 52, 11. 
 
 8iapo\'^, -Tjs, (t)), calumny. 
 
 8i.aYY«'\Xci> (5id, ayyiyKa), to an- 
 nounce, to pass the ward. 
 
 SiaytTVOiiai (Sti, yiyvo/iai), to con- 
 tinue, to pass. 
 
 hia.yta{dt&,&yo>),toleadover,tocon*in'ie 
 
 8i,a8iScii)u (dti, SlSoi/xt), to distribute. 
 
 8iaKiv8vvEvcii (Sii, KivSweia), to incur 
 danger. 
 
 8iaKi$irr(i> (Sid, kAittw), to cut in 
 
SiaXe^tii 
 
 12 
 
 Sovirc'd) 
 
 SioXcYU (Sid, \4yo>), to pick mU; mid. 
 to converse. 
 
 SiaXeCira) {did, \elTui), to leave an 
 interval, to be distant. 
 
 Siapirdju (Sii, dpirdfw, f. iprd^oi, 
 Ati.apiri<raoTapTrd<roiJi,ai, a. ■^p7ro|o 
 or ijpiraaa, pf. ijpiraKa, pf. pass. 
 ■ifipir ay luu), to plunder, to carry off 
 as plunder ; KaTa\ap.pdvovai, ...Sirip- 
 iraafi^va, and they, also, found most of 
 their other effects plundered, ^. 73, 5. 
 
 SLairpaTTU [bid, irpiTTtu), to accom- 
 plish ; mid. to effect for one's self. 
 
 SuunrECpci) (Std, ffireipu, f. airepw, pf. 
 pass, itrirapfiai), to draw apart, to 
 scatter, to spread abroad. 
 
 hiarAia (u), f. --//(ra, to bring quite 
 to an end ; to continue doing. 
 
 SiaTC6r|)i,i (Sid, Ti6Tip,i), to dispose; 
 •irdtfras oiirw diandels direir^jUTreTO, 
 so disposing all, he sent (them) back, 
 p. 56, 6. 
 
 8ia(j>6€tpo> (5id, ^delptij, f. ~epu, a. 
 -eipa, pf. -apKn), to destroy. 
 
 SiSdo-xu, f. -d|K), pf. -axa, pf. pass. 
 SeSlday/j.ai, a. iSiSix^V, <o teach; 
 . mid. to have a person taught. 
 
 StSptuTKO), f. Spdffo/Mi, pf. d^SpaKa, 
 2 a. ISpap, to run away, to es- 
 cape ; only found in compounds ; 
 2 a. Idpav, dpw, Bpaliiv, dpavai, 
 Spds. 
 
 SlZafUi, f. Sui(TW, a. HiaKa, pf. S^duKa 
 (§126), yf. pass. Sidopxti, a. iS60riv, 
 to give, present. Cf. Lat. do, Eug. 
 Do.sE. 
 
 Si4pXo|i,at. (Sid, (pxofMi), to go 
 through; SiijXfls \A7o!, a rumor 
 spread abroad, p. 68, 8. 
 
 Si^co {did, (x<^), to be distant from, 
 separated from. 
 
 ii'Co-Tiiii,!. {Sid, Urriiii), to cause to 
 stand apart ; intrans. in the mid. , 
 
 and 2 a., pf., and plupf. act., to^ 
 stand apart. 
 
 SIkuios, -aia, -aiov, just ; iic too Si- 
 Kcdov, according to justice; adv. 
 SiKoldJS', el p^v Srj SiKaia iroiija'iti, 
 whether, indeed, I shall act justly, 
 p. 66, 13. 
 
 SiKaioo-vvT), -Tjs, {ii), justice; eft ye 
 pT}v SiKaiOtrdv'rjv...iTri5elicvvodai ^ov- 
 Xofnevos, and as regards justice... 
 wishing to show himself (ajustman), 
 p. 61, 9. 
 
 SiKauSTi]5, -rjTOS, {t}), justice. 
 
 SCkt), -his, {i]), right, justice, an action 
 at law, a penalty, punishment ; p.,) 
 Xapdiv p.e S'iKip) iiriBy, lest having 
 seized me he shalUinflict punishment. 
 
 SitrxlXioi, -ai, -a, two thousand 
 
 Si(|>6c'pa, -as, (4), a tanned skin 
 
 scopes, -ou, (6), a seat in a chariot. 
 
 StiiKu, f. -Jw, a. -fa, pf. SeSiaxa, pf. 
 pass. -Titat, a. iStiSix^Vt '" pursue 
 
 Siupv|, -uxoS) (o or Ti), a trench, a- 
 canal. 
 
 SoSfivai, see 81S(d|ii. 
 
 SoKEu, (fi), (most of the tenses are 
 formed from assumed pres. Soku), 
 f. 8u|u,a. ISo^a, pf.pass. SiSiirfp.ai, to 
 seem, to appear good ; impers. SoKei, 
 it seems, it seems good or expedient ; 
 6 5^ direKpivaTO Sn oi/5' . . . Sb^aiai, 
 and he replied ...I should never 
 seem so at Uast lo you, p. 68, 13 ; 
 to think, 1 , 8, 2. 
 
 SoXioSi -o, -ov, treacherous, deceitful. 
 
 AiSXoirffi, -av, (ol), Dolopians. 
 
 8<5Jo, -r;s, (rj), opinion. 
 
 SopirriOTOs, -ov, (6), supper-time. 
 
 86pD, -aros, (t6), a spear; regular in 
 prose. 
 
 SoiiXos, -ov, (4), a slave, suliject. 
 
 Soviriu, («), f. -liffw, to maJce a loud 
 noise ; to faU in battle. 
 
Gpoo) 
 
 13 
 
 elKd|^a> 
 
 Spdo), f. Spdffw (§ 106), a. iSpaaa, pf. 
 SiSpaxa, pf. pass. diSpa/jun, to do. 
 
 Spliravov, -ou, (t6), a scythe. 
 
 SpeTavT|i^apos, -o)', acythe-bearing. 
 
 Spap,os, -ou, (6), runniruj, fliyht ; Spb- 
 /x£fi 5eZy, to run hantilt/ ; dpj/M)s 
 iyhero rocs (TTpaTtutTais, lit. a 7*wn- 
 ning began to the sotdiers ; tr. the sol- 
 diers began to run. 
 
 8vvo|»oi, inflected like tCTaiiai. inpres. 
 and impf. (for accent, see §127, 
 6, N. 2), f. dw^opxLt, pf. StSivrj- 
 /mi, a. pass. iSw^d'qv, ^Sw^Brpi 
 (§ 102, 1, N.), impf. idwd/jLTiv, to 
 be able, can; oflen used with super- 
 latives, -(is fidXitTTa iSOvarOf as 
 much as he was able. 
 
 Svva|i.is, -cms, {ij), power, force, mili- 
 tary power; Kark Sivaiut, to the 
 
 best of one's power ; iwip Sivaiur, 
 beyond one's power. 
 
 8vvd<rrT]s, -ov, (6), a ruler, an irfluen. 
 tial man. 
 
 Swards, -i), -6v, possible, able ; comp 
 -drrepos, sup. -tiraTos. 
 
 Sivu, imperf. Idvmv, see Svu, to set. 
 
 ivo (§ 77, 1 and N. 1), two. Lat. 
 duo, Eng. Dual. 
 
 Svo-pdros, -Of, difficult to cross. 
 
 Sia, fut. Sijoi, 1 a. (dvaa (trans, in 
 the 1 a. and fut. to put clothes on 
 another), pf. SidvKa, 2 a. Idw, a, 
 pass. iSi8r)v, intrans. in all other 
 tenses in aet. and mid., of clothes, 
 to put on; of places, to enter; of 
 the sun and stars, to set. 
 
 SciScKO, indeclinable, twelve. 
 
 Supov, -ov, (t6), o gifl, present. 
 
 £. 
 
 ia.v, {el, liv), contr., ijv, Av, if, used 
 w. suhj. ; see § 207 and § 223. 
 
 laiiTOv, -rjs, -oS, or alrrov, alrr.qs, airroB, 
 reflex pron. , of himself, herself, itself, 
 his own, § 80. 
 
 laa, f. -dirixi, n,. efaira, pf. efa/ca, pf. 
 pass, erauai, a. eldSrir, impf. etaiv, 
 f. mid. in pass, sense, i&&o/j,ai, to 
 let, suffer ; to permit ; oiStvl wdiTore 
 dxipurrov elase t}]v wpoev/iLav, he 
 never at any time allowed the zeal of 
 any one (to go) unrewarded, lit. he 
 never allowed anyone his zeal, &c., 
 p. 61, 15. 
 
 ifi^s, of place, near ; of time, nigh 
 
 at hand ; of numbers, , nearly ; 
 
 comp. 4yyvT4po), sup. iyyoTdTu 
 
 (or iyy&repov, iyyiraTa). 
 
 't'Y^vCTo, see 7l7vo|xai. 
 
 ^YKpar^s, -^s, master of, w. gen.; 
 
 Toi)s iiiuripovs ^iXovs roirav h/Kpa. 
 
 rets TToi^ffai, to make our friends 
 
 masters of these things. 
 tyi, I. Lat. ego, Eng. Egotism. 
 iyayf {h<!>, 7^), T, more emphatic 
 
 than (y<&, 
 ii{Ka, f. (?ffeXiJ(j-ft), a. ^flA7;(ro, pf. 
 
 ■fl$i\riKa, to wish, to be uniting. 
 j f9vos, -ouj, {t6), a nation ; jcot fdytj, 
 
 nation by nation. 
 A, if, with indicative or opt. xal cl^ 
 
 even if; el koI, although. 
 el 7cip, Oif..., that .'....would that; 
 
 see § 251 ; = Lat. utiuam. 
 etSov (the pres. is supplied by opda), 
 
 2 pf. oTSa (as pres. § 130, 2), f. 
 
 eUro/iai, to see, to hnow. 
 d'Oe, interj. that! would that; see 
 
 § 251 ; = Lat. utinam. 
 elKtiJu, f. eUdau, a. ■^Kaaa, pf. pass 
 
flK^S 
 
 14 
 
 CKirXcu 
 
 efxaiT/uti, to make like, to liken, to 
 compare, to conjecture. 
 
 cIkos, -4tos, (ti5), neut.partio. ofloi/co, 
 likely, probable, reasonable. 
 
 eCkoiti, indeclinable, twenty. 
 
 Aku>, f. el?u, to be like ; pf. loixa with 
 pres. sense, pf. part, ^oimis, -wo, 
 -6s, Att. eUdis, -via, -6s ; loiKe, it 
 seems ; lis loiKC, as it seems. 
 
 ctXov, 2 a. of alp4u). 
 
 eI|i.I, (cro/j-ai (see § 129, I.), to be; w. 
 gen. to belong to. The root iir- is 
 seen in Lat. est ; 5iot t6 iy tosoiJt^ 
 clvat Tov KivSifov irpotTiliVTOS, lit. 
 on account o/bein;/ in suck (a crisis) 
 of approaching danger, i.e. en such 
 extreme danger; dW ivel ■^Kovire 
 KSpov iv KiXiicff &Ta, but when 
 he heard that Cyrus was m Cilicia, 
 § 280, p. 55, 11. 
 
 cl|u (§ 129, II.), to go. Lat. eo, ire. 
 
 ctirep {el, irip intens.), if indeed. 
 
 ctirov, 2 a,./ said ; 1 a. elTra ; the 
 pres. is supplied by ifivnl, \#7u, 
 or dyopeiu, the fut. and pf. by 
 ipw, elpriKa. For the use of rfTroi', 
 ^TjAif, \4ya, in constraction of in- 
 direct discourse, see § 260, 2, N. 1. 
 
 sis, w. ace. only, into, to, among. 
 
 tU, [ita, 8v (§ 77), one. 
 
 cio-pdWu (efs, /SdXXiu), to throw into, 
 to make an entrance into. 
 
 clo'PoX'/i, -Tjs, {ii), an entrance, a pass. 
 
 Aa-tKaivo {els, iXaiva) , to march into. 
 
 tiirif>\0[Ui,i {els, (pxoiMi), to enter. 
 
 cUrrrTiSdii), (3), to leap into; <riiv 
 ToiroiS elffwriSiiiJavTes els rbv iriiKbv, 
 leaping with these (equipments) into 
 the mud, p. 61, 18. 
 
 tl(rirlirr» {els, ttItttoi), to fall into. 
 
 clo-d), adv. within; prep, w. gen. 
 within. 
 
 ctro, adv. then, after that. 
 
 tire. ..tin, ctrc.l), whether ..or, either 
 ...or. 
 
 CK, before a vowel e'J, w. gen. only, 
 from, out of; ix roirov, hereupon, 
 ix ToO dSimv, by unjust means. 
 
 ^Kairros, -v> -o", each. 
 
 iKarepos, -a, -op, each. 
 
 eKarcpcaScv, adv. on both sides. 
 
 iKaWpiDo-e, adv. in both directions. 
 
 iKCLTov, indeclinable, one hundred. 
 
 UPalva {ix, ^alvia), to go firth. 
 
 ^kPoXXu {ix, pdWa), to cast out, 
 banish. 
 
 cKS^pii) {ix, Sipu, f. SepH, a. ISeipa, 
 pf. pass. SiSap/uu), to flay. 
 
 kK&, adv. Oiere 
 
 Iwlvos, -1?, -o (§ 83 and § 148), that, 
 he, — Lat. ille. 
 
 ivKlvt, adv. thither. 
 
 CKKoXvirru (^<;, KoKirru, t. KolKiypa, 
 a. ixd\v\j/a, pf. pass. KeKd\v)ji.fmi), 
 to uncover. 
 
 iKKkr^trla, -as, (^), an astemUy. 
 
 kKxKCvut {^K, xXlvw, f. k\ivu {§ 120,1), 
 pf. KixXixa (§ 109, 3, N.l), pf. pass. 
 xixXi/iai, a. ixXlBr/v), to bend aside, 
 to give way. 
 
 iKKOftlla, f. Attic -lu, (ex, KO/iJfu, 
 f. -laa, Att. -tui (§ 1 20, 3), a. ix6p.t<ra, 
 pf. pass, xex&iua p.ai), to carry out. 
 
 4KKV|ialvu (^K, xvfiaivw, f. /cu/Uavu), 
 (0 be uneven, to bend out. 
 
 IkX^YU {ix, \iyia), to choose, to select. 
 
 eicXeCiru {ix, Xeliru], to leave, to aban- 
 don. Eng. Eclipse. 
 
 IkitCittu {ix, ttIttio), to fall out, to be 
 driven out, to be banished ; iretparo 
 KOTdyeo' toi>s (xTeirTiiiK6Tas, he at- 
 tempted to restore those who had been 
 banished. 
 4KirXe<i) {ix, wXia, f. mid. vKeiaofiai, 
 a. (rXeva-a, pf. pass. ir^Xeuffjuai), 
 to sail out ; see § 123, N. 1. 
 
(•KirXTJTTW 
 
 15 
 
 'EwdXios 
 
 iKvKffrra (e/c,. TrXiJTTW, f. irAiJfu, a. 
 
 ^7r\i;fa, pf. TT^TrXirya), to strike out, 
 
 to terrify. 
 iKiroStiv, adv. out of the wai/. 
 iKc|>ev'Y(ii (iK, ^ci^uj, to escape. 
 I.CUV, -oOffa, -ix, willing, § 66, N. 1. 
 SXapov, see XapPdvu. 
 4\o«v», f. ^Uo-u, Att. iXC (§ 120, 2), 
 
 a. fi'.Jiaa, pf. AiJXaxa (§ 104), a. 
 
 pass, ii.ddtjv, pf. i\7]\a^i, to drire, 
 
 to ride, so. dp/xa or firTro;/, march, 
 
 so. ffTp6.TGV;Ml. 
 
 eXsTX"? *• 'f "> 1 ^- ^Xpyl" ; pf- pass. 
 
 i\-tl\eyimL (§ 113, N. 3), b. ■^a^- 
 
 jt9/;i', to convincf, confute. 
 cXeXl^A), f. -?w, to raise the cry of 
 
 ^XeXeO, the war-cry. 
 eXtVOai, see aipEco. 
 iXcvSepta, as, (■)]), freedom. 
 iXcvStpos, -o, -o», Att. -OS, -01', free. 
 'EXXds, -tiSos, (^), Greece. 
 "EXXr)v, -T/TOS, (6), a 6Veei. 
 'EXXtivikos, -i), -4", Grecinn, Greek. 
 'EXXt|Vik<os, adv. in the Greek tongue. 
 'EXXrioTrovTittKos, -i), -l", situated on 
 
 the Hellespont. 
 'EXX^jirirovTOS, -ov, (r), HeJIespont. 
 iXvlla, -laa, Att. -iS (§ 120, 3), » 
 
 ijXirura, to hope ; in a bad sense. 
 
 to fear ; w. ace. to hope for ; w. dat. 
 
 to hope in, 
 t"*ir;s, -ISos, (ii), hope, 
 ijiavrov, -^s ("§ 80), reflex, pron., of 
 
 myself 
 iji^aivw [h, ^ctiVu, f. mid. ;3i)iroyuai, pf. 
 
 fti^TjKa, 2 a. I^t/i/, like ((Tttiv), to go 
 
 into or on board, embark, to leap into. 
 efiPdXXu (^i>, j3(i\X<»), to Mmw in, to 
 
 empty into, to make an attack. . 
 ((lov, 4)1.01, i^i, oblique eases of i-^'j. 
 €(105, --h, -'", my, mine. 
 ciiirCirXfifLi {kv, TrifnrXTjfii, f. TrXiSffw, a. 
 
 (ir\i)(ia, pf. tt^ttXijko), to ,^. 
 
 €|iirtirT<i> f^;*, wLtttui), to fall into or 
 
 upon. 
 £|jkirpaa-Sev, adv. w. gen., ie/ore, in 
 
 front of. 
 iv, prep. w. dat. only, in, among; 
 
 of time, during. 
 c'vavrlos, -a, -ov, w. gen. or dat., 
 
 opposite, opposed to. 
 ivScia, -as, (ij), need, want. 
 ivh(Karo^,'-7], -on, eleventh. 
 cvSudi (kv, SiWj see Svvu), to put on." 
 EveSpevu, f. -cAadi, to lie in wait or 
 
 omlmsh. 
 ivafJ. {iv, el/il), to be within, 
 ivtxa, w. gen. on account of, for the 
 
 sake of. 
 IvEV^KOvra, ninety. 
 8v6a, adv. there ; as relative, where : 
 
 with idea of motion, whither: 
 
 Of time, when. 
 iv9ev, adv. thence; as a relative, 
 
 whence ; of time, thereupon. 
 (vO^vSe, hence. 
 Sviot, -ai, -a, some. 
 tvvt'o, nine. 
 
 evoiKcw, (u), f. -"^aoj, to inhabit. 
 ^vraiiSa, adv. of place, there, in that 
 
 place ; of time, at the very time, 
 
 then. 
 ^VTeX^is, -^s, fali, complete ; StSxreui rbv 
 
 fiLuBbv ^n-eX^, to give fill pay; adv. 
 
 -X£s, sup. -X^ffTOTtt. 
 
 evT«v9«v, adv. thence, hence ; of time, 
 
 henci'Jbrth. 
 «vt£9'-|ii {iv, Tieri/u), to place in; to 
 
 put on board; mid. store up, to 
 
 hoard. 
 tVTos, prep. w. gen., within; of place 
 
 or time, adv. mthin. 
 €vnry\dvw {iv, Tvyxdvoj), to fall in 
 
 with to meet. 
 "EviiaXns, -ov, (6), Enyalius ; (the 
 
 warlike) name of Ares (Mars). 
 
«■« 
 
 16 
 
 ^inXavSdvu 
 
 e|, prep. ; see (k. 
 
 i^, indedinable, six. 
 
 i^aya {^{, dya}, to lead, to induce. 
 
 tfaiT^di (ef, ahiin), to demand, ask 
 for ; mid. to beg off, gain a person's 
 release; ri fiiiTrip k^airtiaaiilin), his 
 mother luimni/ begi/ed him off, p. 
 77, 6. 
 
 (laKurx^Xioi, -at, -a, six thousand. 
 
 c^aKocioi, -ai, -a, six hundred 
 
 c'lc^ai, inf. of l^ea-ri. 
 
 c|c\avvu (e|, iXaivu), to drive, march ; 
 so. iriSa, &,}fM, Ittov, <rTpi,Tevfm, 
 to go, f.0 ride, to march; kvrevdev 
 i^eXaiva, thence he marches. 
 
 c^^pXOftai (e|, (pxo/mi,), to go out. 
 
 JJeoTi, impers. , it is allowed, or permit- 
 ted. 
 
 i(,iTiun,i, -cws, (^), a searching old, a 
 military inspection or a review. 
 
 i%i\Kmro., sixty 
 
 cSiKV^Ofipi (-or/jii), (f. l^o/iru, pf. 
 Tyfiai, 2 a. Ikj/itiv) , to come up to. 
 
 ifyim\Y.\. (i?, laTTiii..), to pUxce out; in- 
 trans, parts, to stand aside from, to 
 withdraw. 
 
 c£oirXl^o|iai, f. -Ijo^xat, to arm com- 
 pletely; pass, and mid., to arm 
 one's self complttdy. 
 
 e^oTrXurCa, -as, (ij), full military equip- 
 ment, under arms, evraOBa d'j h ry 
 e^owXialif .... TerpaKbina,, there at 
 thnt tfme under arms, the number of 
 the Greeks was ten thousand and four 
 hundred heavy armed men (lit. 
 shield), p. 19, 12. 
 
 8|<i), adv. without; prep. w. gen., out- 
 side of, without; of time, beyond. 
 
 iiraivia, {&), f. -i<rw, Att. -icoiuu, a. 
 iirriveaa, pf. iw-QveKJ,, to praise, to 
 thank, to applaud. 
 
 litav (ewel, Av), when, whenever. 
 
 iirel, conj. when, after, since, fur. 
 
 ^irciSdv (^xeiSi), &i>), conj. when, 
 whenever, as soon as, after that. 
 
 imi£i\, when, after, since. 
 
 Ihrafu, (err I, elfd), to he upon; ctt^c, 
 there was upon (it). 
 
 SirEi.|ii {eiri, el/u), to march forward, to 
 advance; Kia\6ireie toO Kdeiv eiri'jv- 
 Tos, he would hiruler them from burn- 
 ing (everything) astliey advanced; ij 
 emoScra fios, the following morning. 
 
 EiTECircp {iiret, irip intens.), since. 
 
 intna, (enl, jBira), then, thereupon. 
 
 eir(, prep, radical sense, upon; w. 
 gen., rest at ii ])lace, u/ion, at, near, 
 for ; iirl TOTL>ri^,for this pur/iose; etfi 
 iavTOu, by himsflf; ttr ehfjvqs, in the 
 time of peace; w. dat., ntar (when 
 liostility is implied), ai/ainsf; of 
 time, in, on, or at, inl To&ri^, on ac- 
 count of this ; de/ifiiding on, in the 
 power of, in addition to; w. acu, 
 to, towards, against. 
 
 EirtPovXcilu {e-irl, /3oi/. eiiii), to plot 
 against, § 187. 
 
 e'lriPowX'*], -Tjs, (^), a plot. 
 
 imyLyvo\i,a\. {stI, ylyvoiia),to make 
 an attack; to come on. 
 
 4iri8eCKVv|jii {ewl, SelKm/u), to shnw, 
 exhibit. 
 
 ciriSitoKU {?Tri, SuljKfa), to pursue. 
 
 iiri,6v}Ua, (<3), f. -i)(j-u, to set one's heart 
 upon a thing, to desire. 
 
 cinKd|iirTU {iirl, Kd/iwra, f. icd/t^w), 
 to wheel around. 
 
 iitlKii^ax (eirl, Keipai), to attack. 
 
 {iriKCvSvvos, -on, dimgerous, insecure. 
 
 ciriKOvpi]|i.a, -oTos, (rb), aid, protec- 
 tion. 
 
 eiriKpiirru [tirl, KpinrTw), to hide, to, 
 conceal. 
 
 e'iriXav8dvu (M, \av86,vu), to escape 
 notice; mid. to forget, w. partic. see 
 § 279, 2. 
 
liriXc(ir(i> 
 
 17 
 
 Srcpos 
 
 fTTiXdira (IttI, Xeliroi), to fail, to be 
 left ; t4 iirCKeiirbixevov, the part left. 
 
 Eirifi^Eia, -as, (^), care, kind atten- 
 tion. , 
 
 £in|iEX4o|iai (eirl, fiiXofiui, f. i^eKiiiro- 
 fmij pt*. fi€fi4\7]fiaLf a. lfj.e\ii8Tiv), to 
 takecareoftobseroe carefully,^ 171, 2. 
 
 firifiiyvviLi (eirl, ulywfu), to mingle 
 withj have int&'course with. 
 
 iintrOttTa (cirt, irlvTa), to fell upon, 
 to attack, § 187. 
 
 cvCirovos, -ov, painfiil, toilsome. 
 
 eirCppvTos, -ov, well-watered. 
 
 'EiricBcvTis, -ous, (6), EpistMnes. 
 
 ^irlirTa|i,ai, f. eiri.aT'fiaoiMi, a. pass. 
 ilTTiaTTid'ijv, iuipf. ijTurTdfiriv, in- 
 flected in the present like the 
 pres. pass, of iaTTim, for, accent, 
 see § 127, 6, N. 2, to know. 
 
 tmirro\i\, -ijs, (^), a letter. 
 
 ^in(r<{>dTT(i), f. -|w, to slay upon. 
 
 ^TTiTttTTw {eiri, T&TTtjj), to enjoin upon. 
 
 ciriT^Seios, -ov, suitable ; neut. pi. pro 
 visions. 
 
 iirvrii^fx [iirl, tIOtj/u), to place upon, 
 to impose, to attack. 
 
 iiriTpiiroi (eiri, rp^iria), to tarn to, to 
 permit. 
 
 tiriTwyxdvo) (fir/, Tvyxivw), to fall 
 upon, to find. 
 •■ ciruji^pu (hirl, tpipw), to bear against; 
 mill, to rush upon ; /cai Apurov ttot^ 
 eTritl>epofjL4v7)v oiK Ihpetrev, upon one 
 ocrasion, also, he did not shrink from 
 a bear rvshing upon (him), p. 54, 
 10. 
 
 Eirixup^u, (C), f. -Tjo-iij, to advance. 
 
 Siro|jiai, f. mid. Itl/o/iai, 2 a., mid. 
 iairSfitpi, impf. clirC/iTji/, to follow, 
 to pursue. In the active, Iwui, f. 
 g^ai, 2 a. Sffvov, to be engaged, to be 
 busy about. 
 
 iirra, seven. 
 
 cirraKiSoxoi, -ai, -a, seven hundred. 
 
 'Eirioga, -T)s, (i)), Epyaxa, wife of 
 Syeunesis. 
 
 ep7(£^o|jLai, f. mid. epydjofmi, pf. 
 eipya,(riJ,ai, a. elpyAsBiiji, to work. 
 
 %p70v, -ov, (t6), work. 
 
 %pT||ios, -ov, deserted, unprotecttd. 
 
 epC^cii, f. -Urto, a., ijpura, to contena 
 with, w. dat. ; vik Vs Ipi^ovri oi 
 irepl aotjiias, (Apollo) conquering 
 him (Marsyas) contending with him 
 (Apollo), (§ 144, 2) concerning (mu- 
 sical) skill. 
 
 Spiov, -ov, {t6), wool. 
 
 ^pp.aiov, -ov, (rb), windfall, good luck. 
 
 cp|iT)V£vs, -iwt, (6), an interpnter. 
 
 ipofuu, f. mid. ipiao/mi, 2 a. mid., 
 ■/ip6p.if]i>, impf. elpop,riv, to ask, to in- 
 quire. 
 
 Spv|J,a, -OTOS, (t(5), a fence, a guard, u, 
 fortification; dvH 4p6u,a,Tos, to serve 
 as a fortification ; ipipara ^oktes, 
 having as defences, p. 71, 25. 
 
 Ipu|ivds, -■/!, -bv, strongly fortified. 
 
 ^p\op.aL, f. i\eO(TopuiL, 2 p. i\-^\vda, 
 2 a. f/XSov, to come, to go ; in Attic 
 prose, elp.1 is .used for iXeiaopiai 
 (§ 200, N. 3). 
 
 ipurraxa, (iS), f. -ijiru, pf. -tjko, to asfc, 
 to ask a question. 
 
 co-Slu, f. (Bopai, pf. fSiiSoKa, pf. pass. 
 iSTjdetrpuL, a. pass. i)S4tTB7pi, 2 a. 
 (<j>ayov, to eat. 
 
 ktrrripa, -as, (i)), evening. 
 
 Strre, conj. unJiZ; see § 239, 1. 
 
 ?<rx,a.TOs, -1), -OK, the furthest ; the high- 
 est, lowest, like Lat. summus, the 
 last, the worst, § 142, 4, N. 4 ; irb- 
 \iv iax^rnv, a frontier city, p. 17, 
 14 ; adv. eo-xdras, comp. -drrepov, 
 sup. -drraTo,, last. 
 
 ^qios, -a, -ov, the one or the other of 
 two. 
 
»n 
 
 18 
 
 tas 
 
 in, adv. of present, past, or future 
 time, yet, as yet, longer, still; w. 
 a neg. , no longer, at all ; liifiroTe in, 
 never again ; oiK &pa Iti,, then not at 
 all ; IVt oSv &v yhotTo, can you then 
 still be i p. 68, 13. 
 
 itonkcs, ■■q, -oil, or -OS, -ov, ready, of 
 pei'sons, nady; of the mind, ready, 
 quick. 
 
 8tos, (-eos) -ovs, (to), a year. 
 
 iTa\ov. See tuyX'''"*' 
 
 rf, adv. well. 
 
 cvSai|iov(a, -as, {ii), prosperity, happi- 
 ness. 
 
 cvSatpiovl^ia, f. -1<t<ii, to esteem happy. 
 
 ciSa(|i.»iiv, -ov, g. -oms (eS, Sal/iuov), 
 with a good genius, happy, prosper- 
 ous; neut. fiSSaipu)!'. 
 
 exep'Y^'nis, -ov, (6), a benefactor. 
 
 cv'^Seio, -as, (rj), goodness of dispo- 
 sition, simplicity ; in a bad sense, 
 silliness, stupidity. 
 
 cu^9i]S, -es, (eB, fidos, character), tvell 
 disposed, simple-minded; in a bad 
 sense, simple, silly; adv. eirjBws, 
 sup. -iirraTa. 
 
 cliBvftos, -Of, chterful. 
 
 ciOiis, -e'la, -i, straight, direct; as an 
 adv. eiffis or eiiBi, of place, straight 
 to, direct for ; of time, straightway, 
 at once, immediately ; also reg. adv. 
 ciOias. 
 
 efivoia, -as, (^), good-will, friendship. 
 
 tivoiKiai, sAy. friendly; eivoiKW ?xoi- 
 ev auTlji, that they might be friendly 
 to him, p. 57, 3. 
 
 eSvoos, -001', contr. eivovs, -ovv (eB, 
 vAos), well-minded, kind; see § 71, 
 N. 3. 
 
 ciJirpaKTOs, -ov, easily done, practica- 
 ble. 
 
 cupT|)Jia, -aros, {t6), that which is found, 
 windfall. 
 
 tipia-Ka, f. eipi^oi, pf. eOpTjKo, pf. 
 pass, eliprifmi, a. eupiBriv, 1 a. eipov 
 2 a. mid. eipbfiriv, to find, to dis- 
 cover. 
 
 cSpos, (-60s), -ous, (to), breadth, width. 
 
 iipi%, -ela, -i; g, eipios, -elas, -ios, 
 wide. 
 
 e{jtoX|ios, -op, brave, 
 
 Ev<|)pd'n|s, -OK, ('), Eiijihrates. 
 
 c{J\op,ai, f. mid. ei^upai, a. mid, ijilfd- 
 lirfv, pf. ■qhyp.ai, to wish, to jiray, 
 Kal ol fiif etxovTo (without the aug- 
 ment, § 102, 2) lis SoWous fivTas 
 airoiis \T]<p$f,vai, a'd some prayed 
 that they might be taken on the ground 
 that they were treacherous, p. 61, 17. 
 
 eiuvv|iios, -Of (ev, SvofLO.), of good 
 name; euphemistic for the ill- 
 omened word AplaTcpos, left, on the 
 left hand; rb eiiwiiov [nipas), the 
 left wing. 
 
 "E<l>«<ros, -ou, (f(), E/ihesus. 
 
 i(|>Co-TT||u {iiri, iffrrip,!.), to stop, \n- 
 trans. forms, to stand still. 
 
 Ix9p(5s, -d, -ov, hostile, unfriendly; (6) 
 ixBpbi, a foe. 
 
 i\a, f. fffti or irxV^j pf- ("Xili^O't pf- 
 pass. (irxvtJ^h a. iax^Briv, 2 a. 
 lirxov, imp. elxov, to have, to hold, 
 to occupy; mid. ^x"/*""! f- ^^opuii 
 and axiivoimt, 2 a. iffxip-V, to 
 cling to; intrans. with adv., to be; 
 ^X^'" foAus, to be well. Tlpi^enos 
 ^X^MfoSi Proxenus being next. 
 
 £(i)S, ia, (ii) (§ 55, N. 1), dawn,mom- 
 ing; els tV iwiovirav ((o, on the fol- 
 lowing morning. 
 
 iias, adv. as long as, while, until; see 
 § 239, 1. 
 
19 
 
 rjmix'a 
 
 Z. 
 
 tjiMt, ( i3), f. t^O-u, a. t^tra, pf. efi;Ka, 
 impf. i^aov (we), and If?)!' (as if 
 from iyjiu), to live ; see § 123, N. 2. 
 
 ^«VP7V«|x.i, f. fei5|w, a. efeufo, pf. pass. 
 l^evy/mt, a,, pass, i^cix^r/v, more 
 commonly 2 a. i^iyitv, to join; 
 "iitpvpa eirrjii el'evyiiivri T\aldis 
 cvrd, there was a bridge upon (it) 
 made of seven boats joined together. 
 
 Zeus, Ai{5s, (o), Zeus; voc. ZeS. (Lat. 
 
 Jupiter). 
 ^T|\(i>Tas, -tJ, -iSi', worthy of ijnitation, 
 
 to be envied. 
 ^ri^iCa, -a.^, (i]), loss, penalty. 
 jT]T6tD, (w) , f. --^ci", *o seek for, to ask 
 
 for; w. infin., to seek to do. 
 Jcivt], -T/s, (^), a girdle. 
 
 <i, conj. with three chief signifs. 
 (1 ) disjunctive, or ; doubled ^ . . . . 
 ■fi, either ....or; (2) inteiToga- 
 tive in indirect or direct questions, 
 whether; (3) comparative, than. 
 
 t\, adv. with two signifs. : (1 ) strength- 
 ening, truly, verily; (2) in inter- 
 rog. sentences, = Lat. num. wluxt? 
 pray? 
 
 ■jj (dat. of 8s), adv. in what way, 
 ivhere ; 17 eSivaro rdxiirTO, as quickly 
 as possible. 
 
 'fj7e|uiv, -4yos, (6), a guide, a leader. 
 
 iQ7^o|>.ai {S,ya}, f. mid. --qcoiiai, pf. 
 iiyrj/iai, to go before,to lead an army, 
 and so to command; w. dat. to go 
 before; w. gen. to lead, command; to 
 issue orders, 1, 8, 22 ; to think (like 
 Lat. dueere), w. ace. and infin., 
 1, 2, 4. 
 
 TJSccDS, adv. comp. ijSiov, sup. ■^Sio-ra, 
 with pleasure, gladly. 
 
 <jSt), adv. now, already, at once. 
 
 {{So|Jiai, f. mid. iiaB-qaoiuu, u. pass. 
 ifiaBr]!/, to be pleased with, glad. 
 
 VjSovyj, -fis, (ti), pleasure, favcrr. 
 
 ^jSvIs, -eia,-i, sweet, agreeable, pleasant; 
 comp. ijdiav ; sup. ijStiTTos, § 72. 
 
 {|\6oy, see %pxo|iai. 
 
 {JKurra, sup. adv., comp. fjTTOv, in the 
 
 least degree. 
 fJKOi, f. <)|u, impf. fjKov in sense of 
 
 plupf.,<oco»!e,^weco»ie; see § 200, 
 
 Note 3. 
 'HXeios, -ov, (0), an Elean, native of 
 
 Elis. 
 'TJXiKta, -OS, (^), age; etrel r^ ip^iKlif 
 
 tTpcire, when it became his age, p. 
 
 51, 5. 
 ^Xios, -ov, (6), the sun. 
 ■i\f.tKr[]Uvai, adv. carelessly. 
 r\lUpa., -as, (^), day; &;xa ry rnUpif, 
 
 at break of day. 
 ^|i.^epos, -a, -ov, our (§ 82). 
 iJluSc^s, -^s, half full. 
 'fjli.fovos, ov, (6), a mule. 
 ^^KTv^, -eta, -V, half. 
 <jv = idv, if; w. sub . ijv Tj/jteis vm^aa- 
 
 fiev, if we shall conquer. 
 '^vCko, adv. when. 
 ■fjvCoxos, -ov, (6), a driver. 
 ■fjvirep {ijv, TT^p iutens. ), if. 
 ■^irep, where. 
 i\p6\i,r\v, see Spojiai. 
 <j<nix^, adv. quietly. 
 il<rv\la, -as, {i]), rest, quiet. 
 
T[o-a-ao|iai 
 
 20 
 
 tSios 
 
 liirirdoiiai, (u}/;(ai)> Attic ^rrdo/uac, 
 f. ijtrariB'^ffonai., a. pass. i\saii6i)ii, 
 to be inferior, to be conquered. 
 
 JjO-OrolV, Att. ■IJTTWI', -OK (§ 73, 2), 
 
 weaker, comp. of raicis; adv. ^ttoi/, 
 less; sup. fiKiara, least. 
 
 e. 
 
 6dXacrdra, later Attic ddXarra, -i;s, 
 
 (:^), Me scu; K07ii 8&\aTTav, by sea. 
 SdvaTOS, -01/, (6), death. 
 flopir^ii), (S), later Att. 6appia, (w), 
 
 f. -■^o'ci), to be of good courage. 
 Sopo-os, later Att. Sdppos, (-eos), -ovs, 
 
 (to), courage. 
 Sairirov, Att. 6S,ttov, adv. comp. of 
 
 Tax>) (§ 73). 
 6av|ui^<ii, f. mid. Bavfidao/Mt, rare 
 
 Bavfj^daoj, u.. iBa6fj.a.(Fa, pf. reBaij- 
 
 HaKa, to wonder, to- admire. 
 SavpLcurios, -a, -ov, wonderful. 
 6av|iairTds, - ^, -&<', to be wondered at, 
 
 wondrous, curious; adv. -rds, won- 
 derfully. 
 0ci)|raKOS, -ov, '{ij), ThapsScus. 
 6cao|iai, (u/iai)> f- mid. fiedo-o/uti, a. 
 
 iBeatr6.iJ.i)v, |if. reBiaiuu, a. pass. 
 
 iBedBr/v, to beliold, to witness; to 
 
 look on. 
 Qelos, -a, -ov, of n'cfrom the f]ods ; rot 
 
 Beta, religious obserrancfs, omen'i. 
 6{Ka, f. BA^ffu, a. iB4\ri<Ta (not in 
 
 indie. ), pf . reWXijKa, to be willing. 
 @c)U(rroK\i)S (-^eos), -^ows, (6), The- 
 
 mistOole.?, a celebrated Athenian 
 
 general. 
 9e(5s, -oO, (6), Gcx/. Eng. Atheist. 
 6cpdir<iiv, -oVTOi, (6), an attendant. 
 QfTToXCa, -as, {ri), Thessaly. 
 @erTaX(Ss, -ov, (6), u Thessalian. 
 
 9ia, f. Beiro/juu (the other tenses are 
 supplied by rpix''), to run. 
 
 8eii>p^<i), (u), f. -iJo'iD, to view, observe, 
 review. 
 
 0T|Paios, -ov, (6), a Theban. 
 
 6T|pdsi>, (u, ) f. -diru or -d<rop,ai, to hunt 
 V)ild Imasts. 
 
 9t|pcvu, {oT8ripdiii,{u),-d(ra), f. -eiau, 
 to hunt. 
 
 6t|pCov, -ov, {t6), wild animal, game. 
 
 Ot]o*avp(Ss, -ou, (rb), a treasure. 
 
 6vf\a-Ka, f. mid. Bavoviuu, f. pf. te- 
 Bvft^w (% 120, 3, N. and § 98, 2 N. ), 
 pf. riBvrim, § 200, N. 6, 2 a. (Ba- 
 vov, to die, to be slain ; used as pass. 
 
 of dTTOKTellfU . 
 
 6(SpvPos, -ov, (6), noise, a confused 
 
 sound. 
 0p^, ©pij^K^s, (o), a Thrnc/an. 
 Ov^a.Ti\p, -Tp6s, (ij), a danghl'-r. 
 6v|i,(Ss, -oD, (6), sou/. 
 OJifa, -as, (^7), q. door; iiri rdis, /3o' 
 
 <Ti\4us, Bipais, at the doors of tht 
 
 king, i. e., at court. 
 SvirCa, -as, (ri), a sacrifice. 
 6ia, f. Bvcia, a. IBvaa, pf. riBvKa, pf. 
 
 pass. T^BS/iat, a. iriiBT/v, § 17, 2, N.. 
 
 io soicrifice, to celdxrate with sacri- 
 fices. 
 SupaKtJci), f, -io-u, to arm with the 
 
 breastplate. 
 6iipa|, -aKos, (b), a breastplate. 
 
 Idoiiu, (i3/«u), f. mid. Idffopuu, a. 
 pass. IdBriv and pf . b/xat in a pass, 
 sense, a. mid. laadp.'qv, to heal; of 
 wounds, to dress. 
 
 larpifs, -oC, (i), a physician 
 tSetv, see opau. 
 
 IBios, -ia, -ov, private; as subst. t4 
 13(01'; eisri tSiov, for one's privateuse. 
 
lSlliTT|S 
 
 21 
 
 ka6l(rn)|u 
 
 lSuiTT)S, -OH, (o), a private person, 
 
 one in a private station, a common 
 
 soldier. 
 lSp6(o, (0), f. -cio-w, § 125, N. 3, to 
 
 perspire, to sweat. 
 ISiiv, see opoo). 
 
 tepeiov, -oi;, (to), a victim for sacrijice. 
 lEpdv, -oB, (to), anything sacred; ret 
 
 iepi,, the omens from the entrails of a 
 
 mctim. 
 iEp(Ss, a-, -bv, sacied. 
 ln\u, f. ^au, a.. ^Ko. (§ 121, Note 2), 
 
 pf. elxa, pf. pass, el/iat, a. pass. 
 
 eWiiv, to send, to throw; mid. to 
 
 rush; see § 129, III. 
 iKavds, --4, -6v, hfitting; of persons, 
 
 sKffirient, able ; of things, enough. 
 iKavws, adv. sufficiently. 
 'Ikoviov, -ou, (ri), Iconimn, a city of 
 
 Lyeaonia. 
 I!Xt|, -t]s, {iij, a crowd, a band, a troop 
 
 of horse ; icar t\as, in companies of 
 
 horse. 
 l|idTiov, -ov, (to), an outer garment, a 
 
 cloak worn above the x'tupk. 
 tva, conj. (§ 215), that, in order that.. 
 tirirapxos, -ov, (6), a commander of 
 
 the horse. 
 iinrevs, -4us, (6), horseman, 
 £'inro8po|j.os, -ov, (6), a race-course for 
 
 horses. 
 tinros, -ov, (6, ij), a horse, a mare; 
 
 i<j> trirov Btipeietv, to hunt on horse- 
 
 baik; (ri) hiros, cavalry. 
 
 tcros, hri, laov, Att. fffos, -17, -ov, 
 equal to, like ; of place, level ; Att. 
 comp. Icrairepos ; h 'ia(f, in an even 
 line. 
 
 'lo-o-ol, -uv, (ol), Issi, commonly 
 Issus. 
 
 V(m]|j.i, f. ffT^ffut, it. iaTfjaa, pf. ^ffTrj- 
 Ko, a. pass. ivTiB-ipi, pf. laTa/mi ; 
 f. pf. eo-T^fw (§ 120, 3, N. and g 
 98, 2, N.), 2 a. ?o-t;;k, to place, sta- 
 tion ; trans, to make to stand, to place, 
 to station, in the pres., iinpf., fut. 
 and a,., act. ; intraiis., to stand, to 
 be set or placfd, in ) f., plupf., 2 a. 
 and fut. pf., act. and in pass. ; 
 mid. to place one's self, to stand, 
 except in the pros., impf. and a. 
 which is trans., to place or set up 
 for one's self; 2 pf. as pres., 2 
 plupf. as impf. both intrans. ; 
 ^TTou irux^v ^KOffTos icTTTjKjjs, whcr- 
 ever each one happened to be stand- 
 inij, § 279, 2 ; lirraffap, they stood 
 still, p. 66, 16, see § 130, 1. 
 
 lirxvpos, -i, -liv, strong. 
 
 lirxvpus, adv. strongly, exceedingly, 
 very severely; sup. ia-xupbrara. 
 
 l(r%i%, -lios, (r)), strength esp. of the 
 body; military force. 
 
 IxSvs, -ias, (6), a fish. 
 
 txvtov, -ov, (tA), a track. 
 
 'lavla, -as, (15), Ionia, a district on 
 the coast of Asia Minor. 
 
 'luviK^Si -1), -bv, Ionian. 
 
 K. 
 
 Ka6^£o|iai {Kari, l^o/uu), f. mid. 
 KaSeSoOfmi, impf. iKaBefb/im, to sit 
 down; of an army, to take up a po- 
 sition, to hah. 
 
 ica6t|Svira6^(>i, (u), f. -■^<ra {Kard, iiSis, 
 iradeiv), to squander in luxury. 
 
 KaS'fJKu (Kard, ijica), to come down, to 
 extend dotim. 
 
 Ka6Co-TT||i,i (xard, tarri/u), to station, 
 appoint, make, arrange, to become 
 eslablislied; intrans. in 2 a., pf., and 
 plupf., and in all tenses of pass., 
 
22 
 
 KOTOHCaCvU 
 
 to be placed, to set dwn^to be estab- 
 lished; /coWffTi) (Is T'rpi paaiXeiav, 
 he became estahlished in the kingdom. 
 
 KaSopdo), (fi)) (/card, opiu), to look 
 down upon, to descry, to observe. 
 
 KaC, conj. and, also, even; /coi . . . 
 Kal, both . . . and. 
 
 Kotirtp {ml, Trip), although, § 277, 6, 
 
 N. 1. 
 ijaipos, -oO, (o), due measure; of time, 
 
 a fitting time, occasion; of place, the 
 
 right spat. 
 KaCu, Att. Kdu, f. Kaiffia, a. iKaxiaa, 
 
 pf. K^KavKa, impf. (Kaiov, Att. ^KaoK, 
 
 a. pass. iKaiBifi, (2 a. iK&riii), pf. 
 
 KiKavfjUu, to bam. 
 KOKiSs, -ij, -Ai', bad, evil, wicked; (t4) 
 
 Kaxbv, subst. evil, harm; comp. xa- 
 ■kIwv, sup. K&KuaTOS, § 73, 2 ; Kad- 
 
 ovi elal Tuv pap^ci,pwv,they are worse 
 
 (mare cowardly) than the barbarians, 
 
 p. 18, 13. 
 KaKus, adv. t//, badly; iroietv KaxQs, 
 
 to treat ill; see § 165, Note 1. 
 KixKia, (S>), f. Ka\4(ra, Att. Ka\u (§ 
 
 120, 2), a. ixiiXftra, pf. k^kXt^kol, a. 
 
 pass. iKKiiBrpi, pf. KixKriiiai, to call, 
 
 to summon, name, 
 KdXXos, -eos, Att. -ous, (t6), beauty, 
 KaX<Ss, -'4, -6v, beautiful, honorable; 
 
 of sacrifices, auspicious, favorable; 
 
 comp. KaWltav, sup. /cdXXiOTos, § 73. 
 KoXus, adv. fairly, well ; KaXws ^x^'", 
 
 to be well; KaXCs vparTeai, to be for- 
 tunate, § 165, N. 2 ; comp. KiWiop, 
 ■ sup. KdXXitrra. 
 KdvSvs, -I'os, (o), an over-coat. 
 kSv = Kal &v {iiv), and if, 
 Kdveov, Att. contr. Kamuv, -oO, (t4), 
 
 a basket. 
 KairTiXetov, -ov, (t6), an inn; o! r& 
 
 KoirijXEia ^x"""'! '^osc having inns, 
 
 innkeepers. 
 
 Kairv^s, -oO, (6), smoke. 
 EainraSoKCa, -as, (t\), Cappadocia. 
 Kdirpos, -ov, (6), o uyild boar, 
 Kdp^)?], -iji, (ii), hay. 
 Kao^coXdSi -ov, (6), Castolus; K<wtw- 
 
 XoO ireSioK, the plain ofCaslDlus. 
 Kara, prep, primarily denoting mo- 
 tion from above, down; w. gen. 
 down from, down; against, X47os 
 Kard Ttvos, a speech against one (ac- 
 cused) ; but Tpis Tiva, a speech in 
 answer to owe (an opponent) ; w. 
 ace. down along; of time, through- 
 out; of numbers, nearly ; of fitness, 
 according to; of place, 6^; Karci, 
 yijv, by land; Kark IBirq, by nations; 
 Kar' ?Xtts, in companies. 
 KaraPaCvca (/card, ^aivu), to go down 
 (from the interior to the coast, op- 
 posed to ava^alva, to go up). 
 KaraYY^XXu (/tard, d77^XXu), to an- 
 nounce, to declare, (o give information 
 against (a person gen.), of (any- 
 thing ace). 
 KaTiJL^o) (/card, fi7w), to lead down, to 
 restore especially from banishment. 
 KaraSifd) (rcard, S6(ij, Sdvcj), trans, in 
 the pres., f. and a., (Siiu, f. Si<ra, a. 
 ISvira,), to make to sink; intrans. ir 
 2 a., pf., plupf., act. and in mid., 
 to sink, set of the .sun; /a!) iifms 
 aiJrats Ta?s rpL-^peffi KaraSOffr], lest 
 he should sink us together with the tri- 
 remes themselves, p. 53, 12. 
 KaTafiedaiiai, (u/uai), ((card, 9cda/iai), 
 
 to look down upon, to view, 
 KaraKaCvu (/card, kclLvoj, f. Kavu) 
 § 120, 1), -pf. K^Kom (§ 109, 1), 
 2 a. fKavov), to hill ; to citt off, bn 
 Toi/s TpoKaraKdovrai .... ^Xoi, that 
 he would either cut off, by lying in 
 ambush, the cavalry burning (all) 
 before, &c., p. 63, 12. 
 
KaraKaCoi 
 
 23 
 
 KXiopxos 
 
 KaraKaCcd, Att. -Kdta {Kard, Koidj), to 
 bam down. 
 
 KaTaKO-n-TW (/caret, /cAtttw), to cut in 
 ■ pieces. 
 
 KaTaXa)J.pdv(i> (Kard, Xanpiyw), to 
 seize upon, occupif-t-'pass. to be taken. 
 
 KaTaXcliru [nardy Xtiiruj), to leave; 
 pays, to he left, abandoned. 
 
 KaraXXaTTU (Kard, dXAdrrw, f. dX- 
 \d^u, pf. ^XXaJa, pf. pass. ^XXay- 
 /j-ai.}, to change, to reconcile. 
 
 KaTaXtJu (/card, Xiiio), to dissolve; 
 to bring to an end; mid. to make 
 peace; irpbs w. ace. to terminate the 
 war against, to come to an agreement 
 with; sc. tJjc Topdav, to halt. 
 
 Karavoito, (£j, (vc^a), {&), f. -ijiru, 
 to remark; to observe, 1, 2, 4. 
 
 KaravTiv^pas, adv. opposite w. gen. 
 
 KaTain|8cui>, (£), f. -■^o-o/ioi, to leap 
 down from. 
 
 KarairpiiTTu (icaTii, Trpdrrw), to ac- 
 complish; el Ka\us Karairpd^etev, 
 if he should .succnssful.li/ accomplish ; 
 § 165, N. 2. 
 
 Kdrau-Kiva^u (KaTd,(rKevd^o), f, -data), 
 to prepare, regulate ; mid. to build, 
 to furnish a house. 
 
 Karacnrdco (/card, trirdta, f. (TTrdfTw), 
 to drag down ; dXXd (TvpsireffCuv Kare- 
 iTTdirBri drrb toO tirrov, hut falling 
 with (her) he was dragged from his 
 horse, p. 54, 10. 
 
 KaTaTt6T||u [Kard, Tl8ri/i,t), to place 
 down, to place away, to hoard. 
 
 KaTa<f>av^s, -^s, in plain sight, clearly 
 visible. 
 
 KaTa<|>EVY(D [Kard, ^eiJyw), to flee for 
 refuge. 
 
 KaTEiSov, see KaOopau. 
 
 Har^X" {""■'rd, ^u), to hold back, to 
 restrain. 
 
 KariSeiv, see KaOopdoi. 
 
 KaTu, adv. downwards, w. verbs of 
 motion ; w. gen. down from, behw. 
 
 Kauirrpou ir&iov, the plain (fCaystrm. 
 
 KctiD, see KaCdi. 
 
 K^Yxpos, -ov, (6 or t)), millet. 
 
 KEifiai, f. KeicropAL, imperf. iKeip/rjv, 
 to lie, to lie (dead) ; dwodavSvTes 
 iKtivTO iirl Txi 7^, they lay dead (lit. 
 having died) upon the ground; used 
 as pass, to rWripj.. 
 
 KeXaivaC, -(ov, (al), Celnnm. 
 
 KfKfiio, f. -ei)<ru, a. iK^Xewra, to order, 
 hid, w. dat. of person. 
 
 Kcvds, -7), -w, empty ; w. gen. without; 
 comp. -Arepos, sup. -AraTos ; also 
 regular -liyrepos, -(Jlrraros. 
 
 Kepa|>.uv d7opd,(^), the market of the 
 Ceramians. 
 
 Kcpi£vvv|ii, late f. Kepdcru, Kepw (§110, 
 II., 2), a. iKtpa<ra, pf. pass. KiKfa- 
 pju, a. pass. ixpdBriti, to mix, min- 
 gle; otvif Kepicras airrjv, having 
 mingled it wUh mine, 1, 2, 13. 
 
 K^pas, -aros, (-aos), -ids, (t6), a horn, 
 the wing of an army, § 56, 2. 
 
 K£(j>aX.i^, -^s, {^), the head. Cf. Lat. 
 caput, Eng. Capital. 
 
 K^pvYfia, -aros, (to), a proclamation 
 by a herald. 
 
 Ki)pv|, -vKos, (6), a herald. 
 
 KT]pvir<ru, f. -fu, a. ixiipv^a, to pro- 
 claim; impers. the herald proclaims. 
 
 KiXixCa, -as, (^), Cilicia, a j)rovince 
 of Asia Minor. 
 
 KCXil, KlXiKos, (d), a Cilician. 
 
 KfXio-o-o, -7)s, (^), a Cilician woman. 
 
 KivSvvniu, f. -eiiTui, to be in danger, to 
 incur danger. 
 
 kIvSvvos, -ov, (6), danger. 
 
 Kiv^u, (i3), f. -i)o-u, to move about. 
 
 KX^apxos, -ov, (6), Clearchus, the 
 commander of tte mercenaries in 
 Cyrus's service. 
 
KX^irrai 
 
 24 
 
 Kia)tii 
 
 KXfirra, f. kX^^w, pf. KixXo^a (§ 109, 
 1), a. pass. iK\4<pSriv, pf, k^kKc/i.- 
 fiatj 2 a. ^KXdiTTji'f to steal. 
 
 Kvi])i(s, -iSos, (ij), a greace. 
 
 Koivg dat. fem. of Kowis used as an 
 adr. in common, together, publicly. 
 
 Koiv6a, f. -Ultra, a. imbiuitra, to make, 
 common, to make communication; 
 mid. like the act, to communicate. 
 
 KoXd^o), f. /coXdo-u, generall}' the mid. 
 is iised Ko\dffo/iai, a. mid. ixoXa- 
 a&firfv, f, pass. Ko\afT6-^(rofmi, a. 
 iKoUffdTjv, to punish, to chastise. 
 
 !KoXoo-<raC, -ui', (ai), Coloxsae. 
 
 KoviopTos, -oO, (o), a doud of dust. 
 
 KOITTU, f. -^W, a. ^KO^a, pf. KCKOtpO., 
 
 2 pf. Kimira, 2 a. pass. iKbinqv, to 
 
 cut, to slaughter. 
 KiScTfios, -ou, (6), order; ornament. 
 KOV(|>o$, -i;, -Of, 2f]^At. 
 Kpdvos, -ens, (ri), a helmet. 
 Kpar^u, (u), f. -tJitu, fo ie strong, to 
 
 rule, conquer, to become master of, § 
 
 175, 2 ; to be in power. 
 KpdTio-Tos, best; sup. of iyaSis. 
 Kporos, -eos,(Ti), strength, pmver; i\ai- 
 ' vein hik Kpiroi, to ride at full speed. 
 Kpavy^), -^s, (^), a shout, outcrg, clamor. 
 Kpias, g. (/cp^aos) xpius, {t6), flesh, 
 
 meat, (§ 56, 2). 
 KpeCrTuv, better; comp. of iyaSos. 
 i:pe|uivvu|i.i, f. xpeiidaw, Att. KpefiQ 
 
 (§ 120, 2), a. iispipjiaa, to hang. 
 Kp^vi), -i)S, (^), a fountain. 
 Kpi6<j, -^s, (^), barley. 
 KpCvai (§ 109, 3, N. 1), f. Kpwd (§ 120, 
 
 1), a. iKpuia, pf. KixpiKa, a. mid. 
 
 expivA/niv, a. pass. exptBriv, pf. k^k/9i- 
 
 ;uai, fo judge, to estimate. 
 ■ KpinrTci), f. -^iii, a. -^a, pf. -0a, a. 
 
 pass. -i^Bipi, pf. Kixpvupai, 2 a, 
 
 ixpi^fiv, to conceal, to hide. 
 
 lA-aofiai, (uJmoi), f. KTiiiroiMi,^. Cktti: 
 ir6.fi.iiv, pf. KiKTifiuu or iKTrip.ai, to 
 get for one's self, to acquire . the pf. 
 {/ Aaiie acquired) I jaossess, with 
 meaning of present ; iSvws oSi> lo-e- 
 irSe diidpes |S|(01 t^s Aeu^e/sias ijs 
 KtKTr)<r6e, see then that you are men 
 worthy of the liberty of which you are 
 possessed, before Sirws sc. eirinek'. 
 eio-fle, p. 57, 11. 
 
 KTcCvci), f. KTevu (§ 120, 1), a. dcreiva 
 (§ 121), pf. iKTOva (§ 109, 1), 2 a. 
 ^KTOvov (§ 109, 3) (djro/cre/i'U is 
 generally used), to kill. 
 
 KTi]o-Cas, -ov, (6), Ctesias, a Greek 
 physician at the Persian court. 
 
 EvSvos, -ov, (6), Cydnus, a river in 
 Cilicia, flowing through the city 
 of Tarsus. 
 
 k^kXos, ov, {&), a circle; xiKKip, in a 
 circle. Eng. Cycle. 
 
 iruKXtfu, (u), f. -liaw, to encircle, sur- 
 round, 
 
 KvK\(i)<ris, -eus, (4), a surrounding, as 
 in hattle. 
 
 Evpeios, -ela, -eiov, belonging to 
 Cyrus. 
 
 Kvpos, -on, (6), Gyrus. In the 
 Anabasis, Cyrus the Younger, the 
 younger brother of Artaxerxes, 
 whom he attempted to dethrpne, 
 B. c. 401 ; Kvpos d ApxaTos, Cyrus 
 the Elder. 
 
 KvtDV, {d or ij), gen. kv>'6s, dat. kvvI, 
 aoc. xiva, voo. Kiov; plur. mixES, 
 gen. KviiSv, dat. icviri, ace. xivas, a 
 dog. 
 
 KoiKia, f. -i<ru, a. exiiXuira, to hinder; 
 w. gen. to kinder one from doing a 
 thing; w. infin. to hinder; w. ace. 
 to hinder, or prevent a thing. 
 
 Kii|iT|, •];!, (i^), a viZJop'e. 
 
Xa- 
 
 .-yxo-vo 
 
 35 
 
 AvSCa 
 
 A. 
 
 \a7xavu (cl. 5), f. mid. Xijfo/nai (w. 
 ap,t. meaning), pf. etXtiXa, pf. pass. 
 eiXiUfMi, a. pass. eKifxfltii', 2 a. 
 eXaxov, to obtain bi/ lot, generally 
 to obtain, w. gen. ; lo become pos- 
 sessed of n thing. 
 
 XaytSs, -d), (6), a hare, § 42, 2, N: 
 
 \d6pa, adv. secretly; w. gen. without 
 one's knowledge. 
 
 AaKESai|i.iSvios, -ov, (6), a Lacedae- 
 monian. 
 
 AaKeSal|i.(i>v, -oras, -f^), Lacednemon 
 or Sparta, a city in Laconia. 
 
 Xaiipdvai, f. Xij^o/iai (w. act. mean- 
 ing), pf. e£Xi70o, 2 a. iXa^ov, pf. 
 pass. e?\j7,:i/iai, u. eX'^^dTjif, to take, 
 receive, obtain ; ilirus .... Xd/Soj 
 paaMa, that he might find the. king 
 as unprepared us possible, p. 57, 4. 
 
 Xa^iirpos, -A, -iv, bright. 
 
 Xa|nrpdTT]s, -ijtos, {^), splendor. 
 
 XavBdvu, f. X^i7i>i, pf. X^Xij^a, 2 a. 
 t'Xa^oi', to lie hid, escape the notice of 
 (some one) ; mid. X^tro/tai, pf. X^- 
 \ri(rfuu, f. pf. XeX^ffO|i««, 2 a. iXa- 
 BbfLriv, toforgi-t; w. participles, see 
 § 279, 2 ; XaBuv Kvpov dTreXBiiu, lit. 
 having gone away without the knowl- 
 edqeofCgrus; rp€(f>jfievov eX&v$a.vev, 
 was secretly supported. Cf. Eng. 
 Lethargy. 
 
 Xads, -oC, (!>), Att. Xec6s, <Ae people; 
 in pi. subjects of a prince. 
 
 X«7«i, f. X^fu, a. eXefo, (for pf. act. 
 elptjKd is used), pf. pass. X^Xey/iai, 
 a. pass. iX^x^Vt to ^"yt speak, men- 
 tion, relate; Xiyerai, it is said; X&y- 
 erai Kal Toiis &XXovs, and it is said 
 that the rest, p. 44, 23. Lat. lego, 
 Eng. Lectuiib. 
 
 \lyti) (Attic only in compounds), to 
 gather, to count; f, Xi^w, a. IXefa, 
 pf. elXoxa, pf. pass. eiXeyfiai or 
 XiXeyfiat. 
 
 Xeiira, f. -^j/a, 2 pf. XiXoi-ira (§109, 2), 
 pf. pass. X^Xeififiiu, a. lXel(j)BT)v, 2 a. 
 eXiwov, 2 a. mid. iXi.irltii.riv, § 95, 
 to /eawe ; class 2. 
 
 XeuxoOtSpa^, -aicos, (o), wiVA white 
 breastplate. 
 
 Xevkos, -^, -<i>', light, clear; of water, 
 bright; of the skin, while, fair; of 
 sound, cZear; of gold, /)a/e, (i. e. 
 alloyed ) ; root appears in Lat. lu- 
 ceo, Eng. Look. 
 
 XtSos, -ov, (d), a stone. Eng. Lith- 
 ograph (XlBoi, ypd(j)a). 
 
 \ip.as, -ov, (o or •!)), hunger. 
 
 X670B, -ov, (d), a word, discourse, in- 
 terview, mention; i^iois Xdyov, wor- 
 thily of (being) mentioned; rumor, 
 report, SuiXBe X470S, the rumor 
 spread abroad, p. 68, 8. Eng. 
 Logic. 
 
 ^°YX1' "'?'> (^)> '^^ point of a spear; 
 a spear. 
 
 Xoiirds, -i), -bv, left, remaining, the 
 rest of. 
 
 Xd(|>o$, -ov, (d), a ridge, hUl. 
 
 \o\afia, -as, {if), the'command of a 
 company; pi. the command of com- 
 panies; Kal els (j>po6pui koX Xoxayias, 
 both fur garrison duty and for com- 
 mand of companies, p. 52, 4. 
 
 Xoxayas, -oD, (d), a captain, the com- 
 mander of a Xoxos. 
 
 Xdxos, -ov, (d), a company of soldiers, 
 = about 100 men. 
 
 AvSCa, -as, (rj), Lydia, a province in 
 Asia Minor. 
 
AvSios 
 
 26 
 
 (icXavla 
 
 AvSios, -fa, -lov, Lydian. 
 
 AvKatos, -aia, -aiov, belonging to Mount 
 Lycceumj Lyccnan ; Bieiv to, AiJ/cata, 
 to celebrate the Lyccea, a festival 
 celebrated by the Arcadians in 
 honor of Pan. 
 
 AvKios, -ov, (6), Lycius, a Syracusan. 
 
 X^KOs, -on, (6), a wolf, 
 
 AvKoupYos, -ov, (6), £ycurjr«s, a Spar- 
 tan lawgiver. 
 
 Xii|iaCvo|iiai, f. mid. \viw,voviiai, pf. 
 
 \e\iiiaaimi., to tnat with indignity, 
 
 to spoil, to frustrate. 
 \vKia, (w), f. -^tfu, to annoy; of light 
 
 trooiis, to harass. 
 Xiioi (§ 106 (end)), f. \i(ra, a. IXuffa, 
 
 pf. \i\vKa, pf. pass. XfKvixat, a. 
 
 pass. iXiBriv, a. mid. iXvad/irir, to 
 
 loose, to break a treaty or oath. 
 
 M. 
 
 |id, a particle used in oaths, by ; in 
 Att. /id is used absol., /ii, Ala, by 
 Zeus. See § 163. ^ 
 
 MaCavSpos, -ov, {6), the Maeander, 
 a river separating Lydia from 
 Caria, remarkable for its winding 
 course. 
 
 paKpds, -d, -JJ", Umg, either of space or 
 time ; reg. comp. juoK/jiTepos, sup. 
 /uiKptrraToi; irreg. comp. fiiaaav, 
 fioUrffov, sup. fi'fiKuTTos or ftAKLtrro^. 
 
 yAXa, adv. vei-y, much; comp. /mWox, 
 more, rather; sup. /idXiffra, most, 
 especially; (is iiAXisra iriKpinrTSiie- 
 vos, concealing as much as he could. 
 
 lidXicrra, see (iilXa. 
 
 (loXXov, see (iilXa. 
 
 (lavBdvu, f. mid. liaS-fiffofuu (w. act. 
 meaning), pf nc/idSriKa, 2 a. e/aa- 
 6ov, to learn by enquiry, to under- 
 stand, w. partic. § 280. 
 
 |idvTis, -6US, (6), a prophet, soothsayer. 
 
 Maptrios, -ov, (6), the Marspas, a 
 river of Phrygia, falling into the 
 Maeander ; Marspas, son of Olynu- 
 pus. 
 
 (Jidprus, -vpos, (6), ace. fiiprvpa, also 
 H&prw, a witness. 
 
 Mdo-Kas, -a (§ 39), {i), the Mascas, 
 a river of Mesopotamia. 
 
 |idn]v, adv. in vain=ha.t. finistra. 
 |id\aipa, -as, (t)), u. large knife, u 
 
 short sword, opp. to {f^os, the 
 
 straight sword. 
 |idxT|, -IIS, {i)), a battle. 
 |>.dxo|iai.,f. iw.x^'roimi, Att. fuixoOfuu 
 
 (§ 120, 2), pf. pie;jAxni"''h ^- ioii. 
 
 i^uLxccdfi-riP, lo fight; iJsTO yap .... 
 
 iuax£iffS<» /SaffiX^a, for he thought 
 
 .... that the king would fight, p. 
 
 53, 14. 
 ppC^dXciis, aAv. greatly. 
 Mryopevs, -^us, (6), a MegarUm. 
 («70S, |«7dXT|, pUya (§§ 70, 73), 
 
 great, large; comp. /j-eltur, sup. 
 
 /i^llTTOS. 
 
 Mc7a<|iepvT|s, -on, (A), Megaphemes. 
 
 |u6C<m]|],i, (/ierd, ?ffT7;/ti)i trans, in 
 pres., impf., fut., a. act. and mid. 
 to transfer; intrans. in mid. and 
 pres., impf and a. pass. ; in the act. 
 2 a., pf. and plupf., to withdraw. 
 
 |icto>v, -ov, comp. of lUKpis, less; 
 fueXov "xf u*, to be worsted. 
 
 [icXavCa, -as, (^), blackness; XP^'V 
 Si <rvxv^ HitTepov ibavep fte\avta tis 
 iiiTf TfSltfi fTr! TToXi), and in a very 
 short time afterwards (it appeared) 
 like something black reaching far off' 
 on the plain, p. 52, 7. 
 
|U\as 
 
 27 
 
 |ua(v(i> 
 
 fi^Xos, |i4\aiva, (i^av (§ 71), black; 
 camp. /ieXdirrepos, sup. -Taros. 
 
 fUKa, impers., f. /ieX^irei, pf. liefUX- 
 ilKc, it concerns. See § 171, 2, N. 2. 
 
 |i.£XCvT|, -I;!, (ij), millet, a kind of 
 grain. 
 
 )uXX(i>, f. /icW'^ffu, a. e/i^Wriira and 
 ■/lfi4\\ri(ra (§ 102, Note), to intend, 
 to be about, or Asj^'B to do anything. 
 See § 98, 3. 
 
 |tE|u|>o|i,ai, f. mid. /jJ/i^o/iai, a. mid. 
 efieij.\l/d/iiiv, to blame. 
 
 fUv, a connective particle, indeed ; on 
 the one hand , . . .on the other; as 
 well , . . .as; to recall what has 
 gone hefore, now; to mark an ob- 
 jection, yet, however, still, neverthe- 
 less. Used merely to show some 
 relation between one clause or 
 word and another which follows : 
 the latter is generally introduced 
 by 5^, but sometimes by oKKi, 
 fiAvToi; ii.h d'/i, however; jxh oiV, 
 nay, rather; & iiiv .... 6 5^, the 
 one . ... the other ; the farmer .... 
 the latter: it can never stand first 
 in the clause. See § 1 iZ. 
 
 f,lvTov, conj. yet, however, &c. See 
 
 H^vo), f /lEj-ffl (§ 120, 1), a. 'fietva, pf. 
 f'€^hTj::a, to remain, wait, await. 
 Cf. Lat. maneo, Eng. Mansion. 
 
 HZlvaai, -wKos, (d), Menon, one of 
 the commanders of Cyrus's Greek 
 force. 
 
 ji^iros, -Ti, -ov, middle; inAtt. w. gen., 
 between ; comp. /J^aairepos, sup. /xc- 
 ffalraTos. For position, sec § 142, 
 i. Note 4; /liffov, (ri), the centre. 
 The root is the same as in neri, 
 Lat. medius, Eng. Middle. 
 
 |i.€<rT(Ss, -li, -iv, JuU, w. gen. 
 
 |Ji£T<i, prep, among; w. gen. in the 
 
 midst of, between, wWi, among ; only 
 
 used in poetry w. dat. among ; w. 
 
 ace. of , motion coming into, or 
 
 among; of place, after; of time, 
 
 after, next to. 
 |teTaSt8(ii|ii (/xera, diSta/u), to give a 
 
 part of. 
 )i,eTa|u, adv. of place, between; of 
 
 time, between-whiles ; prep. w. gen., 
 
 between; of time, during. 
 jierair^^iru (/iera, Tr^fiirw), tosendfor. 
 fkiriULi (/lerA, ei/d), to be in the midst 
 
 of, to share in. 
 jXET^upos, -ov, raised up. 
 |ji^Xpi, before a vowel sometimes /lix- 
 
 pis, prep. w. gen., milil; of place, 
 
 as far as, p.^xP'- OaXdffff'qs, as far as 
 
 the sea; of time, /t^zpi o5, until 
 
 when ; conj. until, g 239. 
 (I'/j, adv. not; conj. lest, that not; see 
 
 § 215, C and N. 1 ; g 283. 
 )i,i]Sa|ifj, adv. nowhere, in no manner. 
 (iti84 (/i^, S4), conj. and not, nor. 
 Mr|8£a, -OS, (ri), Media. 
 (itiSeCs, |JiT]SE|<,la, PiS.'v (p.riSi, efs), no 
 
 one, none, § 283. 
 litiB^iroTe, adv. (jiriSi, irori), never, 
 
 § 283. 
 MijSoi, -wv, (ol), Medes. 
 M^SoKos, -ov, (6), Medocus. 
 |jit]kIti, adv. no longer, % 283. 
 |1T)K0S, -eos, (t6), length, height, iallness. 
 (I'^v, adv. truly, mdeed,^he,t. vero, 
 
 see \Uv. 
 (i^jv, |ti)Vos, (o), a month. 
 pi'fjiroTe, adv. never. 
 ftifirta, adv. not yet. 
 [i^TE, and not; p-ip-e .... pirre, neither 
 
 .... nor. 
 H'^TTip, |M)Tpo5, (ti), a mother. (§ 57.) 
 poCvcii, f. jMO^'u (§ 120, 1), a. ip,iriiia, 
 
 Att. e/i(ora (§121, N. 1), pf.Aie/ii"7- 
 
 KO, a. pass. ep,iiv0riv, pf peplaapai 
 
(iItwiii 
 
 28 
 
 vof,lX/a 
 
 OT lieiiiafifuu, to paint over, to dge ; 
 to stain, to ■pollute. 
 
 |i(-yw|ii, f. id^a, a. iiu^a, pf. pasa. 
 liifiiyiiat, a. pass. iidxSw, 2 a. 
 if-tyVi to mingle, to mix. 
 
 MCSas, -ov, (d), Midas. 
 
 |UKp6s, -d, -dv, small, little ; of time, 
 little, short ; luxpoS del, it ivants but 
 little; comp. luxpirepos, sup. -ira- 
 Tos; irreg. forms iXiaauv or eXdr- 
 Twv, peluv; ^^dx'o■TO! (juXaroi) ; 
 luKpbv, narromly. § 73, 5. ^ 
 
 MiX^o-vOS, -la, -tov, Milesian ; silbst. 
 inhabitant of M ileitis. 
 
 M(Xt)tos, -ow, (ifi, Miletus, a, city of 
 Curia. 
 
 MiXTiiiST]^, -ou, (d), Milti&des, an 
 Athenian commander who defeated 
 the Persians in the battle of Mara- 
 thon, B. c. 490. 
 
 |i,i|jiv^<rK<D, f. /jLv/iaiA), a. '/wriaa, pf. 
 pass. ij,i/ju>7i/ia.i, (the pf. is both mid. 
 and pass, with present sense, § 200, 
 N. 6), a. iiuiiiaBriv , a mid. ^/iKTjo-d- 
 pLrpf, to remind ; mid. to remember. 
 
 |U(Hci>, (ffl), f. -ijtru, pf. pe/dariKa ; 
 f. mid. in pass, sense, fua'/ia-opuii, 
 a. pass. iiutriiBTiv, pf. pass. pLciil- 
 a'tjpui, to hate. 
 
 IuctBds, -oO, (o), pay, wof/es. 
 
 |iur6oo), (to), f. -fiiffta, a. exluSaaa, pf. 
 lU/dirBiiiKa, to let out for hire ; mid. 
 to hire at a price ; pass, to be, hired 
 far pay, % 199, 3, N. 2 ; pj-trewB.]- 
 voL ovK iirl ToiTip eipaffav, they said 
 that they were not hired for this, 
 p. 40, 7. 
 
 |ivd, {it), gen. p-vSis, a mina, = 100 
 drachmas ($16§). 
 
 |u>vos, -•q, -ov, alone ; ueut. fiivov, 
 adv. alone, only. 
 
 I&vpids, -dSos, ten thousand ; c^ui/ . . . 
 rpiaKovra p.vpiddas ffTparias, having 
 ...an army of three hundred thousand 
 men, p. 55, 11 ; and p. 78, 8. Eng. 
 Myeiad. 
 
 (lipios, -la, -I.OV, u.suallj' in the plur. ; 
 p,ipioi, -ai, -a, ten thousand, § 77, 2, 
 N. 3. 
 
 MOo-ios, -fa, -101', Mysian. 
 
 N. 
 
 vavfiax^u, {Si), f. -i)<ru, to fight in a 
 
 ship, to fight a naval battle ; to fight. 
 vaSs, v«(4s, (^), a ship. Lat. navis. 
 VEavio-Kos, -ou, (6), o youth, u young 
 
 man, so called till the age of 40. 
 vcKpds, -oO, (6), dead body ; in pi. the 
 
 dead ; as an adj . vfxpbi, -d, -bv, dead. 
 ve>(i), f. vep.Si (% 120, 1), later vepi- 
 
 aus, a. heipu (§ 121), pf. vev(p.riKa, 
 
 to distribute; mid. w. ace. to possess; 
 
 of herdsmen, to feed, to pasture. 
 vfos, -o, -ov, Att. -OS, -ox, of men, 
 
 young ; of things, new, fresh ; comp. 
 
 vdrepos, sup. -(iroTos. 
 
 ve(|>IXt|, -ijr, (^), a cloud, a mist. 
 
 vo&s, -li, (6), Att. for vais, temple. 
 
 vi\, particle of affirming, w. ace. x!) 
 Ala, yes, by Zeus, § 163. 
 
 vijiros, -ou, (if;), an island. 
 
 viKdu, (u), f. -i}o-u, pf. vevlKtiKa, to 
 conquer, win : the pres. may have 
 the sense of the pf., / conquered 
 or (I have conquered) am victorious. 
 
 vCki), -rii, {ij), victory. 
 
 vo|i,lJ(i), f. -la-u, Att. vopxu, § 120, 3, 
 pf. vevbp,iKa, pf. pass. vevop.urpja.i, 
 a. ivoplaBriv, to hold as a custom, to 
 think, to consider. 
 
VOflOS 
 
 29 
 
 fi'is 
 
 vJ|ios, -ov, {6), a custom, a law; 
 rlBiiai AaKedaifwvloi-s iil>ii,ovs, he 
 enacts laws for the Lacedaemo- 
 nians, 
 
 voos, contr. voSs, -ov, (o), mind. 
 
 voir(a, t. -ijaa, to be sick,to be miserable, 
 v6ira5, -ov, (t\), sickness, disease, 
 
 misery. 
 vCv, adv. now; enolit., viv. 
 vv^, WKTtSs, {v), night. 
 
 QcvCas, -ov, (o), Xenias. 
 |£viK(S5, -i), -iv, or -6s, -I 
 
 to a stranger or guest ; tJ ^enxiv, 
 
 -ov, the mercenary force. 
 tfvos, -ov, (d), a stranger, guest, a 
 
 mercenary, 
 ^ivo^iiv, -CiiiTOS, (d), Xenophon, an 
 
 Athenian, the principal leader of 
 the Greeks in their retreat, and 
 the author of the Anabasis. 
 
 S^PSl'i """j {'')> Xerxes. 
 
 |(<f>os, {-eos, ) -ous, ( t4) , o straight sword. 
 
 ^vXivos, -1], -ov, wooden. 
 
 |«Xav, -ov, (ri), wood. 
 
 o. 
 
 o, ^, ri, «Ae; see § 78 ; d iih...o Si, 
 this one . . . that one ; i Si, and he, 
 § 143, N. 2 ; for its use before a 
 participle, see § 276, 2. 
 
 ^YSo^KovTa, eighty. 
 
 88«, ■fjSe, ToSe, this, i. c. what follows, 
 § 148, N. 1 ; rivSe rbv rpbirov, in 
 the following manner, § 160, 2. 
 
 oSds, -oC, (ti), a way, road, street, a 
 march. 
 
 896V, rel. adv. whence. 
 
 oIkoSc, adv. homeward; § 61. 
 
 oIk^o), (fi), f. -■qiru), a. (jkijira, pf. 
 ^KTiKa, impf. ^eov (ovv), to line, 
 dwell. 
 
 olKla, -as, [ii), a house. 
 
 oUoSofi^ci), (u), f. -^iriii, to build. 
 
 otiKoi, adv. at home. 
 
 olKovdfios, -ov, (dj, a manager; el Si 
 Tiva optlrrj Seivbv Svra olKOpbfiov Ka\ 
 KaracrKevA^ovri, re ^s fipx<" X'^PO'S, 
 Kol vpoabSovs TTOLOvvTa, and if he 
 (ever) saw any one that was a skil- 
 ful manager regulating the country 
 
 which he governed, etc. 
 
 oIkoSi -ov, (d), house, family. 
 
 olKTclpu, f. olKTepd (§ 120, 1), a. (j!/c- 
 Tcipa (§121), impf ^T€ipov,lopity, 
 to have pity upon ; oIk. rtvd tlvos, to 
 pity one for or because of a thing. 
 
 otvos, -ov, (d), wine; w. the digamina, 
 FoiKos ; Lat. vinum, Eng. Wine. 
 
 o^o^ai, Att. ol/xoLL, f. mid. olijffop^i, 
 a. pass, i.'ri&tjv, impf. (^sp.Tiv or L^fifiv, 
 to suppose, think, as opposed to 
 knowing, always of the future ; Sv 
 (^To Tnarbv ol (§ 144, 2) eXvai, 
 whom he thought to be faithful to 
 himself. 
 
 otosi oto, olov, rel. pro., of what kind, 
 as,=Lat. qualis. 
 
 B'is, 6 or ij, gen. t'ios, ace. 6iv ; pi. 
 nom. (I'cs, gen. Stiav, dat.' o?e«, 
 ace. Bias,; contr. nom. and ace. 
 pi. fts : Att. nom. oTs, gen. oWs, 
 dat. oil, ace. otv; pi. nom. oles, 
 gen. oluv, dat. o^iri, ace. otas ; nom. 
 and ace. pi. also oZs, a sheep. 
 
oUirmp 
 
 30 
 
 oirajros 
 
 otoinr^ (oros and intens. rip), just as. 
 
 oixofuu,, f. mid. olxMoimi., pf. otxuKo. 
 or (fixu/ca, impf. ifxAt^'fi of persons, 
 to he gone ; of things, as of darts, 
 to rush along ; of strength, to be 
 gone, lost; see § 200, N. 3, and 
 § 279, N. 
 
 itKvia, (w), f. '■flaw, impf. &kvovv, 
 to hesitate; iyii yip iKvoltiv hv els 
 ri TrXota i/i^aiveiv, for I should 
 hesitate to embark in the vessels, 
 p. 52, 12. 
 
 iKTaKoinai, -at, -a, eight hundred. ' 
 
 oKTii, eight. Lat. octo, Eng. Octave. 
 
 oKTuKaCScKa, eighteen. 
 
 SXpios, -or, or -a, -ov, happy, bledt, 
 especially with worldly goods ; 
 ricA ; irreg. sup. SX/Sio-tos, reg._ sup. 
 iA/SiiiraTos also occurs ; adv. -lus. 
 
 6Xc6pos, -ov, {i), destruction, death. 
 
 6XI70S, -v, -ov, of number or quan- 
 tity, little, Jew, opposed to iroXis ; 
 of size, small, little, opposed to 
 /liyas ; oomp. iXitrffwv, sup. dMyiir- 
 Tos; see § 73. Eng. Oligakcht 
 {d}dyos, fi/)X")- 
 
 6XXv|u, rarely dWiu, f. 6\w (§ 120, 
 1), a,. (SXeiro, pf. 6Xii\eKa (§ 104), 
 2 pf. «XuXa (§ 200, N. 7) ; mid. 
 SKXviMi, f. iXoOp.ai, 2 a. diXSp-rji', 
 plupf. liXiiXeu' ; act. to destroy, to 
 lose; mid. to perish; 2 pf. intrans. 
 /am ruined; in prose generally 
 dTriXXu/ii. 
 
 8X0S, -1;, -01", whole, entire, § 142, 4, 
 N. 1. Cf. Eng. Catholic (kotiI, 
 8X0S). 
 
 'OXvv6ios, -1;, -oj', OlyntUan. 
 
 ifioX^S, -'4> '^"i smooth, level. 
 
 &|iaXas, adv. roei??^, regularly. 
 
 8|>.w|i.i, f. 6p.ovp.M (act. meaning), a. 
 &iw(ra, pf. i/iii/toKO (§ 104), pf. 
 pass, hpjhpjxyfai., a. <ip.66Tiv and 
 
 ibpjxrdrjli', impf. iS/troy or &iu>vov, 
 
 to swear. 
 Sfioios, -oia, -oio;", also -05, -oc, = 
 
 2zj;e. Lat. slmilis. 
 6|i.oXo7iiii, (ffl), f. -^o-u, a. <JAtoXi77;o-a, 
 
 pf. fbfioXdyrjKa, to confess, to ac- 
 knowledge. 
 6|ioTpairE|as, -ov (6/iis, common, rpd- 
 
 Trefa, <a6/c), sz«in9 at the same table ; 
 
 suhst. tah/e-rompanion. 
 o[u)v, adv. together, 
 ifuas, yet, still, nevertheless. 
 jivapos, -ov, (d), and (t6) iveipov, a 
 
 dream. 
 Hvofo, -aros, (t6), a name. Lat. 
 
 nomen, Eng. Anonymous. 
 dvopid^u, f. -i<ru, &c., to name, call. 
 fivos, -ou, (d or ^), an ass. 
 6|iis, -«a, -iJ, of impresiiions on the 
 
 senses, sharp, keen ; of sight, keen ; 
 
 of sound, sharp, shrill; of pain, 
 
 sharp ; of taste, sharp ; of motion, 
 
 /8irj| or Bini, in what direction. 
 
 SviirSf, (k), in the rear, behind. 
 
 oirio-SoijiuXaK^u, (ffl), f. -•^irw, to guard 
 the rear. 
 
 oirlo-u, adv. of place, backwards ; w. 
 gen. after, behind. 
 
 mrXlla, f. -Iffw, Att. lu (§ 120, 3), 
 a. SnrXura, pf. pass. £}irXur/uu, <o 
 a?™, equip. 
 
 6irXtn|s, -ov, (d), a heavy-armed foot- 
 soldier, hoplite, who carried a pike, 
 (Sbpv) and a large shield (iir\ov). 
 
 BirXcv, -ov, {t6), usually in the pi., 
 arms ; especially, shields 
 
 6iro6cv, relat. adv. whence. 
 
 Siroi, relat. adv. whither, where; w. 
 gen. fiiroi 717s, where in the world. 
 
 oirotos, -ola, -oioK, of what sort, kind, 
 or quality = Lat. qua/lia. 
 
 oiriSiros, -% -ov, rel. ac^., of number, 
 
oit6ts 
 
 31 
 
 as many as, Lat. quot ; of space, 
 as large as, Lat. quantus ; OTrdffas 
 etxe (pv\aK(is, as many garrisons as 
 he had, 1, 6. 
 
 uirirt, when, whenever, since, = Lat- 
 in cum ', otrdre ir&vv i]Si/v XdjSoi, 
 whenever he found (any) very sweet, 
 § 232, 4. 
 
 CiroD, relat. adv. where, w. gen. where; 
 Sttou 75s, where in the world; of 
 time, when ; of manner, how ; 
 causal, since. 
 
 Sttcds, aJv. how, that, in order that, 
 § 216; Sttus 6ir..iTas iTajSipiffeiev, 
 in order that he might land soldiers. 
 
 opdu, (ffl), {.stem 6ir-), f. mid. Sij/o- 
 Hai (in act. sense), pf. iiipaxa, 
 or ibpuKa, pf. pass, iiipafiai or 
 Si/x/Mi, a. Ci<f)8iiv ; for 2 a. elSov, 
 impf. iJipoii', to see. Eng. Pano- 
 rama (ttos, o/)iiw). 
 
 ^P'V'l, -^s. (r(), anger. 
 
 6pyiX,o\i,ai, f. -i(rop.ai, Att. -loDjUat, 
 § 120, 3, a, ihprylaBiiv, to make 
 angry ; pass, to grow angry. 
 
 SpGios, -la, -lov, ste/). 
 
 6p6ds, -i5, -o", straight. 
 
 fpSms, adv. 7'ii;A*. 
 
 6p|l,du, [S>), f. -^(TW, pf. (bpfXTIKa, pf. 
 
 pass. &p/My]p.ai, to put in motion, to 
 rush ; mid. to S' < forth. 
 
 'OpovTas, -a, (6), Orontes. 
 
 iipos, -eos, (to), o mountain. 
 
 ipia-a-a, Att. -ttw, f. ipi^w, a. Sipv^a, 
 pf. 6pJ>pvxa (rare), pf. pass. 6/)i6- 
 puyfj.ai, a. (bp6xS7}v, to dig. 
 
 8s, <i, 8, w/io, U)A/c/i, t«^a( ; kolI Us, 
 and he ; & riiv.v Solr;, which he should 
 give US, % 232, 4. 
 
 Siros, -V) ■'"'> of size, as great as ; of 
 time, as long as; of space, as far 
 as; of number, as many as; its 
 antecedent is rdcros, after which it 
 
 is rendered as = Lat. quajitus ; 
 Sjip, with ,comp. followed by an- 
 other coiup. with Tojoirip, the more, 
 so much the more. 
 
 8<rir6p, <l'ir«p, 8ir«p, the very person 
 who, or thing which ; who, which, 
 
 otrriov, Att. conti-. cSittoOc, -o5, (t4), 
 a bone. (§ 43.) * 
 
 So-Tis, iJTtS, 8 Ti, u-hoever, who, which- 
 ever, wluitever. In indirect ques- 
 tions, who, what. 
 
 irav — iTe dv, wlunevcr. 
 
 8t€, conj. when, since. 
 
 8x1, conj. that, Latin quod, § 216 ; 
 because, § 250 ; that, in quoting 
 another's words, § 241, 2; w. a 
 sup. intens. like Lat. quam; Sri 
 iirapacTKevbraTOV, as unprepared as 
 possible. 
 
 ov, adv. where, gen. of 8s. 
 
 oil, adv. ( before a vowel with smooth 
 breathhig, oi)k ; before an aspirate, 
 oix) not, § 283. 
 
 oB, adv. of place, where. 
 
 ov, pers. pron. See § 79, 1. 
 
 ovSafiov, adv. nowlwre. 
 
 ovZi {oO, S^), nor, not even. 
 
 ovSeCs, oiScfila, ovS.'v, no one ; neut. 
 nothing. 
 
 oiZiira, not yet. 
 
 o4k, adv. not ; see o4. 
 
 oiK^Ti, adv. no longer, § 283. 
 
 oiv, conj. therefore, then, at any rate. 
 
 oiinoi, adv. not yet ; Sri oHwoj 5// ttoX- 
 Tiov -xfi^^ovToirov ijdiovi oiftp itrcri- 
 Xot, (lit. , not yet up to the present 
 time) that not far u lonjg time 
 had he met with sweeter wine than 
 this. 
 
 ovpavos, -ou, (o), heaven, the .'iky. 
 
 ofire, adv. and not, nor ; neither. 
 
 ovTos, oiin], toSto, this. 
 
 ovTUS, adv. of oStos, commonly oih-a 
 
0.x 
 
 32 
 
 iropaficiiros 
 
 before a consonant, in tliia manner, 
 thus, so. 
 
 oix, not ; see oi. 
 
 6^d\a (§ 108, i, II. ), f. d^eiX^o-w, 
 a. (i^elXr/aa, (pf. (i^efXijica !), 2 a. 
 &<t>eXov, impf. &<p€t\ov, to owe, to be 
 indebted ;, in pass, to be due ; in 
 wishes, imuld that, § 251, 2, N. 1. 
 (i)0e\ov, / oa^At .... of what one 
 has not done, hence it conies to 
 
 express a wish that a thing had 
 
 happened which has not ; &<pi\e 
 
 .... iqv, would that Cyrus ivere 
 
 alive, p. 74, 8. 
 a(j>6aX|Ji6s, -oO, (6), an eye. Cf. Eng. 
 
 Ophthalmy. 
 g^vpcSs, -i, -bp, rugged, strong (easUy 
 
 held). 
 {ii|fis, -eas, (4), a sight, seeing. Cf. 
 
 Eng. Optics. See opdu. 
 
 n. 
 
 vdSos, -eos, (to), suffering, misfortune. 
 
 TTOlOvtJtt), f. -1(T10, Att. -iw, § 120, 3, 
 cl. 4, to c/ion< o pcran. Eng. P^AN. 
 
 irai8Ei6u (Trats), f. -trw, a. ^irafSeuffa, 
 pf. weiralSevKa, to bring up a child, 
 to educate; mid. (sometimes) to 
 cause to be educated. 
 
 irais, iraiBos, (4 or 4), gen. dual'Tral- 
 Soif, gen. pi. raiSuv, § 25, 3, N., 
 boy, child. Eng. Pedagogue (irais, 
 S,yiii). 
 
 iralw, f. Tratffu (-■^iru), ii. liraicra, 
 pf. -iriirauia, a. jiass. i7rah6r,v, to 
 strike, to strike a peraon, to strike ft 
 weapon against a person, to wwind. 
 
 iroXai, adv. long ago. Eng. Pale 
 OGUAPHY (jrdXai, 7pd0u). 
 
 iraXaids, -<i, -ii", old, aged ; of things, 
 ancient, venerable, also obsolete ; rb 
 troKaibv, adv. anciently ; reg. comp. 
 and sup. TraXoiirepos, -iroros ; 
 more often TroXalrepos, TraKalraros, 
 formed from the adv. iriXai. 
 
 irdXiv, adv. back, backwards ; of time, 
 again, once more. Eng. Palimp- 
 sest {TdXiV, \pTiv, to rah). 
 
 vaXXaxCs, -iSos, (^), a concubine. 
 
 itoXtov, -oO, (t4), a dart, javelin. 
 
 7rovT(iiro<ri, before a vowel -inv, adv. 
 
 irAvTD, adv. everywhere, on all sides. 
 
 TravToSairos, -4 -bv, 'of every kind ; 
 adv. -TTus, in aU kinds of ways. 
 
 irdvToflev, adv. from every side. 
 
 irdvv, adv. very, wholly. 
 
 irapd, prep., radical sense, beside; w. 
 gen. from beside, from, of persons 
 and places ; w. dat. at the side of, 
 near, of places, things, and per- 
 sons ; w. ace. of place, running 
 ntnng, beside; of motion to, to, 
 towards, of persons ; of time, 
 during, irapb. rbv irbXefwv, during 
 the war ; denoting opposition, con- 
 trary to, trapb, rds (nrOvSds, contrary 
 10 the treaty. In numerous com- 
 pounds, as Paragraph. 
 
 irapaPalvoi (Trapd, Palva), to trans- 
 gress, to violate. 
 
 irapaYY-^u (irapi., iyyiWia, which 
 see), to pass an nnnouncement from 
 one to another ; as a military term, 
 to give the watchword which was 
 passed from man to man ; to send 
 orders, w. dat. and infln. 1, 2, 1 ; 
 w. dat. to command, 1, 8, 3. 
 
 irapayC'Yvoiiai (irapd, ylyvo/iai), to be 
 present, to come. 
 
 n'apdScuros, -ov, [b), a park. Eng. 
 Fakadisb. 
 
TapaS>Su|xi 
 
 33 
 
 iriSCov 
 
 iropoSCSuiii {irapd, dlSu/u, which 
 see), todeliver up, to give over, give mtt. 
 
 irapaKoX^u [Trapd, KaK^u), to call to 
 one's self, summon, exhort, encourage. 
 
 irapaKeXcvo|j,ai (Trapd, KeKeiw, f. 
 -etfffu), to exhort, to urge. 
 
 irapaXafipdvu (Trapd, Xa/t/Sdvu), to 
 take from another, succeed to. 
 
 ^apa|i,Eipo)i.ai (d/^ei/3a/Mi, f. 7iiid. 
 d/xei^o/wti, a. ijiji£t\pa), to change a 
 little; to leave on one side, lo pas'! 
 by, hence lo excel ; mid. to pass try, 
 1. 10, 10. 
 
 irapa|>.T|p£8i.os, -ov, adj. over the thighs. 
 In neut. plur. subst, armor fur the 
 thighs. 
 
 irapairX^u {irapd, vXia), to sail bg or 
 alongside of 
 
 irapa<ra'Y7T)s, -ov, {ri), a parasang = 
 about 3^ piles. 
 
 irapacTKeud^u (<riceudfa>, f. -diru, &c. j, 
 to prepare. 
 
 n-apao-Kcu^, -^s, {t)), preparation. 
 
 irapardTTci) (Trapd, rdTTw), to post 
 beside others, especially in order of 
 battle; mid. to draw up in battle 
 array. 
 
 irapaT(6r)|u (Trapd, rWtipA,, which 
 see), to place beside, io provide, sup- 
 ply, p. 74, i; mid. to place by one's 
 own side, to gommit to one's chaige. 
 
 TapcYY"^") ('^)> ^- ■')''■"> '" ?•"* '^^ 
 , word of command. 
 
 irdpu|i.i (irapd, cip/), to be by or pres- 
 ent, lo arrive ; Kip(p wapTJcrav, (they) 
 arrived for Cyrus, p. 19, 4, § 187. 
 
 ^apeXavvw (irapd, iXaOvoi), to march 
 by, lo ride by. 
 
 irap^p\op.ai (irapd, Ipxo/mi), to go by, 
 pass by or along. 
 
 irapi\<a [Trapd, ?X'")> '" "ff^' '"> /"''- 
 nish ; wpdypuiTa irap^eiv, to give 
 trouble. 
 
 irap(T||ii. (Trapa, 1't;/u), to let drop at 
 the side, to let pass, lo allow. 
 
 irdpoSos, -ov, (^), a way, passage, pass. 
 
 Ilappdo-ios, -ov, (6), a Parrhasian. 
 
 IlapvcraTis, -i5os, (^), Parysdtis. 
 
 irds, irdira, irdv (§ 67), all, the whole, 
 every; gen. pi. raasc. and neut. 
 irdvTuif, feni. iratrwv, dat. pi. masc. 
 and neut. Tracri, § 25, 3, N. ; for 
 the position see § 142, 4, N. 1. 
 = Lat. oninis j TrdpTwj' iraWa Kpd- 
 TLffTos ivop-l^ero, he was considered 
 the best of all in all things. Eng. 
 Pantheist (ttSs, 6e6s). 
 
 TLaa-lMv, -oims, (6), Pasion. 
 
 irdo^M, f. mid. trelaopai., 2 pf. ir^- 
 TTOvflo, 2 a. iiraOov, to suffer, = Lat. 
 patior, Eng. Passion ; eS or Ka- 
 kQs wdcrxct", to be well or ill treutid, 
 § 165, N. 1 ; dvd* tbv ed ^TraQov vn 
 iKcLmv, in return for those things in 
 which I have been well treated by him. 
 
 IlaTa^vas, -ov, (6), Patagyas. 
 
 iroT^p, iraxpc's, 16), a father. Lat. 
 pater, Eng. Patkunai,. 
 
 irdTpios, -a, -ov, belonging to a father, 
 paternal ; hereditary. 
 
 irarpts, -ISot, (t,), fatherland, native 
 land. 
 
 irarpuos, --fa, -^v, also -os, -ov, 
 coming or inherited from a fathtr. 
 
 Tavu, f. Trai)irw, a. iiravaa, pf. ir^- 
 TrauKa, pf. pass. T^iravfiai, a. pass. 
 iwaiiBijv or iTraiaBrpi, to cause to 
 cease ; mid. to cease, to stop. 
 
 na<f>\a7(iv, -ocos, (o), a Paphlago- 
 nian. 
 
 iroxxls, -eta, -i, thick, large, stout; 
 comp. irdffffuv, also iraxi-'^v, -ov, 
 gen. -OKO! ; sup. ttox'^ttos ; later 
 the reg. iraxiirepos, Traxi^aros. 
 
 Tt&iov, -OV, (t6), plain, ground. Lat. 
 pes, Eng. Pedestrian. 
 
Ci5s 
 
 34 
 
 vepiop&a 
 
 irejos, -li, -6v, on foot ; in plural, foot 
 soldiers, sometimes land soldiers. 
 
 irelitaj f. ire/cw, a. ^Trcttro, pf. tt^- 
 ireiKO, pf. pass. iriireurfMi, (§ 113, 
 N. 4), a. ixelffBijii, to persuade; 
 pass, to be persuaded ; mid. to per- 
 suade- one's self, to comply, obey; 
 2 pf. TrdiroiSa, intrans. / trust. 
 
 ir^ivdo), (ti), -ijiTM, a. iirelvqaa, pf. 
 TTCTrelyiiKa (§ 123, N. 2), <o ie 
 hungry ; w. gen. <o hunger after, 
 
 •iRtpo, -as, (^), iriaZ, attempt. 
 
 ircipacD, (u>), generally veipdo/iai, 
 (tw/«tt), f. mid. TreipdtrofjLat, a. mid. 
 iireipaffAfiTiv, pf. TreireipafjuiL, to at- 
 tempt, endeavor ; w. gen. of person, 
 <o moAre (Wo/ tyj to try to persuade. 
 
 irsKrrlos, -a, -ov, to be obeyed, to be 
 persuaded. 
 
 HeXoirovv^jcrios, -a, -ov, Peloponne- 
 sian ; as a subst. a Peloponnesian . 
 
 IIeXo'n'6vvi[]o'os, -ov, (17), Pelopon- 
 nesus, the peninsula foiming the 
 southern part of Greece, now the 
 Morea. (TUXoirot vijffos, the island 
 ofPelops.) 
 
 IWixai, -wi>, (al), Peltce. 
 
 TreXTairHjs, -ov, (6), one who bears a 
 light shield (itAti;), a targeteer. 
 
 ireVTacTTiKos, -i), -6v, belonging to a 
 peltast ; ri tre\TaaTiKjv, the bat- 
 talion of targeteers 
 
 it^Xtji, -ris, {ij), tt small light shield 
 without a rim, a shaft, u, pole, 1, 10, 
 12 ; a target, a spear. 
 
 ir^Jiirw, f. -foi, a. -rj/a, pf. iriirojujia, 
 pf. pass. ir^Tep.fmi, a. pass. ' e7r^/i- 
 <P8tiv, to send, to send auxiy ; of 
 missiles, to shoot ; mid. riiiweaSal 
 Tiva, to send for one. 
 
 ir^vus, -ijTos, ( 6), a day-laborer, a poor 
 man; as adj. poor, w. gen.; comp. 
 ^irtviaTepot, sup. -^o-totos. 
 
 ir€VTaK(5iricK, -at, -a, five hundred. 
 
 irivTf, indeclinable, five. 
 
 TEvreKaCSeKa, indeclinable, fifteen. 
 
 irevT^KOVTO, indeclinable, fifty. 
 
 ir^TTOiv, -ov, gen. -ovos, of fruit, ripe ; 
 also soft, tender, gentle ; comp. re- 
 Tahepos, sup. TreiralTaTOS. 
 
 irip, enclit. particle adding to the 
 force of the word to which it is 
 annexed. 
 
 irept, prep., radical sense, all around, 
 about ; w. gen. of place, about, con- 
 cerning, aliove ; irepl irXeiffTov or 
 Tepi Troyras 7roie:crflai, to consider 
 (lit. to make) (a thing) of the high- 
 est importance ; w. dat. of place, 
 around, near, of an object of which 
 one is contending, fur; w. ace. 
 around; of place, around; of per- 
 sons, around; ol irept Ttva, those 
 around any one, the attendants; of 
 time, about. 
 
 irepiayY^XXco {repl, d77A\u)^, to an- 
 nounce by a messaije; w. dat. and 
 iniin. to send round orders for people 
 to do something, to summon. 
 
 ircpidYu (Trepi, Hyu), to lead around, 
 to lead about with one. 
 
 icepi^C-yvoiiiu [ir^pi, ylyvo/Mai), to be 
 superior, to conquer. 
 
 n'EpCcip (Trepi, el/il), (i» be superior, to 
 surpass; ri ttj ^Tri/ieXei'g Tre^ie.Vai 
 T^v ^l\av Koi T.J) Trpoffv/if'Krdai. 
 XOjoifefffloi, raOra lp,oiye luSXXov 
 Sojcei iya(TTa elvai, that he should 
 surpass his friends in kind attentions, 
 and in an anxious desire to obliu'; 
 this seems to me more worthy (f ad- 
 miration, p. 52, 6. 
 
 irepieppeiTo, see irepipp^w. 
 
 ir{pUx<ii (irepl, lx'^)> '" encompass, 
 
 irtpiop&a (wepi, Spia), to look around 
 for, to overlook, to disregard; mid. 
 
irepiitltira 
 
 3S 
 
 v\fy> 
 
 to look about before doing a thing, 
 to be circumspect, delay. 
 
 TrepLirCiTTO) {irepl, wIttu), to fail upon 
 and embrace. 
 
 irtpiirKitD {repl, irXfia), to sail around. 
 
 vepiirriirara, f. -Ju, to fold around. 
 
 (Tcpipp^u (Trepf, piw, f. peiffofuti, pf. 
 ippiitKa, 2 a,, pass, (in act. sense) 
 ippOrjp), to Jlow around; pass, to be 
 surrounded by water ; irepieppelTO 
 alirri iiirh rod Mdinra, it (itself) was 
 surrounded by the Maskaa river, p. 
 54, 6. 
 
 II^po-T|s, -01/, (6), Persian. 
 
 Hcpo'iKds, -4 -l>v, a Persian. 
 
 ir^rpa, -as, (^), a roc&; pi. ir^rpat, 
 (ai), masses of rock. 
 
 vfi, enclitic particle ; of manner, in 
 some way, somehow; of space, by 
 someway; of numbers, about; ttI), 
 inten'og. -particle ; of manner, 
 how ? of space, which way ? 
 
 ir'r\yf\, -TJs, (rj), a spring; in pi. the 
 springs or sources of rivers. 
 
 TrriXds, -oD, (6), mud. 
 
 iriixiis, -ews, (6), the fore-arm, a cahit, 
 about 18 inches. 
 
 n£7pT)S, -TITOS, (6), Pigres, a Carian. 
 
 irUju), f. -i<ru, a. iirUaa, pf. pass. 
 TrewUff/iai, cl. 4, § 108, to press, to 
 be oppressed. 
 
 n-CiiirXTifii, f. ttXtJo^u, pf. iriTXi^Ka, a. 
 lirXriaa, a. mid. iTr\7i<rap.riv, pf. 
 pass. viwKiiir^iai, a. irrXijaBTfi, to 
 fill, w. ace. and gen.; w. aco. of 
 person, fo J?// y«S, to satisfy. 
 
 iriv^, f. Trio/juit, pf. ir^TbJKa, 2 a. 
 fiTiov, a. pass. ^irhQ'qv, pf. Tr^opuii, 
 to drink, = Lat. poto, Eng. Poison, 
 Potation. 
 
 irtiTTO) (§ 108, 8), f. mid. TretroO/iai, 
 ] {. vrirTUKa, 2 a. iTrecrov, to fall, to 
 fall down. 
 
 IIurC8i]s, -ov, (6), o Pisidian; Pi- 
 
 sidia was a province in Asia Minor. 
 irioTcvco, f. -eijat^, to trust. 
 irtims, -ews, (^), faith, a pledge 
 iricTTiis, -■^, -if, of persons, faithful, 
 
 trusty; of things, trustworthy, sure ; 
 
 as subst. pledge ; Trurrbv or irurrii, 
 
 BovvaL Kal Xa^elv, to give and receive 
 
 pledges ; (ra) irtaTi., pledges. 
 irwTTiSTTjs, -'Tos, (ii), fidtlity. 
 irXaYios, -ia, -iov, oblique ; ets ir\&^ 
 
 yiop, sideways. 
 irXaLcriov, -ou, ( ru), square; iv TrKo.iffitp 
 
 irXifipeL, in a solid square. 
 irXavcu>p.ai, (-u/ioi), f. -i/icrofuu, pf. 
 
 TTcirXdiniiiai, to wander. Eng. 
 
 Planet. 
 irXduro-u, Att. tXAttio, f. irXaina, pf. 
 
 TT^TrXoxa, pf. pass. iriirXcurfiai, to 
 
 form, fabricate. 
 irX^Opov, -ov, (t6), a plethron, being 
 
 100 Greek feet, or 101 English 
 
 feet. 
 irX«£ii)V Or irXIciiv, more, and fXetaroi, 
 
 most, comp. and sup. of iroXis. 
 trXiKa (§ 109, 3), f. jrX^fu, a. IrXe^a,, 
 
 pf. 7r^7rXe;ta or ir^Xoxa, a. jtass. 
 
 iirXix6riv, 2 a. irXdicr/v, pf. nriirXey- 
 
 luu, to weave, plan, construct. 
 irXevpd, -Ss, (^), m'rfe, flank. 
 irUu (§ 123, N. 1), f. mid. TrXeiao- 
 
 fiai or 7rXeu(roC/«ti, b. lirXevaa, pf. 
 
 jr^TrXeuKa, a. pass. iirXeiaBTiv, pf. 
 
 TT^TrXei/ff^ai, to smV. 
 ttXtiy^, -^s, (^), a Wou). , 
 
 irXiiflos, -COS, (r4), ful.:sss, multitude ; 
 
 length of time. Eng. Plethora. 
 irX^BcD, pf. wiTtXriBa, to be or become 
 
 fvdl; of rivers, to be fidl, to rise. 
 
 From the root which appears in 
 
 Lat. pleo, Eng. Plenty. 
 irKifv, prep. w. gen. except; adv. be- 
 sides, unless, save, save thai ; ttXtiv, 
 
ir\^pi]$ 
 
 36 
 
 ' iropcvw 
 
 oJ Ta KaviiKela lx'"^^h lit- except 
 those hailing inns, i. e. the innkeepers. 
 
 irX'fipTis, -«, M, § 172, 1. 
 
 irXi|(rl6s, -a, -on, near; as siibst. (6) 
 ir\7;<rios, o neighbor ; adv. irXijcrloi', 
 near, hard by ; comp. irXijinolTepos, 
 sup. TrXijCidiTaros, also TrXT/tri^trre- 
 /)0S, -^(TraTOS. 
 
 irX'/jcra-m, Att. -ttw, f. irXiJIcs, pf. 
 ir^7r\i77a (rare), 2 a. pass. ^irX^i)!', 
 but in composition iTMyTiv, pf. 
 TrivXify/uit, to strike. Lat. plagg,. 
 
 irXCvOos, -ou, (^), a brick; irXlvBoi 
 drral, baked bricks; ttXIvSos nepa- 
 IJ.la, burnt brick. 
 
 irXoiov, -ov, (rb), a vessel. 
 
 irXdos, contr. ttXoOs, -oO, (o), a sailing, 
 a voyage. 
 
 itKoxnia (Co), f. ijira, to be rich; w. 
 gen. to be rich, to abound in a 
 thing. 
 
 xXowTos, -ov, (6), riches, wealth. 
 
 iroS^pT]S, -es, reaching to the feet. 
 
 iroUu, (u), f. -i)o-|U, to make, to ap- 
 point, to do, to bring to pass, to cause ; 
 TOieiv eS or KaKCs, to treat well or 
 ill, § 165, N. l, = Lat. facio, Eng. 
 Poet ; /cat 7roi^ireiei» .... 5to77ei- 
 Xoi, and he would cause that they 
 would never be able ... that thfa/ 
 had seen the army of Cyrus, p. 63, 
 12. 
 
 iroirjT&s, -a, -ov, verbal adj. to be 
 done; neut. ttoii/t^oi', one must 
 make or do, § 281. 
 
 iroiKlXos, -v, -ov, many-colored. 
 
 iroiji'^v, -^ms, (6), a sheplifrd ; voiix^v 
 Xauv, a shepherd of the people, i. e. 
 a pince or chief. 
 
 irolos, TToto, irotov, interiog. adj. of 
 what sort ? 
 
 voKt\Uii>, (a), {. --/lira, a. pass, ^iro- 
 Xe/iTJfliji', to wage war; w. aco. to 
 
 make war upon or against, also used 
 with irpos and ^ttL w. aoc. against. 
 
 vo\i]i.io9, ~la, -lov, hostile ; sxibst. an 
 enemy ; oi iroXi/uoi, the enemy. 
 Eng. Polemic. 
 
 ir(SXE|ios, -ov, (6), war. 
 
 ToXiopKEO), (u), f. -■^a, a. -rjira, to 
 hem in a city, to besiege. 
 
 irdXis, -e«s, (rj), a city, at Athens 
 the fortress of the city, used either 
 of the place or its inhabitants or 
 both ; when xiiXis and Aarv are 
 joined, the former is the body of 
 citizens ; the latter, their dwellings. 
 
 iroX^TTiS, -ov, (6), a citizen. 
 
 iroXXaKis, adv. often. 
 
 ToXvpLaS^S, -4s, having much learning , 
 adv. -Suis, in a very learned way. 
 
 iroXiis, iroXX^, iroXi (§ 70), of num- 
 bers, many; opposed to 6Xlyo%, 
 few ; of the value of a tiling, much ; 
 TToXXoB &^ios, worth much ; of space, 
 large, far, wide ; iroWTiS Kal Aya- 
 flij! otiriis, being veiy large and fer- 
 tile, p. 71, 25 ; oi TToWol, the many, 
 majority ; as adv. in neut. sing, 
 and pi. TToXi, iroXXd, much, or many 
 times ; iirl iroXii, a great distance, or 
 of wide extent ; w. comp. and sup. 
 intens. ttoXJ BS.ttov, far iiuicker ; 
 comp. irXeluv, Att. irXiaii, sup. 
 TrXcfffTos. Poly- ip compounds, 
 as Polygon. 
 
 iroXuTsX'^s, -h, expensive. 
 
 iroVT|p<Ss, -A, -i", {irov^w), causing 
 pain, painful ; of things, bad, use- 
 less ; in a moral sense, bad, worth- 
 less, wicked. 
 
 Tcofiia, f. -eia-iii, comm. dep. paas. 
 iropeOofiat, f. iro/jei5o'o/Mtt, pf. pass. 
 Treirlipevimi., a pass. ivopeiBriv, to 
 bring, to carry; pass, and mid. to 
 be carried, or to carry one's self, to go. 
 
iropltfi) 
 
 37 
 
 n'poSii|io& 
 
 to march, to proceed; iropeietrBai 
 
 &va, to proceed up (to the interior) ; 
 
 ei Si} TTOre Tropeioiro, if at any time, 
 
 whenever he should go out, p. 63, 4, 
 
 From the same root {irop-) with 
 
 7r6po5, passage, 
 iTopCjffl, f. -laoi, Att. -ifi (§ 120, 2), 
 
 [I. iir!ipi.<Ta, pf. pass. Teir6puT/mi, to 
 
 furnish, to procure. 
 irSppa, farther, far ; comp. -uripu, 
 
 sup. -urd,T(jj, 
 irop<|>vp£as, contr. -poSs, -pa, -povv, 
 
 pwrple. Eng. Pokphyey. 
 irda-os, -71, -ov, interrog. adj. how 
 
 great ? hew much ? iroiris, -4 -o;/, 
 
 indef. adj. of any size or number. 
 iroTa|J.os, -oO, (6), a riiier. Eng. 
 
 Hippopotamus (jroro^u-is, iinros). 
 iroTc, enclitic, oncfi, euer. 
 iroTepos, -^/)a, -£/3oc, wAicA o/'(Ae tioo? 
 
 whetUer, = Lat. uter. 
 TTOTiJV, -oO, (ri), drink. Same root 
 
 as Lat. potio, Eng. Potatio.n. 
 iroi, enclitic, somewhere; iji' iron, if 
 
 anywhere ; ttoO, interrog. adv. 
 
 whtre ? \v. gen. ttoC 77)5, where, in 
 
 what part of the world? 
 irovs, iroSds, (0), dat. pi. iroal, Lat. 
 
 pes, afoot. 
 n'paYjxa, -ttT-os, (t4), a Mj'nji c/une, a 
 
 deed; plnr. affairs, difficulties. 
 irpav^s, -^s, steep, 
 irpaos, irpaeta, irpaov (§ 70, Note), 
 
 lame, gentle; comp. irpa&repos or 
 
 irpajrepos. 
 irpa^is, -ews, (v)t doing, action, deed, 
 
 exploit. Eng. Practical. 
 Trpa<ro-a>, Att. Trpdrrtt}, f. irpd^w, a. 
 
 lirpa^a, pf. Triwpaxa (ti'ans. 7 Aai'e 
 
 (/one), and iriirpaya (iutrans. / 
 
 hare fared), pf. pass. iriTrpaypAu, 
 
 to do, to perform ; e5 Trpdrreiv, to be 
 fortunate; § 165, N. 2. 
 
 vp^iru, f. Tpixf/u, a. hrpe^a, to be 
 like ; impers. wpiirei, it is becoming, 
 w. dat. of person; iuipf. lirpeTre. 
 
 irpia-pvi, -uo! and -ews, (6), an old 
 man; an elder; then since the 
 elders were preferred iu power, oi 
 irp^ff^eis, elders, chiefs; ambassador; 
 as from an adj. come the" degrees 
 of comparisou, comp. irpecr/Siirepos, 
 sup. TTpetr^iiTaTos. Eng. Pkes- 
 BYTER. 
 
 irpCa<r6ai, 2 a. infin. of liviofiat ; 2 a. 
 indie. iTrpi6.p.T)v. 
 
 irpCv, adv. before, before that, until, 
 followed sometimes by indie, 
 § 241 ; the iufin., § 274 ; some- 
 times by subj. or optative, g 239. 
 Cf. Lat. prius, Eng. Pristine. 
 
 irpii, prep. w. gen. only, of place, 
 before, in front of; of time, before 
 (opp. to p-eri, afler) ; of persons, 
 going b(fore another ; in fronl^ of, 
 so as to defend. 
 
 irpoai.(r0.1vcp,ai. (irpb, ala8dvop,ai), to 
 observe beforehand ; irpoaurBjpievos 
 Tj. airj. Tavra (riviis) ^ouXeuO/U^- 
 cous, ubsercing beforehand (certain 
 pei'bo:)s) jilotting these snme things. 
 
 TpopdXXu (Trpi, jSdXXoj), to cast for- 
 ward ; with TO, faXa, to present. 
 
 irpo8i8<op.i {irp6, SiSufu), to give be< 
 forehand, to abandon, to betray. 
 
 irpdeip.i (Trpi, el/ii), to advance, to go 
 biforc. 
 
 •npoii-irov (irpb, ehrov), to say before- 
 hand, to announce. 
 
 irpoeXavvtt) (trpb, Aotfcw), to drire for- 
 ward, to advance. 
 
 irpoOv|i.^OjjLai {oupLai), i,6vjx4opja,i, f. 
 -ifffo.uai, &c.) to he very desirous. 
 
 irpoOvfiUi., -as, (^), zeal. 
 
 Tpd8ii;jios, -on, ready, willing, eager; 
 w. gen. eager far. 
 
irpo6tf|i.us 
 
 ^ 
 
 irpoinroi&|tai 
 
 trpo9i\uiti, adv. willingly, eagerly ; 
 comp. -brepoVj sup. -in-ara. 
 
 Trpof(rTi)(ii {irpb, hrrjut), trans, in 
 pres., impf., fut. and a., act. and 
 in the mid. , to place before ; iutraus. 
 iu pass, with 2 a., pf., and plupf., 
 act. to stand before ; w. ace. person, 
 to approach ; w. gen. to command. 
 
 irpOKaTa\a)i,pd.v<i> (t/>j, nard, \a/i- 
 jSdj'ar), to seize upon befyrehand, to 
 preoccupy. 
 
 irpoKaraKalcD, Att. -ic6,a {irp6, nurd, 
 Kala), to burn down before, to lay 
 waate. 
 
 "irpoKTiptio"ir<i), Att. -ttu, f. -fj, to 
 proclaim by herald, to proclaim pub- 
 licly. 
 
 irpo(»eToiir£8iov, -ov, [ri), a covering 
 for the forehead, a fronil-el. 
 
 npii^evosi -ov, (6), Proxenus, one of 
 ■ the Greek generals. 
 
 irpoopdcii, (uj), {Trp!i, opdw), to see 
 before. 
 
 wpos, prep. w. gen., dat., or ace, 
 radical sense, in the presence of; 
 w. gen. implying motion from a 
 place ; w. dat. abiding at a place ; 
 w. ace. motion to a place ; w. gen., 
 after pass, verbs, as agent, by 
 {} 197, 1, N. 1); rpii Bedv, in 
 presence of gods ; irpbs tov "Kipov 
 Tpbwov, in heeinng with the charac- 
 ter of Cyrus ; in a hostile sense, 
 against ; irpbs airbv, 1, 1, 8 ; ace. 
 to, in respect to, against. 
 
 TTftoa'a.ya {irpbs, &y(tj), to lead against. 
 
 irpoa-aiTcu, (u), (jrp6s, alriu), to ask 
 in addition. 
 
 iFpoo-SlSoifu (TTpiSs, dlSupu), to giee in 
 addition, 
 
 irpd(rap.i (irpis, el/it), to be at or near 
 at hand, to be present. 
 
 Tpd(r£i|ii {irpbs, cl;«0> '" 3° '" '"' '"" 
 wards; Irvxe irpoffiiliv, happened to 
 be approaching; S^Xos ^v irpofftibv, 
 it was evident that he was advancing. 
 
 irpociiiaiva {irpbs, iXaOi/ttr), to inarch 
 to. 
 
 irpoo-Epxofiai {irpbs, (pxofmi), to 
 coine to. 
 
 irpoc^Xcii {vpbs, lx'')t '" ^'^ '"• 
 
 irpoiHJKai {irpbs, ^(cw), to come to. 
 
 irpdirOev, adv. bifore; irpbcrSev .... 
 irph, until; els rb irpbaBev, forward ; 
 rb irpiiaBev, before, 1, 10, 10, and 
 11 ; els rb irpbadev olxovrai. StibKov- 
 res, have gone (§ 200, N. 3) forward 
 in pursuit, p. 69, 5. 
 
 irpo<r£T;(ji.i {irpbs, ii]fu), to send to, to 
 suffi-r to come to ; mid. to suffer to 
 approach, to admit ; w. iniiu. to un- 
 dertake to do. 
 
 '7rpo<r».a\l(D, (ui), (irpbs, KolKia), to 
 call to. 
 
 TrpocKwiu {kvv4w), {Giy, f. -i/jata, a. 
 -rjiTa, to prostrate one's self before, 
 to worship, to salute, 1, 8. 21 ; otirep 
 irpbadev jrpoiTeKOvovv, Kal rbre irpo- 
 (reKivTfaav, Kaiirep eiSbres, who had 
 formerly been used to salute him, even 
 then ihi'y saluted him, although know- 
 ing. § 277, 6, N. 1 (end), p. 
 42, 7. 
 
 irpoo-Xap-Pdvcii {wpos, Xafi^tivtii), to 
 take to to lake hold (to help), tn lay 
 hand to the work; dpu airbs irpoir- 
 eXdfi^avev els rhv irijikbv ifi^aXvwv, 
 at the same time he himself descending 
 into the mud laid his hand to the 
 work, p. 61, 10. 
 
 irpdtroSos, -ov, {ij), a way to; revenue. 
 
 irpa(ritoi^a|iai., (oS/tai), {''rpos, iroi4u), 
 to pretend; eTs Si 5i) eive, irpo<r- 
 iroioiifievos ffTeOdeiv, but then one of 
 
irpoinroXc|i^iij 
 
 33 
 
 piiTTia 
 
 these said, pretending to be in haste, 
 
 p. 5i, Ex. 11. 
 irpo(nroX€|i^cii, [u), {irpos, woXefiioj), 
 
 to wage war against. 
 irpoo-rdo-cru, Att. -ttw (irpos, rdrruj), 
 
 to enjoin upon, or to give orders, to 
 
 order to do; dWi, n^v et tIs yi ti. 
 
 (reiev, hjit farther if any one served 
 him well when he commanded any- 
 thing (to be done), p. 61, 15. 
 
 irpooTepvCSiov, -ov, (to), (irpd, arip- 
 vov), a breastplate, 
 
 ■irpo(rTi6r||ii (irpos, rlBrj/u), to put to, 
 add, to bestow upon ; in a bad sense, 
 to iiiflirt ; mid. to place one's self to, 
 to agree to. 
 
 irpdo-w, adv. of time, forward; of 
 sfiaee, forward, onward; Uvai toO 
 irpoow, part. gen. lit., to go (a step) 
 of tlie wag forward, farther ; comp. 
 'tar^pw, sup. -WTdrw. 
 
 ^poTcpaios, -aia, -aiov, former; r^ 
 irpoT€pa,i.q,, sc. i];ji^pt}, on the dag 
 before. 
 
 irpoTcpos, -^po, -epov, of time, sooner ; 
 of place, before; w. gen. before; 
 irpOTepa Kdpov ir^vre ij/jiipaiv, Jive 
 dags before or earlier than Cyrus; 
 comp. without any positive use 
 (sup. TpuTos), like Lat. prior; 
 adv. Tporepov, before, 
 
 wporpi\(a {irpo, Tp4xu), to run before. 
 
 irpo<f>alv(i) {Trpo, ^atva), to show be- 
 fore; mid. to appear before, to ap- 
 pear in the distance. 
 '7rpo({>a(ris, -ews, (^), a pretext; tt/jo- 
 
 tjiaffiv TTOLUffdaL, to make a pretence, 
 
 1, 2, 1. 
 irpuTOV, adv. first, at first; rb irpw- 
 
 Tov, at first. 
 irpuTos, -1?, -ov, first ; irpwrov, as 
 
 adv. in the Jirst place, first ; sup. of 
 
 ir,.6 ; comp. irporepos. 
 irrepov, -ov, (tS), a feather, mostly in 
 
 f)\. feathers; wings. 
 trripv^, -vyos, {i)), a wing. 
 ■iri\r\, -lis, {ti), comm. plur. (ai) 
 
 viXai, a gate, a pass, an entrance, 
 iniv6dvop.ai, f. mid. ircico/uu, pf. 
 
 ir^irvaiiaL, 2 n. iirvdofiTiv, to learn, 
 
 to inquire. 
 inipds, -ov, (6), (from Tvp, fire, on 
 
 account of its color when ripe), 
 
 wheat ; pi. grain. 
 irci, up to the present time, yet ; oSirw, 
 
 not yet ; oi) irporepov .... iru), never 
 
 before. 
 iriaKia ( j), -^ffu, to sell. 
 irciiroTC, at any time, ever yet ; oiSha 
 
 hv irtbiroTe d0e£XeTo, he never at 
 
 any time took anything (from him), 
 
 p. 56, 18. 
 ircSs, adv. how? 
 x<Ss, enclitic, somehow, in some way, 
 
 in any way. 
 
 p4Sios, -la, -lov, Att. also -ot, -ov, 
 easy ; ready ; comp. pif'^v, sup. 
 p^ffTos. § 73, 9. 
 
 pqSloi, adv. easily, ready; comp. 
 p^ov, sup. p^ffTa. 
 
 ^^v, p^ov, comp. of pfSioi. 
 
 pia, f. mid. peiaopjai, Att. fiv^ffoiuu, 
 a. lopevaa, pf. ippir^Ka, 2 a. p. 
 ipoinv, w. act. sense, to flow, run. 
 
 pCirru, f. pl\j/oi, a. Ippiipa, pf. (ppupa, 
 pf. pass. ?pptp.p.at, a. ippltpGrpf, to 
 cast, to hurl, to cast away. w. ace. ; 
 
^<Sos 
 
 40 
 
 irirdu 
 
 fii^J/atfres Tois 'jrop^vpous KdvSvSf 
 
 having thrown away their purple 
 
 overcoats. 
 ^dos, Att. contr. povi, -oO, (6), a 
 
 stream, current ; /cord t-J;* ^oDv, 
 
 down the stream. 
 pv6|ids, -oC, (6), regular movement or 
 
 time. Eng. Rhythm. 
 
 pii|ibi], -ijs, (t/), W/Z^ strength: gen- 
 erally strength; force; force, i. b. 
 anny. 
 
 pi&vvv|u, f. j>iba(i>, a. ippaaa, pf. pass. 
 Ippapiai, used as pres. a. ippibaBrpi, 
 to strengthen; pass, to 6e streny. 
 
 <rii\iri'Y|, -1770s, (ii), a trumpet. 
 o-aXirCjo), f. (ro\7ri7|u, u.. ^ird\7ri7|o, 
 
 later f. txa\vlau, a. ^o-dXTrtira, to 
 
 sound the trumpet; impers. aaXirl- 
 
 fet, the trumpet sounds. 
 SdpSas, -ew>, (aX), Sardis, capital of 
 
 Lydia. 
 o-OTpairrio), -ei)j-fci, intrans. to be a 
 
 satrap ; trans, to rule as a satrap ; 
 
 w. ace. or gen. 
 croTpdinis, -ov, (6), a satrap, a Per- 
 sian governor of a province. 
 Zdrvpos, -ov, (6), Sutyrus. 
 <ra<ti^s, -is, clear; comp. -^ffTcpos, 
 
 sup. -iffraroi. 
 ira<|>us, adv. clearly; comp. -itrrepov, 
 
 sup. -etTTara. 
 (rT]|ialv<i), f. <ri]p.avui, a. iaiiiiriva. or 
 
 iff'^/Mva (§ 121, N. 1), to show by a 
 
 sign, to signify, p. 72, 4. 
 (rr|p.Etov, -ov, (t!>), signal, mark, a 
 
 standard ; rb ^aalKetov arjixelov, the 
 
 royal standard. 
 <r^(ra|iov, -ov, (t6), sesame. 
 "''■yht 'V^' {v)> silence. 
 <riSr\pos, -ov, {6), iron, steel. 
 SiXavds, -oC, (6), Sildnus. 
 ervriov, -ov, (t6), com ; food, 
 o-Itos, -ov, 6, corn, food. 
 vitmia, (w), f. ■'^ffo/MC, a. iaiiSiwitaa, 
 
 pf. aetridiTTiKa, to be silent; trans. 
 
 to keep silence, to be silent. 
 
 (TKevdJo), f. -dau, a. iiTKeiaffa, pf 
 pass. iffKeiatrpMi, to prepare. 
 
 o-Kcvos, -eos, (ri), the baggage of an 
 army. 
 
 (rKEVoi|>dpos, -ov, carrying baggage; 
 subt. baggage-carrier, sutlers ; ri 
 <rKevo(j>dpa, the beasts of burden. 
 
 <rKT|v^(D, (uj), f. -■^(Tui, to encamp. 
 
 o-KT)V<|, -^s, {it), a tent; in pi. a camp. 
 
 <rKT]irToi)xos, -ov, bearing a staff; as 
 subst. a sceptre-bearer, an officer at 
 the Persian court. 
 
 o-Koir^u, (u), f. -i}(7-u (only used in 
 pres. and iinpf. )," the other tenses, 
 f. CK^foiiai, a. iffKetl/ip,r]v, pf. lir- 
 Kc/ifiat, being supplied by aK^irro- 
 pai, to look at or tifler a thing, to 
 view, to consider, observe. 
 
 (TKoTos, -ov, (6), darkness. 
 
 SK<i6i)5, -ov, (6), a Scythian. 
 
 SdXoi, -uiv, {oVi, Soli, a, city of Ci- 
 licia. Eng. Solecism. 
 
 SoijiaCvETOs, -ov, (6), Sophanitus. 
 
 a-o^la, -as, {ij), vnsdom, skill. 
 
 (ro<|>ds, -1), -6v, wise, clever, skilful.. 
 Same root as Lat. sapiens, Eng. 
 Sage. 
 
 <ro<|)us, adv. wisely, cleverly; comp. 
 -tbrepov, sup. -tirara. 
 
 (nrdu, f. aiT&ira, a. (airaira, pf. (<r- 
 TToxa, pf. pass. l<TTa<rimi, a. ia- 
 iriaBriv, to draw. Eng. Spasm. 
 
inrivia 
 
 41 
 
 (TuXX^YIr) 
 
 tnrivSa, f. a-irelau, a., laweura, pf. 
 ia-weiKO. (§ 101, 3), to pour out a 
 drink-offering; mid. to pour out 
 libations one with another, and since 
 this was the custom of making a 
 treaty, to make a treaty; et ry 
 airdaaiTO, if he (ever) made a treaty 
 with any one. 
 
 cnrevSii), f. •e6<7a, a. iffTrevtra, pf. 
 pass. Sffirevjfmi., to hasten, to be in 
 
 (rrroXas, -dSos, (ii), a leathern corslet. 
 
 o-irovS^i, -ijs, {ii), a libation; pi. 
 ffTTovSai, {at), u treaty or truce; 
 Trapb, ras ffTTOpSds, contrary 'to the 
 treaty. 
 
 o-irovSaioXoY^o), (w), f. -^<rw, to con- 
 verge tamestly with. 
 
 (TirovS^, -),i, {ij], haste. 
 
 CTTaSiov, -ov, (t6), a furlong, a Greek 
 measure of length, (600 Greek 
 feet), = 606J English feet. 
 
 0Ttt6|iiSs, -oO, (6), a station, day's 
 march. Lat. stabulum, Eng. 
 Stable. 
 
 KTriyatrjua, -aros, (to), a covering, u, 
 corering for a tent ; SitftBipas, 4s 
 ei^oj' (rTeyda-/w,Ta, ^irl/iTrXaffax, the 
 tanned shins, which they had as cover- 
 ings (for the tents), which they filled. 
 
 o-T^XXu (§ 96, III., and § 109, 3), 
 f. areXGi, a. ftrretXa, pf. ^ffraX/ca, 
 pf pass. IffToK/uii, 2 a. p. ^ordXTji', 
 to send, equip. 
 
 CTcvos, -ij, -6v, narrow, 
 
 a-Tepioj, (li), irrepiiau, iiTT^priffa, -Ka, 
 to deprive. 
 
 OT^pvov, -ov, {t6) , the breast. 
 
 oT^c|)ovos, -ov, (6), a crown, a vyreath, 
 garland. 
 
 (TTtifios, -^os, {rb), dense company. 
 
 oTXeyyfei -ISos, (ri), Jlesh-scraper, 
 comb. 
 
 <rro\f\, -^s, {ri), robe. 
 
 (TTeSXos, -ov, (6), preparation, military 
 force. 
 
 oTp(iT€D|io, -aros, {t6), an army. 
 
 irrpwreia, f. -eiffia, to make an expe- 
 dition, march; mid. to serve as a 
 soldier, to make an expedition ; i<t> 
 & itTTpareieTO, in those things for 
 which he was making the expedition, 
 p. 66, 20 ; efs, or iirl, nm, against 
 any one; to be engaged in military 
 operations. 
 
 <npaTt\yia, -ijiru, to be a general; w. 
 gen. to command. 
 
 o-rpaTTjYis, -oC, (6), general. Eng. 
 Stbatagem. 
 
 OTpario, -as, {i)), an army 
 
 <rTpaTu4TT)s, -ov, (6), a soldier. 
 
 trrpartytreZeia, -e^aw, to encamp ; to 
 take up a position. 
 
 o-TpoT<iire8ov, -ov, (to), a camp, an 
 encampment. 
 
 CTperrros, -ij, -6v, easily lient, twisted; 
 subst. {&) o-T/jeTTTos, a twisted collar. 
 
 a^pi^a, f. arpi^ui, a. laTpexf/a, pf. 
 larpoipa (§ 109, 1), IffTpa/imh *■ 
 ^jTpi<p8riv (rare), 2 a. p. iarpAtpriv 
 (§ 109, 3), to twist, to turn, to face 
 about. Eng. Catastkophe ( .-aro, 
 
 (TTp^^u). 
 
 SniiK^dXios, -la, -lov, Stymphalian ; 
 
 sabst. a Stymphalian. 
 tri, o-oO (§ 79), thou Lat. tu. 
 oTj-yyC-yvop.ai {(riv, yiyvop.tiL), to be 
 
 viith, to be intimate with. 
 OTjyKoX^ia, JcJ), (o-fo, Ka\iw), to call 
 
 or summon together ;-, mid. to call te 
 
 one's self to invite to a feast. 
 Svlvvccris, -los, (6), Syenpesis, king 
 
 of Cilicia. 
 (ruXXa|t.pdvii> {a-iv, XajujSdvu), to seize, 
 
 arrest, apprehend. Eng. Syllable. 
 OTiXX^^M {iriv, \iya, to gather), f. 
 
(ruXXoyf) 
 
 42 
 
 iri^dYiov 
 
 (TuXX^fu, a. (TvviXe^a, pf. awelXoxa 
 (§ 109, 1), pf. pass. ainidXeyimi, 
 2 a. pass. avveKiyqv, to gather to 
 gether, to collect, assemble. 
 
 OTiXXoY^, -ris, [ti), a gathering; a levy- 
 ing of sddiers. 
 
 o^lipaWoi {(Tiv, pdWia), to bring 
 together^ to contribute ; xp^t-f^'m <rwe- 
 pdWoyro airif, contributed money for 
 him. 
 
 trv^ovK&ia {(r6v, jSouXet^u), to advise, 
 counsel ; mid. to consult together. 
 
 (rv|i.|<.ax^o>, («), f. -ijo-oi, to be an ally, 
 to be in alliance with ; to aid, to help, 
 
 iril|i.)i.a\os, -on, ((Tip, iiAx'i),in alliance 
 with ; ciiipjaxos, (o), an ally, 
 
 (ru)i.|i.C'Yvu|ii (aim, fdym/u), to mingle 
 with, to join. 
 
 (ri)|i.iras, (rviiirao-a, trif,vav {o'iv, 
 ttSs), all together. 
 
 trv^irifiini}, (aiv, TrifjLTU)}, to send 
 with. 
 
 (TvfiiirfirTCi) ((riv, irlirra), to fall to- 
 gether, to grapple with. 
 
 arv|JLir\eais, -lav, [ffiv, ttX^us, ttX^os), 
 filed, w. gen. 
 
 a-upirpdo-iru, Att. -ttw ((riv, vpia- 
 (Toi), to do with another, to help, 
 assist, to cooperate with. 
 
 trlni, prep. w. dat. only, with, in com- 
 pany with, 
 
 trw&ya {aiv, S.yi>i), to bring together. 
 
 o-uvaXXdrTCi) (dXXdTTu, f. -dfu, a. 
 ■fjWa^a, pf. ifKKaxa, 2 a. pass. 
 ilWiyrgi, pf. ijWaynat) ,toreconclle 
 
 o-vvavaPaCvu (in/f, civd, palvui), to go 
 up with. 
 
 o-vvavTcLo), (a), f. -i)(rM, a. -ijxTijffa, 
 to meet, 
 
 (nivdirEi|lu (ffiif, diri, eliu), to depart 
 at the same time. 
 
 mivdirTci) {dirrio, f. fi^u, &o.), to join 
 with; el yip tito dXXiJXois MX'!" 
 
 avviij/ere, for if you join in any con- 
 test with one another, p. 55, Ex. 13. 
 
 (rvvafii (<riv, eliiC), to go with, to ad- 
 vance. 
 
 OTJVtpYos, -i'', helping in work; aubst. 
 assistant. 
 
 (Tuv^cnrojv, see crvinrdM. 
 
 (rvv6T;fLa, -aros, (rb), anything agreed 
 u/ion, a sign, a watchword, 1,8, 16. 
 
 (TiivoSos, -ov, (rj), a coming together; 
 a met ting ; in a hostile sense, a 
 meeting of two armies, an engage- 
 ment, 1, 10, 7. 
 
 trvvoiSa {aiv, olSa,), see § 130. 
 
 orvvrdTro) (<riv, rdrTu), to draw up 
 (in military order) ; mid. to place 
 one's self in military order ; idv Si 
 /jiTlSi TTteixbva StSip, awrdTTeirBai 
 t)]V Taxl<rTr,v, but if he shall not 
 give a guide, that they shall place 
 themselves in military order most 
 sptedily, p. 57, 8. Eng. Syntax. 
 
 ctvvtIOtip (civ, rlBrifu), to place to- 
 gether; mid. to make an agreement 
 with. Eng. Synthesis. 
 
 o-uvTVYxdvcB ((TTjv, Tvyxdvu), to meet 
 with, to fall in with, vr. dat. 1 , 10, 8. 
 
 S-upaKdcios, -ov, (6), a Syracusian. 
 
 SvpCa, -as, (i]), Syria. 
 
 <rvcrKevd^O|i,ai, -daw, to make prepara- 
 tions, to pack up. 
 
 frvcrrdo), -dato, to sew together. 
 
 <rvcrir(ipdo)i.ai, pass, to be coiled up 
 toi/eJher ; of soldiers, to be in close 
 array ; avveaveipaiihriv Ixw .... 
 rdliK, having the company of six 
 hundred cavalry with him drawn up 
 in close array, 1, 8, 21. 
 
 o"wirTpttTicoTi]s, -ov, (6), a fellow-sol- 
 dier. 
 
 (Tvxvds, -i), -i", of time, long; of 
 number and q^uantity, many, much. 
 
 <r^6,yu>v, -ov, (t4), a victim for sacri- 
 
tr^&t/a 
 
 43 
 
 TeK|i^piov 
 
 Jke ; rk <r<l)i,yi.a, the omens fiom the 
 
 motions of the victims. 
 (r4>d^o), Att. -TTdi, f. (Tipd^ai, pf. 
 
 'liT<payiuu, to slaughter, to sacrifice. 
 o-((>6is,-fo, iiom. pi. of the pers. pron. 
 
 of 3d person, they. 
 (r(t>EvSovd<D, f. -ijffw, to use the sling. 
 o-ijjEvSsvi), --qs, (■4), a sling; that which 
 
 is slung ; the stone or build:. 
 <rc|)EvSov^TT]S, -ov, (6), a slinger. 
 o'(t>oSpds, -ti, ■!»>, excessire, pressing; 
 
 a<j>oSpli, luSeia, pressing want. 
 (TxeSdv, adv. nearly, almost, chiefly ; 
 
 ffxeSiv d' Sre, but atiout the time 
 
 when, 1, 10, 16 ; a-xeSbv oi ofiorpd- 
 
 Trefoi KdXovfievoi, chiefly, those who 
 
 were called table-companions. 
 o^fjutt, -oros, (ri), farm, outward 
 
 appearance. Eng. Scheme. 
 
 (TXoX'^, -ris, (ij), leisure. 
 
 tr&Xja, f. a&aii), a. laaaa, pf. aiaaxa, 
 pf. paiss. ffiauKTimi, Att. iriiriiJiMii, 
 a. i(Tili6i]v, to save, preserce. 
 
 SuKpdrtis, (-cos), ous, (6), Socrates. 
 1. The Athenian philosopher, B.C. 
 468-399. 2. An Achaean, one of 
 the Greek generals ; for voc., see 
 § 52, 2, Note 1. 
 
 (ru|j.a| -aros, (t6), ^Ae &0(iy, 
 
 0-U5, o-uv, ace. sing, o'uii', ace. pi. 
 masc. and fem. (rws, contr. from 
 (TWOS, -a, -ov, safe and sound; of 
 things, sound, whole, safe, certain. 
 
 Sucris, -cws, (6), Sosis. 
 
 (tutVip, -^pos, (6), a savior, u. pre- 
 server. 
 
 o-un^pios, -ov, bringing safety ; subst. 
 means of safety. 
 
 rdXavTov, -ov, (ri,), talent, =$1,000. 
 
 Tafuisj -16, (6), Tamos. 
 
 Tii^is, -EMS, (^), an arranging, order, 
 rank, line ; of soldiers, cohort, com- 
 pany. 
 
 rdpaxos, -ov, (6), confusion, disorder. 
 
 Tapo-oC, -wv, (oi), Tarsus, chief city 
 of Cilicia. 
 
 Tii<rir«i, Att. T&TTU, f. Tii|w, a. ^rafa, 
 pf. Tfra^a, a. pass. irdx^Vi pf- 
 T^ray/Mi, to arrange, to draw up in 
 military order, to appoint ; tSv irpbs 
 TovTo Terayfi^vuv, of those appointed 
 to this work, p. 61, 10 ; to order, 
 itrel d^ rax^eU, w$ ^ff)7j aiirbs, virb 
 Tou ifjLov c.8e\if>ov, but when, as he 
 himself said, haring been ordered by 
 my brother, p. 49, 8. Eng. Tactics. 
 
 TOUTT], adv. in this or that way or 
 manner, here, there. 
 
 Td<f>po$, -ov, (fi), a ditch, trench. 
 
 Tax^s, -eta, -i, swift, quick; raxi, as 
 adv. quickly, soon ; comp. Bitrauv, 
 Att. -TTOiv, and raxit^v, sup. rdxtfr- 
 Tos, g 73, 10 ; (is Tix'<^ra, as 
 quickly as possible; 5 idivaro rixia- 
 Ttt, as quickly as he uxis able ; r'rjv 
 raxloTTjv bSbv, by the speediest way. 
 
 Ti, enclitic oonj., and, like Lat. que ; 
 T^ . . . . Kal, both .... and, or and 
 in particular, as the xal is more 
 emphatic. 
 
 TiCva (§ 109, 3, N. 1), f. revw, 
 (§120, 1) a. h-eiva, (§121), pf. 
 riraKa, pf. pass, rh-afuu (§ 109, 3, 
 N. 1), Ir&B-qv (§ 109, 3), to extend; 
 to hasten. 
 
 Teix^S) (-cos), -ous, (rb), a wall, for- 
 tress. 
 
 TCK|i^piov, -ov, (rb), a sign. 
 
TcXeurda) 
 
 44 
 
 T0(rd(r8E 
 
 TEXoirdu, (fi), -tJiTU, pf. TCTcXerfTIJKO, 
 
 to en<i, to die. 
 T«KVOv, -ov, (ri), a child. 
 TtKeuri], -tjs, (t)), etid, completion. 
 TA.as, -eos, (t6), an end, result. 
 rif-va, f. Te/iSi, pf. T^r^iiij/ca, 2 a. ft-a- 
 
 /io» or tre/iov, 2 a. mid. irefUfiriv, 
 
 pf. pass. TiTiifinai, a. ^t^tJSiji', to 
 
 c«i in iaft/e, to wound. 
 T^tro-apes, Att. rirrapes, -pa (§ 77), 
 
 _/6«r. Eng. Tessellate. 
 TerpoKLO^tXioi, -at, -a, ^/owr thousand. 
 TETpaKoo-ioi., -at, -a, four hundred. 
 TCTTopaKOVTa, forty. 
 Tt'xvTi, -)js, (4), siffl. Eng. Tech- 
 
 KICAL. 
 
 T'gSe, dat. fem. of &Se. 
 
 Tidpa, -as, (t\), a tiara. 
 
 TCypTS, -ijros, (6), the Tigris, a river 
 wiijitying into the Euphrates. 
 
 tMi [ii, f. eifau, a. lOriKa (§ 121, N. 
 2), pf. TieaKo., 2 a. ^Stji/, pf. pa.ss. 
 Ti6ei;xai, a. MStjv, to set, place, 
 put ; mid. to put, to place (for one's 
 self), to fix, settle; rlBcaBau rh. 
 STrXa has three senses ; (1) tn stark 
 or pile arms ; generally to take up n 
 position, 1, 2, 6 ; (2) to jrf (sol- 
 diers) under armi. to draw (them) 
 up in order nfbcillle : ( -3^ to lay down 
 one*s arms,to surrfnder ; with dyCiva, 
 to appoint, 1, 2, 10 ; h t(£|ei BiaBai. 
 Sw\a and eis rd^iP tA SirXa rlBea- 
 0ai, to place one's self in ordei- of 
 battle. Cf. Eng. Theme. 
 
 nfAca (i3), -ijirw, Teriym/ico (§ 123), 
 to honor, to value. 
 
 Tiji'*], -TJ!, (ii), honor. 
 
 Ti|iios, -a, -OK, AeW in honor. 
 
 TLfuapia, f. -ijiru, to punish, to take 
 vengeance upon. 
 
 t£s, t£ (§ 84), inteiTOg. pron. who? 
 which? what? 
 
 tIs, tI (§ 84), indef. pron. enclit. 
 some one, something, any one, any- 
 thing, a, u, certain ; fj£/\a'Aa rts, a 
 certain blackness ; xa^KJs tls, some- 
 thing like brass. 
 
 Ti.(r(ra<j>^pvT|s, (-fos), -oi;s, D. -«, A. 
 -Tif, V. -TI, (6), Tissaphemes, satrap 
 of Caria. 
 
 TiTpciiTKa), f. rpiiffa, a. frputaa, pf. 
 pass. r^rpiij/jLai, a. pass. ^Tpdjdyjv, 
 to wound. 
 
 t£<i), f. riffu, impf. friov, pf. pass. 
 T^TifMi, to esteem. 
 
 Tol, enclit. particle of inference, 
 therefore ; in truth. 
 
 To£vDV {toI, viv), therefore, then, ac- 
 cordingly, further. 
 
 TotoirSe, ToidSc, toiovSe, of such a 
 kind, nature, quality; somewhnt as 
 follows ; generally referring to what 
 follows. 
 
 tcioStos, ToioiJTi], toioBto or -of, of 
 such kind, nature, or quality ; comii. 
 referring to what had gone before ; 
 ie rotoiri^ tov KtvdOvov irpoffiivros. 
 in so much of appfoaching danger, 
 i. c. in such extreme danger, p. 
 47, 5. 
 
 To\|j.[8t|s, ov, (6), TolmXdes, the best 
 herald in the army. 
 
 T(S|cvp,a, -oTos, (t4), an arrow. 
 
 To|6Ji(ii, f. -ei/Vu, to hit with an arrow. 
 Cf. Eng. Intoxicate, as arrows 
 were often poisoned. 
 
 To|oTi]s, -ov, (6), a bowman. 
 
 riiros, -ou, {6), a place, region. Eng. 
 Topio. 
 
 T(5(ros, -71, -ov, of size, so great ; cf 
 space, so wide; of time, so long; 
 of number, so many ; of sound, so 
 loud ; = Lat. tantus ; answers to 
 the relat. iicros. 
 
 TOcrdff'Be, -iJ'S^ -6v5g = ritros, with 
 
45 
 
 inr&p\a 
 
 stronger demonstr. force, so great, 
 so large ; w. infin. so strong, so tiUe, 
 to do a thing ; ToabvSe, adv. so very, 
 so much. 
 
 toctoOtos, Totrairr), tocovto, or -ov, 
 so targe, suA, so great, = Lat. tan- 
 tus ; S(Tif .... ToaovTif, lit. by how 
 much the sooner . . . .by so much the 
 more, i. e. the sooner . ... the more. 
 
 rare, adv. rfjen, at that time, often 
 formerly ; ol rbre, the men then liv- 
 ing, § 141, N. 3 ; it answers to the 
 relative ire., and interrog. vbrt. 
 
 TpdXXcis, -eav, (ai), TraUes, a city 
 of Lydia. 
 
 Tpavjia, -oTos, (t6), a wound. 
 
 Tpeis, TpCo, three (§ 77). Lat. tres, 
 Eng. Thbicb, Teiob. 
 
 Tp^iru, f. Tp4^(ii, a. Irpexpa, pf. ri- 
 Tpo0a (§ 109, 1), 2 a. irpwirov 
 (§ 109, 3), pf. pass, rirpaiiiuu, a. 
 h-piipBipi, to turn ; pass, and mid. 
 to turn, to betake one's s'lf; rphreiv 
 els ipvy/iv, to pit to flight. Lat. 
 trepidus, Eng. Inteepid. 
 
 Tp^(^(i), f. 6pi\j/ui, a. I6pe\j/a, pf. t^- 
 Tpo<pa (§ 109, 1, and § 17, 2, N.), 
 TiBpap,pai. (rare TiTpa/xpai), 2 a. 
 irpdipTiv, to nourish, support. 
 
 ^^X" (»«-> §17. 2. N.), f mid. 
 Spap^oSpai, pf. SeSpdp.T]Ka, pf pass. 
 SeSpi.p,r)iuu., 2 a. (Spap.av, to run. 
 
 rptat, f. Tpiaa, a. (rpeaa, to tremUe 
 with fear, to shrink away from. 
 
 TpiaKOVTa, indeclinable, thirty. 
 
 TpiaKiia-lOP, -ai, -a, three hundred. 
 
 Tpi^pT|S, (-eos), ous, (^J, properly an 
 adj. thrice fltted ; as subst. sc. vam, 
 a gaUey with three banks of oars, 
 galley, trireme. 
 
 Tp£s, adv. thrice. 
 
 rpuTKotSfKa, thirteen. 
 
 rpurx'^wi, -ot, -a, three thousand. 
 
 TpCros, -ri, -ov {rpets), third. 
 
 Tpoirf], -^s, (ij), a turning, a rout. 
 Eng. Tbopio, Trope. 
 
 Tpdiralov, -ou, (rii), a trophy. 
 
 rpoTFOs, -ou, (6), a turn, munner, char- 
 acter. 
 
 TpO(ti^, -^s, (^), nounsAmenf, support. 
 
 TuyxAvw, f. mid. rei^opui, pf. Teru- 
 XIKo or T^euxa, 2 a. Itux""! *" 
 Ai'S, as with an arrow ; of persons, 
 to meet by chance; of things, to 
 meet with, to obtain ; intrans. to hap- 
 pen ; w. a participle, happen, by 
 chance, g 279, 2 ; Trapim ^tu7x«''e, 
 happened to be present; vo/ii^ovres 
 TTapi Kvpip . . . . fj iropi pairiKet, 
 thinking if they were lirave with Cyrus 
 tkey would obtain .... than with the 
 king, p. 61, 16. 
 
 T^pawos, -ov, (6 or ^), a lord or master; 
 an absolute sovereign ; it was applied 
 to any one who had made himself 
 king by force, not to hereditary 
 sovereigns. 
 
 Ti\i\, -7)S, (ii), chance, fortune. 
 
 rij&f, adv. in the foUowing manner, as 
 follows. 
 
 fiScap, {iSaTOs, (ri), water. 
 
 vios, -ov, (6), a son; declined reg. 
 but also declined as if from vleis, 
 g. vUos ; dat. vlit, ei ,* ace. vUa ; 
 dual, vUc, vi^iv ; pi. vUes, eis, gen. 
 
 vUuu, Siv; dat. vliaiv, ace. vliai, 
 
 voc. viies, eh. 
 ifirepm, -a, -ov, your. 
 virapxos, -ov, (6), a subordinate officer. 
 {wdpx<» [vTri, S,pX'')i t" begin, to be. 
 
intAaiva 
 
 46 
 
 to exist; naptfcroTis Sii ^ li'tf'tp 
 ijrrjpxe rlf Kiip(f, now Oi/rua had his 
 mother Parysatia (i. e. to support, 
 to favor him), p. 61, 7. 
 
 'frireXaiivu (iwb, iXaipui), to drive un- 
 der; intians. (sc. iTiror), to ride 
 up to. 
 
 imif, prep. w. gen. or ace. ; w. gen. 
 expressing that over which some- 
 thing is ; of place, over ; of motion, 
 over, aa'oss, or over, beyond; from 
 the notion of standing over to pro- 
 tect, yiw, in defence of, in behalf of; 
 w. ace. expressing that over and 
 beyond which a thing goes ; of 
 place, over, beyond; of measure, 
 over; of number, above, upwards 
 of, beyond. Eng. Hyper- in com- 
 pounds. 
 
 iveppoki\, '-^s, (ii), the act of casting 
 beyond ; the act of passing ; passage, 
 a pass. 
 
 impSl^ioi, -ov, above the right. 
 
 v7r6pit>a(vo|iai (uirip, ^aifo/iai), to 
 I show one's self over or ahoroe. 
 
 virT|peTc'a> (a), f. -Itau, pf. {nrnperiiKa, 
 to serve on board ship, to serve, to 
 furnish. 
 
 i3in)p^TT)s, -ou, (6), properly an under- 
 rower ; a sailor, a laborer, servant. 
 
 i!m(rxvco|iai, f. mid. ivoax^^oiuu, 
 pf. iireo-xiM"") 2 a. mid. inteiTxi- 
 Hifv, to promise 
 
 i'lrvos, -ov, (6), sleep. 
 
 iiro (Lat. sub), under; w. gen. ; of 
 place, _/ro7n unrfer ; as agents after 
 pass, verhs, by ; w. dat. under ; w. 
 ace. ; of place, to express motion 
 towards and under an object ; of 
 
 time, about, inri viiKra, towards 
 night ; inrb t^v lu, about morning. 
 
 iiro8^XO)iai (iirb, Sixopai), to receive. 
 
 iirojv'yiov, -ov, (tI>), a beast of burden, 
 a pack-animal. 
 
 iira\a|i.pdv(D (inrb, Xa/i^ivio), to re- 
 ceive. 
 
 iiroXcCiriD (irS, Xeiiru), to leave behind. 
 
 ^yl^o\vto {vir6, XiJw), to loosen, to un- 
 bind. 
 
 {nroir^|j.ir(ii {{nrd, Tr^fiTai), to send se- 
 cretly, to send as a spy. 
 
 inrotrreva, f. -eiStrw, impf. inriijTrTevov, 
 § 105, 1, N. 2, to suspect, appre- 
 hend. 
 
 iirdinrovSoSt -ov, under a truce or 
 treaty ; rods vexpoi/s iiroffirbvdovs 
 ivoSiSbvai,, to give up the dead under 
 truce. 
 
 {iiroTl6T|)ii (vt6, tIBtjiu), to place un- 
 der, to suggest. Eng. Hypothesis. 
 
 iiroi|>aCva> {inri, <paivu), to appear a 
 little, to daxvn. 
 
 irTrQ\iapia, (C), f. -i}o-(i), to withdraw, 
 to retreat. 
 
 {riTTCpaios, -ala, -atov, following; ^ 
 ia-repala (se. iiiiipa), the following 
 day; or dat. on the following day. 
 
 lioTcpov, adv. afterwards, later. 
 
 iS<rTcpo$, -ipa, -epov, the latter; of 
 time, later; w. gen. later than. 
 
 'fi(|>lirTT||u {inrb, ?iTT);/iii), trans, inpres., 
 impf., fut., and a., to plare under ; 
 pa.ss. and 2 a. to stand under, to 
 place one's self under an engagement, 
 to promise ; w. dat. to resist. 
 
 i\|n|X<Ss, -i), -br, lofty. 
 
 veil, f. iiffia, a. pass. Hadipi; impers. Set, 
 it rains. 
 
i^aiSpos 
 
 47 
 
 4>op^u 
 
 ({>ai8pds, -d, -in, bright. 
 
 (|>alv<D, f. ^avu (§ 120, 1), a. l<fniva 
 (§121),pf.7r^0ae);ra(§17, 2,N.), 
 pf. pass. Tri<pa<r/Mi (§ 109, 1 and 3, 
 N. 1 (end)), a. pass. itpdvOriv, 2a. 
 p. i<j>6.vriv, 2 p. iriipritia, to make to 
 appear; of sound, to make ilistinct; 
 w. partic. (§ 280), to appear. Eng. 
 Phenomenon. 
 
 <|>dXa7|, -ayyos, {fi), a line of battle, 
 a phalanx. 
 
 <|iaVEpas, -d, -iv ((fjalvu), open to sight, 
 visible, apparent, manifest, evident. 
 
 ij>avEp<3s, adv. opmly. 
 
 <^^pa>, f. otjoi, a. iffeyKa. pf. hifvoxo., 
 2 a. i^veyKov, pf. pass, ^jijvcyiiai, 
 a. ■^ix^Vi to bear, to lead, endure, 
 producn ; pass, to be carrifd. 
 
 ^eiya (cl. 2), f. mid. 0ci)|o/ioi and 
 ipev^ovficu, pf. TT^^eirya (§ 17, 2, 
 N.), 2 a. eifivyov, to flee ; ol 0ei)- 
 Yoi/Tcs, (Ae fugitives, the exiles ; the 
 pres. may have the sense of the pf. 
 I flee or (I have fled) am in exile 
 Lat. fugio, Eng. Fugitive. 
 
 ^T\y.l, f. i^^ffoi, a. #01)0-0 (§ 129, IV.), 
 to say, to affirm, lo speak ; for dif- 
 ferent construction in indirect 
 discourse, see § 260, 2, N. 1. Lat. 
 •fari, fama, Eng. Fame. 
 
 <)>6d.V(i>, f. <j>B&ffa and -■^(To/mt, a. 
 l<f>6a(ra, pf. 'ipBaKa, 2 a. act. eipdriv 
 (like earriv), to come before, antici- 
 pate; § 279, 2 ; fiiTfcis ;i)) (pBdffuai 
 liifre KCpo! /tijre ol K/Xi(ces jcaraXa- 
 pivres, in order that neither Cyrus 
 nor the Cilicians should anticipate 
 (them ) in preoccupying ( the heights), 
 p. 57, 8. 
 
 <)>6eYY0|tai, f. mid. -^o/iat, a. mid. 
 
 ifpBey^dliriv, to cry aloud, to shout. 
 
 Eng. Diphthong (Sis, <p86yyos). 
 4eE[pu, f. iiBepw (§ 120, 1), a. e^^et/ia 
 
 (§121), pf. eipBapKa, pf. pass. 
 
 i<p8a,piMu, a. i(p0ctpriv, to destroy. 
 ij>6ove(i), (fi), f. -^(Td), Jo enw^. 
 (j>6(ivo$, -ou, (6), envy. 
 (|>iMci), (fi), f. -ij(rw, pf. Te^lXijKa 
 
 (§ 17, 2, N., § 123), pf. pass. 
 
 iretpiXtjpMt, a. i<pi\ii67ji/, ' to love. 
 
 Phil- in compounds. 
 <tiiXCa, -as, {ii) , friendship. 
 (filXios, -ia, -loK (^iXos), friendly. 
 (J>i.\o9i]po$, -oi*, ybnc? q/" iAe chase. 
 <t>i\oK£pS^(i>, (u», f. -tJo-u, to te greedy 
 
 of gain, to seek gain eagerly. 
 i|>iXaKCvSiJva5, -ov, fond of danger. 
 ^iKo^j!ii\% -h, gen. (-^os), -ous,fond 
 
 of learning ; see § 71 (end). 
 <|>tXos, -Ti, -0/; dear, friendly (§ 73, 
 
 II.); conip. ipiXlay, ^IXrepos, or 
 
 (ppXalrepos ; sup. ^iXurros, ^iXra- 
 
 Tos, or (fnXairaTOi. 
 <|>lXos, -ov, (6), a friend. 
 (j>\vapla, -as, (^), nonsense ; pi. ^o^ 
 
 €nes ,* dXX' ^7ii 07/^1 raOra ^Xvapias 
 
 clfai, but I say that these things are 
 
 fooleries. 
 <j>oP«u, (w), f. -Tia-o), a. i^b^riaa, a. 
 
 mid. i<l>opritrdiJ.Tiv , a. pass. ^00/3^- 
 
 9r)i', to terrify ; mid. to ./ear. 
 <j)dpos, -ov, (6), ^eor, /vjAt. Eng. 
 
 Hydrophobia (liSiip, 04|8os). 
 (|>oi.vIkeos, -^a, -eov, contr. -ous, -^, 
 
 oOi', purple. 
 $oivtKT|, -Tjs, (^), Phoenicia. 
 <f>oiviKi(rHjs, -oB, (6^, one toAo wears 
 
 the purple ; a courtier. 
 i)>opl(i>, (fi), f. -ijo-u, a. i^bp^qaa, 
 
 frequent, cf. 0^/)<i), to carry, to wear. 
 
ijipdjai 
 
 43 
 
 XiX<5* 
 
 i|>pd{<i>, f. ^/)d(ru, pf. wiippaKa (% 17, 
 
 2, ^.), pf. pass, iritppaaiuii, a. 
 
 i^piaOriv, to tell, declare. Eng. 
 
 Pkrasb. 
 i^p^v, -ecis, (i^), the mind. 
 i|>p^vi|ios, -ov, in one's right sens^^, 
 
 thoughtful, intettigent. 
 <l>povT£jcii, -iffw, Att. -M, § 120,3, 
 
 1o think, to reflect, to be anxious. 
 i^poipapxos, -ov, (6), a commander of 
 
 a garrison or fortress. 
 i|>povpf(i>, (u), f. -ijiru, a. iippoipriaa, 
 
 to guard, to hold under guard. 
 i^poipiov, -ov, (Tl>),a guard, a fortress, 
 
 garrison duty ; eis {jtpoipM, for gar- 
 rison duty, 1, i, 15. 
 ^pv^Ca, -OS, {i)), Phrygia, a provmoe 
 
 of Asia Minor. 
 #pvg, -vybs, (6), o Phrygian. 
 
 I c^wyi» tti-DS, (6), fugitive, exile. 
 
 I i)>vXaKV), --/js, (^), Mf act of guarding, 
 a waleh or guard; a garrison, 1, 1, 
 6 ; of time, a wr.tcli ; « place for 
 wutchiofi mill guarding; irpbs rit 
 0u\aKds, to the guard-stations. 
 
 c|nSXa|, -a/tos, {&), a guard. 
 
 ^vXdTTu, f. -{w, a. i(pi\a^a, pf ri- 
 4>i)uiXa (§ 17, 2, N.), to juaiii; 
 iiitrans. to keep guard; mid. to be 
 on one's guard. 
 
 i^vo), f. <f>6(riD, a. (ij>voa,, pf. iriipvKa 
 (§ 17, 2, N.), to produce. 
 
 ^UKa'Cs, -tSos, (4), aPhoeceanwoman. 
 
 t^uv^cis, -eiriro, -ei', sounding, gifted 
 with speech, endowed with a voice ; 
 contr. in neut. pi. ^avavra (Dor.). 
 
 4>ws, <(«i)T<is, (§ 25, 3), (7-i), a light. 
 
 XaCpu, f. xaipioru, pf. KCxdp^Ka (g 17, 
 
 2, N.), pf. pass. KexipTilMi^ part. 
 
 Kexap/iims, f. mid. xopowMtt', 2 a. 
 
 pass. ixipVt to rejoice, to be glad ; 
 
 w. dat. to rejoice at; be delighted 
 
 with, take pleasure in a thing. 
 XaXciraCvu, f. -ai-S (§ 120, 1), ^x"- 
 
 \irrpia. (§121), to be hard; mid. 
 
 to be angry. 
 XaXeirds, -■^, -ii", hard tobear, grievous; 
 
 difficult; of persons, ^ard to dca? 
 
 tt'iVi, hostile ; rd, xa\eird, hardships; 
 
 ol xttXeTrdtrepoi, bitterer enemies ; tcl 
 
 XaVfTiiroTO, those things which 
 
 are most cruel ; comp. -ilrrepos, sup. 
 
 -tbraros. 
 XoXeirus, adv. with difficulty ; comp. 
 
 -itrrepov, sup. -liroTO. 
 X^Xkcos, -^a, -eo;', contr. xo-^^o^ih 
 
 -■5, -oC>', ©/■ brome or copper, brazen. 
 
 XoXkcSs, -oC, (6), copper, brass. 
 
 Xap'as, -leaaa, -lev, graceful, pleas- 
 ing. § 67, 2. 
 
 Xap'topai, f. -Laopai, Att. -tou/uti 
 (§ 120, 3), ii. 4x<^puriiii.rir, pf.Vcx*'' 
 purimi, both in act. and pass, 
 sense, to gratify ; w. dat. and ace. 
 to gratify a person in regard to any- 
 thing, to oblige. 
 
 Xiipis, -iTos,- favor, gratitude; ace. 
 X<i/Ju'. 
 
 X«'P, X«H>'5s, (^), reg. but dat. pi. 
 
 Xci.p<S<i>) (u), f. -iiffa, a. ix^lpwaa, to 
 take in hand, to overpower, to master. 
 
 XeppiSviricros, -ov, (i/), the Chersonesus, 
 a peninsula upon the Thracian 
 side of the Hellespont. 
 
 XCXioi, -ai, -a, a thousand. 
 
 XiXos, -oC, {6), grass, forage. 
 
XlTulV 
 
 49 
 
 f«%A 
 
 XiTcSv, -tScos, (6), a tunic. 
 
 Xopros, -on, (6), fodder ; x6(yroi koO- 
 ^os, hay. 
 
 Xpdo|iai, {uiuu), f. mid. xpiiaoixai, 
 a. mid. ixi>'ri<^i'l'.Vi't pf. pass. Ki- 
 Xpijiuai (§ 123, N. 2), to use, to em- 
 ploji ; i/iiv, lis ii6mi.s ireiBofiimi.s, 
 TTUTTOTdTOis xpiJo'eTttt, Ae wi'Z/ employ 
 you as the only ones who obeyed him, 
 as most trustiDorthy. 
 
 Xpdo>, f. xpiiaa, a. IxRV"'"'! pf. x^- 
 ■XfiitKo. (§ 17, 2, N.), n. mid. ^XPT 
 ffd/irip, a. pass. ixp'^<r8r]v, pf. k^- 
 XPW^o.1 and Kixp^t^^'. in present 
 sense, to deliver an oracle ; mid. is 
 
 ^ also used as a deponent with pf. 
 pass. KixpVI'^'' ii same sense (see 
 Xpdu), to use w. dat. Lat. uti. 
 
 XP^, impers. subjunot. XPV> optat. 
 
 ^ XP^l'Vi infin. xPV'"''h impf. ^XP')" 
 and XP^"! f' X/")"'*'! *' is fated, it is 
 necessary ; w. infin. i* mwsi, i7 !s 
 ^i ; w. ace. and infin. one must 
 needs do a thing. 
 
 Xp-jiSu (in Att. only used in pres. 
 and impf.), to wish. 
 
 Xpfjl^o, -OTOS, (rii), thing used; pi. 
 goods, poperty, money, resources; 
 XP^MOTO TToXXi, mucA money. 
 
 Xp^criiios, -i;, -OK, «se/«Z. 
 
 Xpdvos, -ov, (6), (ime; xpiSi'V "■"X"* 
 a considerable time. Eng. Chkonio. 
 
 Xpvoreos, -^o, -eoi", contr. ■xp^<"'^h -Vt 
 -oOk, golden. § 65. 
 
 Xpvcrtov, -ou, (rii), pj«ce of gold, gold 
 money (coined). 
 
 Xpvo-6s, -oO, (6), joW. 
 
 Xpvo-oxdXivos, -oc, !oi<A gold-studded 
 bridle. 
 
 X<ipa, -as, (^), o p/acc, <Ae place as- 
 signed to any one, position ; els T)f> 
 iavTov x'^P"'"' t" ^" """* position, 
 p. 44, 25; fcinrf, country, terri- 
 tory. 
 
 X<apla, {&), f. -ijffu, Att. -ijffOjuoi, a. 
 ix^pW't pf. Kex'I'pvK''; to make 
 room for another, to withdraw ; to 
 proceed, 1. 10, 13. 
 
 Xaplov, -ov, {t6), a place, position. 
 
 \apli, adv. apart; as prep. w. gen. 
 without, apart from. 
 
 Xupos, -ov, (6), space, district. 
 
 "9. 
 
 *dpos, -ov, (6), P-arus, ?i Tiver of 
 Cilioia. 
 
 ^^lov, -ov, (t4), a iraceht. 
 
 <|/euS'(js, -^s, false, lying ; as subst. 6 
 if/evS-fis, a liar; Att. irreg. sup. 
 ypevSiffTaTos. 
 
 i};ev8o),' f. ypeijw, a. ^\pev(ra., pf. pass. 
 lifevffiMi, a. pass. i<fei(T6riv, to de- 
 ceive ; mid. to be false ; i^j/einBr) tov- 
 To, in this he was deceived. PsEUDO- 
 as a prefix in numerous words. 
 
 i|ft\^S, -i), -6v, bare; uncovered, un- 
 armored ; ^i\^v Ix"' rytv KeiftaX^v, 
 having his head bare, i.e. without 
 helmet. 
 
 i|fiX(ia>, (u), f. -iliffia, pf. pass. i^l\ii>- 
 /lai, to strip bare, to make bald; 
 pass, to become bald; w. gen. to 
 strip bare of a thing. 
 
 'l^'X^i -^S) {ij)> breath, soul, life. 
 
60 
 
 ii^tUo 
 
 il 
 
 •S, inteij. 0, used in direct address. 
 
 uSe, adv. thus, so, in this manner, in 
 the following wanner. 
 
 iiviofuu, (-oC/iai), f. -■/ijo/mi, a. iavri- 
 ardfiTjv, pf. ittivyifiai, impf, i(ovo6/j,7]V, 
 to buy, to purchase (irpii/i.'riii is used 
 as 2 a. ; for accent, see § 127, 6, 
 N. 2). 
 
 ^Kus, ^KEia, &KV, gen. i^k^os, -elas, 
 -^os, quick, swift; adv. ibxiai or 
 &Ka, swiftly; comp. and sup. liici)- 
 repos, iiKiraTOi ; iiTeg, iIikLiiiv, 
 
 &KUrTO$. 
 
 uvios, -a, -oy, for sale ; t4 (Swo, wares. 
 
 tipa, -as, (if), time. 
 
 US, demonstr. adv. of manner, so, 
 thus. 
 
 OS, relat. ady. when, as; & S' (tis 
 iiTTJXBev, but when he departed, p. 63, 
 15 ; as oonj. that; ils ^TrijSouXeiJoi, 
 (saying) that he was plotting, 1, 1. 
 3 ; before a partic. to express the 
 idea of the subject of the leading 
 verb, without implying that it is 
 the idea of the speaker or writer, 
 as if, an the ground that, with the 
 intention of, for the purpose of, pre- 
 tending that, that ; dis els TlurlSas 
 Pov\6tJi£vos ffrpareieirSai, pretending 
 that he wished to had an army against 
 the Pisidians, 1, 1. 11 ; (is IlurlSos 
 ^ovXdfici'os ^KjSaXeiv irayri,wa(rtv iK 
 
 T^s Xiipas, that he wished to expel 
 the Pisidians wholly from the country, 
 1, 2, 1, § 277, 6, N". 2 ; <is im^v 
 XeiovTos 'Sur(ra(pipvovs, on the ground 
 that Tissaphemes was plotting, 1, 1, 
 6 ; lis <l>l\ov, as a friend, 1,1,2; 
 w. sup. lis TdxiffTo, as quickly as 
 possible; w. numerals, about; w. 
 infin., denoting purpose or result, 
 so that, so as, § 266, 2, N. 1 ; lis 
 11^ H.-trreirdaL Tr,s Kdptpjjs t6 iidtap, 
 so that the water did not touch the 
 hay; causal conj. because; tem- 
 poral, when ; as prep. w. ace. used 
 only before names of persons, to. 
 
 acnrcp, just as ; of time, as soon as ; 
 to modify an assertion, as if, as it 
 were ; w. partic. as, oi as if, § 277, 
 6, N. 3. 
 
 uo-Tc, w. infinitive, so thal^ so as, 
 § 266, 1 ; on condition, § 266, 2 ; 
 fiffre air^ p.aK\ov <pl\ovs elvai 1) 
 jSaffiXef, so that they were morefriendly 
 to him than to the king, p. S5, 6 ; w. 
 indicative, so that, § 237. 
 
 ia'ra\f\, -^s, (^), a scar. 
 
 a^iKe, would that, that; &(pe\€ 
 Tovro voieiv, would that he were 
 doing this (lit. he ought to be doing 
 this). See i^CKat. § 251, 2, 
 N. 1. 
 
 <ii|>cX^«, (u), f. -■^(F<ii, to assist. 
 
II. ElfGLISH AND GEEEK 
 
 [For numerals, see Grammar, § 76 j for pronouns, § 79.] 
 
 A. 
 
 a, a certain one, rh. 
 
 abandon, to, irpoSlSaiju. 
 
 ability, Siva^ii, (4); to the best 
 
 of one's ability, eh Sii/afuv. 
 able, to be, Siva/iat,; able (adj.), 
 
 lKai>6s, -ij, ■-6v. 
 about (Concerning), irepl w. gen.; 
 
 about (around), d/ix^f w. ace. ; 
 
 about w, numerals, tiis; /jidWa, 
 
 § 98, 3 ; we are about to do this, 
 
 /jt^Wo/iev toCto iroieTv. 
 above, inrip w. gen. or ac.c. 
 accede, to accede to a truce, 
 
 (TTT^i'So/x.at (mid.), 
 accomplish, to, SiairpiTTo/mi. (mid.), 
 accordance ■with, in, Tp6s w. gen. 
 accustomed to hunt, iSiipewv, 
 
 § 200, N. 5. 
 accrue, to, ylyvofuu. 
 accuse, to, alndo/Mi ; jta/SiiXXu. 
 actuate, to, Trapo^inu. 
 admire, to, Savfui^ai, dyaitai. 
 advance (go forward), to, TpUi/u 
 
 used as fut. of irpoepxopui ; ^TTi^w- 
 
 pew ; advance (to, towards, or 
 
 against), ixi w. elfit ; iwkpxofiiiL ; 
 
 to advance on the run, Sp6iuf 
 advance-guard, irpo<l>i\ai (6). [Belr. 
 advise, to, avfi^ovXeia. 
 after, conj. iwct, ^ireiSi}, § 207, 2 ; 
 
 prep., p.eTA w. ace; after these 
 
 things, fiercL raSra, 
 afternoon, SctXri {ri). 
 afterwards, Scmpov, adv. 
 
 again, (of place, back, backward; 
 of time, once more ; in narrative, 
 on the other hand, in turn, like- 
 wise), o5; (back again), iriXw; 
 (still, longer), ft-t. 
 
 against, iirL or vpbs w. aoc. 
 
 alive, to be, fdu, <§ 98, N. 2. 
 
 all, irSs, irSo-o, Tray, § 25,3,N. 1 ; not 
 at all, oiBiv, § 160, 2. 
 
 almost, dXlyov w. Sei, § 172, 2, N. 2 
 (end). 
 
 ally, (Tip./iaxos {i). 
 
 alone, /iivos, -17, -ov. 
 
 already, ifSr;, adv. 
 
 also, Kal. 
 
 altar, pa/iis (6). 
 
 although, fiimoi ; by a partic, 
 § 277, 5. 
 
 always, det, adv. 
 
 am, elpil. 
 
 am able, Wra^ai, § 122, 2, N. 2. 
 
 am come, ■^ku, see § 200, Note 3. 
 
 am gone, ofxo/tai, § 200, 3. 
 
 ambush, to lie in, heSpeia. 
 
 among, /lerd w. gen. ; (into), eli w. 
 ace. 
 
 anciently, rb dpx^ov. 
 
 and, Kal ; koX corresponds to the 
 Lat. et ; ri (enclitic), to Lat. que ; 
 
 angry, to be, x(iKciralvo(w.i (mid.), 
 w. dat. ; to make angry, dpyt^ta. 
 
 animal, faov {t6) ; wild animal, 
 $Tjpiov {t6). 
 
announce 
 
 52 
 
 away 
 
 announce, to, dyyeWa, or diray- 
 yeWu, § 110, II., 2, or 8:07- 
 y'.Wio, or ira/)077eXXii) ; to an- 
 nounce publicly, irpoayopeiu). 
 
 annoy, to, (taicffls iroi^u, § 165, N. 1. 
 
 another, dXXos, -jj -0. 
 
 answer, to, diroKpivofiai. 
 
 anticipate, to, ^Biru, § 279, 4. 
 
 anxious, to be, (ppovTlfa. 
 
 any one, some one, any thing, rU, 
 tI, § 84 and § 150 ; any (other) 
 one, another, &\\os, -% -0. 
 
 appear, to, mid. and pass, of 
 
 appoint, to (assign), diroSeiio'vfiL ; 
 (games), tIBtiiu. 
 
 approach, ttpodos (^), 
 
 array, to, Tdacu ; of those arrayed 
 against the Greeks, rui/ KarH, 
 rods "EWrjifas rerayfUvtav. 
 
 arise (accrue), to, ylyvoiuu. 
 
 Ariatippus, 'AplarmTos (6). 
 
 armed with scythes, SpeiravTi<p6pos, 
 
 arms, SwXa (rd). [ -a, -ov. 
 
 army, ffTpircv/ia (t4) ; ffrpwrid (i)). 
 
 around, inpl, w. ace. ; a/x^ w. ace. 
 
 arrange, to, SmTdaaw, 
 
 arrest, to, a-vWap-pdvu. 
 
 arrive (am present), to, wdpeifu; 
 come &om some place, d(j>uaieo- 
 pai ; have arrived, am come, ^/cu, 
 pres. with force of pf. § 200, N. 3. 
 
 Artaxerxes, 'XpTa^4p^s (i). 
 
 as, (bs, sometimes not translated, 
 with partic. in gen. absolute, § 277, 
 6, N. 2 ; just as, Sxxirep ; as i^ 
 (lis : as quickly as possible, in 
 rdx'OTa; as much as possible, 
 cJis iiAXiara, with or without the 
 
 proper form of Siuafuu ; as many 
 as possible, lis or Sri irXeiffTOi ; 
 as fast as he could, ^ iSivaro 
 rdxtffTd ; as follows, proper form 
 of iSe (§ 148, N. 1) when the ob- 
 ject of a verb ; SiSe, an adverb ; 
 (somewhat as follows), roibaSe, 
 TotdSe, TOuvSe ; not translated 
 after verbs signifying to appoint, 
 &c., § 166 and N. 2. 
 
 ascend, to, dvapaivu. 
 
 ashamed, to be, mid. of aiffx^'"'' i 
 so that every one was ashamed, 
 HiiyTe irdcriv alffx^rvrjv slvai. 
 
 ask, ab-iu (ask a pe^'san for some- 
 thing), § 164 ; ipurdu, or dve- 
 pun-du, interrogate, to inquire; 
 
 _ (popui mostly used in the aor. and 
 fut., for the present ipimdia is 
 used ; Seop,ai, beg, § 172, 2, N. 2. 
 
 ass, 6vos (6 or -ri). 
 
 assemble (levy), to, dSpol^u. 
 
 assembly, iKicKriaia (4). 
 
 assist, ii0eX^u ; inrripeTia w. dat. : 
 to assist in urging on the work, 
 ffuo-ffouSafu ; with one's assist- 
 ance, p^rd. ' ' 
 
 assistance, ^a^eeia (4). 
 
 astonished, to be, davpdfuj. 
 
 at, els, w. ace. after verbs .of motion; 
 iy, w. dat. ; iirl, w. dat. ; at full 
 speed, dvd Kparos ; at least, 7^ 
 enclit., (Lat. quidem) ; at the 
 same time, dpu ; at last, tAos. 
 
 Athenian, 'AdTjvatoSf -a£a, -aioi'. 
 
 attack, to, iiriTtBijpj.. 
 
 attempt, to, reipdopju. 
 
 away, ride, to, aVeXai^xu ; sen^ 
 away, d<j>li)pi. 
 
Babylon 
 
 53 
 
 by 
 
 Babylon, Bo/SwXSi' (^). 
 
 banish, to, iK^aWa. 
 
 baxbarian, ^ap^apos (6). 
 
 barbarian, pap^aptKds, -t/i, -6v. 
 
 bare, ^iXos, -4 -o". ' 
 
 base, KaKos, -ij, -ok, § 73, 2 ; basely, 
 
 (coKus (adv.). 
 battle, fi.ax'n iv) i battle (war), 
 
 iroXtfios (6). 
 bear, to, ^ipu. 
 beast, Sriploi' {t!i) ; beast of burden, 
 
 itroi^iov {to). 
 beat, to, iralu. 
 
 beautiful, xaXos, -i}, -ox, § 73, 3. 
 beauty, toXXos (to). 
 because, Sti, § 250 ; by partie. 
 
 § 277, 2. 
 become, to, ylyvoiiau 
 becoming, it is, dei. 
 before, irpo, w. gen. ; irpos w. gen. ; 
 
 irplv (conj.) §240, 1. 
 begin, to, apx" or iirapxa, § 280 ; 
 
 I begin to run, Spo/ios ytyverai 
 
 flOl. 
 
 behalf of, irip, w. gen. 
 behind, in the rear, tvuTSai, adv. 
 belong to, to. «?>"". § 169, 1. 
 benefit, to, i>^e\iw ; to benefit 
 
 greatly, ii.iya ih^eXcu. 
 besiege, to, iroXwp/t^u. 
 best, ipuiTos, -iji -ov ; seem best, 
 
 doxiio. 
 betray, to, irpoSlSa/u. 
 between, pxra^i, w. gen. 
 beyond, irip, w. ace. or gen. 
 bid, to, KeXeitj). 
 black, /iiiXas, lUXauia, /iiXow. 
 blackness, pie)Mvla {ii). 
 'blame, to, (pass. ), eirtri/idu, w. dat> 
 
 blow, ttXijvi} (ij). 
 
 boasting, /leyaX'^opos, -a, -or. 
 
 boat, TrXotop {t6). 
 
 boldly, dappaXius (adv.). 
 
 book, pi^tov (t6). 
 
 bom, to be, ylynpuu.. 
 
 both, api^oTepoi ; both . . . and, koI 
 . . . Kal; Tk ... Kal: Kal = the Lat. 
 et: re (enclitic) = Lat. que; both 
 . . . and in partieularf oi- partic- 
 ularly, Ti . . .Kal; or dual. 
 
 bow, to use the, ro^eiu. 
 
 boy, TTois (6), § 25, 3, N. 
 
 bracelet, \f/e\tov (to). 
 
 brave, iyae6s,-^,-6v, §73, 1 ; (man- 
 ly), ivSpeios, -e(o, -ciox. 
 
 bravery, apcr^ (^). 
 
 breadth, eSpos (to). 
 
 break of day, at, dp-a rrj ijuipif. 
 
 break down, to, XiSu ; to break a 
 treaty, irTovSas Meiv. 
 
 breakfast, ipiarov (to). 
 
 breastplate, Bdipai {<>)■ 
 
 bridge, ykipvpa, (^). 
 
 bridle, xa'^u'iSs (»)• 
 
 brother, dSeX^As (6) ; voc. £Se\<jie. 
 
 bum, to, raw or KoXa; bum up, 
 KdraKaita. 
 
 but, dXXci ; 5i. 
 
 by, (the agent), irb w. gen. ; by, 
 a particle of swearing, /id, vij, see 
 § 163 ; along by, Trapd, with the 
 ace. ; near by, w. dat. ; by land, 
 Kh.Tb, yrjv ; by the side of, irapd, 
 w. dat. ; (to a position ) by the'side 
 of, TTopd, w. ace. ; by the side of 
 the road, rapck rifv 656v ; trans- 
 lated by gen. § 171, 1, and N. ; 
 by partie, § 277, 2. 
 
uaU 
 
 64 
 
 coiiteat 
 
 0. 
 
 call (anmmoii), to, /nxXlu; (name), 
 
 camp, aKTjval (ol) ; aTpaT&ireSov 
 
 (r6). 
 can, SinaiMi., § 122 2, N. 2. 
 canal, ai\thv (6). 
 captain, Xoxayos (a), 
 care, to take care of, iTL/ji^Xeo/iai, 
 
 § 171, 2 ; take .care, care for, 
 
 lieXft iwi, w. gen. 
 carelessly, iuueXtni'vun, adv. 
 carry oa 'tivi, to, jroXe/iia ; carry, 
 
 case, in, cl w. the nidic. or opta- 
 tive. \ 
 
 cast at, to, p<i\\<i> ; to cast stones 
 at him, j8aXXe<i/ air^v '\i6ois. 
 
 cease, to, iravofjun (mid. \. 
 
 centre, fie(roi> (to). 
 
 certain, a, ris (enclitic). 
 
 certainly, ^ /iiji'. 
 
 character, TpoTTos (6) ; (disposition), 
 4)ia-ts {ii) ; in accordanoe with 
 the character of, irplis toO tj>6/rov, 
 
 chariot, &pim (to). 
 
 Chersonesus, Xeppovqaos (^). 
 
 choose, to, alpeofiai. 
 
 Cilicia, KtXiKla (^). 
 
 citadel, d,Kp6iro\Ls (ij). 
 
 citizen, itoXIttjs (6). 
 
 city (either the place, or its inhabi- 
 tants, or both), iroXis {i)) ; iarv 
 (not including the inhabitants) ; 
 the men or those in the city, oi 
 h affTEi auBpuToi, or oi fc Sarei, 
 § 141, N. 3. 
 
 Clearchus, KXeapxos (4). 
 
 cloud, ve<l>k\ii (^). 
 
 cohort, Tojis (tJ). 
 
 cold, x"/"'" (^)- 
 
 collect (levy, assemble), to, aSpol- 
 fu; collect (lead together), o-uX- 
 Xfyw. 
 
 come, to, Ipxo/mi ; am come, iJKw, 
 § 200, N. 3 ; to come together, 
 aviiepxo/uu ; to come forward, 
 vpoepxapuu ; come back, ^xa. 
 
 command, to, wpotaTni/u, used in 
 this sense only in the intransitive 
 parts, pf., plupf., fut. pf. and 2d 
 ao. tenses, § 171^ 3 ; command 
 (to do something), KeXeia ; com- 
 mand (an army), arpaTrfyea, 
 §171, 3 ; command (order), tot- 
 Tu w. ace. ; command (to act as 
 commander), eirurTaTiu. 
 
 commander, apx^m (6). 
 
 commit injustice, to, aSiKem. 
 
 commotion, SoSiroi (6). 
 
 company, of infantry, rdfis (J)) ; 
 of horse, tXii {ii) ; company with, 
 in, trill, w, dat. ; nerti w. gen. 
 
 compel, to, Pidfo/mi, w. ace. and 
 intln. 
 
 conceal, to, kpvittw. 
 
 concerns, it, p-iXei. ; concerning, 
 irepl, w. gen. ; to be concerned, 
 &x6oiMu. 
 
 confusion, ripaxos (o). 
 
 conquer, to, vixdu ; to be con- 
 quered, ^rrdouai. 
 
 conscious, I am, aiiiotSa i/rnvrf, 
 § 127, VII ;§ 187. 
 
 consult together, to, a-v/ipovXeio/uu. 
 
 contend, to, ipij^u, § 186, N. 1 ; 
 to contend with any one for 
 any thing, avTiiroielaBai (mid. of 
 dcTHroi^u) Tivl Tims, § 173, 1, N. 2; 
 
 § 186, ]sr. 1. 
 contest, irytiv (o). 
 
control 
 
 55 
 
 do 
 
 control, to, tx"- 
 convene, to, <rvvdyoi. 
 co-operate, to, avf^rpdrTiD. 
 costly, iroXuTeXiis, -h. 
 counsel, ^oiXev/ja (t4) ; (ru^/SouXi) (rf). 
 count upon, to, 'Koyl^o/mi. 
 country (territory), xiipa (^) ; na- 
 tive country, TrarpLs (ij). 
 
 cross, to, Siipaliiu; a crossing, 
 
 crown, <rT^<pavos (6). 
 
 cry out, to, /Sodu. 
 
 custom, ci^os (6). 
 
 out off, to, iKK&irTu ; cut in pieces, 
 
 KaraKlnrTU ; cut down, iKulmTU). 
 Cyrus, Kvpos (6). 
 
 D. 
 
 danger, Klvdvms (6) ; incur danger, 
 
 to, KLvdvvedw. 
 dare, to, roX/jdu. 
 daric, SapencSs (6). 
 Darius, Aa/jeios (6). 
 darkness, fieXavla (ii). 
 dart, TraXrdv {t6). 
 daughter, Bvydrrip (^). 
 dawn, at, S,/m &p8pif. 
 day, Tip.ipa (ii) ; day's journey or 
 
 n?arch, (rraBp-bi (6). 
 death, fldvoTos. (6) ; to put to 
 
 death, AiroKTeivu. 
 deceive, to, ij/e6du. 
 decide, to, yiyviixTKU. 
 declare, Aveiirov, 2d aor. 
 deep, /SdfliJs, -e?a, -i; four deep, 
 
 iirl Terrdpcov, 
 defeated, to be, iirrdoimi.. 
 delay, to, Siarpipu. 
 deliberate, to, ^ovXeioimi (mid.), 
 deliver up, to, wapaSlSo/uu. 
 delicious, ■i/dis, -eio, -i. 
 demand, to, diraiTiu. 
 dense, irvKvb^, -^, '6v. 
 deny, to, off <t>Tiiu, 
 depart, to, aireifu; direpxa/xai. 
 dcS3rb, to, auTOfioXeoj ; a.ir€pxo^ai. ; 
 
 many deserted from the king, 
 
 irapd ^affiX^tas iroXXoi &ttjX$qv. 
 design, to, f*tavo4ojActi. 
 
 deserve, the one deserving (it), 
 
 iTiT-^ScLOS, -OV. 
 
 desire, iiri.dup.la (^). 
 
 desire, to, ^7ri9u/i^u ; xpvt'^; (nouu) 
 Trddos (6). 
 
 despatch, to, d7ro7r^^nru. 
 
 destroy, to, dtpaipita ; \i>u. 
 
 die, to, dirodviiaKia, eviinKW, § 200, 
 N. 6. 
 
 differ, to, Siatjiipu. 
 
 difficult, x**\67r6s, Sv(nr6p€VT0Sf -ov ; 
 &p.ijXo.vos, -ov. 
 
 difficulty, &Topov, neut. of iiropos, -ov 
 
 diligent, p.eXeTrjp6s, -d, -6v. 
 
 Dionysius, Aioviio-ios (6). 
 
 directed, to be, el/it; to direct, 
 dtroSeiKVvpit.. 
 
 direction, in this, Tai-ry, adv. 
 
 disgracefcl, al(Txp6s, -d, -Iw. 
 
 dismiss, to, &<j>lrip.i. 
 
 displeased, to be, iix^<>M<"- 
 
 divinity, Sa.lp.av (6). 
 
 do (perform, act), to, Trpdrria 
 (either trans, or intrans.) ; ttoi^oi 
 (make, appoint), (trans.) ; do 
 well or good, eB iroiiw ; should 
 (must) be done, TrotTTreos, -a, -ov^ 
 § 281, 1 and 2 ; to be successful 
 or fortunate, KaXwy Tr/jdrrw ; to 
 do harm or ill to, icaKus troUta, 
 § 165, N. 1. 
 
door 
 
 se 
 
 favor 
 
 door, dipa (j\). 
 
 down, down from, Kari. w. gen. 
 
 draw up (in military order), to, 
 
 rirrw. 
 drink, to, ttIvu ; (noun), vot6v (t6). 
 drive, to, ^leXaiivu. 
 
 due, to be, 6tf>il\ofiai. 
 
 duly authorized, Ixivbt, -i), -bv. 
 
 duty of, it is, {iaH) w. predicative 
 
 genitive, § 1-69, 1. 
 dwell, to, oJK^w. 
 
 E. 
 
 each, ^Koo-Tos, -ti, -ov; each other, 
 
 dXXiJXwi/, § 81. 
 eagle, dcTis (6). 
 earth, yij (^). 
 easy, eOTrpaicroSf -ov. 
 eat, to, iaBlia. 
 educate, to, iratSeuu. 
 effect a passage, to, vapipxa/mi. 
 either . . . or, i) . . .ij. 
 elder, irpeap&repos, -a, -ov. 
 Eleian, 'HXeios (o). 
 embark, to, ifipalvu. 
 empire, dpx^ (^)- 
 employ, to, x/xioM"'. § 188, 1, N. 2 ; 
 
 § 98, N. 2. 
 encamp, to, (rTpaTO-ireSeio/Mi (mid.), 
 end, reXeuTiJ (^). 
 endure, to, dK^o/ioi. 
 enemy (enemy in war), iroKip.ioi 
 
 (6) ; personal enemy, ix^ph (6). 
 engaged in military operations, 
 
 to be, arpareiofiaL ; to engage in 
 
 war, TToXeyu^w. 
 enjoy (use), to, xfx'^oimi (mid.), 
 
 § 188, 1, N. 2. 
 enough, Uafd!, -i), -6v. 
 
 enquire, to, ipuriia. 
 
 enter, to, tlaipxopju; Sdvio, see 
 
 § 128, 1, fine print, 
 enterprise, 7rpo|ts (■i). 
 entreat, to, Siop-ai, w. gen. 
 err, to, A/jLapriivu. 
 
 escape, to, iKipeiya. [N. 6. 
 
 Euphrates, Ei^parris (6), § 142, 2, 
 every, everyone, ttos, jrooa, tcLv; 
 
 everybody, iras ris ; everything, 
 
 neut. of Trds tis, or simply rd, iravra.. 
 evident, tpavepbt, -d, -iv; StJXos, -17, 
 
 ■ov, § 280, N. 1. 
 evils, Kaxd pi. of xanbs. 
 exceedingly, la-xvpwt, adv. 
 except, irXi)!', w. gen. 
 exercise, to, yvpj/i^. 
 exhibit, to, diroSekvu/u. 
 exile, 0u7ds (6) ; 6(/>eiyuv; 6^CTrc7r- 
 
 TOMciis, § 276, 2. 
 expedient, it seems, ioxei. 
 expedition, to make, orpaTeioiMi. 
 expel, to, iK^dWu. 
 expend, to, Sairai/dw. 
 extricate, to (help to), (rweiqStjSdj^. 
 eye, 6^8aKn6s (0). 
 
 F. 
 
 faithful, vurrds, -1), -61'. 
 
 fall, to, tIttoj; to fall upon or 
 to fall into, iimlitTui ; to fall 
 down, iKwiirTu, m. 
 
 farther, toO vpbaa, partitive gen., 
 lit., (a step) of the way forward. 
 
 fast, raxis, -eia, -i, §78, 10; as 
 fast as he could, ^ iSivaro rd- 
 XicTTo; the faster, itrip flSTToi', 
 § 188, 2. 
 
 father, iraTi}p (d). 
 
 favor, to do a, e8 iroi^u, §165,N. 1. 
 
favorable condition 
 
 57 
 
 famish 
 
 fkvorable condition, to be in, 
 
 (caXfis Ix^iv. 
 
 fear, 04/3os (d). 
 
 fear, to, 1st or 2d pf. of Seldai, with 
 ace. or with yiii) ; (hesitate), oKvioi, 
 w. firi, § 218 ; to be frightened, 
 (po^ioiuu ; (reverence ), alSioftai.. 
 
 feet, hundred feet, irXiBpav (rb). 
 
 fellow, fellow soldiers, avSpet 
 * ffT/jariiSrai. 
 
 few, 6\lyoi., -ai, -a. 
 
 fifteen, Treirc/ca/Seico, indecl. ; fif- 
 teen hundred, ircvraKdaioi Kal 
 
 &&j,irevT-fiK0VTa, indecl. 
 
 fight, to, lidxof-ai. 
 
 find, to, tuplcTKu; found, to be, 
 iwdpx'^i if any one shall be 
 found doing good to us, iav 
 /iivToi. T(S ^juos Kal eB irociiv iriipxv- 
 
 first, irpCJTos, -t), -on; at first, 
 irpuiTov. 
 
 fiih, Ix^is (o). ^ 
 
 fit time, xaipis (6) 
 
 five, wivre, indecl. ; five thou- 
 sand, TroKTaKiffx'X'oi, -oi, -o. 
 
 flay, to, ixdipw. 
 
 flee, to, 0ei)7w- 
 
 flesh-scraper, <rT\eYYls {ii). 
 
 flight, ^i/yi) {ii). 
 
 flourishing, eiSatpunv, -ok. 
 
 flow, to, ^4a. 
 
 follow, to, «7ro/ioi, § 184, 2. 
 
 followers, ot vepl airdv. 
 
 following manner, in the, USe, adv. ; 
 rdvSe T&u rpinrov, § 160, 2. ; on the 
 following day, tJ ia-repcUq., § 189 ; 
 on (during) the following day, 
 § 161 ; (arriving at and ex- 
 tending into the following day) 
 generally rendered on the fol- 
 lowing day, eis t}]v (jarepalav. 
 
 folly, ei-ZiBeM (^). 
 fond of learning, tpiKo/iaS/is, -4s. 
 food (nourishment, support), 
 Tpo(j>ri (^) ; (com, grain), nros 
 
 \ / HI 
 
 fool, fi6.Tau)S (d). 
 
 foolish, ei^erji, -£S. 
 
 foot, irois (d). 
 
 for, ydp conj. ; for the sake o^ 
 IpcKa w. gen. ; Sid w. ace. ; for 
 what, dih rt; iirl w. dat. ; (in 
 behalf of), iirip w. gen. ; after 
 verbs of asking, see § 164. 
 
 force, pla {ij) ; force or forces, Si- 
 vap.ts (^). 
 
 foregoing time, in the, ivr^ jrptur$e» 
 
 forget, to, iirikavOdvopai. 
 former, irpirrepos, -a, -ov; the for- 
 mer . . . the latter, o! piiv . . . 
 
 olS4. 
 fortified, ipv/iyis, -ij, -6v. 
 forty, TcaaapdKovra ; forty-five, 
 
 iriirre Kal TeatrapdKovra. 
 fountain, Kpivq (4)' 
 four, Th-rapes, § 77 ; four deep, iwl 
 
 reTTdptov; four thousand, rerpa- 
 
 Ktax^^Loiy -at, -a. 
 free, iXeddepoSf -tj, -ov. 
 freedom, 4\e\i6epla (•^). 
 frequently, roWdKis, adv. 
 friendly, to be, eCmVcffls ^x"- 
 friend, 0l\o:, (d). 
 friendly, 0(\ios, -la, -lov. 
 from (away from a place), dtrb w. 
 
 gen. ; (out of), i^ w. gen. ; (from 
 
 beside a person), vapd. 
 front, in front ol^ trpb w. gen. 
 fugitive, <l>vyd% (d). 
 full, TrXi7pi(S, -fs. 
 furlong, fl-T-dSfoc (t4). 
 furnish, to, n-op^u. 
 
gam 
 
 68 
 
 hasten 
 
 G. 
 
 gain, to, KepSatvbi. 
 
 galley, Tpiiipiji Ipi). 
 
 games, iyiliv (d). 
 
 garrison, <t>vKia.Kii (^). 
 
 gates, iri)Xo( (ai) ; gate, 6ipa (ii). 
 
 general, o-rpoTin'os (d). 
 
 girdle, fiiyi; (it). 
 
 give, to, Slbwiu; to give up the 
 idea (of doing anything), 6.to- 
 yiyiiiiaKa ; to give orders, irapay- 
 vAXu ; to publicly give notice, 
 jrpoayopeiu ; to give one's oath, 
 Sfivvpu. 
 
 glad, to be, ijBo/juii. 
 
 gladly, ijdioK. 
 
 Glus, rXoOs (d). 
 
 go, to, elfu; (pxopjai; go down, ko- 
 Ta^alvu; go away, dTr^p^o/uH ; 
 go further, Uvai roS rp6(r<o ; go 
 against, Umt iirl w. ace. ; to go 
 up, drajSalxu; to go forward, 
 irpictpu ; go into, ip.^alvu> ; let go, 
 lupltiiu ; go back, airei/u. 
 
 God, ffeis (d). 
 
 gold, xpvalov (T-d). 
 
 golden, xpw^oCs, -^, -oC» ; having a 
 gold-studded bridle, xpvo'oxdXt- 
 xos, -oi». 
 
 gone, am, oi'xo/Mii, § 200, K. 3. 
 
 good, &ya06s, -ii, -bv; it seems 
 good or iexpedient, 5om; good 
 looking, eieiSiis, -4s ; good thing, 
 iyadbv, neut. ace. of d,ya6bi\ to 
 be of good cheer, Bapplu. 
 
 goodness, &peTii (^). 
 
 govern as satrap, to, aarpaireiiii. 
 
 government, ipx^l (i). 
 
 grant, to, Sl6up.t. 
 
 grass, x'^^ds (d). 
 
 gratify, to, x«/>'foA«" w. ace. and dat. 
 
 great, /a^yos, iieydXTi, /iiya ; great- 
 ly, M^a. adv. 
 
 Greek, "BWtji' (o) ; in the Greek 
 language, '^Wtivikus. 
 
 grieved, to be deeply, xa^fTus 
 tpipta ; to be grieved, \vTrio;juit,. 
 
 ground, yn (i)); on the ground 
 that, lis w.partic, § 277, 6, N. 2; 
 groundless, cecjs, -i), -di-. 
 
 guard, to, ^vkdrTu ; guard (senti- 
 nel), <pi\a^ (d) ; guard (garri- 
 son), ^vXaK-^ (4) ; to guard the 
 rear, 6irt(r6o^v\aKio). 
 
 guest, lA'os (d). 
 
 guide, iiyep.<liv (d) 
 
 guilty, to be, iStKiu. 
 
 H. 
 
 habit, were in the, by the imper- 
 fect tense, § 200, N. 5. 
 
 half, i/jiuavs, -e<o, -V. 
 
 hand, xf'p (^)- 
 
 happan, to, rvyxdva w. partic, 
 § 279, 4 ; happened to be his 
 guest, ^hos to iriyxa'c oiirijj; 
 ylyvop.ai. 
 
 happy, eiSalp,av, -ok. 
 
 harass, to, Xurr^o) w. ace. 
 
 harbor, Xi/ni)i' (d). 
 
 hare, Xoycis (d), § 42, 2, N. 1. 
 
 harm, to do harm to, KaK&s votiu 
 
 w. ace. ; (injure), dSirfw. 
 hasten, to, mid. of ttiiit; oppdopai.; 
 
 to be in haste, (rjreu'Su) w. infin. 
 
hastily 
 
 59 
 
 immediately 
 
 hastily, rayi, adv. 
 
 have, to, fxM> j or by dative of pos- 
 sessor, § 184, 4. 
 
 hay, x4/)Tos (o) 
 
 he, she, it, when the subject of a 
 verb, or when readily supplied 
 from the context, not expressed, 
 unless for the sake of emphasis, 
 §144, 1, and §134, K 1; he, 
 himself, she, herself, they, 
 themselves, the proper form of 
 oiris, -ii, -6, § 145, 1 ; § 79, 1, N. 
 1 ; he who, often by the article 
 with the partic, § 276, 2, and 
 § 148, N. 3. 
 
 head, Kc^oXi} (^). 
 
 hear, to, d/couoi. 
 
 heat, KaOfia {t6)^ 
 
 heavy-armed soldier, ottX/tijs (o). 
 
 heights, aicpa {to.). 
 
 helmet, Kpdms (t4). 
 
 herald, ktJ/juJ (d). 
 
 here (at this veryplaoe), aiiToC, adv. 
 
 hill, y^\o<l)05 (o). 
 
 him, her, it, them, oiris, -i}, -A, 
 § 79, N. 1, and § 146, 2 ; § 144, 2. 
 
 himself, herself, itself, them- 
 selves, when intensive bythe prop- 
 er form of airds, -i), -A, § 79, N. 1 ; 
 § 142, 4, N. 6; reflexive, iavroS, 
 iavTTJs, iavTou, or ainoVj aOrl^j, 
 airoS with or without oftris, § 80 ; 
 § 146 ; by the middle voice, § 199. 
 
 hinder, to, KuXia. 
 
 hire, to, iu<r06a. 
 
 his, her, its, "their, not referring 
 to the subject of their sentence, 
 the gen. singular or plural of 
 ofiriSs, § 142, 4, N. 3 ; when refer- 
 ring to the subject of their verb 
 the gen. of the reflexive pronoun 
 is used, § 142, 4, N. 3 ; when not 
 emphatic by the article, § 141, N. 
 2 ; also by the possessive pronoun, 
 §147. 
 
 hit, to, d,KOvTil^u, 
 
 hold, to, ^x*^- 
 
 home, homeward, of/caSe, § 61. 
 
 honor, to, ri/idu ; honor, ri/ii) (ij). 
 
 honorable, rifnoSf -a, -ov. 
 
 hope, i\Tls (ii). 
 
 hoplite, otXIttis (o). 
 
 horse,' Vttttos (o) ; on horseback 
 (with verbs signifying to hunt), 
 d0' trrov; with verbs signifying 
 to ride, i(p' iirwov. 
 
 horseman, lirweis (d). 
 
 hostile, TToX^juios, -a, -ov. 
 
 house, £6juos (d). 
 
 how, TTus, in direct questions; 
 Sttus, in indirect, § 282, 1 ; how 
 much, ttAo-os, -ri, -ox ; how many, 
 Siyos, -Ij, -ov. 
 
 however, inivroi, adv., sometimes, 
 liiv. 
 
 hundred, iKarSv, indecl. 
 
 hunger, Xi/iis (d). 
 
 hunt, STipeuw; to hunt on horse- 
 back, Sripeva dir6 iirirov. 
 •1, to, /SaXXu. 
 
 Ir^" 
 
 I, iyd,, ipioS, § 144, 1. 
 
 if, ci, before the indicative and op- 
 tative; iav, before the subjunc- 
 tive. 
 
 ill, KaK&s ; treat ill, xaKus iroUa. • 
 immediately, ciSiis; when used to 
 
 add expllcitness to particles, often 
 
 rendered by Si}. 
 
impassable 
 
 69 
 
 juatiae 
 
 impassable, A^'^x^^^^t ~^^' 
 
 in, ii>, with dative ; fU (after verbs 
 
 of motion), w. aoc. 
 in accordance with the character, 
 
 irpos ToC rpiirov, 
 in 3,3 much as, iSis w. partic, § 277, 
 
 6, N. 2. 
 in behalf of, iirip w. geu. 
 income, TrplnroSos (ii). 
 in company with, iTiii> w. dat. 
 in order that, iva, § 216. 
 in that place, inraxiSa, adv. 
 in the following manner, &Se, adv. ; 
 
 rixSe rbv rpbrov, § 148, N. 1 ; 
 
 § 160, 2. 
 in the power of, ivL w. dat. 
 in the presence of, wpoi w. gen. ; 
 
 after verbs of motion with ace. ; 
 
 those in presence of the Idng, 
 
 indeed, S^. 
 
 infantry, fXij (^). 
 
 inferior, to be, iiTrdo/iat, § 175, 2. 
 
 inflict punishment, to, SUrip iiri- 
 
 ri9y]p>i,. 
 inform, to, a-rjualva, § 110, il. 2 ; to 
 
 give information, p.tivia. 
 
 inhabitants, ol Mucouxres. 
 
 injure, to iSiK^a; without doing 
 injury, iaivQs. 
 
 injustice, to commit, iSix^ia; 
 (noun) dSida (^). 
 
 inquire (seek), to, fiyr^w. 
 
 in regard to, irpds w. ace. 
 
 in return for, drri w. gen. 
 
 inspect, to, iTUTKtnriu. 
 
 instead of, ami w. gen. 
 
 insuperable, d/i'^x'"'0'> -o"- 
 
 intelligent, o-o^Sf, -i), -ok. 
 
 intend, to, p,4\\a, §118, 6. intend- 
 ing or with the intention of, 
 (ij with a partic, § 277, 6, N. 2. 
 
 interpret^, ipur/veis (6). 
 
 into, els w. ace. ; into the presence 
 of, Trpij w. aco. 
 
 Ionia, 'luvla (^). 
 
 it, airis, airii, auVo, § 79, TS. 1 ; 
 § 145, 2. 
 
 it is characteristic of, (^ittI), with 
 the predicative genitive, § 169, 
 1. 
 
 it is necessary, 5« ; dvdyKJi {ij) with 
 (iarlv). 
 
 itself see himself. 
 
 javelin, tra\T6v {t6). 
 
 join, to, aviiidympj., § 187 ; join in 
 a war against, trvfnro\ep,4<a Tp6s 
 w. ace. ; join in an expeditiM| 
 against, <rv<rTpaTfioiuu iirl w. acco 
 (band together) ffwlarriiu. 
 
 journey, oSos (^) ; a day's journey, 
 ffroff/iis (6). 
 
 Jove, Zeis (6). 
 judge, KpiT-^s (6). 
 Jupiter, Zeis (6), voe. ZeO. 
 just, Siraios, -a, -oc; justly, Sixaia 
 (neut. pin. of Skaios), also StKafu:. 
 just now, SiJ. 
 justice, punishment, SIkii (4)- 
 
keep guard 
 
 61 
 
 love 
 
 keep guard, to, <I>v\6,ttw. 
 
 kill, to, diroKTelvia ; (pass. iirodi>'^(TK<o). 
 
 king, /SairiXeiJs (6) ; am king, /8a- 
 
 kingdom, ^atnXda (^). 
 
 know, t,-, olSa, see §200, N. 6; 
 iirlaTaimi. (§ 122. 2, N. 2); (per- 
 ceive) ytyviliiTKw. 
 
 knowledge of, without the, "K&Spa 
 w. gen. ; or by XavBivia with a 
 paitic. , § 279, 4 ; I should wish 
 to depart without the knowl- 
 edgb of Cj^rus, povKolii-qv Sw 
 XaBeir KSpov dweXdiiy, § 204, N. 
 2. 
 
 L. 
 
 land, 7^ (ii); by land, xarck y^k; 
 to land, aVoj3i/3(ifa). 
 
 language, in the Greek language, 
 'BXXijj'iKws. 
 
 large, /i^yas, /ieydKri, iiAya. 
 
 last, Icrxaros, --q, -ov, § 142, 4, N. 4. 
 
 laughter, yi\m (6). 
 
 law, xo/ios (6). 
 
 lay (down) up, to, KaTarWenai, 
 mid. ; I did not lay (them) up 
 for myself for my own private 
 use, ovK eis rb ISiov KaTe8i/i.iji> i,uoi. 
 
 lay waste, to, ri/jaia. 
 
 lead, to, dyiii ; lead away or back, 
 diriyu; lead up, dvdyw; (com- 
 mand), iiyioim'. w. gen. 
 
 leader, ^eiuiv (6). 
 
 learn, to, irnvBAva ; KaTaimvBdvw. 
 
 learning, fond of learning, ipCKo- 
 /juB'^s, -h. 
 
 leave, to, \elru ; to leave behind, 
 
 left, eviivv/ios, -ok; the left wing, 
 rb fviivv/iov ; the left hand, i] dpur- 
 ripa Xf'p- 
 
 leisure, (rxpKi (if) ; to be at leisure, 
 (TxoXdfw." 
 
 langth, /iiJKos (ri). 
 
 lest, /ti} (after verbs of fearing), 
 
 §218. 
 let, idui ; by the subjunctive or the 
 
 imperative, § 252 and § 2.53. 
 letter, ^TrttrroXi} {tj). 
 levy, levying (of troops), a-uXXoyi) 
 
 (^) ; to l3vy, (TvWiyu}. 
 liberty, iXcvBepla (^). 
 lie (dead) , to, Keifiai, § 127, VI 
 life, /3ios (o). 
 lift up, to, atpa. 
 light-armed man, yvfiv/irris (o). 
 like, to, am pleased with, ijdoiMi. 
 little, i5Xl7os, -ij, -o>', § 73, 6 ; want 
 
 little, 6\lyov S4a, § 172, 2, N. 2. 
 live, to, ««), § 98, N. 2. 
 loiter, to, pXaKeia. 
 long (much), iroXtis, ttoXXij, ttoXi). 
 longer, no, ovKh-i; laiKh-i; §283; 
 
 longer, ft-i. 
 look, to, /3X6rai. 
 loose, to, Xiiu ; to let loose, dipirifu ; 
 
 to cause to let forth, d<j>leijuu, 
 
 mid. ; the one who let loose the 
 
 ass, rbv dipivra rbv Svoy ; to let 
 
 go, d(t>iriiit. 
 loud, iroXiis, TToXX^, rd\6. 
 love, to, ^i\4(i>. I 
 
maintam 
 
 62 
 
 my 
 
 M. 
 
 maintain, to, rplijiia; (another 
 army) was secretly maintaiiied, 
 
 Tpe^o/Jtsmv i\&vdai>ev. 
 
 make, to, iroUu ; make an expedi- 
 tion, ffTpareOofiaif make war, 
 iroXc/j^w ; to be made, ylyyo/Mi. ; 
 make a treaty, (nrivSo/MU ; make 
 ai^ agreement, avmiBctuu (mid.), 
 §187 ; to make a levy, tt]v av\- 
 \or^^v troiov/iat - (mid. ) ; make 
 oath, tp-vv/u. 
 
 man, dv/ip (6) (Lat. vir) ; 6.vBpmroi 
 (o) (Lat. homo); sometimes ren- 
 dered by the predicative gen., 
 § 169, 1 ; the men of that time, 
 ol tAtc &v6piinroi, § 141, N. 3. 
 
 manager, oIkov6iju)s (o). 
 
 manifest, S^Xos, -i;, -ov; mani- 
 festly, § 280, N. 1. 
 
 many, xoXXoI, -ai, -d; as many as 
 possible, 8n TrXeio-TOi, -a'. -"■■ 
 
 march, to, vopeio/uu (of either the 
 general or the army) ; i^eXaiva 
 (of the general) ; arpaTeliw (of the 
 army) ; march away, iireKaivui. 
 
 march, 6S6s (ji) ; a day's march, 
 . (rTadp.6s (6) ; iropeia {ij). 
 
 market-place, dyopd (4) ; market, 
 to furnish a market, dyop&v 
 
 vapix^^"- 
 Marsyas, MapcriJas (d) 
 master o^ eyxpariji (o). 
 meat, Kp4a (rd), § 56, 1. 
 meet (to fall in with), to, ei^iry- 
 
 xivi^i (to go out to meet), 
 
 oVoJTdu. 
 Men of Greece, 0, H &iidpes"&\\'ip'e5. 
 Menon, M.^nuv (d). 
 
 mention, to, \eya. 
 mercenary, ^eviK6s, -■)), -6v. 
 message, iyyeXta [ii). 
 messenger, 477eXos (o). 
 middle, /irf<ros, -i;, -ov, § 142, 4, 
 
 N. 4. 
 Miletus, W.l\ijTos (^). 
 mina, fwa {ii). 
 mind, roSs (o). 
 mingle, to, Kepdtw/u. 
 moderately, /ter/olus. 
 money, xP'iM'"''' ('"''}• 
 month, /xtJc (d). 
 more, /xaXXov; more than, yuaXXoc 
 
 ij; more (in number), comp. of 
 
 TToXlJs. 
 
 morning, Im {ii) ; the following 
 morning, ij eVioCira las. 
 
 most, the very, Sn wXetiTTOi. 
 
 mother, /iijnjp (^). 
 
 mountain, ipos (t6). 
 
 much, iroXi/s, -i), -i) ; how much, 
 irdffos ; S<ro5, as much. 
 
 mud, irTjXds (d). 
 
 multitude, irX^ffos {t6} 
 
 must, Sei, § 184, 2, N. 1 ; by the 
 verbal in -rios, § 281, 1 and 2 ; we 
 must do this, TaSra ii/uf (or ^Ss, 
 § 188, 4) TTOirireov errlv, or raCra 
 ilpBi Set ToiTJirai,, § 184, 2, N. 1. 
 
 my, f/ids, -i}, -OK, or the personal 
 pronoun, § 147, when not emphatic 
 by the article, and § 141, N. 2 ; 
 my own, the reflexive pronoun, 
 §80; §142, 4, N. 3; myself, 
 when intensive, the proper form 
 of ouTos, -t}, -6, §145; myself, 
 reflexive, ejHowoO, inavrrjs, § 146. 
 
63 
 
 often 
 
 N. 
 
 name, Byo/w, {t6) ; named, see § 160, 
 1 ; named Cydnus, KiSvos 6voim. 
 
 narrow, a-Tev6s, -^, -bv. 
 
 narrowly, luxpiiv, adv. 
 
 nation, IBvos (t6). 
 
 native land, irarpis {ii). 
 
 near, iyyis vr. gen., §182, 2, fine 
 print ; iwl w. gen. dat. ; wapd (by 
 the side of), irpds (in the presence 
 of), w. dat. ; TrXijtrios, -a, -ov, for 
 comparisoii see vocab. 
 
 necessary, it is, x/"} j to be neces- 
 sary, dh/mi, § 172 and N. 1. 
 
 necessity, AvdyK-q {r/) ; unless there 
 was some necessity for it, el ii'fi 
 Ti di/ayKotov el-q, § 226, 1 ; it is 
 necessary (lit., there is a ne- 
 cessity to me), d,v6,yKri fioi. 
 
 neck, Tp&xv^"^ (o). 
 
 necklace, <rTpeirT6s (d). 
 
 need, am in, S^o,uai. 
 
 need, to, S^a ; there is need of, 5«, 
 § 172 and N. 2; to be in need, 
 
 negligently, rip.e\TiiJiii><iis. 
 neighbor, yelrwv (d) ; as an adj., 
 
 neighboring to or adjacent to, 
 
 w. gen. or dat. 
 neither . . . nor, oihe . . . ofre ; /i-^e 
 
 .../iiiTc, §283. 
 
 never, oHirvre; /i-^are; otxtri; see 
 §283. 
 
 nevertheless, Si with a correspond- 
 ing ixhi. 
 
 next, ix^fuvos, -ti, -oc; Proxenns 
 being next, Jlpb^ei/oi ixblievos ; 
 next to, Trpis w. dat. 
 
 night, ciij (ij) ; about midnight, 
 ■jrepl n^ffat viKTas. 
 
 no (not), oi ; no, nor, aXV oiSi; 
 no longer, oiKin ; juijcA-i ; § 283. 
 
 no one, nobody, ouSeis; /juriSels; rh 
 with a negative ; § 283. 
 
 noise, 06pvpos (d). 
 
 nonsens3, <p\vapia {i]). 
 
 north, UpKTOs (d). 
 
 not, ov ; ovK before the smooth 
 breathing; oi'x before the rough 
 breathing; in interrogative sen- 
 tences ou expects an affirmative 
 answer, yni} a negative answer. 
 For the use of ou and /i^, see 
 §283. 
 
 nothing, ovSh, /i-riSh ; § 283. 
 
 now (at this time) , vSv ; even now, 
 ijS-ri (already). 
 
 nowhere, ovSafiov. 
 
 number, ipiS/ibs (d); ttX^Aos {to). 
 
 O. 
 
 O, followed by the vocative, <5; 
 O that, the optative, either with 
 or without elBe or ei yap, § 251, 1. 
 
 obey, to, rcWo/Mi; to (must) be 
 obeyed, viarios, -a, -ov vr. dat. 
 
 obliquely, els icKiyiov. 
 
 observe, to, Karavoiw. 
 
 obtain, to, SiairpirToaaL (mid. ) ; 
 having obtained (bis request) 
 from the king that it should be 
 granted, dtairewpayfiivm ttoh^ ^- 
 (TiXiojs SodrjvaL. 
 
 occupy, to, ^w. 
 
 often, ?ro\\a^£s. 
 
old 
 
 64 
 
 permit 
 
 old, TC'Ca-pm, adj. ; to be (so many) 
 yoars old, einl w. gen. ; those 
 who are tairty years old, ol rpii- 
 Kovra Irri yeyovbrres, § 200, N. 6. 
 
 oa (situated on), ivL w. dat., or 
 gen. ; on ascoaat of, inKa w. 
 gen., &I.& w. ace. ; on the plain 
 of Castolus, iv KairruXoC ireSlif, 
 with verbs of rest ; with verbs of 
 motion, eis . . . veilov ; on the sup- 
 position that, lis with a partic., 
 § 277, 6, N. 2 ; to advance on 
 therun, 5/)(5/iifiS«v; on condition 
 that, i<fi 4'> § ^^^ t °'^ ^ sides, 
 iriirr-g, adv. ; on you, eis u/tSs. 
 
 one, efs, /u'a, if ; one of the oppo- 
 site party, dpriffTao-iiiTijs (d) : 
 one is translated by the gen. after 
 verbs to name, to appoint, etc., 
 § 16^, 2. 
 
 once, &>ra|, (on a certain time), 
 trori ; at once, now, ^S?;. 
 
 only, iwms, -ij, -ox. 
 
 oppose, to, KuiXiw. 
 
 opposed to, or opposite to, Kard 
 w. ace. 
 
 opposite to, KaravTuripas, w. gpu. 
 
 or, ri. 
 
 order, to (bid, urge), /ceXetfw; to 
 
 arrange in order, riaaw ; (to 
 
 tell, direct) ^/xifw. 
 order (law), vbiwi (6); (military) 
 
 order, rd^is (t)); in order of 
 
 battle, iv rd|ei ; in order that, 
 
 Xm, § 216. 
 originate from, to, ylyvo/mi. 
 ornament, Kbaiwi (6). 
 Orontas, 'Opirras (A), 
 other, 4\Xos, -j/, -o ; (of two), ?re- 
 
 poi, a. ov. 
 otherwise, dWios. 
 ought, xP'h'i S«. 
 our, by the gen. of personal pronoun, 
 
 or by the possessive, § 142, 4, N. 
 ■ 3 ; § 147, when not emphatic by 
 
 the article, § 141, N. 2. 
 out of, iK w. gen. 
 over, irip w. aco. or gen. 
 overcome, to, wicdw. 
 overpower, to, ;8idfo/uai. 
 owe, to, 6<t>el\u. 
 own, my own, your own, etc., gen. 
 
 of reflexive pronoun, § 142, 4, N. 3. 
 ox, |3aCs (d). 
 
 pack up one's baggage, to, avvKev- 
 d^ofuu. 
 
 palace, ^curlXeia (ra). 
 
 palm-tree, 4>olni (d). 
 
 park, Tapdd€Lf70i (d). 
 
 particularly, both . . . and particu- 
 larly, T* . . . Kal. 
 
 Parysatis, Jlapiffans {ij), 
 
 Pasion, Xlacrluv (d). 
 
 pass or passage, irrepjSoXi} {ij) ; iri- 
 Xai (al). 
 
 paternal, irarplfos, -a, -ov. 
 
 pay, p,ur6os (6) ; (to give pay), aTro- 
 
 diSa/u luadbv ; to pay attention, 
 
 fTTt/xeXeojUat. 
 people, 5ij/ios (d) ; the people of 
 
 the city, or in the city, oi h 
 perceive, to, alaBavopat, [iarei. 
 perhaps, ((tus. 
 perish, to, dTriXXu/iai (mid.) ; Airo- 
 
 BvfiffKw (used as the passive of 
 
 dTTOKTeivtOf to kill). 
 permit, to, idu ; it is permitted, 
 
 ((etrriv. 
 
perplexjd 
 
 €5 
 
 put 
 
 perplexed, to be, ivopiw. 
 
 Persian, Jlipa-ris (6). 
 
 persuade, irelBw. 
 
 phalanx, ipdXay^ {-q). 
 
 philosopher, <^i\(5iroi/)os (6), 
 
 Phrygia, ^pvyla {ri). 
 
 ^-igi~ii, Xliypris (6). 
 
 plaje, riiros (6), (country), x<i/"* 
 
 (il) ; to place, Hdiiiu ; in that 
 
 place, ii>rav6a, adv. ; place of 
 
 refuge, airoarpoijjTi (ri). 
 plain, irediov (to). 
 pleased, to be (take pleasure in), 
 
 ijSop.ai; to please (wish, to be 
 
 willing), poi\o/xai. 
 plethron, vXiBpov (to). 
 plot, i-iri^ovX'q (ij) ; to plot, jSou- 
 
 Xeio/iai,; to plot against, im- 
 
 Pov\eiu. 
 plunder, to, Stapviiio. 
 point out, to, iinSelKvv/u. 
 possess, to, KiicTr)p,ai, perf. of (trd- 
 
 o/aai with meaning of present, 
 
 § 200, N. 6 ; Ixw. 
 possession, Krripa (to). 
 possible, as many as, in. or (!is 
 
 irXeio-Toi (often with Sivapai), olos 
 
 re (of such a nature as); it is 
 
 possible, ?|e(rTi, or 1(7ti. 
 power, Sivap.!.! (i}) ; to be in the 
 
 power of, iirt w. dat. 
 prais3, liraims (A) ; praise, to, 
 
 preceding, on the preceding day, 
 T-g irptaBev vpepq., § 141, N. 3. 
 
 prepare, to, Trapao-zcEuafu ; pre- 
 pared (sufficient), Uavos. 
 
 preparation, irapaaKev-fi (]). 
 
 present, to be, wApeipt. 
 
 present, Swpaii (to) ; to present (to 
 offer), ira.p(x<^ ; present state of 
 affairs, rh. irapiura Trpdypara. 
 
 pretence, irp6(paa-i,s {■/)) ; on the 
 pretence, or pretending that, 
 lis w. ^artic, § 277, 6, N. 2. 
 
 pretext, irpSipacris (ij). 
 
 prevent, to, KuXia. 
 
 private person, ISiiir-qs (o) ; pri- 
 vate, IfStos, -la, -ov; for one's 
 own private use, cis ri ISiov. 
 
 prize, S.d\oii (tA). 
 
 proclaim, to, KaraKJipimi). 
 
 proceed, to, iropeioptai. ; irpSei/u. 
 
 promise, to, ^urxv^opui. 
 
 property, xy^/wca (ri.) ; sometimes 
 by the predicative gen., § 169, 1. 
 
 prosperous, eiSalpMv, -on; to be 
 prosperous or to prosper, § 165, 
 N. 2, cB TpiTTa. 
 
 prostrate one's self, to, irpovKiiviiii. 
 
 prove false, to, ^ciSopai (mid.). 
 
 provisions, ^iriTiJSeio {rd). 
 
 Proxenus, UpS^cms (o). 
 
 punishment. Ski; (ii) ; to punish, 
 KoXdfw ; suffer punishment, Sl- 
 Kyjjv didovat, 
 
 purchase, to, dyopd^u; wplaaBai, 
 2 aor. indie, iirpi.dp.riv only used 
 in the aor., the other tenses are 
 supplied by livio/mi. 
 
 purple, ^omKoSs, -^, -oBi'. 
 
 purpose of, for the, (Sis w. partic, 
 § 277, 6, N. 2 ; for this purpose, 
 eirl ToiTip. 
 
 pursue, to, didiKoi. 
 
 put, to, Ti8ijfi.i ; put on, hdioi ; put 
 to death, dirOKrelvin ; diroBv-liUKW 
 used as the passive of diroKrelva. 
 
quick 
 
 66 
 
 rush - 
 
 quick, Taxii, -«io, -i}, § 72, 1. 
 
 quickly, rax^us ; toxi> ; as quickly 
 aa he could, j iSivaro rdxiirra; 
 as quickly as possible, iis rd- 
 X'ffTa; sometimes by the partio. 
 
 with otxo/Mi. (§ 200, N. 3), § 279, 
 4, N. ; he has departed quickly, 
 otxerai djiTLfiiV. 
 
 quietly, xaB' -qffvxlav. 
 
 quite, S-f/i 
 
 B. 
 
 raise (to levy forces), to, iSpolj^oi. 
 
 rank, ra^ s (^). 
 
 rather, liaWov. 
 
 ready, iToiixos,-ri, -ov ; to get ready, 
 
 rear, in the, liTrurdev. 
 
 reasonable, eixis (gen. -6tos) (tj) ; 
 to spsak reasonable things, e2- 
 kAto X^ew. 
 
 receive (take), to, Xa^^ivu; to re- 
 ceive favors, £5 Trdirx", § 165, 
 N. 1 (have), ^x"! iu return for 
 the favors which I had received 
 from him, d.vd' S>v eB IwaBov inf 
 
 reconciled with, to become, koto- 
 
 XiJw Tpis with ace. 
 refiige, place of, 6,TO(rTpo<t>-fi (^). 
 refuse, to, otf ^i^/iu. 
 region, Tixos (o) ; to that region 
 
 where, oB, adv. for icfi oB tottou. 
 rjign, to, /SaffiXetfu. 
 rejoice, to, fiSo/ioi ; x"'/"*- 
 remain, to, /neyu. 
 remember, to, /ietiviinai. 
 reply, to, AiroKptrnfiai. [yiWio. 
 
 report, \6yos (6) ; report, to, iray- 
 request, airiiiia (ji) ; request, to, 
 
 requite, to, ijjiim/iai (mid.). 
 
 respected, to be, etmt tI/uos ; never 
 in any respect, /Jt-vdh, § 283. 
 
 rest, or rost of, o fiXXos, § 142, 2, 
 N. 3. 
 
 restore, to, xariyu ; to restore 
 safe, diroffu/^o;. 
 
 return, to, airei/ju. 
 
 review, i^iraais {i]). 
 
 review, to, i^^ra(rtv iroieTv. 
 
 revolt, to, d0/j-Ti;,iu. 
 
 reward, /MureSs (6). 
 
 rich, irXoiiffios, -a, -ov; to be rich, 
 
 riches, jrXoOros (o). 
 
 ride, to, iXaivw ; ride out, i^eXaivw ; 
 
 ride away, d7reXai)vi»; to ride 
 
 through, Siekaivta. 
 right, on the right, .5e|i4s, -d, -ov. 
 rise, to cause to, di^ar^XXu ; also 
 
 intrans. to rise, at the rising of 
 
 the sun, fi/xo riklif AvariWovTi, 
 
 § 186 (end), 
 river, rarafiis (o). 
 road, oSit {fi). rose, ^6Boii (r<(). 
 royal, PaalXeios, -a, -ov. 
 rule, to, dpx" (command) ; ^aaiXei^ 
 
 (reign, be king of), § 171, 3. 
 run, to, rpix^i 
 running, SpVs (j). 
 rush, to, Upju (mid.). 
 
sabre 
 
 67 
 
 sabre, yudxovo (ii). 
 
 safe, &aij>a\i)i, -h. 
 
 sail, to, T\4a; to sail away, iwo- 
 
 sake\>f, for the, IveKa (o), w. gen. 
 same, 6 airSs, § 79, 2. 
 Sardis, ZdpSfis {al). 
 satrap, a-arpdirris (6). 
 say, to, \^oi; <t>W^\ ftwoy; see 
 § 260, 2, N. 1 ; say in opposition, 
 
 scimeter, iKivdxris (d). 
 
 scythe, 5p4iramv (ri). 
 
 sea, 6a\a<T(ra, Att., 06,\aTTa (ii). 
 
 season, upa (tj). 
 
 Secretly, expressed by the participle 
 and the verb, XavBivu, § 279, 4; 
 as secretly as possible, (lis jud- 
 XifTO iSivaro iirmpvirraiievBi. 
 
 see, to, opdu (general word) ; (wit- 
 ness) Be&oiiai. 
 
 seek (to ask for), to, i-rfriui ; air^u 
 (to beg, to ask a person for 
 something). 
 
 seems, it, SokA ; it seems good 
 (expedient), Sok«. 
 
 seize, to ( to take hold of any per- 
 son or thing), Xa/i^dva; alpia 
 (to capture, to take a town or 
 prisoner) ; (to arrest), avXKaii- 
 p&vu). ipdva. 
 
 seize beforehand, to, irpoKaraKa/i- 
 
 select, to, ^<cX(fyw. 
 
 self, airds in apposition with a noun 
 or pronoun. 
 
 sell, to, TTwX^u. 
 
 send, to, Tri/iTrto ; send for, nera- 
 iri/nro/Mi (mid.). 
 
 set, to (the sun), Svo/jiai. 
 
 set out, to, opudo/iai.. 
 
 settled (favorably), to be, the in- 
 traus. parts of KaBLffrnifu ; inas- 
 much as these things would be 
 settled favorably, lis KaTturriiao- 
 
 several, SxavToi, -ot, -a. 
 
 shame, alaxwri {ii). 
 
 shield, do-iris (^). 
 
 ship, vaOs (4). 
 
 short. Taxis, -«o, -v. 
 
 shout, Kpavyii (ti). 
 
 show, to, SeUvvjMi ; tpalvu, 
 
 side of, on the, irp6. 
 
 sight, in plain, rara^avi^s, -h. 
 
 signify, to, dTiiialvw. 
 
 silent, to be, auairdu; to remain 
 silent, (Tcydu) ; silence, aiyii (17). 
 
 silver, dpyvptov (tA). 
 
 since (because), iiret. 
 
 six, ?|, indeol. 
 
 sixty, i^itKovra, indecl. 
 
 skill, ao^la (ti). 
 
 skin, Sipim (t6). 
 
 slave, diiSpdwodov (ri) ; SoCXos (6). 
 
 slay, to, diroKTelvu ; to be slain, 
 dirodviitrKuj. 
 
 so, oCtm! ; so ... as, oSra (s) . . . is ; 
 so that, (So-re, w. indie, § 237 ; 
 w. infin., § 266, 1 ; to be so, oCrus 
 ^ctv ; so much, rotrouroif ToaavTTj, 
 TocrovTo or -ov, correlative to, S(ros ; 
 the (more), w. comp. ... so 
 much the more, followed by a 
 comp., So-ij) w. comp. followed by 
 another comp. w. Totroinfi, § 188, 
 2; so much the more, waXi 
 flaWop. 
 
 soldier, crTparitiTT^s (6). 
 
 some, fvioi, -ai, -a; some (certain 
 ones), Twh ; some . . . others, si 
 
68 
 
 teach 
 
 li.4v . . . ol Si; sometimes rendered 
 by the partitive genitive, § 170, 1, 
 somewhere, iroi, enclit. ; some 
 other person, SXXos rts. 
 
 son, iraXs (6). 
 
 sooner, it pin-epos, -a, -on; Barrov, adv. 
 
 source, vrfyii (57). 
 "south, p£<yiip,ppia (if). 
 
 speak (general word like dioo in 
 Lat. ), to, \iyii>, (pri/il, (like Lat, 
 aio), er7rov(likeLat. inquit) §260, 
 2, N. 1 ; speak the truth, dXri- 
 devw; to speak boastfully /trya- 
 
 spear, ddpv (t6). IXrnopiu. 
 
 speed, at full, dva Kpdro;. 
 
 speedy, raxvs, -eta, -v; by the 
 speediest way, tIjv Taxlariiiv 6S6v, 
 
 splendor, Xafiirpdrris (^). {§ 160, 2. 
 
 spread, to, Siipxa/uu. 
 
 staff, ^aKTtjpla {tj). 
 
 stand, to, Xaritui (in this sense in 
 the perf., pliiperf., and 2 aor. act. 
 and in the middle). 
 
 station, to, Utihu ; to station one's 
 self under arms, ri, StM ride- 
 a0ai ; riaaw (for the-intrans. foims 
 of XsTtiiu). 
 
 steal, to, K\iTTTa. 
 
 steep, TTpoKi)!, -^s. 
 
 still, in, adv. 
 
 stone, \lBos (0); stone to death, 
 KaTatreTphiti, 
 
 stop, to, Trauw. ; 'tpianjfit, 
 
 strength, la-xiis [ii). 
 
 strike, with alarm, to, iKirXi^ru). 
 
 submit, to, irdcrxu. 
 
 such (commonly of what has gone 
 
 before), toiovtos, toiouttj, toiouto 
 
 or ov; such a thing, toiovt6v ti; 
 
 such, Sffos, -11, -ov, a correl. of 
 
 Too-ouTos (Lat. quantus). 
 suffer, to, Trdtrxw ; to suffer punish- 
 ment, SIktiv SlSap,t. 
 sufficient, i/toviSs, -^ -on. 
 sun, iiXios. 
 
 superior, to become, wepiylyvoiiai. 
 supply, to, wopiiw. 
 supposition, on the supposition 
 
 that, iis with ". pai-tic, § 277, 6, 
 
 N. 2. 
 support, T/3(50^ (ij) ; to support, 
 
 Tpitpta. 
 surprised, to be, BavpA^u. 
 surround, to, KVKkbia. 
 suspect, to, irroTTevu. 
 suspend, to, Kpepavvvp,u 
 suspension of the laws, ivopla (1)). 
 sweet, ^Su's, -e?a, -v. 
 swift, Taxis, -em, -u ; swiftly, toxw ; 
 
 rax^ws. 
 sword (short syraid)^ /laxaipa (ij) ; 
 
 (long sword), |i0o! (tA). 
 Syennesis, Su^weo-is (0). 
 Syrian, Svpios, -la, -lov. 
 
 T. 
 
 take, to, Xa/i^dva ; take care, ivi- 
 pie\4opai ; takeback, i,voKap,pavw ; 
 take under one's protection, imo- 
 Xa/u/Saxu; to take counsel, pov- 
 
 '■ \eiopuu_; to take command, 'fiyio- 
 fuu ; to take (seize), alpiia or 
 i<pai.piui; (to receive) Sixopai; 
 
 take part in the work, irpoaXaij.- 
 talent, rdXavrov (tA). [fidvui. 
 
 tame, Tpdos. 
 tamely, irpdus, 
 targeteer, ireXTa<rr-/is (0). 
 teach, to, waiSevto; Siddo'KU. 
 tea' her, SLSda-KaXos (c). 
 
tell 
 
 69 
 
 treat ill 
 
 tell, to, X^w; (report) i,irayy4XKu ; 
 eCwov, 2 aor., see § 260, 2, N. 1. 
 
 temple, veds (d). 
 
 ten, S^Ka ; ten thousarnd, fiipioi, -ai, 
 -o, § 77, 2, N. 3. 
 
 tender, diraX6s, -i5, -i"- 
 
 tent, (TKTjf^ {■>]). •' 
 
 terrified, to be, iKirMiTTOnai. 
 
 territory, x^'P"- (v)- 
 
 Thales, GaX^s (6). 
 
 than, -fj. 
 
 Thapsacus, Qd\j/aKos (rj). 
 
 that, pronoun, ixelms; after verbs 
 of saying when the infinitive is 
 not used, Stl or is, § 243 ; in 
 order that, im, Sttuis, § 216 ; after 
 verbs of fiaring /n-^, § 218 ; at that 
 time, Tore; sometimes translated 
 by the article, § 141, N. 5 ; some- 
 times by au adverb, § 141, N. 3; 
 
 ; the men of that time, oJ rSre 
 &v$piiJTroi. ; before an iufin. or par- 
 tic, in indirect discourse, see § 246, 
 when the infin. is not used, St-i or 
 
 . lis, § 243. 
 
 the, d, i], t6 ; the men in the city, 
 ol iv fiirret &v8p(i]Trot.; the men of 
 that time, oJ T-dre AvBpunroi. ; the 
 affairs of the state, ret, ttjs ir6- 
 Xews; see §141, and Notes; the 
 . . . and, /ji^ . . . S4; the followed 
 by a comparative, or the more . . . 
 so much the more, Sirip with 
 comp. followed by another comp. 
 with Toa-oiircp; § 188, 2. 
 
 then, riTe, S,pa; Tofwy , (oontinua- 
 tive). 
 
 thence, h>Te08ev. 
 
 there, ivravBa ; ixel; there is, ia-rlv. 
 
 thing, Tpdyiia (rd) ; or by neut. adj. 
 or pronoun. 
 
 think, to, (consider, auppo.3e), 
 vop,l^ui ; (believe), Tyyeoiuu : (sup- 
 
 pose, believe), oto)uu ; to think 
 
 one's self worthy, df idw. 
 third, TpLros, -ri, tov ; on the third 
 
 day, ry Tphrj, § 189 (end), 
 thirty-seven, ^irrd /cai rpiiKoiiTa. 
 this, oSt-os; 8Se, §148; this one 
 
 who, often the article and partic, 
 
 § 276, 2. 
 those, see this ; those in the city, 
 
 01 iv Sjrrei, § 141, N. 3; those who, 
 often by artic. with partic, § 276, 
 
 2 and § 148, N. 3. 
 thou, o-i), § 144, 1. 
 
 though, p,iii witli a corresponding 5^. 
 
 thousand, x'^'<", ■"■'■< ■"■■ 
 
 Thracian, Qpq.^ (d). 
 
 through, SiA w. gen. 
 
 throw, to, t-niu, § 127, III. ; /3d\Xu. 
 
 thus, oCtu (as above mentioned) ; 
 
 (5Se (as follows), 
 till, lare, fas, § 239 ; trpiv, § 240, 1. 
 time, xpi'o^ (d) ; sometimes by the 
 
 article, with an adverb, § 142, N. 
 
 3 ; the men of that time, ol t6t€ 
 dvdpwroi. 
 
 Tissaphemes, "Siffcra^ipv/is (d). 
 
 to, sign of dative; when expressed 
 by a preposition ; els, with names 
 of places ; lis, vvith persons only ; 
 Trpds (into the presence of) or Trapd 
 (to the side of) with persons or 
 places; to the region where, 
 P^XPi'S oC. 
 
 Tolmides, ToX/iiSi^s (d). 
 
 towards (with verbs of motion), ^ir^ 
 irepl w. ace. 
 
 town, TrdXis (^). 
 
 track, ix'i-ov (rd). 
 
 transact, to, troUu. 
 
 treachery, without, dSdXws, adv. 
 
 treat ill or well, to, (ca/cus or eS voUia, 
 § 165, N. 1; to be well or ill 
 treated, e£, or KaKus iriax'^"'- 
 
treaty 
 
 treaty, trirovSal (a!) ; to make a 
 
 tTeaLty,(nrovdasTroL€iffdai ; to break 
 
 a treaty, o-TropSAs \6eiy. 
 trenclj, rdcfipos (^). 
 tribute, Saaiibs (6). 
 trouble, to give, irpiy/iaTa tto/j^x" > 
 
 troubled, to be, 6,vi&oiuu. 
 truce, ffirovSal (al); to make a 
 
 truce, airivSo/mi (mid), 
 true, d\riBiv6s, -ij, -w. 
 
 70 voyage 
 
 trumpet sounds, traXirifei (imper). 
 trust, to, irtffTedu. 
 truth, dX'^Seia {i]). 
 tunic, xiTiii- (6). 
 turn, in your, oB, adv. 
 turn about, to, dvaCTpitfia, 
 turned into, to be, ylyvo/Mu. 
 twenty, elxoin, indecl. ; twenty- 
 five, irivTe KoX etKQffi. 
 two by two, Kari, Sio. 
 
 U. 
 
 unarmed, &oir\os, -ov. 
 
 unattended with gratitude, to be, 
 dxaplarois Ix^'", w. dat. 
 
 uncovered, <l/iK6s, -4 -ov. 
 
 under, iwS \y. gen. dat., or ace. 
 
 uneducated, aTaidevroSf -ov. 
 
 unexpected gain, eSprf/m (tA) ; I 
 made it for myself an unex- 
 pected gain, eSpiiim iiroitiaiiiTiv. 
 
 unjust, &biKos, 7j, -ov. 
 
 unless (if not), ci/iij, § 219, 3. 
 
 unobserved, \avddvoi w. the partic. 
 § 279, 4 and § 204, N. 2. 
 
 unprepared, aVapdinteTOS, -a, -ov; 
 as unprepared as possible, Sri 
 dirapaaKev/iTaTos, -% -ov. 
 
 unrewarded, dxipurroi, -ov. 
 until, ?MS, lare, &xPh § 239, irplv, 
 
 § 240, 1. 
 unwillingly, (Lkuv, -ov. 
 up, aVd, w. ace; adv. &vu; to go 
 
 up, dva^aiva ; up to, p,ixp' with 
 
 genitive used of either place or 
 
 time. 
 upon, iirl with gen. (after verbs of 
 
 rest) ; w. the ace. after verbs of 
 
 motion ; by the dat. 
 upward, avia. 
 
 urge, to, KcXeiia, irapayyiWia. 
 urge on the work to, irTrouSofw. 
 use, to, x/idoiimi, § 188, 1, N. 2. 
 useful, xpii^'Mos, -% ov. 
 
 valor, dperi) (^). 
 
 value, to, Ti/iionai. 
 
 vengeance upon, to take, n/iup^o- 
 luu (mid.) w. ace. 
 
 very, p.dXa; (altogether), wdw; 
 the very person who, Sffmp, 
 ijirep, iirep ; in Very truth, ^ liijv. 
 
 vessel, vavi (i)). 
 victory, vU^q (^). 
 village, Kth/ii) (ti), 
 vine, a/iTreXos (ri). 
 virtue, dperi (ti). 
 visible; to be, Karaipalronai. 
 voyage, ttXoCs (d). 
 
■wage war 
 
 Tl 
 
 withdraw 
 
 W. 
 
 wage war, to, iroKen^oi. 
 
 wagon, fiyoala (■^) ; wagon road, 
 odbs kfia^LrSs. 
 
 wait, to, Tepiiiivu. 
 
 wall, Teixos (to). 
 
 want (ask), to, Sioimi., generally 
 with the gen, § 172, 2 ; but it takes 
 neut. pronouns and sometimes 
 neut. adjectives in the aoo. ; want 
 a little, S\lyov Siin. 
 
 war, ir6Xe/ios (6). 
 
 waste in pleasure, to, KaB-qiviraBim. 
 
 water, fiSup (t6) ; to water, apSw. 
 
 way, oSlis (ii); to be on one's way, 
 Tropeio/mi, ; by the speediest way, 
 t}}v Tax^TV*' oSop ; in any way, 
 TTiis, enclit. ; in other ways, rd 
 oKXa. 
 
 weak, i.ff6ev/is, -h. 
 
 wealth, irXouTos (o). 
 
 wealthy, ir\oiau>s, -la, -lov; ciSal- 
 flUVf -ov. 
 
 weep, to, SaKpiio. 
 
 well, eB; to be well, mXus ^x""! 
 
 well watered, ivlppvTos, -ov; 
 
 well-armed, eiioTrXos, -oc. 
 well disposed, efooos, -ov ; see § 71, 
 
 N. 3. 
 what, t/s, tL, § 149, 1 and 2 ; in in- 
 direct questions, Sti.; for what, tI. 
 whatever, S tu 
 when (after), iirel ; interrog., Trjutaa ; 
 
 by apartic, §277, 1. 
 whenever, OTrire, §207, 2. 
 whence, from whence, SBcv; hOev. 
 where, oB; interrog., ttoC; interrog. 
 
 with- verbs of motion, iro? ; relative 
 
 adv., Iv8a. 
 wherever, Sirj; with verbs of motion ; 
 
 8tov with verbs of rest. 
 
 whether, el; whether ... or, iri- 
 
 Tepov . . .. ij. 
 while (when), iwd ; (in that time), 
 iv ^; or rendered by the partic. 
 
 white, Xeufcis, -^, -ov. 
 
 who, ris, interrogative ; os, relative ; 
 iio-Tis often in dependent questions, 
 § 282, and § 149, 2. 
 
 whoever, iio-Tis. 
 
 whole, Tras, Toxra, irav; SXos, -fj, 
 -nv ; see § 142, 4, N. 5. 
 
 why, ri; Sid H. 
 
 width, effpo! (t6) ; about twenty- 
 five feet wide, (is efcoiri iroSuv tA 
 edpos. 
 
 wild, aypios, -la, -(ok ; wild animal, 
 
 wine, olvos (6). [Bvplov (t4). 
 
 wing (of an army), Kipas (t6). 
 
 wise, <ro06s, -i), -ix; wisely, ffo^uis, 
 adv. § 74, 1. 
 
 wisdom, (Toip'.a (^). 
 
 wish, to, |8oi)\0(uai. 
 
 with (in company with, with the 
 help of), <riv w. dat. ; (sharing 
 with, implying closer union 
 than ffiv), /ierd w. gen. ;by a par- 
 tic, § 277, 6. 
 
 with the intention of, (is w. partic, 
 § 277, 6, K. 2. 
 
 without (on the outside of), l^oi, 
 prep. w. gen. ; dvev, (destitute 
 of), w. gen. ; without the knowl- 
 edge of, Xaffpa, w. gen. or by the 
 partic. with \av8ava, § 279, 2 ; 
 sometimes by a partic with a neg- 
 ative, § 283, 4. 
 
 withdraw, to, liMar-niu in the in- 
 trans. parts; to cause to with- 
 draw, the aorist mid. with an 
 object. 
 
within 
 
 72 
 
 Zenias 
 
 within, etcm w. gen. ; or by the gen. 
 
 of time, § 179, 1. 
 woman, yw^ [i)). 
 wonder, to, BavpA^a. 
 wooden, liiXiKos, -i), -ov. 
 work, epyov (t6). 
 worthy, ii^ws, -la, -iov. 
 would that, the secondary tenses pf 
 
 the indicative with eWe or el yap, 
 § 251, 2 ; tlie aor. of 6<peiKia with 
 infinitive, § 251, 2 N. 1 ; would 
 that he were doing this, (S^eXe 
 toCto iroiuv or eWe toCto ivolei. 
 
 wound, to, TiTpiiaKu ; a, wound, 
 rpavjua. 
 
 write, tOi ypdtpa ; see § 199, 3, N. 3 
 
 year, eros (ro). 
 yet, In ; not yet, ofhrio. 
 you, fl-i5, see § 79. 
 young, vios, -a, -ov. 
 your, gen. of personal pronoun, or 
 the possessive pronoun, § 147. 
 
 your own, gen. of reflex, pronoun ; 
 
 see § 142, 4, N. 3. 
 yourself, when intensive the proper 
 
 form of airos, -i), -6, § 79, 1, N. 1 ; 
 
 § 145, 1 ; reflexive, <reavToS or aav- 
 
 ToS, aeavTijs or aavr^s, § 80 ; § 146. 
 
 Z. 
 
 zeal, wpoBv/da (^). 
 zealous, irpb6viu>s, -ti, -qi>. 
 
 Zenias, Sevlns (6). 
 
 Till: END. 
 
 Preseii'ork lifi Berwick & Smith, US Purchase Stnet, tSvstPV. 
 
136 CREEK. 
 
 First Four Books of Xenophon's Anabasis. 
 
 With an illustrated Vocabulary. Edited by Professors W. W. Goodwin 
 and John Williams White of Harvard University. i2mo. Half 
 morocco. 355 pages. Mailing Price, S1.65; Introduction, iSi.SO; 
 Allowance, 25 cents. 
 
 Without Vocabulary. Mailing Price, iJSi.io; Introduction, jSi-oo; 
 Allowance, 25 cents. 
 
 The Notes are copious, and much grammatical aid is given, 
 chiefly in the form of references to the revised and enlarged edition 
 of Goodwin's Greek Grammar. 
 
 A colored map is added, giving the route of the Ten Thousand. 
 
 Professor White's Illustrated Vocabulary to the First Four Books 
 of the Anabasis is now in preparation. Until it is ready Professor 
 Crosby's complete Lexicon to the Anabasis will be bound with this 
 edition. 
 
 Goodwin's Greek Reader. 
 
 Consisting of Selections from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and 
 Thucydides; being the full amount of Greek Prose required for 
 admission to Harvard University. With Colored Maps, Notes, and 
 References to the revised and enlarged edition of Goodwin's Greek 
 Grammar. Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin of Harvard Uni- 
 versity. i2mo. Half morocco. 384 pages. Mailing price, S1.65; 
 Introduction, S1.50; Allowance, 25 cents. 
 
 This edition of the Reader contains the first and second books 
 of the Anabasis, with copious notes, the greater part of the second 
 book and an extract from the seventh of the Hellenica, with the 
 first chapter of the Memorabilia, of Xenophon ; the last part of the 
 Apology, and the beginning and end of the Phaedo, of Plato ; and 
 selections from the sixth, seventh, and eighth books of Herodotus, 
 and from the fourth book of Thucydides. 
 
 B. L. Cllley, Prof, of Greek, 
 Phillips Exeter Acad. : The selections 
 are good, the notes are well written, 
 and, what I think much of, the type is 
 clear and the book looks attractive. 
 The beginner gets as much good from 
 reading the two books of the Anabasis 
 as if he read the whole of it, and, in 
 addition, is made acquainted with the 
 closing scenes of his Peloponnesian 
 War, sees Socrates tried, condemned, 
 
 and executed, follows Xerxes in his 
 invasion of Greece, learns of Themis- 
 toeles and Miltiades, of Thermopylae 
 and Salamis, and is encouraged to 
 inform himself on the whole history 
 of Greece. 
 
 I shall feel that a long step in ad- 
 vance has been taken when I learn that 
 the Anabasis has been thrown aside for 
 as good a book as Goodwin's Greek 
 Reader. 
 
GREEK. 
 
 137 
 
 Goodwin's Greek Moods and Tenses. 
 
 By William W. Goodwin, Ph.D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature 
 in Harvard University. Seventh Edition. Revised and Enlarged, 
 limo. Cloth. 279 pages. Mailing Price, jjSl. 65 ; Introduction, jSl. 50. 
 
 The object of the work is to give a plain statement of the principles 
 which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, — the 
 most important and the most difficult part of Greek Syntax. Schol- 
 ars are referred to the Preface for a fuller account of the principles 
 'on which 'the work is based, and of its object and scope. The 
 index to the classic examples (more than twenty-three hundred in 
 number) by which the work is illustrated, arranged according to 
 authors, is of great value to teachers who use the book for reference 
 in their classes. 
 
 Since 1874 Goodwin's Moods, and Tenses of the Greek Verb has 
 been included in the list of works recommended by the Board of 
 Classical Studies of the University of Cambridge (England) to 
 candidates for honors in the Classical Tripos. In 1875 it was re- 
 published by Macmillan & Co. in London and Oxford. 
 
 The London Academy: The 
 
 syntax of Curtius's grammar, although 
 much improved in the last German edi- 
 tion revised by Dr. Gerth, cannot even 
 now challenge comparison with " Good- 
 win's Syntax of the Moods and Tenses." 
 It is Incomparably the best, the clearest, 
 and most complete account of the ex- 
 ceedingly complex construction of the 
 Greek sentence ; it is studied at Cam- 
 bridge by all those who aim at the at- 
 tainment of high classical honors, and 
 it is equally fitted for the highest forms 
 in public schools. It is not only a 
 treatise on Greek, but, by implication, 
 on logic and the science of language, 
 and it affords a far better training for 
 advanced boys than the- brilliant and 
 attractive, but rather inaccurate, work 
 of Dr. Farrar. If the scholarship of 
 Harvard is really built on the founda- 
 tions of Dr. Goodwin, we may look for 
 great results in the future of American 
 philology. 
 
 Arthur Sidgwick, Lecturer at 
 Corpus Christi Coll., Oxford, and Fel- 
 low of Trinity Coll., Cambridge : The 
 best book on the subject that has been 
 published, either in Europe or America. 
 It is well known in England, at any rate 
 among the best Cambridge scholars; 
 and those whose opinion is of most 
 value appreciate it most highly. 
 
 North American Review : It is 
 the only important work on the subject 
 in the English language. 
 
 The Nation : Its publication be- 
 gan a new era in the study of Greek in 
 this country. After a thorough course 
 in it, a student feels as much at home 
 among the optatives as in our own 
 mays and mights. After the acute in- 
 vestisalions of German scholars, it was 
 reserved for the " practical American " 
 to give the clue to the protasis and 
 apodosis. 
 
LA TIN. 
 
 123 
 
 An Etymology of Latin and Greek. 
 
 With a Preliminary Statement of the New System of Indo-European 
 Phonetics, and suggestions in regard to the study of Etymology. By 
 Charles S. Halsey, A.M., Principal of the Union Classical Institute, 
 Schenectady, N.Y. i2mo. Cloth. 272 pages. Mailing price, ^1.25; 
 Introduction, $1.12. 
 
 The following are the prominent features of the work : — 
 
 1. It presents the subject in a systematic form. The general 
 principles and laws of the science are first clearly stated and illus- 
 trated ; then the words are treated in their etymological order. 
 
 2. It gives a new and simple plan, presenting side by side for 
 each group of related words the form of the root in Indo-European, 
 Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, with the meaning of the root. 
 
 3. It gives great prominence to the derivation of English words, 
 supplying to a large degree the place of an English etymology. 
 
 4. Being furnished with a complete index for every root and word 
 treated, it can be conveniently used as a work of reference. 
 
 5. It presents the entire subject in a form thoroughly adapted to 
 school use in classes. 
 
 6. The present work is the first school-book to set forth in the 
 English language the principles and the application of the new sys- 
 tem of I.-E. Phonetics. This work may be used without confusion 
 in connection with any grammar or lexicon. 
 
 Prof. O. Keller {of Prague), in the 
 " GSttinger Gelehrte Anzeigen ": The 
 entire work is very instructively and 
 practically arranged. The author has 
 with great skill succeeded in choosing 
 what is best established, and in giving it 
 brief and lucid expression. We do not 
 ' hesitate in warmly recommending the 
 work to German students of philology. 
 
 Dr. G. Meyer, in the "Literarisches 
 Centralilatt," Leipsic : German stu- 
 dents could very well use jtjie same 
 work, and one who understands Eng- 
 lish should not fail to procure for him- 
 self this excellent book, especially as 
 he finds in it a very clear and compre- 
 hensive statement of the new Indo- 
 Germanic vowel-theory. 
 
 J. H. Heinr. Schmidt, in the "Ber- 
 liner Philologische Wochenschrift" • 
 This work is characterized by a very 
 convenient and practical arrangement. 
 It holds throughout the system of 
 etymology founded upon the latest 
 phonetic views. It would be very de- 
 sirable to have in the German lan- 
 guage such a book, presenting for 
 beginners a clear view of the subject. 
 
 Latine : We cannot but urge every 
 teacher of Latin to possess this admir- 
 able manual, which has run the gauntlet 
 of the critics at home and abroad with 
 the highest success. Principal Halsey 
 has made the teaching of etymology 
 much more practicable. 
 
GREEK books; 
 
 Allen Medea of Euripides $1.00 
 
 College Series of Greek Authors See D'Ooge, Dyer, Hum- 
 phreys. 
 
 D'Ooge Sophocles' Antigone : Text and Notes 95 
 
 T'ext only 45 
 
 Dyer Plato's Apology and Crito : Text and Notes .95 
 
 Text only .... . .45 
 
 Flagg Hellenic Orations of Demosthenes 1.00 
 
 Anacreontics 35 
 
 Seven against Thebes 1.00 
 
 Goodwin Greek Grammar 1.50 
 
 Greek Reader 1.50 
 
 Greek Moods and Tenses 1.50 
 
 Selections f I'Om Xenophon and Herodotus 1.50 
 
 Goodwin & White : Anabasis 1.00 
 
 Anabasis (with Vocabulary) 1 .50 
 
 Humphreys Aristophanes' Clouds : Text and Notes ... .96 
 
 Text only 45 
 
 Keep Essential Uses of the Moods 25 
 
 Kendrlck Greek at Sight 16 
 
 Lieighton Kew Greek Lessons 1.20 
 
 LilddeU & Sc6tt. . Abridged Greek-English Lexicon 1.90 
 
 ' Unabridged Greek-English Lexicon 9.40 
 
 Seymour Selected Odes of Pindar 1.40 
 
 Sldgwlck Greek Prose Compositioii 1.50 
 
 Tarbell Philippics of Demosthenes 1.00 
 
 Tyler Selections from Greek Lyric Poets 1.00 
 
 White First Lessons in Greek 1.20 
 
 Schmidt's Ehythmic and Metric of the Clas- 
 sical Languages 2.50 
 
 CEdipus Tyrannus of Sophocles 1.12 
 
 Stein's Dialect of Herodotus 10 
 
 Whlton . .| Orations of Lysias 1.00 
 
 Copies sent to teachers for examination, with a view to Intro- 
 duction, on receipt of Introduction Price given above. 
 
 GIM &■ COMPANY, Publishers. 
 
 BOSTON. NEW YOKK. CHICAGO.